Safety Information Safety Information English

Read This First Sicherheitshinweise Deutsch

Bitte zuerst lesen

À lire avant de commencer Consignes de sécurité Français
Leggere prima di iniziare
Leer antes de empezar
Informazioni sulla Italiano
Llegiu això primer sicurezza

Información de seguridad Español

Informació sobre seguretat Català

 English

Safety Information 1. Safety Information for This Machine

2. Other Information for This Machine

For information not found in paper

manuals, see the online manuals available
on our web site ([Link]
or via the control panel.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and
keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be
sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using
the machine.
English
Content How to Read the Manuals

How to Read the Manuals......................................................................................................... 1 Symbols Used in the Manuals

1. Safety Information for This Machine This manual uses the following symbols:

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with This Machine............................................... 2

The Meanings of Safety Labels................................................................................................ 3

English
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes
Safety Precautions to Be Followed........................................................................................... 3 of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Safety Labels of This Machine................................................................................................. 7

2. Other Information for This Machine

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on
Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................. 15 resolving user errors.
Trademarks............................................................................................................................. 17

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant
information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.

(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)

(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols.
Read the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model
you are using. For details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see
"Model-Specific Information", Device Management.

1
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Disclaimer The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer
This Machine
be liable for any damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the
registered data, or the use or non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Prohibition
Documents or data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the
machine.
Caution
English

In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this
machine or any results from the data executed by you.

General mandatory action sign

Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. Do not touch
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Do not throw into the fire
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from
the use of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.

Do not use the cleaner

Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals. Keep out of reach of children

• Type 1: Pro 8300S

• Type 2: Pro 8310S
Caution, risk of having hands or arms caught
• Type 3: Pro 8320S
• Type 4: Pro 8310
• Type 5: Pro 8320 Caution, hot surface

Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local
dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please
contact your local dealer.

2
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

The Meanings of Safety Labels Safety Precautions to Be Followed

Requirements for Locating and Installing Machines

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because

English
doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
CAUTION • Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result • Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

CAUTION
• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can
result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can

cause the machine to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine
to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal
components are overheated.

• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously

for a long period of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to
ventilate the room sufficiently.

3
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Requirements for Using Power Plugs and Cords CAUTION

• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not
push it into loose and unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure.
WARNING Doing so can result in heat generation.

• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or • When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull
electric shock: the plug, not the cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that damage the power cord, possibly resulting in fire or electric shock.
English

match the specifications shown

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and
• Using multi-socket adaptors
the area around the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on
• Using extension cords
the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic
• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord
• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can
from the wall outlet for safety.
result in fire or electric shock:
• Damaging them • If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive
• Bundling them holidays, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for
• Modifying them reasons of safety.
• Putting heavy objects on them
• Pulling them forcibly • Power Source
• Bending them forcibly 220–240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in For users in Norway, this product is also designed for an IT power distribution
electric shock.
system with phase-to-phase voltage of 230V.
• The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They
cannot be used for appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use
power cords other than the power cord or cords supplied with this machine. Requirements during Emergencies
Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.

• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from
the wall outlet at least once a year and check them. If any of the following
conditions exist, do not use the plug and the power cord continuously, and WARNING
consult your dealer or service representative.
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity.
• There are burn marks on the plug
Doing so could result in electric shock.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken • Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you
• The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged can disconnect the power cord plug easily in an emergency.
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot

• When the machine's circuit breaker turns "Off", contact your service
representative. Setting it to "On" can result in electric shock, fire, smoke, or
tripping of the room's breakers.

4
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

WARNING Requirements for Using the Machine

• If the machine behaves unusually as follows, turn off the power immediately.
After turning off the power, make sure to disconnect the power cord plug from
the wall outlet, and then contact your service representative and report the CAUTION
problem. Continuously using the power cord can result in fire or electric shock.
• The machine is emitting smoke • Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
• The machine is emitting odors
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure
• Metal objects or other foreign objects have fallen inside the machine
glass. Your hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.

English
• Water or other fluids have fallen inside the machine
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray
when pulling it out or pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your
Requirements for Relocating Machines fingers in the machine's gap and injury can result.

• Install or remove options after disconnecting the power cord plugs from
the wall outlet and confirming that the main unit is not hotter than the room

CAUTION temperature. Otherwise, you will be burned.

• When moving the machine, do not hold the control panel. Doing so may
damage the control panel and can result in injury or malfunction. Requirements for Handling the Machine's Interior
• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another
floor, contact your service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine
can result in injury or malfunction.
WARNING
• After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise,
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in
the machine might move or topple over to cause injury.
this manual. There are high voltage components inside the machine that can
• When moving the machine, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall cause electric shock. Also there are laser components inside the machine
outlet and confirm that line cords and other connecting cables have been that can cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any
removed. Otherwise, the power cord is damaged, possibly resulting in fire of the machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or
or electric shock. repair.
• Do not disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so can result in fire and
electric shock. Also, exposure to the laser components inside this machine
risks blindness.

CAUTION
• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed
paper, do not touch areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching
those areas can result in burns.

• Although the machine is designed so that a safety device protects users from
injury, take care not to touch the rollers during operation. The rollers may
pinch before stopping completely.

5
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

CAUTION WARNING
• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's • The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this
interior. If the machine's interior is not regularly cleaned while dust product's packaging:
accumulates, fire and malfunction can result. • Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this
machine close to babies and small children. Suffocation can result if
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose.
injure your fingers.

• The fusing unit becomes hot. When removing the fusing unit, wait for 20
English

minutes or more after opening the cover and confirm that the fusing unit is not
hotter than the room temperature. Otherwise, you will be burned.
CAUTION
• Clean areas around the resist roller after confirming that the machine • Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze
is turned off and the main unit is not hotter than the room temperature. them. Toner spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes,
Otherwise, you will be burned. hands, or floor.

• Keep your hands clear of the inside of the ring binder and the space under the • Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind
ring binder tray. You can trap your fingers if you do not. of conductive paper. Doing so can result in fire.

• Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a
child accidentally swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult
Requirements for Handling Supplies a doctor immediately.

• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
WARNING • Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in
• When binding paper manually with a ring opener, take care not to have your
a place with an open flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
fingers caught.
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact
• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or
with naked flame and burns can result.
used), make sure not to inhale toner.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside • When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency
• Toner-attached parts measures first, and then consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner.
a fresh air environment.
Absorbed toner may cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of
sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However, you can use a toner-compatible
water.
industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the spilled toner
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of
using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.
water.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or

used), be careful not to have toner dirt your skin or clothes.

6
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Safety Labels of This Machine

CAUTION
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and
smears them, take the following actions: Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water. This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
cold water. Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and removing the stain may become impossible.
Main unit

English
• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables
with toner, be careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used
1
consumables and shutting the lid of the container if the lid is available, put
2
them in a bag.

6 5
4

EAQ001

1.
Keep your fingers and other body parts away from moving parts. Do not pull out other units
when replacing the developer.

2.
Do not press the internal unit that has been pulled out. Pressing the internal unit may cause
it to fall down.
7
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

3. 12.
For correct handling of the waste toner bottle, see page 6 "Requirements for Handling This label indicates the weight of the unit. However, this label is meant for customer engineers
Supplies". and operators who have received training. Do not lift a unit that has this label.

4 and 5. 13.
Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, you might trap your fingers The inside could be very hot. Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. Otherwise,
and an injury might occur. an injury might occur.

6. 14.
English

Do not touch the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, an injury might occur. Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The web of the fusing unit could be very hot. Caution
should be taken when removing misfed paper.

7 8 9 8 10
Three-tray Wide LCT

9 2

7
11

9 7 13

14
12

EAQ011

7, 8, and 9.
DWR002
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
1.
10. High temperature parts. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an injury
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside and surface of the fusing unit could be might occur.
very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
2.
11. Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot.
Do not touch the parts the label indicates. These parts may become very hot. Wait and do
not touch these parts until they cool down. Otherwise, burns might occur. It may take up to
20 minutes for the parts to cool down after a large number of pages have been continuously
printed.
8
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

2. (This label is attached to both trays.)

Large Capacity Tray
Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, you might trap your fingers
and an injury might occur.

Multi bypass tray

1
1

English
EAQ008

1.
High temperature parts. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an injury
might occur.
DFV009

Two-tray Wide LCT 1.

Keep your hands clear of the multi bypass tray when removing paper jam. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.
1

EAQ009

1 and 3.
High temperature parts. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an injury
might occur.
9
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher SR5100 Finisher SR5110

8
1

2
English

EAQ004

5 1.
3 When opening and closing the front cover, keep your hands clear of the hinges. The hinges
are a hazard. You risk trapping your fingers if you do not keep your hands clear of them.
4
2.
The inside could be very hot. Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. You might
trap your fingers and an injury might occur.
EAQ002

1 and 2.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers
during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.

3 and 4.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's
staple unit, or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.

5 and 6.
Be careful of the protruding parts of the front cover when replacing the cartridge in the saddle
stitch unit or clearing a paper jam from the saddle stitch unit.

7 and 8.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on.
Otherwise, an injury might occur.

10
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Left side
Booklet Finisher SR5120

Right side

3
1

English
4

EAQ005

3.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's
staple unit, or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to
EAQ003
touch the booklet finisher tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
1.
When opening and closing the front cover, keep your hands clear of the hinges. The hinges
4.
are a hazard. You risk trapping your fingers if you do not keep your hands clear of them.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's
staple unit, or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
2.
The inside could be very hot. Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. You might
trap your fingers and an injury might occur.

11
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Multi-Folding Unit Interposer

1
English

3
EAR001

1.
The part with the label affixed to it is very hot and might burn you. Keep your hands and arms
away from it.

DFV013

1, 2, and 3.
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the multi-folding unit could be very hot.
Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.

12
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Trimmer Unit Ring Binder

1
1 2

English
3

DFV014

1.
Keep your hands clear of the internal cutting blade when you are removing jammed paper.
Not doing so risks injury to your fingers from the cutting blade.

EAR002

1.
Keep your other hand clear when closing the cartridge cover. You might trap your fingers if
you do not.

2.
Keep your hands clear of the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, you might trap your fingers
and an injury might occur.

3.
When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.

13
 1. Safety Information for This Machine

Perfect Binder Buffer Pass Unit

1
English

2 DFV004

1.
These labels indicate the weight of the unit and describe how to lift the unit. However, these
labels are meant for customer engineers. Do not lift a unit that has these labels.

DFV016

1.
When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the perfect binder's lower left tray.
You might trap your fingers if you do not.

2.
Do not reach far inside the unit. Moving parts inside may cause injury.

14
 2. Other Information for This Machine

High Capacity Stacker Laws and Regulations

1 2
Duplication and Printing Prohibited
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports,
driver's licenses.

English
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility
for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying
or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.

Laser Safety

For type 1,2,3,4, and 5

This machine complies with the requirements of IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) for
class 1 laser product. The machine contains one VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting
Laser), 772–792 nanometer wavelength. The beam ivergence angle is 5.5 degrees
(minimum) and 7.9 degrees (maximum) in the vertical direction, and 5.5 degrees (minimum)
and 7.9 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser beams are generated in
Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The VCSEL has forty light sources and the maximum output
DFV005
power of each light source is 1.23 milliwatt.
1.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:
Do not attempt to get inside the high capacity stacker. Otherwise, an injury might occur.

2.
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the high capacity stacker could be very
hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.

Caution
Symbols for the Power Switch Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Symbols for power switch that are used for this machine are as follows:
: POWER ON For Media Identification Unit Type S3
: POWER OFF
: STANDBY Media Identification Unit (optional) complies with the requirements of IEC 60825-1:2014
(EN 60825-1:2014) for class 1 laser product. Media Identification Unit contains one VCSEL
(Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser), 772–792 nanometer wavelength. The beam
divergence angle is 5.3 degrees (minimum) and 7.9 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
direction, and 5.3 degrees (minimum) and 7.9 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction,

15
 2. Other Information for This Machine

and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The VCSEL has twelve light
sources and the maximum total output power is 2.5 milliwatt. Overseas Affiliates and Noise Emission Information
The following label is attached on the bottom of the machine.
In accordance with TUV "GS Symbol" requirements, details of the EU office or
representative company are given below.

Overseas Affiliates
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands
English

Noise Emission
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Note to Users EU Countries EMC Directive

Model Name: Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320
Warning on Class A Product
Manufacturer:
Ricoh Co., Ltd. Warning:
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo. 143-8555, Japan This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this
equipment may cause radio interference.
As this machine is not a household appliance, it does not conform to ErP Directive 2009/125/
Importer:
EC which was revised in 2013.
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands

Declaration of Conformity
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 2014/53/
EU.

The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL: [Link]

products/ce_doc2/
and selecting the product applicable.

Operating frequency band: 2400 - 2483.5 MHz

maximum radio-frequency power: less than 20.0 dBm

16
 2. Other Information for This Machine

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment Trademarks

The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has
been specified in national law on collection and treatment of E-waste Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.

English
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be
disposed of separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By
following these instructions you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to
reduce potential impacts on the environment and human health, which could otherwise result
from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products helps to conserve natural resources and
protect the environment.

For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please
contact the shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

All Other Users

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you
bought this product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

For Users in India

This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the "India
E-waste Rule" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated
biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and
0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in the Rule.

17
 English

18
19

English
 English

20
 Deutsch

Sicherheitshinweise 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

2. Andere Informationen zu diesem Gerät

Informationen, die nicht in den gedruckten

Handbüchern enthalten sind, finden Sie in
den Online-Handbüchern, die auf unserer
Website ([Link] oder über
das Bedienfeld verfügbar sind.

Lesen Sie dieses Handbuch sorgfältig vor der Verwendung des

Geräts und bewahren Sie es zum Nachschlagen griffbereit auf.
Für eine sichere und korrekte Verwendung lesen Sie unbedingt
die "Sicherheitshinweise" vor der Verwendung dieses Geräts.
Deutsch
Inhalt Hinweise zum Lesen der Handbücher

Hinweise zum Lesen der Handbücher...................................................................................... 1 In den Handbüchern verwendete Symbole

1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät In dieser Anleitung werden die folgenden Symbole verwendet:

Bedeutungen der bei diesem Gerät verwendeten Sicherheitssymbole................................... 2

Bedeutung der Sicherheitskennzeichnungen........................................................................... 3
Weist auf Punkte hin, die bei der Verwendung des Geräts zu beachten sind, und erläutert
Zu befolgende Sicherheitsvorkehrungen................................................................................. 3 mögliche Ursachen für fehlerhaften Papiereinzug, Beschädigungen von Vorlagen und
Sicherheitsetiketten an diesem Gerät...................................................................................... 7 Datenverlust. Lesen Sie diese Hinweise unbedingt.

Deutsch
2. Andere Informationen zu diesem Gerät
Gesetze und Vorschriften....................................................................................................... 15 Weist auf zusätzliche Erklärungen zu Gerätefunktionen sowie auf Anleitungen zum Beheben
Marken.................................................................................................................................... 17 von Anwenderfehlern hin.

Dieses Symbol befindet sich jeweils am Ende eines Abschnitts. Es gibt an, wo Sie weitere
relevante Informationen finden können.

[]
Erläutert die auf Bildschirm- oder Bedienfeldansichten des Geräts dargestellten Schaltflächen.

(hauptsächlich Europa und Asien), (hauptsächlich Europa) oder (hauptsächlich

Asien)
(hauptsächlich Nordamerika)
Unterschiede bei den Funktionen der Modelle von Region A und Region B werden durch zwei
Symbole gekennzeichnet. Lesen Sie die Informationen zu dem Symbol, das der Region des
verwendeten Modells entspricht. Informationen darüber, welches Symbol dem von Ihnen
verwendeten Modell entspricht, siehe Handbuch Geräteverwaltung.

1
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Haftungsausschluss Bedeutungen der bei diesem Gerät

Soweit gesetzlich zulässig haftet der Hersteller in keinem Fall für jegliche Schäden, die
verwendeten Sicherheitssymbole
sich aus einem Versagen dieses Geräts, Verlusten von Dokumenten oder Daten oder der
Verwendung bzw. Nichtverwendung dieses Produkts und den damit gelieferten Handbüchern
ergeben. Verbot
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie stets Kopien oder Sicherungen der im Gerät gespeicherten Daten
besitzen. Dokumente oder Daten könnten aufgrund von Bedienungsfehlern oder Störungen
des Geräts gelöscht werden. Achtung
In keinem Fall haftet der Hersteller für von Ihnen mit diesem Gerät erstellte Dokumente oder
Ergebnisse aus den von Ihnen verwendeten Daten.
Hinweis auf allgemeine Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
Deutsch

Hinweise
Nicht berühren
Die Inhalte dieses Handbuchs können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden.
Einige Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch können leicht vom Gerät abweichen.
Um eine gute Ausgabequalität zu erzielen, empfiehlt der Hersteller, den Originaltoner des
Nicht ins Feuer werfen
Herstellers zu verwenden.
Der Hersteller kann nicht für Schäden oder Kosten verantwortlich gemacht werden, die
entstehen, wenn keine Originalteile des Herstellers in Ihren Büroprodukten verwendet
werden. Keinen Staubsauger verwenden

Von Kindern fernhalten

Gerätetypen
Überprüfen Sie den Typ Ihres Geräts, bevor Sie die Bedienungsanleitung lesen.
Achtung, Hände oder Arme können
• Typ 1: Pro 8300S eingeklemmt werden
• Typ 2: Pro 8310S
• Typ 3: Pro 8320S
Achtung, heiße Oberfläche
• Typ 4: Pro 8310
• Typ 5: Pro 8320

Einige Gerätetypen sind möglicherweise in einigen Ländern nicht erhältlich. Einzelheiten

erfahren Sie von Ihrem Händler.
Bestimmte Optionen sind in einigen Ländern eventuell nicht erhältlich. Einzelheiten erfahren
Sie von Ihrem Händler.
Je nachdem, in welchem Land Sie sich befinden, können bestimmte Einheiten optional sein.
Einzelheiten erfahren Sie von Ihrem Händler.

2
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Bedeutung der Sicherheitskennzeichnungen Zu befolgende Sicherheitsvorkehrungen

Anforderungen zur Aufstellung und Installation von Geräten

WARNUNG
Zeigt eine potenzielle gefährliche Situation an, die zu lebensgefährlichen oder ernsthaften
Verletzungen führen kann, wenn die Anweisungen nicht befolgt werden.
WARNUNG
• Vermeiden Sie, folgende Handlungen nahe oder innerhalb des Geräts
auszuführen, da sie zu Brand oder Stromschlägen führen können:
ACHTUNG • Gebrauch entflammbarer Sprays, Lösungsmittel etc.
• Platzierung entflammbarer Sprays, Lösungsmittel etc.
Zeigt eine potenzielle gefährliche Situation an, die zu kleinen bis mittleren Verletzungen oder • Platzierung von Behältnissen, die Flüssigkeiten oder kleine Metallteile

Deutsch
Schäden an Eigentum führen kann, wenn die Anweisungen nicht befolgt werden. enthalten

ACHTUNG
• Stellen Sie das Gerät nicht in einem feuchten oder staubigen Umfeld auf.
Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr von Brand oder Stromschlag.

• Stellen Sie das Gerät nicht auf eine instabile oder schräge Oberfläche.
Dadurch kann das Gerät umfallen und möglicherweise Verletzungen
verursachen.

• Stellen Sie keine schweren Gegenstände auf dem Gerät ab. Dadurch kann
das Gerät umfallen und möglicherweise Verletzungen verursachen.

• Decken Sie die Lüfter des Geräts nicht ab. Dies kann zu Brand führen, da die
internen Komponenten überhitzen.

• Wenn Sie dieses Gerät in einem schlecht belüfteten oder engen Raum
ununterbrochen verwenden oder eine große Menge an Materialien drucken,
stellen Sie sicher, dass der Raum ausreichend belüftet wird.

3
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Anforderungen zur Verwendung von Netzsteckern und -kabeln ACHTUNG

• Achten Sie darauf, das Netzkabel vollständig in die Steckdose einzustecken.
Stecken Sie es nicht in lockere oder instabile Steckdosen, die wahrscheinlich
WARNUNG einen Kontaktfehler verursachen. Andernfalls kann es zu Hitzeentwicklung
kommen.
• Vermeiden Sie folgende Handlungen, da sie zu Brand oder Stromschlägen
führen können: • Wenn Sie den Stecker aus der Wandsteckdose ziehen, ziehen Sie immer
• Verwenden jeglicher anderer Netzspannungen oder Frequenzen als am Stecker und nicht am Kabel. Ziehen Sie nicht gewaltsam am Netzkabel.
die, die den aufgeführten Spezifikationen entsprechen Dies kann das Netzkabel beschädigen und möglicherweise zu Brand oder
• Verwenden von Mehrfachsteckdosen Stromschlägen führen.
• Verwenden von Verlängerungskabeln
• Ziehen Sie das Netzkabel mindestens einmal im Jahr aus der
• Berühren der Kontakte des Netzkabelsteckers mit metallischen
Wandsteckdose und säubern Sie die Stifte und den Bereich um sie herum.
Gegenständen
Deutsch

Eine Staubansammlung am Stecker stellt eine Brandgefahr dar.

• Vermeiden Sie es, die folgenden Handlungen an Netzkabeln auszuführen,
• Ziehen Sie bei Wartungsvorgängen am Gerät aus Sicherheitsgründen das
da sie zu Brand oder Stromschlägen führen können:
Netzkabel aus der Wandsteckdose.
• Beschädigen
• Bündeln • Sollten Sie das Gerät über einen längeren Zeitraum nicht verwenden, wie
• Modifizieren zum Beispiel während eines fortlaufenden Urlaubs, vergewissern Sie sich,
• Schwere Objekte auf ihnen abstellen dass das Netzkabel aus Sicherheitsgründen aus der Steckdose gezogen
• Gewaltsam an ihnen ziehen wird.
• Sie gewaltsam biegen
• Stromquelle
• Fassen Sie den Stecker des Netzkabels nicht mit feuchten Händen an.
220 – 240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Stromschlags.
Achten Sie darauf, das Netzkabel an eine wie oben spezifizierte Steckdose
• Die mitgelieferten Netzkabel sind ausschließlich zum Gebrauch mit diesem anzuschließen.
Gerät bestimmt. Sie dürfen nicht für andere Geräte als dieses verwendet Benutzer in Norwegen können dieses Produkt außerdem mit einem IT-
werden. Verwenden Sie keine anderen Netzkabel als die mit dem Gerät Stromverteilungssystem mit einer Phase-zu-Phase-Spannung von 230 V
mitgelieferten. Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr von Brand oder Stromschlag. verwenden.
• Um Brand und Stromschläge zu vermeiden, ziehen Sie den Stecker und das
Netzkabel mindestens einmal im Jahr aus der Steckdose und überprüfen
Sie sie. Wenn eine der folgenden Bedingungen vorliegt, verwenden Sie Anforderungen während Notfällen
den Stecker und das Netzkabel nicht weiter und wenden Sie sich an Ihren
Händler oder Service-Partner.
• Es sind Brandflecken am Stecker vorhanden
• Die Kontakte des Steckers sind verformt WARNUNG
• Die inneren Drähte des Netzkabels liegen frei oder sind kaputt
• Die Ummantelung des Netzkabels ist gerissen, eingedrückt oder • Berühren Sie das Gerät nicht, wenn in unmittelbarer Nähe ein Blitz einschlägt.
beschädigt Es besteht Stromschlaggefahr.
• Wenn das Netzkabel gebogen wird, schaltet sich die Stromversorgung
aus und ein • Installieren Sie das Gerät unbedingt so nahe wie möglich an einer
• Ein Teil des Kabels wird heiß Wandsteckdose, um im Notfall das Netzkabel leicht ziehen zu können.

• Kontaktieren Sie Ihren Kundendienstvertreter, wenn sich der Schutzschalter

des Geräts in der Stellung „OFF“ (Aus) befindet. Wird er in die Stellung „On“
(Ein) gedreht, könnte dies zu einem elektrischen Schlag, Feuer, Rauch oder
dem Auslösen der Schutzschalter des Raumes führen.

4
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

WARNUNG Anforderungen zur Verwendung des Geräts

• Sollte bei dem Gerät folgende Unregelmäßigkeiten auftreten, schalten
Sie sofort die Stromversorgung ab. Nachdem Sie die Stromversorgung
abgeschaltet haben, ziehen Sie das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose und ACHTUNG
kontaktieren Sie dann Ihren Service-Partner und melden Sie das Problem.
Eine weitere Verwendung des Netzkabels kann zu Brand oder Stromschlag • Schauen Sie nicht direkt in die Lichtquelle. Andernfalls können Augenschäden
führen. verursacht werden.
• Das Gerät qualmt
• Wenn Sie den ADF absenken, legen Sie Ihre Hände nicht auf die Scharniere
• Es treten Gerüche aus
oder das Vorlagenglas. Ihre Hände oder Finger könnten eingeklemmt
• Metallobjekte oder andere Fremdkörper sind in das Innere des Geräts
werden, was zu Verletzungen führen kann.
gefallen
• Wasser oder andere Flüssigkeiten sind in das Innere des Geräts gelangt. • Halten Sie Ihre Hände fern vom Papierausgabeschlitz der Finisher-

Deutsch
Broschürenablage, wenn Sie die Hefteinheit des Finishers herausziehen oder
hineinschieben. Andernfalls könnten Sie sich Ihre Finger im Zwischenraum
Anforderungen zur Umstellung von Geräten im Gerät einklemmen, was zu Verletzungen führen kann.

• Installieren oder entfernen Sie die Optionen, nachdem Sie die

Netzkabelstecker aus der Steckdose gezogen und sichergestellt haben,
dass das Hauptgerät nicht heißer als die Raumtemperatur ist. Andernfalls
ACHTUNG kann es zu Verbrennungen kommen.
• Wenn Sie das Gerät bewegen, halten Sie es nicht am Bedienfeld fest.
Andernfalls kann das Bedienfeld beschädigt, Fehlfunktionen verursacht oder
Verletzungen verursacht werden. Anforderungen zur Handhabung des Geräteinneren
• Kontaktieren Sie Ihren Service-Partner, wenn Sie das Gerät durch Anheben
auf ein anderes Stockwerk transportieren wollen. Ein Umkippen oder
Fallenlassen kann zu Verletzungen oder Ausfällen führen.
WARNUNG
• Fixieren Sie das Gerät nach dem Umstellen mithilfe der Befestigungslaufrollen
• Entfernen Sie nur die Abdeckungen und Schrauben, die explizit in
an seiner Position. Andernfalls kann das Gerät umkippen und Verletzungen
diesem Handbuch genannt werden. Im Inneren des Geräts befinden sich
verursachen.
Hochspannungskomponenten, die einen Stromschlag verursachen könnten.
• Achten Sie beim Transport des Geräts darauf, das Netzkabel aus der Außerdem befinden sich im Inneren des Geräts Laser-Komponenten,
Steckdose zu ziehen, und vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzkabel und die Blindheit verursachen können. Setzen Sie sich mit Ihrem Vertriebs-
anderen Verbindungskabel entfernt wurden. Andernfalls kann das Netzkabel oder Kundendienstmitarbeiter in Verbindung, wenn eines der Bauteile im
beschädigt werden und es besteht Brand- oder Stromschlaggefahr. Geräteinneren gewartet, eingestellt oder repariert werden muss.
• Demontieren oder modifizieren Sie dieses Gerät nicht selbständig.
Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr von Brand und Stromschlag. Bitte
beachten Sie bitte, dass eine Bestrahlung durch die Laserkomponenten im
Geräteinneren zu Erblindung führen kann.

ACHTUNG
• Im Gerät befinden sich stark erhitzte Teile. Wenn Sie falsch eingezogenes
Papier entfernen, berühren Sie keine anderen Teile, als die in dieser
Anleitung angegebenen. Das Berühren nicht gekennzeichneter Teile kann
zu Verbrennungen führen.
5
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

ACHTUNG WARNUNG
• Obwohl das Gerät so konstruiert ist, dass eine Sicherheitsvorrichtung den • Im Folgenden werden die Warnhinweise auf der Plastiktüte erklärt, die für die
Anwender vor Verletzungen schützt, achten Sie darauf, die Rollen während Verpackung dieses Produkts verwendet wurde.
des Betriebs nicht zu berühren Ihre Finger können zwischen den Rollen • Lassen Sie die mit diesem Gerät mitgelieferten Polyethylen-Materialien
eingeklemmt werden, bevor diese vollständig gestoppt werden. (Tüten, etc.) nicht unbeaufsichtigt in der Nähe von Babys und
Kleinkindern. Kommt das Polyethylen mit Mund oder Nase in Kontakt,
• Kontaktieren Sie Ihren Service-Partner, um das Innere des Geräts zu besteht Erstickungsgefahr.
reinigen. Wenn das Innere des Geräts nicht regelmäßig gereinigt wird und
sich Staub ansammelt, kann dies zu Brand und Fehlfunktionen führen.

• Wenn Sie Papier austauschen oder einen Papierstau entfernen, achten Sie
darauf, dass Sie Ihre Finger nicht einklemmen oder verletzen.
ACHTUNG
• Öffnen Sie die Tonerbehälter nicht gewaltsam, zerdrücken oder pressen Sie
Deutsch

• Die Fixiereinheit wird heiß. Wenn Sie die Fixiereinheit entfernen wollen,
warten Sie nach dem Öffnen der Abdeckung mindestens 20 Minuten und diese nicht, während sich Toner darin befindet. Ausgelaufener Toner kann zu
vergewissern Sie sich dann, dass sie nicht wärmer ist als die Raumtemperatur. versehentlicher Einnahme oder der Verschmutzung von Kleidung, Händen
Andernfalls kann es zu Verbrennungen kommen. oder des Bodens führen.

• Reinigen Sie die Bereiche um die Widerstandsrolle, nachdem Sie sich • Verwenden Sie keine zusammengehefteten Blätter, Aluminiumfolie,
vergewissert haben, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet und die Haupteinheit nicht Kohlepapier oder andere Arten von leitfähigem Papier. Andernfalls besteht
heißer als die Raumtemperatur ist. Andernfalls kann es zu Verbrennungen Brandgefahr.
kommen. • Bewahren Sie SD-Karten und USB-Sticks außerhalb der Reichweite von
• Fassen Sie nicht in den Ringbinder oder den Zwischenraum unterhalb der Kindern auf. Wenn ein Kind versehentlich eine SD-Karte oder einen USB-
Ringbinderablage. Sie könnten sich die Finger einklemmen. Stick verschluckt, konsultieren Sie sofort einen Arzt.

• Lassen Sie die folgenden Gegenstände nicht an einem Ort liegen, an den
Kinder gelangen können:
Anforderungen zur Handhabung von Materialien • Toner (neu oder gebraucht)
• Tonerbehälter, während sich darin Toner befindet
• Mit dem Toner verbundene Teile

WARNUNG • Achten Sie beim manuellen Binden von Papier mit einem Ringöffner darauf,
dass Ihre Finger nicht eingeklemmt werden.
• Lagern Sie keinen Toner (neu oder gebraucht) oder Tonerbehälter, während
• Stellen Sie beim Entfernen von gestautem Papier, Auffüllen und Ersetzen
sich Toner darin befindet, an einem Ort mit offener Flamme. Der Toner kann
von Toner (neu oder gebraucht) sicher, dass Sie keinen Toner einatmen.
sich entzünden und zu Verbrennungen und Brand führen.
• Wenn Folgendes während der Handhabung des Toners auftritt, sollten Sie
• Die folgenden Gegenstände nicht ins Feuer werfen. Bei Kontakt mit offener
zuerst Notfallmaßnahmen erhalten und dann gegebenenfalls einen Arzt
Flamme entzündet sich der Toner und es können Verbrennungen entstehen.
aufsuchen.
• Toner (neu oder gebraucht)
• Wenn Sie Toner einatmen, gurgeln Sie mit viel Wasser und begeben Sie
• Tonerbehälter, während sich darin Toner befindet
sich in eine Umgebung mit frischer Luft.
• Mit dem Toner verbundene Teile
• Wenn Sie Toner verschlucken, verdünnen Sie den Mageninhalt mit viel
• Beseitigen sie keinen verschütteten Toner (einschließlich Resttoner) mit dem Wasser.
Staubsauger. Der aufgesaugte Toner kann durch die elektrische Aufladung • Wenn Toner in die Augen gelangt, spülen Sie diese mit viel Wasser aus.
im Staubsauger zu Brand oder Explosionen führen. Sie können jedoch
• Wenn Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen, Toner (neu oder gebraucht) auffüllen
einen Toner-kompatiblen Industriestaubsauger verwenden. Wenn Toner
oder ersetzen, achten Sie darauf, dass kein Toner Ihre Haut oder Kleidung
verschüttet wird, entfernen Sie den Toner mit einem nassen Tuch, sodass
verschmutzt.
er nicht verteilt wird.

6
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Sicherheitsetiketten an diesem Gerät

ACHTUNG
• Wenn Toner (neu oder gebraucht) in Kontakt mit Ihrer Haut oder Kleidung
kommt und diese verschmiert, ergreifen Sie die folgenden Maßnahmen: Positionen der WARNUNG- und ACHTUNG-Aufkleber
• Wenn Ihre Haut in Kontakt mit dem Toner kommt, waschen Sie den
Dieses Gerät verfügt über Hinweisetiketten für WARNUNG und VORSICHT an den
betroffenen Bereich sorgfältig mit Seife und Wasser.
• Wenn Toner mit Ihrer Kleidung in Kontakt kommt, waschen Sie den
unten dargestellten Positionen. Folgen Sie aus Sicherheitsgründen den Anweisungen und
verschmutzten Bereich mit kaltem Wasser aus. Die Erwärmung der
handhaben Sie das Gerät wie angegeben.
verschmutzten Stelle durch die Anwendung von heißen Wasser fixiert Hauptgerät
den Toner im Stoff und die Entfernung des Flecks wird möglicherweise
unmöglich.
1
• Wenn Sie den Tonerbehälter (einschließlich gebrauchten Toner) oder 2
Verbrauchsmaterial mit Toner ersetzen, achten Sie darauf, dass der Toner

Deutsch
nicht verstreut wird. Nachdem Sie alte Verbrauchsmaterialien entfernt
haben, schließen Sie, sofern vorhanden, den Deckel des Behälters und
legen Sie ihn in eine Tüte.

6 5
4

EAQ001

1.
Achten Sie darauf, nicht mit sich bewegenden Teilen in Berührung zu kommen. Ziehen Sie
keine anderen Einheiten heraus, wenn Sie den Entwickler austauschen.

2.
Drücken Sie nicht auf die interne Einheit, die herausgezogen wurde. Dies kann dazu führen,
dass die interne Einheit herunterfällt.
7
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

3. 12.
Zur korrekten Handhabung des Resttonerbehälters lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt zur Dieses Etikett zeigt das Gewicht der Einheit an. Es richtet sich vor allem an Kundentechniker
Handhabung von Verbrauchsmaterialien auf Seite 6. und Administratoren, die ein Training absolviert haben. Heben Sie ein System mit diesem
Etikett nicht an.
4 und 5.
Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist.
13.
Andernfalls können Sie sich Ihre Finger einklemmen oder sich verletzen.
Die innenliegenden Komponenten könnten sehr heiß sein. Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn
6. dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist. Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Es besteht
Verletzungsgefahr. 14.
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Das Vlies der
Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß sein. Sie sollten daher beim Beseitigen von gestautem Papier
7 8 9 8 10
vorsichtig sein.
Deutsch

Breit-LCT mit drei Magazinen

7
11

9 7 13

14
12

EAQ011

7, 8 und 9
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Es besteht
Verletzungsgefahr.

10. DWR002

Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Das Innere und 1.
die Oberfläche der Fixiereinheit können sehr heiß sein. Sie sollten daher beim Beseitigen Heiße Teile. Berühren Sie keine Bauteile, auf denen ein Etikett angebracht ist. Es besteht
von gestautem Papier vorsichtig sein.
Verletzungsgefahr.
11.
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit einem entsprechenden Etikett versehen sind. Diese Teile 2.
können sehr heiß sein. Warten Sie ab und berühren Sie diese Teile nicht, bis sie abgekühlt Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Das Innere des
sind. Andernfalls können Verbrennungen die Folge sein. Es kann bis zu 20 Minuten dauern, bis Geräts kann sehr heiß sein.
die Teile abgekühlt sind, nachdem eine große Anzahl an Seiten kontinuierlich gedruckt wurde.
8
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

2. (Dieses Etikett ist an beiden Magazinen angebracht.)

Großraummagazin
Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist.
Andernfalls können Sie sich Ihre Finger einklemmen oder sich verletzen.

Multi-Bypass

1
1

Deutsch
EAQ008

1.
Heiße Teile. Berühren Sie keine Bauteile, auf denen ein Etikett angebracht ist. Es besteht
Verletzungsgefahr.
DFV009

Breit-LCT mit zwei Magazinen 1.

Halten Sie Ihre Hände vom Multi-Bypass fern, wenn Sie gestautes Papier entfernen. Sie
können sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.
1

EAQ009

1 und 3.
Heiße Teile. Berühren Sie keine Bauteile, auf denen ein Etikett angebracht ist. Es besteht
Verletzungsgefahr.
9
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Finisher SR5090 oder Broschüren-Finisher SR5100 Finisher SR5110

8
1

2
7

2
Deutsch

EAQ004

5 1.
3 Halten Sie Ihre Hände beim Öffnen und Schließen der vorderen Abdeckung von den
Scharnieren fern. Die Scharniere stellen eine Gefahr dar. Sie können sich Ihre Finger
4 einklemmen, wenn Sie Ihre Hände nicht davon fern halten.

2.
Die innenliegenden Komponenten könnten sehr heiß sein. Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn
dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist. Sie können sich Ihre Finger einklemmen
EAQ002
und verletzen.
1 und 2.
Während des Betriebs drehen sich die Rollen, die das Papier transportieren. Achten Sie
darauf, während des Betriebs keine Rollen zu berühren. Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.

3 und 4.
Berühren Sie nicht die Broschüren-Finisher-Ablage, wenn Sie die Hefteinheit des Finishers
herausziehen oder hineindrücken oder wenn Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen. Sie können
sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.

5 und 6.
Achten Sie beim Austauschen der Kartusche in der Rücksticheinheit oder beim Beseitigen
eines Papierstaus in der Rücksticheinheit auf hervorstehende Teile an der vorderen
Abdeckung.

7 und 8.
Das Innere des Geräts kann sehr heiß sein. Berühren Sie keine Bauteile, auf denen ein
Etikett angebracht ist. Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
10
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Linke Seite
Broschüren-Finisher SR5120

Rechte Seite

3
1

Deutsch
2

EAQ005

3.
Berühren Sie nicht die Broschüren-Finisher-Ablage, wenn Sie die Hefteinheit des Finishers
herausziehen oder hineindrücken oder wenn Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen. Sie können
EAQ003
sich sonst die Finger einklemmen. Achten Sie während dieser Operation darauf, die Ablage
1.
des Broschüren-Finishers nicht zu berühren. Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
Halten Sie Ihre Hände beim Öffnen und Schließen der vorderen Abdeckung von den
Scharnieren fern. Die Scharniere stellen eine Gefahr dar. Sie können sich Ihre Finger
4.
einklemmen, wenn Sie Ihre Hände nicht davon fern halten.
Berühren Sie nicht die Broschüren-Finisher-Ablage, wenn Sie die Hefteinheit des Finishers
herausziehen oder hineindrücken oder wenn Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen. Sie können
2.
sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.
Die innenliegenden Komponenten könnten sehr heiß sein. Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn
dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist. Sie können sich Ihre Finger einklemmen
und verletzen.

11
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Multi-Falzeinheit Einschießeinheit

2
Deutsch

3
EAR001

1.
Die Komponente, an der dieser Aufkleber angebracht ist, ist sehr heiß und kann
Verbrennungen verursachen. Berühren Sie sie nicht mit Ihren Händen und Armen.

DFV013

1, 2 und 3
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Das Innere der
Multi-Falzeinheit kann sehr heiß sein. Sie sollten daher beim Beseitigen von gestautem
Papier vorsichtig sein.

12
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Schneideeinheit Ringbinder

1
1 2

Deutsch
3

DFV014

1.
Halten Sie beim Beseitigen von Papierstau Ihre Hände von der Schneideklinge im Innern
fern. Nichtbeachtung kann zur Verletzung der Finger durch die Schneideklinge führen.

EAR002

1.
Achten Sie darauf, Ihre andere Hand nicht einzuklemmen, wenn Sie die Abdeckung der
Kartusche schließen. Sie können sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.

2.
Fassen Sie keine Teile an, wenn dies auf einem entsprechenden Etikett vermerkt ist.
Andernfalls können Sie sich Ihre Finger einklemmen oder sich verletzen.

3.
Greifen Sie nicht in die Papierausgabe, wenn Sie gebundene Broschüren entfernen. Sie
können sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.

13
 1. Sicherheitshinweise für dieses Gerät

Klebebinder Buffer Pass Unit

1
Deutsch

2 DFV004

1.
Auf diesen Etiketten sind das Gewicht der Einheit und Beschreibungen zum Anheben
angegeben. Diese Etiketten sind jedoch nur für Kundendiensttechniker gedacht. Heben Sie
ein Gerät mit diesen Etiketten nicht an.

DFV016

1.
Achten Sie beim Herausnehmen von gebundenen Broschüren darauf, nicht die linke untere
Ablage des Klebebinders anzufassen. Sie können sich sonst die Finger einklemmen.

2.
Fassen Sie nicht zu weit in die Einheit. Sie können sich an der Mechanik verletzen.

14
 2. Andere Informationen zu diesem Gerät

Großraumstapler Gesetze und Vorschriften

1 2
Vervielfältigung und Druck verboten
Kopieren oder drucken Sie keine Materialien, deren Reproduktion gesetzlich untersagt ist.
Es ist im Allgemeinen aufgrund örtlich geltender Gesetze verboten, folgende Materialien zu
kopieren oder drucken:
Banknoten, Steuermarken, Pfandbriefe, Aktienzertifikate, Bankschecks, Schecks,
Reisepässe, Führerscheine.
Die vorgenannte Liste dient nur als Anhaltspunkt und erhebt keinen Anspruch auf
Vollständigkeit. Wir übernehmen keine Gewähr für ihre Vollständigkeit oder Richtigkeit. Bei
Fragen, ob bestimmte Materialien von Rechts wegen kopiert oder gedruckt werden dürfen,
sollten Sie Ihren Rechtsberater konsultieren.

Deutsch
Laser-Sicherheitshinweise

Für die Typen 1, 2, 3, 4 und 5

Das Gerät erfüllt die Anforderungen gemäß IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) für
Laserprodukte der Klasse 1. Das Gerät enthält einen VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface
Emitting Laser) mit 772–792 Nanometer Wellenlänge. Der Winkel der Strahlendivergenz
beträgt 5,5 Grad (Minimum) und 7,9 Grad (Maximum) in vertikaler Richtung sowie 5,5 Grad
(Minimum) und 7,9 Grad (Maximum) in horizontaler Richtung und die Laserstrahlen werden
im Dauerstrichmodus (CW) generiert. Der VCSEL verfügt über vierzig Lichtquellen. Die
DFV005
maximale Ausgangsleistung für jede Lichtquelle beträgt 1,23 Milliwatt.
1. An der Rückseite des Geräts befindet sich das folgende Etikett:
Versuchen Sie nicht, in den Großraumstapler zu steigen. Es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.

2.
Berühren Sie keine Teile, die mit entsprechenden Etiketten versehen sind. Das Innere des
Großraumstaplers kann sehr heiß sein. Sie sollten daher beim Beseitigen von gestautem
Papier vorsichtig sein.
Achtung
Die Verwendung anderer Bedien- bzw. Einstellelemente oder die Durchführung anderer
Symbole für den Hauptschalter Schritte als die in diesem
Handbuch beschriebenen kann dazu führen, dass gefährliche Strahlung freigesetzt wird.
Die für den Hauptschalter verwendeten Symbole für dieses Gerät sind wie folgt:
: GERÄT EINGESCHALTET Für Medienidentifizierungseinheit Typ S3
: GERÄT AUSGESCHALTET
Die Medienidentifizierungseinheit (optional) erfüllt alle Anforderungen gemäß IEC 60825-
: STANDBY
1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) für Laserprodukte der Klasse 1. Die Medienidentifizierungseinheit
enthält einen VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) mit 772–792 Nanometer
Wellenlänge. Der Winkel der Strahlendivergenz beträgt 5,3 Grad (mind.) und 7,9 Grad (max.)
in vertikale Richtung, 5,3 Grad (mind.) und 7,9 Grad (max.) in horizontale Richtung und die
15
 2. Andere Informationen zu diesem Gerät

Laserstrahlen werden im Dauerstrichmodus (CW) generiert. Der VCSEL verfügt über zwölf
Lichtquellen und die maximale Ausgangsleistung beträgt 2,5 Milliwatt. Auslandsgesellschaften und Angaben zur Geräuschemission
An der Unterseite des Geräts befindet sich das folgende Etikett.
Gemäß den Anforderungen an das "GS-Symbol" des TÜV sind nachstehend die
Einzelheiten zu der EU-Niederlassung oder dem beauftragten Unternehmen aufgeführt.

Auslandsgesellschaften
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Niederlande
Geräuschemission
Achtung
Die Verwendung anderer Bedien- bzw. Einstellelemente oder die Durchführung anderer
Schritte als die in diesem
Deutsch

Handbuch beschriebenen kann dazu führen, dass gefährliche Strahlung freigesetzt wird.

EMC-Direktive
Hinweise für Anwender in EU-Mitgliedsstaaten
Modellname: Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320 Warnung zu Produkt der Klasse A
Hersteller: Warnung:
Ricoh Co., Ltd. Dieses Gerät entspricht den Anforderungen der Klasse A der CISPR 32. In Wohngebieten
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo. 143-8555, Japan kann es zu Funkstörungen kommen.
Da dieses Gerät kein Haushaltsgerät ist, fällt es nicht unter die 2013 überarbeitete ErP-
Richtlinie 2009/125/EC.
Importeur:
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Niederlande

Konformitätserklärung
Hinweise für Anwender in den Ländern des Europäischen Wirtschaftsraums (EWR)
Das Produkt entspricht den wesentlichen Anforderungen und Vorschriften der Direktive
2014/53/EU.

Die CE-Konformitätserklärung ist unter folgender URL verfügbar: [Link]

products/ce_doc2/
Wählen Sie das geeignete Produkt.

Frequenzband: 2.400 - 2.483,5 MHz

Max. Funkfrequenzleistungspegel: weniger als 20,0 dBm

16
 2. Andere Informationen zu diesem Gerät

Informationen für Anwender von elektrischen und Marken

SD ist eine Marke von SD-3C, LLC.
elektronischen Einrichtungen
Andere hier verwendete Produktnamen werden hier nur zu Zwecken der Bezeichnung
Anwender in Ländern, in denen das in diesem Abschnitt gezeigte verwendet; bei ihnen handelt es sich um Marken der jeweiligen Unternehmen. Wir verzichten
Symbol im nationalen Recht zur Sammlung und Behandlung von auf jegliche Ansprüche an diesen Marken.
elektronischem Abfall festgelegt wurde
Unsere Produkte enthalten qualitativ hochwertige Komponenten und sind für einfaches
Recycling konzipiert.
Unsere Produkte oder Produktverpackungen sind mit folgendem Symbol markiert.

Deutsch
Das Symbol zeigt an, dass das Produkt nicht als Hausmüll behandelt werden darf. Es muss
separat über die verfügbaren entsprechenden Rücklauf- und Sammlungssysteme entsorgt
werden. Durch Befolgen dieser Anweisungen stellen Sie sicher, dass dieses Produkt richtig
behandelt wird, und helfen, potenzielle Auswirkungen auf die Umwelt und menschliche
Gesundheit zu reduzieren, die sonst aus ungeeigneter Behandlung resultieren könnten.
Wiederverwertung von Produkten hilft, natürliche Ressourcen zu erhalten und die Umwelt
zu schützen.

Weitere Einzelheiten zu Sammel- und Recyclingsystemen für dieses Produkt erhalten Sie in
dem Geschäft, in dem Sie es erworben haben, bei Ihrem örtlichen Händler oder von einem
Vertriebs-/Kundendienstmitarbeiter.

Alle anderen Anwender

Wenn Sie dieses Produkt entsorgen möchten, setzen Sie sich bitte mit den zuständigen
Behörden, dem Geschäft, wo Sie es erworben haben, Ihrem örtlichen Händler oder einem
Vertriebs-/Kundendienstmitarbeiter in Verbindung.

Für Anwender in Indien

Dieses Produkt, einschließlich Komponenten, Verbrauchsmaterialien, Teilen und
Ersatzteilen, entspricht dem "India E-Waste Gesetz 2011" und verbietet die Verwendung von
Blei, Quecksilber, sechswertigem Chrom, polychlorierten Biphenylen oder polychlorierten
Diphenylethern in Konzentrationen von über 0,1 Gewichtsprozent und 0,01 Gewichtsprozent
Kadmium, außer für die Ausnahmen des Gesetzes.

17
 Deutsch

18
19

Deutsch
 Deutsch

20
 Français

Consignes de 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

sécurité
2. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Pour les informations qui ne figurent pas

dans les manuels papier, veuillez consulter
les manuels disponibles en ligne sur notre
site Internet ([Link] ou sur
le panneau de commande.

Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel avant d'utiliser l'appareil

et conservez-le à portée de main pour référence ultérieure.
Pour une utilisation correcte et en toute sécurité, veillez à bien
lire les "Consignes de sécurité" avant d'utiliser l'appareil.
Français
Contenu Comment lire les manuels

Comment lire les manuels........................................................................................................ 1 Symboles utilisés dans les manuels

1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil Le présent manuel utilise les symboles suivants :

Les définitions des symboles de sécurité utilisés avec cet appareil........................................ 2

Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité................................................................................ 3
Signale des points à prendre en considération lors de l'utilisation de l'imprimante et explique
Consignes de sécurité à observer............................................................................................ 3 l'origine possible des problèmes d'alimentation de papier, d'originaux abîmés ou de perte de
Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil...................................................................................... 7 données. Veillez à lire attentivement ces explications.

2. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Lois et réglementations........................................................................................................... 15 Donne des explications supplémentaires sur les fonctions de l'appareil et des instructions
Marques commerciales.......................................................................................................... 17 pour résoudre des erreurs commises par l'utilisateur.

Français
Ce symbole se trouve à la fin de chaque section. Il vous indique où trouver des informations
complémentaires sur le sujet.

[]
Indique le nom des touches sur l’écran de l’appareil ou sur le panneau de commande.

(Principalement l'Europe et l'Asie), (Principalement l'Europe), ou (Principalement

l'Asie)
(Principalement l'Amérique du Nord)
Les fonctions qui diffèrent entre les modèles de la région A et de la région B sont indiquées
par deux symboles. Lisez les informations indiquées par le symbole correspondant à la
région du modèle utilisé. Pour plus d'informations sur la correspondance des symboles avec
le modèle que vous utilisez, reportez-vous au menu Gestion du périphérique.

1
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Avis de non-responsabilité Les définitions des symboles de sécurité

Dans le cadre prévu par la loi, en aucun cas le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout
utilisés avec cet appareil
dommage pouvant découler de pannes de cet appareil, de pertes de données enregistrées,
ou de l'utilisation ou de la non utilisation de ce produit et des manuels utilisateurs fournis
avec celui-ci. Interdiction
Assurez-vous d'avoir une copie ou une sauvegarde des données enregistrées sur l'appareil.
Il est possible que des documents ou des données soient effacés en raison d'erreurs
d'utilisation ou de dysfonctionnements de l'appareil. Attention
En aucun cas le fabricant ne pourrait être tenu responsable des documents que vous aurez
créés à l'aide de cet appareil ou des résultats des données exécutées par vos soins.
Signe général indiquant une action obligatoire

Remarques
Ne pas toucher
Le contenu de ce manuel peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis.
Certaines illustrations de ce manuel peuvent présenter de légères différences avec votre
Français

appareil.
Ne pas jeter au feu
Pour des documents de bonne qualité, le fournisseur recommande l'utilisation de son toner.
Le fabricant ne peut être tenu pour responsable des dommages ou frais résultant de
l'utilisation de pièces autres que les pièces du fabricant pour vos appareils bureautiques.
Ne pas utiliser d'aspirateur

Types d'appareil À conserver hors de portée des enfants.

Vérifiez le type de votre machine avant de lire les manuels.
• Type 1 : Pro 8300S Attention, risque de se coincer les mains ou
• Type 2 : Pro 8310S les bras
• Type 3 : Pro 8320S
• Type 4 : Pro 8310 Attention, surface chaude
• Type 5 : Pro 8320

Il est possible que certains modèles ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays. Pour plus
de détails, veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
Certaines options peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. Pour plus de détails,
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
En fonction de votre pays, certaines unités peuvent être en option. Pour plus de détails,
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.

2
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité Consignes de sécurité à observer

Exigences pour localiser et installer les appareils

AVERTISSEMENT
Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si les instructions ne sont pas respectées.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes près de ou à l'intérieur de l'appareil,
car cela pourrait causer un incendie ou une électrocution :
ATTENTION • Utiliser des pulvérisateurs, des solvants ou autres produits inflammables
• Placer des pulvérisateurs, des solvants et autres produits inflammables
Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures superficielles ou • Placer des conteneurs contenant des liquides ou de petits objets
des dégâts matériels si les instructions ne sont pas respectées. métalliques

ATTENTION

Français
• Ne pas placer l'appareil dans un environnement humide et poussiéreux. Cela
risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution.

• Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable ou inclinée. L'appareil

pourrait tomber ou basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.

• Ne placez aucun objet lourd sur l'appareil. L'appareil pourrait tomber ou

basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.

• N'obstruez pas les orifices de ventilation de l'appareil. Cela pourrait entraîner

un incendie suite à la surchauffe des composants internes.

• Lors de l'utilisation continue de cet appareil dans une pièce étroite ou mal
ventilée pendant une longue période ou lors de l'impression d'un volume
élevé de documents, veillez à aérer assez la pièce.

3
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Exigences pour utiliser les fiches et cordons d'alimentation ATTENTION

• Vérifiez que la fiche du câble d'alimentation est entièrement enfoncée dans
la prise murale Ne l'insérez pas non plus dans des prises murales lâches ou
instables, ce qui pourrait causer un faux contact. Cela pourrait générer de
AVERTISSEMENT la chaleur.
• Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes car elles pourraient entraîner un • Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale,
incendie ou une électrocution : tirez toujours sur la fiche et non sur le câble. Ne forcez pas sur le cordon
• Utiliser une tension d'alimentation ou des fréquences autres que celles d'alimentation en tirant. Cela pourrait endommager le cordon, entraînant
des spécifications indiquées potentiellement un incendie ou une électrocution.
• Utiliser des adaptateurs multiprise
• Utiliser des rallonges électriques • Au moins une fois par an, débranchez la prise de la prise murale et nettoyez
• Toucher les broches de la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec un objet les broches ainsi que la zone qui les entoure. L’accumulation de poussière
métallique sur la prise constitue un risque d’incendie.

• Évitez d'appliquer les mesures suivantes sur le cordon d'alimentation car • Lors de toute opération de maintenance sur l'appareil, débranchez le cordon
cela pourrait entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution : d'alimentation de la prise murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
• Les endommager
• Si vous n'utilisez pas l'appareil pendant une longue période comme des
Français

• Les emballer ensemble

• Les modifier vacances, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation de la prise
• Placer des objets lourds dessus murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
• Les tirer fort • Source d'alimentation
• Les plier de force
220–240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
• Ne manipulez pas la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec les mains mouillées. Veillez à raccorder le câble d’alimentation à une source d’alimentation du
Cela risque de provoquer une électrocution. type décrit ci-dessus.
Pour les utilisateurs en Norvège, ce produit est également conçu pour un
• Le ou les cordons d'alimentations fournis sont destinés uniquement à cet
réseau de distribution d'énergie d'une tension de 230 V phase-à-phase.
appareil. Ils ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour d'autres appareils que celui-ci.
N'utilisez pas non plus d'autres cordons d'alimentation que celui ou ceux
fournis avec cet appareil. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une
électrocution. Exigences en cas d'urgence
• Pour éviter les incendies et les électrocutions, débranchez la fiche et le
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale au moins une fois par an pour les
inspecter. Si l'un des cas suivants se produit, n'utilisez pas la fiche et le
cordon d'alimentation en continu, et consultez votre revendeur ou le SAV.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Il y a des marques de brûlures sur la prise • Ne touchez pas cet appareil en cas de foudroiement à proximité. Cela risque
• Les broches de la prise sont déformées de provoquer une électrocution.
• Les fils internes du cordon d'alimentation sont à nu ou cassés
• Le revêtement du cordon d'alimentation est fissuré, entaillé ou • Assurez-vous d'installer l'appareil le plus près possible d'une prise murale
endommagé pour pouvoir débrancher le cordon d'alimentation facilement en cas
• Lorsque le cordon d'alimentation est courbé, l'alimentation se coupe d'urgence.
• Une partie du cordon d'alimentation devient chaude

• Si le disjoncteur de l'appareil est défini sur « OFF », contactez votre SAV. Le

définir sur « ON » risquerait de provoquer une électrocution, un incendie, de
dégager de la fumée ou de faire disjoncter.

4
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

AVERTISSEMENT Exigences pour utiliser l'appareil

• Si l'appareil agit de façon inhabituelle, mettez-le immédiatement hors tension.
Après avoir mis l'alimentation hors tension, veillez à débrancher la fiche du
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis contactez votre SAV pour ATTENTION
expliquer le problème. L'utilisation continue du cordon d'alimentation risque
de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. • Ne regardez pas directement dans la source lumineuse. Cela pourrait
• L'appareil émet de la fumée endommager vos yeux.
• L'appareil émet des odeurs
• Lorsque vous abaissez l'ADF, ne placez pas vos mains sur les charnières et
• Des objets métalliques ou d'autres corps étrangers sont tombés dans
la vitre d'exposition. Vos mains ou vos doigts pourraient se coincer, ce qui
l'appareil
entraînerait des blessures.
• De l'eau ou d'autres fluides ont coulé dans l'appareil
• N'approchez pas vos mains du logement de sortie du papier du réceptacle
livret fournisseur lorsque vous le sortez ou l'insérez dans l'unité d'agrafage du
Exigences pour déplacer les appareils finisseur. Vous pourriez coincer vos doigts dans l'espacement de l'appareil
et vous blesser.

• Installez ou retirez les options après avoir débranché les fiches des cordons
d'alimentation de la prise murale et avoir confirmé que l'unité principale n'est pas
ATTENTION

Français
plus chaude que la température ambiante. Sans quoi vous pourriez vous brûler.
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, ne le tenez pas par le panneau de
commande. Vous pourriez endommager le panneau de commande et
provoquer un dysfonctionnement ou vous blesser. Exigences pour manipuler l'intérieur de l'appareil
• Lorsque vous transportez ou déplacez l'appareil en le soulevant pour le
placer à un autre étage, contactez votre SAV. Faire tomber ou basculer
l'appareil risque de causer des blessures ou un dysfonctionnement.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Une fois que vous avez déplacé l'appareil, utilisez le système de bloquage
• Enlevez uniquement les capots ou vis explicitement indiqués dans ce
des roulettes pour le maintenir en place. Dans le cas contraire, l'appareil est
manuel. Il y a des composants haute tension dans l'appareil susceptibles
susceptible de se déplacer ou de basculer et d'entraîner une blessure.
de provoquer une électrocution. Il y a également des composants laser à
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, veillez à débrancher le cordon l'intérieur de l'appareil qui peuvent entraîner une cécité. Contactez votre
d'alimentation de la prise murale et vérifiez que les cordons de ligne revendeur ou le SAV si l'un des composants internes de l'appareil doit faire
téléphonique et autres câbles de connexion ont été retirés. Dans le cas l'objet d'une maintenance, un réglage ou une réparation.
contraire, le cordon d'alimentation sera endommagé, ce qui peut entraîner • Ne démontez pas et ne modifiez pas cet appareil. Cela risque de provoquer
un incendie ou une électrocution. un incendie et une électrocution. Une exposition aux composants laser
internes de l'appareil peut également entraîner la cécité.

ATTENTION
• Il y a des pièces très chaudes à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Lorsque vous retirez
le papier mal alimenté, ne touchez pas à d'autres zones que celles spécifiées
dans ce manuel. Si vous les touchez, vous pourriez vous brûler.

5
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

ATTENTION AVERTISSEMENT
• Bien que l'appareil soit conçu pour qu'un dispositif de sécurité protège les • La section suivante explique les messages d'avertissement du sac plastique
utilisateurs des blessures, faites attention à ne pas toucher les rouleaux utilisé pour l'emballage du produit :
pendant l'opération. Les rouleaux peuvent pincer avant de s'arrêter • Ne laissez pas les éléments en polythène (sacs, etc.) fournis avec
complètement. l'appareil à la portée de bébés ou de jeunes enfants. Porter ces
matériaux en polyéthylène à la bouche ou au nez peut causer un
• Contactez votre SAV ou revendeur pour nettoyer l'intérieur de l'appareil. Si étouffement.
l'intérieur de l'appareil n'est pas nettoyé régulièrement alors que la poussière
s'accumule, il y a un risque d'incendie et de dysfonctionnement.

• Lors du remplacement du papier ou du retrait du papier coincé, assurez-vous

de ne pas vous coincer les doigts et de ne pas vous blesser.
ATTENTION
• L'unité de fusion peut devenir chaude. Si vous retirez l'unité de fusion, • Ne forcez pas pour ouvrir les conteneurs de toner pendant que du toner est
attendez au moins 20 minutes après ouverture du capot et assurez-vous que à l'intérieur, ne les écrasez pas et ne les pressez pas. Le déversement de
l'unité de fusion n'est pas plus chaude que la température ambiante. Sans toner peut entraîner une ingestion accidentelle ou des vêtements, mains,
quoi vous pourriez vous brûler. plancher sales.

• Nettoyez les zones autour du rouleau de résistance après avoir confirmé que • N'utilisez pas de feuilles agrafées, d'aluminium, de papier carbone ou tout
Français

l'appareil était éteint et que l'unité principale n'était pas plus chaude que la autre type de papier conducteur. Cela pourrait entraîner un incendie.
température ambiante. Sans quoi vous pourriez vous brûler. • Conservez les cartes SD et clés USB hors de portée des enfants. En cas
• Tenez vos mains à l'écart de l’intérieur de l’unité de reliure spirale et de d'ingestion accidentelle d'une carte SD ou d'une clé USB par un enfant,
l’espace qui se trouve en dessous du réceptacle de reliure spirale. Vous consultez immédiatement un médecin.
risquez de vous coincer les doigts dans le cas contraire. • Ne laissez pas les éléments suivants dans un endroit où des enfants y ont
accès :
• Toner (neuf ou usagé)
Exigences pour manipuler les fournitures • Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur
• Pièces fixées au toner

• Lors de la reliure manuelle de feuilles avec un module d'ouverture des

AVERTISSEMENT spirales, prenez garde à ne pas vous coincer les doigts.

• Lorsque vous retirez une feuille de papier coincée, que vous réapprovisionnez
• Ne stockez pas de toner (neuf ou usagé) ou de conteneurs de toner avec
en toner ou que vous remplacez le toner (neuf ou usagé), veillez à ne pas
du toner à l'intérieur dans un endroit avec une flamme nue. Le toner peut
l'inhaler.
s'enflammer et entraîner un incendie ou des brûlures.
• Lorsque ce qui suit se produit pendant la manipulation du toner, prenez
• Ne vous débarrassez pas des éléments suivants en les brûlant. Le toner
d'abord des mesures d'urgence puis consultez un médecin si nécessaire.
s'enflammera au contact d'une flamme nue.
• Lorsque vous inhalez du toner, gargarisez-vous avec beaucoup d'eau et
• Toner (neuf ou usagé)
allez respirer de l'air frais.
• Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur
• Lorsque vous avalez du toner, diluez le contenu gastrique avec
• Pièces fixées au toner
beaucoup d'eau.
• N'aspirez pas du toner renversé (même usagé) avec un aspirateur. Le toner • Lorsque vous avez du toner dans les yeux, rincez-les avec beaucoup
aspiré peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion en raison des étincelles d'eau.
du contact électrique à l'intérieur de l'aspirateur. Cependant, vous pouvez
• Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, que vous remplissez ou que vous
utiliser un aspirateur industriel compatible avec le toner. Lorsque le toner
remplacez du toner (neuf ou usagé), veillez à ne pas répandre de poussière
est renversé, nettoyez soigneusement le toner déversé à l'aide d'un chiffon
de toner sur votre peau ou vos vêtements.
humide afin de ne pas l'éparpiller.

6
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil

ATTENTION
• Si du toner (neuf ou usagé) entre en contact avec votre peau ou vos
vêtements et que vous l'étalez, prenez les mesures suivantes : Emplacements des étiquettes AVERTISSEMENT et ATTENTION
• En cas de contact du toner avec la peau, lavez abondamment la zone
affectée avec de l'eau et du savon.
Cet appareil présente des étiquettes pour l' AVERTISSEMENT et la PRECAUTION aux
• Si du toner entre en contact avec vos vêtements, lavez la zone tâchée
à l'eau froide. Chauffer la zone tachée en appliquant de l'eau chaude endroits indiqués ci-dessous. Pour une sécurité maximale, veuillez suivre les instructions et
fixera le toner dans le tissu et retirer la tache deviendrait impossible. manipuler l'appareil comme indiqué.

• Lorsque vous remplacez un conteneur avec du toner (y compris du toner Appareil de base
usagé) ou des consommables avec du toner, veillez à ce que le toner
n'éclabousse pas. Après avoir retiré les consommables usagés et avoir
1
fermé le couvercle du conteneur si le couvercle est disponible, placez-les
2
dans un sac.

Français
3

6 5
4

1. EAQ001

Éloignez vos doigts et autres parties du corps des pièces en mouvement. Ne sortez aucune
autre unité lorsque vous remplacez le développeur.

2.
N'appuyez pas sur l'unité interne qui a été sortie. Si vous appuyez sur l'unité interne, vous
pourriez la faire tomber.
7
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

3. 12.
Pour une utilisation correcte de la cartouche de toner usagé, reportez-vous à la page 6 « Cette étiquette indique le poids (masse) de l'unité. Toutefois, cette étiquette est destinée aux
Exigences pour l'utilisation des consommables de l'appareil ». représentants du service client dûment formés uniquement. Ne tentez pas de soulever une
4 et 5. unité présentant cette étiquette.
Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous
risquez de vous coincer les doigts et de vous blesser. 13.
L'intérieur pourrait être très chaud. Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette
6. étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez
de vous blesser. 14.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Le filet de l'unité de fusion peut être
7 8 9 8 10
très chaud. Il faut être prudent lors du retrait du papier mal alimenté.

LCT grand format trois magasins

1
Français

7
11

9 7 13

14
12

EAQ011

7, 8 et 9.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez
de vous blesser.
DWR002
10.
1.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. En surface comme à l'intérieur,
Pièces très chaudes. Ne touchez pas les parties comportant cette étiquette. Dans le cas
l'unité de fusion peut s'avérer très chaude. Il faut être prudent lors du retrait du papier mal
contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.
alimenté.

2.
11.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. L’intérieur de l’appareil peut être
Ne touchez pas les parties signalées par l'étiquette. Ces parties peuvent devenir très
très chaud.
chaudes. Attendez que ces parties refroidissent avant de les toucher. Dans le cas contraire,
vous encourez un risque de brûlure. Les parties peuvent prendre jusqu'à 20 minutes pour
refroidir après l'impression continue d'un grand nombre de pages.
8
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

2. (Cette étiquette est fixée sur les deux magasins.)

Magasin grande capacité
Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous
risquez de vous coincer les doigts et de vous blesser.

Multibypass

1
1

Français
EAQ008

1.
Pièces très chaudes. Ne touchez pas les parties comportant cette étiquette. Dans le cas
contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.
DFV009

LCT grand format deux magasins 1.

Tenez vos mains à l'écart du multibypass lors de la résolution d'un incident papier. Dans le
cas contraire, vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts.
1

EAQ009

1 et 3.
Pièces très chaudes. Ne touchez pas les parties comportant cette étiquette. Dans le cas
contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.
9
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Finisseur SR5090 ou Finisseur livret SR5100 Finisseur SR5110

8
1

2
7

6
Français

EAQ004
5
3 1.
Lorsque vous ouvrez ou fermez le capot avant, gardez vos mains à l'écart des charnières.
4 Les charnières peuvent présenter un danger. Vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts si vous
ne tenez pas vos mains à l'écart des charnières.

2.
L'intérieur pourrait être très chaud. Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette
étiquette. Vous pourriez vous coincer les doigts et vous blesser.
EAQ002

1 et 2.
Pendant l'utilisation, les rouleaux de transport du papier tournent. Veillez à ne pas toucher
les rouleaux pendant le fonctionnement. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.

3 et 4.
Tenez vos mains à l'écart du magasin du finisseur livret lorsque vous retirez ou enfoncez
l'unité d'agrafage du finisseur ou que vous résolvez un incident papier. Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts.

5 et 6.
Veuillez faire attention aux parties saillantes du capot avant lorsque vous remplacez la
cartouche dans l'unité de piqûre à cheval ou lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé dans
l'unité de piqûre à cheval.

7 et 8.
L’intérieur de l’appareil peut être très chaud. Ne touchez pas les parties comportant cette
étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser.
10
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Côté gauche
Finisseur livret SR5120

Côté droit

3
1

Français
EAQ005

3.
Tenez vos mains à l'écart du magasin du finisseur livret lorsque vous retirez ou enfoncez
l'unité d'agrafage du finisseur ou que vous résolvez un incident papier. Dans le cas contraire,
EAQ003
vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts. Faites attention à ne pas toucher le réceptacle
1.
du finisseur livret pendant le fonctionnement. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous
Lorsque vous ouvrez ou fermez le capot avant, gardez vos mains à l'écart des charnières.
blesser.
Les charnières peuvent présenter un danger. Vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts si vous
ne tenez pas vos mains à l'écart des charnières.
4.
Tenez vos mains à l'écart du magasin du finisseur livret lorsque vous retirez ou enfoncez
2.
l'unité d'agrafage du finisseur ou que vous résolvez un incident papier. Dans le cas contraire,
L'intérieur pourrait être très chaud. Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette
vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts.
étiquette. Vous pourriez vous coincer les doigts et vous blesser.

11
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Unité de pliage multiple Inserteur

2
Français

3
EAR001

1.
La partie sur laquelle l'étiquette est apposée est très chaude et pourrait vous brûler. Gardez
vos mains et vos bras à distance.

DFV013

1, 2 et 3.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. L'intérieur de l'unité de pliage
multiple peut être très chaud. Il faut être prudent lors du retrait du papier mal alimenté.

12
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Massicot Unité de reliure spirale

1
1 2

Français
DFV014

1.
Tenez vos mains à l'écart de la lame de coupe située à l'intérieur lorsque vous résolvez un
incident papier. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser les doigts avec la lame
tranchante.

EAR002

1.
Tenez vos mains à l’écart lorsque vous refermez le capot de la cartouche. Dans le cas
contraire, vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts.

2.
Éloignez vos mains des parties indiquées par cette étiquette. Dans le cas contraire, vous
risquez de vous coincer les doigts et de vous blesser.

3.
Lorsque vous retirez des livrets reliés, tenez vos mains à l’écart de la sortie papier. Dans le
cas contraire, vous risquez de vous coincer les doigts.

13
 1. Consignes de sécurité pour cet appareil

Unité de reliure sans couture Unité de thermorégulation

1
Français

2 DFV004

1.
Ces étiquettes indiquent le poids de l'unité et décrivent comment la soulever. Toutefois,
ces étiquettes sont destinées aux techniciens client. Ne soulevez pas une unité qui a ces
étiquettes.

DFV016

1.
Lorsque vous retirez les livrets encollés, veuillez ne pas laisser vos mains sur le magasin
inférieur gauche de l’unité de reliure sans couture. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de
vous coincer les doigts.

2.
N'introduisez pas vos mains en profondeur à l'intérieur de l'unité. Le déplacement des parties
à l'intérieur de l'unité peut provoquer des blessures.

14
 2. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Empileuse grande capacité Lois et réglementations

1 2
Duplications et impressions interdites
Ne copiez ou n'imprimez pas des documents dont la reproduction est interdite par la loi.
Copier ou imprimer les éléments suivants est en règle générale interdit par les autorités
locales :
billets de banques, timbres fiscaux, obligations, certificats d'actions, traites bancaires,
chèques, passeports et permis de conduire.
La liste précédente est donnée à titre d'exemple et n'est en aucun cas exhaustive. Nous
déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de liste incomplète ou inexacte. Si vous avez des
questions concernant le droit de copier ou d'imprimer certains éléments, consultez un
conseiller juridique.

Sécurité laser

Pour le type 1, 2, 3, 4, et 5

Français
Cet appareil répond aux exigences d'IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) en ce qui
concerne les produits laser de classe 1. L'appareil contient un VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface
Emitting Laser) d'une longueur d’ondes de 772 à 792 nanomètres. L'angle de divergence du
faisceau est de 5,5 degrés (minimum) et 7,9 degrés (maximum) dans le sens vertical, et 5,5
degrés (minimum) et 7,9 degrés (maximum) dans le sens horizontal ; les faisceaux laser sont
générés en mode Onde entretenue. Le VCSEL dispose de quarante sources de lumières et
la puissance de sortie maximum pour chaque source de lumière est de 1,23 milliwatt.
DFV005
L'étiquette suivante est apposée à l'arrière de l'appareil :
1.
N'essayez pas d'accéder à l'intérieur de l'empileuse grande capacité. Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez de vous blesser.

2.
Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées par cette étiquette. L'intérieur du réceptacle d'empilage
grande capacité peut être très chaud. Il faut être prudent lors du retrait du papier mal alimenté.
Attention
L'utilisation de contrôles, d'ajustements ou l'exécution de procédures autres que celles
indiquées
Symbole pour la mise sous tension dans ce manuel pourrait entraîner une exposition à des radiations dangereuses.

Les symboles pour l'interrupteur de mise sous tension utilisés sur cet appareil sont les Pour la Media Identification Unit Type S3
suivants :
: SOUS TENSION La Media Identification Unit (en option) répond aux exigences d'IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN
: HORS TENSION 60825-1:2014) en ce qui concerne les produits laser de classe 1. La Media Identification
: VEILLE Unit contient un VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) d'une longueur d’ondes de
772 à 792 nanomètres. L'angle de divergence du rayon est de 5,3 degrés (minimum) et de
7,9 degrés (maximum) dans le sens vertical, et de 5,3 degrés (minimum) et de 7,9 degrés

15
 2. Autres informations sur cet appareil

(maximum) dans le sens horizontal, les rayons laser sont générés en mode Onde Continue
(CW). Le VCSEL compte douze sources lumineuses pour une puissance de sortie de 2,5 Informations sur les filiales et les émissions sonores
milliwatts.
L'étiquette suivante est apposée sur le dessous de l'appareil. Conformément aux conditions requises "Symbole GS" TUV, les détails de l'agence de
l'Union Européenne ou de la société représentante sont fournis ci-dessous.

Overseas Affiliates
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Pays-Bas
Émission sonore

Attention
L'utilisation de contrôles, d'ajustements ou l'exécution de procédures autres que celles
indiquées
dans ce manuel pourrait entraîner une exposition à des radiations dangereuses.

Directive CEM
Note à l’attention des utilisateurs des pays de l'UE
Français

Avertissement relatif aux appareils de classe A

Nom du modèle : Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320 Avertissement :
Fabricant : Cet équipement est conforme à la Classe A de CISPR 32. Dans un environnement résidentiel,
Ricoh Co., Ltd. cet équipement risque de causer des interférences radio.
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo. 143-8555, Japon Cet appareil n'étant pas un appareil électroménager, il ne se conforme pas à la directive ErP
2009/125 / CE, qui a été révisée en 2013.

Importateur :
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Pays-Bas

Déclaration de conformité
Remarque à l'attention des utilisateurs habitant dans les pays de l’Espace
Économique Européen
Ce produit répond aux exigences et clauses fondamentales énoncées dans la directive
2014/53/EU.

La déclaration de conformité CE est accessible à l'adresse suivante : [Link]

products/ce_doc2/
sur sélection du produit concerné.

Utilisation de la bande de fréquence : 2400 - 2483,5 MHz

Puissance radiofréquence maximale : inférieure à 20,0 dBm

16
 2. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Informations à l'attention des utilisateurs de matériel

Marques commerciales
SD est une marque commerciale de SD-3C, LLC.
électrique et électronique
D'autres désignations de produit sont utilisées ci-après uniquement à des fins d'identification
Utilisateurs dans les pays où le symbole indiqué dans cette section et peuvent être des marques de leur société respective. Nous renonçons à tout droit relatif
a été spécifié dans la loi nationale sur la collecte et le traitement des à ces marques.
déchets électroniques.
Nos produits contiennent des composants de haute qualité et sont conçus pour faciliter le
recyclage.
Nos produits et nos emballages comportent le symbole suivant.

Français
Ce symbole indique que ce produit ne doit pas être traité comme un déchet ménager. La mise
au rebut doit être effectuée séparément en utilisant les systèmes de collecte appropriés. En
suivant ces instructions, vous vous assurez que ce produit est correctement traité et vous
aidez à réduire les effets négatifs sur l’environnement et la santé humaine pouvant résulter
d’une mise au rebut incorrecte. Le recyclage des produits aide à préserver les ressources
naturelles et à protéger l’environnement.

Pour plus d'informations concernant la mise au rebut et le recyclage de cet appareil, veuillez
contacter le magasin dans lequel vous l’avez acheté, votre revendeur local ou votre technicien.

Pour tous les autres utilisateurs

Si vous souhaitez mettre cet appareil au rebut, veuillez contacter les autorités locales, le
magasin dans lequel vous avez acheté cet appareil, votre revendeur local ou votre technicien.

À l'attention des utilisateurs en Inde

Ce produit, ainsi que tous ses composants, consommables et pièces, est conforme
aux dispositions du règlement sur les déchets électroniques « India E-waste
Rule 2011 », interdisant l'emploi de plomb, mercure, chrome hexavalent,
polybromobiphényles ou polybromodiphényléther en concentrations supérieures à 0,1% du
poids, et 0,01% du poids pour le cadmium, sauf les exonérations définies dans le règlement.

17
 Français

18
19

Français
 Français

20
 Italiano

Informazioni sulla 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa

macchina
sicurezza
2. Altre informazioni per questa macchina

Per informazioni non presenti nei manuali

cartacei consultare i manuali online
disponibili sul nostro sito web
([Link] o tramite il pannello
di controllo.

Leggere attentamente questo manuale prima di utilizzare la

macchina e tenerlo a portata di mano per riferimento futuro.
Per un uso sicuro e corretto, leggere le "Informazioni sulla
sicurezza" prima di utilizzare la macchina.
Italiano
Sommario Come leggere i manuali

Come leggere i manuali............................................................................................................ 1 Simboli usati nei manuali

1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina In questo manuale vengono utilizzati i seguenti simboli:

Significato dei simboli di sicurezza utilizzati per questa macchina......................................... 2

Significato delle etichette di sicurezza..................................................................................... 3
Indica i punti cui prestare attenzione quando si utilizza la macchina e le spiegazioni sulle
Precauzioni di sicurezza da osservare..................................................................................... 3 probabili cause di inceppamenti carta, danni agli originali o perdita di dati. Leggere sempre
Etichette di sicurezza della macchina...................................................................................... 7 queste spiegazioni.

2. Altre informazioni per questa macchina

Leggi e normative................................................................................................................... 15 Indica spiegazioni supplementari delle funzioni della periferica e istruzioni sulla risoluzione
Marchi registrati...................................................................................................................... 17 degli errori utente.

Questo simbolo si trova alla fine delle sezioni Indica dove reperire ulteriori informazioni
importanti.

Italiano
[]
Indica i nomi dei tasti presenti sul display o sul pannello di controllo della periferica.

(principalmente Europa e Asia), (principalmente Europa) o (principalmente Asia)

(principalmente Nord America)
Le differenze tra le funzioni dei modelli destinati alla regione A e alla regione B sono indicate
da due simboli. Leggere le informazioni indicate dal simbolo corrispondente alla regione del
modello in uso. Per dettagli sui simboli corrispondenti al modello in uso, vedere Gestione dei
dispositivi.

1
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Dichiarazione di non responsabilità Significato dei simboli di sicurezza utilizzati per

Nella misura massima consentita dalle leggi applicabili, in nessun caso il produttore
questa macchina
è responsabile per qualsiasi danno derivante da guasti di questa macchina, perdite di
documenti o dati, o dall'uso di questa macchina e dei manuali di istruzioni forniti con essa.
Assicurarsi sempre di effettuare la copia o il backup dei dati registrati in questa macchina. I Divieto
documenti o i dati potrebbero venire cancellati in seguito a errori operativi o malfunzionamenti
della macchina.
In nessun caso il produttore è responsabile dei documenti creati dall'utente con questa Attenzione
macchina o dei risultati di dati elaborati con essa.

Segnale di intervento obbligatorio generale

Note
Il contenuto del presente manuale può essere modificato senza preavviso. Non toccare
Alcune delle caratteristiche illustrate nel presente manuale possono differire leggermente da
quelle dell’unità in uso.
Il produttore consiglia di utilizzare toner originale per ottenere stampe di buona qualità.
Non gettare nel fuoco
Il produttore declina ogni responsabilità per danni o spese conseguenti all’uso di pezzi di
ricambio non originali del produttore sui prodotti per ufficio.
Italiano

Non utilizzare aspirapolvere

Tipi di macchina
Controllare il tipo di unità in uso prima di leggere i manuali. Tenere fuori dalla portata dei bambini

• Tipo 1: Pro 8300S

• Tipo 2: Pro 8310S Avvertimento, le mani o le braccia potrebbero
• Tipo 3: Pro 8320S rimanere incastrate
• Tipo 4: Pro 8310
• Tipo 5: Pro 8320 Attenzione, superficie calda

Alcuni modelli possono non essere disponibili in tutti i paesi. Per ulteriori informazioni,
rivolgersi al rivenditore locale.
Alcune opzioni possono non essere disponibili in alcuni paesi. Per ulteriori informazioni,
rivolgersi al rivenditore locale.
In alcuni paesi certe unità potrebbero essere opzionali. Per ulteriori informazioni, rivolgersi
al rivenditore locale.

2
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Significato delle etichette di sicurezza Precauzioni di sicurezza da osservare

Requisiti per il posizionamento e l'installazione delle macchine

AVVERTENZA
Indica una situazione potenzialmente pericolosa che potrebbe causare infortuni mortali o
gravi se le istruzioni non vengono seguite.
AVVERTENZA
• Seguire sempre le seguenti precauzioni di sicurezza durante l'uso della
macchina, in caso contrario possono verificarsi incendi o scosse elettriche:
ATTENZIONE • Non usare spray infiammabili, solventi e simili in prossimità della
macchina
Indica una situazione potenzialmente pericolosa che potrebbe causare infortuni lievi o di • Non collocare spray infiammabili, solventi e simili in prossimità della
media gravità se le istruzioni non vengono seguite. macchina
• Non posizionare contenitori contenenti liquidi o piccoli oggetti metallici

ATTENZIONE
• Tenere la macchina lontano da umidità o polvere. In caso contrario,
potrebbero verificarsi incendi o scosse elettriche.

Italiano
• Non collocare l’unità su superfici instabili o che possano ribaltarsi. In caso
contrario, la macchina potrebbe cadere o ribaltarsi e provocare incidenti.

• Non appoggiare oggetti pesanti sulla macchina. In caso contrario, la

macchina potrebbe cadere o ribaltarsi e provocare incidenti.

• Non ostruire le bocchette dell'aria della macchina. In caso contrario, il

surriscaldamento dei componenti interni potrebbe provocare un incendio.

• Quando si utilizza la macchina in uno spazio chiuso o poco ventilato per

lunghi periodi, oppure si effettuano molte stampe, assicurare l'adeguata
ventilazione della stanza.

3
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Requisiti per l'utilizzo delle spine e dei cavi di alimentazione ATTENZIONE

• Inserire la spina del cavo di alimentazione a fondo nella presa a muro. Inoltre
non inserirla in prese a muro allentate o instabili che potrebbero causare un
contatto difettoso. Questo potrebbe sviluppare calore.
AVVERTENZA
• Per scollegare il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro, assicurarsi
• Osservare le seguenti precauzioni di sicurezza, in caso contrario si di aver afferrato la spina, non il cavo. Non tirare il cavo di alimentazione
potrebbero verificare incendi o scosse elettriche: con eccessiva forza. In caso contrario, il cavo di alimentazione si può
• Non utilizzare una tensione di alimentazione o frequenze diverse da danneggiare e potrebbero verificarsi incendi o scosse elettriche.
quelle corrispondenti alle specifiche riportate
• Non utilizzare adattatori a presa multipla • Assicurarsi di scollegare la spina dalla presa elettrica e di pulire le estremità
• Non usare prolunghe e l’area attorno ad esse almeno una volta l’anno. L’accumulo di polvere sulla
• Non toccare i poli della spina del cavo di alimentazione con oggetti spina costituisce un pericolo di incendio.
metallici
• Per sicurezza, prima di eseguire interventi di manutenzione sulla macchina,
• Osservare le seguenti precauzioni di sicurezza per l'utilizzo dei cavi di scollegare sempre il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro.
alimentazione, in caso contrario potrebbero verificarsi incendi o scosse
elettriche: • Per ragioni di sicurezza, se non si utilizza la macchina per un certo periodo
• Non danneggiarli di tempo (ad esempio le ferie) assicurarsi di aver staccato la spina del cavo
• Non raccoglierli in un fascio di alimentazione.
• Non modificarli
• Non posizionare oggetti pesanti su di essi • Alimentazione
• Non tirarli con eccessiva forza 220-240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
Italiano

• Non piegarli con eccessiva forza Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere collegato a una fonte di alimentazione
con caratteristiche equivalenti a quelle descritte in precedenza.
• Non maneggiare il cavo di alimentazione o la spina con le mani bagnate. In
Per gli utenti in Norvegia, il prodotto è progettato anche per un sistema di
caso contrario, possono verificarsi scosse elettriche.
distribuzione dell'alimentazione IT con tensione fase-fase di 230V.
• I cavi di alimentazione in dotazione devono essere utilizzati esclusivamente
con la presente macchina. Non possono essere utilizzati per dispositivi diversi
da questa macchina. Inoltre, utilizzare solamente i cavi di alimentazione Requisiti in caso di emergenza
forniti con questa macchina. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi incendi
o scosse elettriche.

• Per prevenire incendi e scosse elettriche, staccare la spina e il cavo di

alimentazione dalla presa a muro almeno una volta l'anno e ispezionarli. Se AVVERTENZA
si verifica una delle condizioni che seguono, smettere di utilizzare la spina e
• Non toccare la macchina dopo che un fulmine è caduto nelle immediate
il cavo di alimentazione e contattare il rivenditore o il servizio di assistenza.
vicinanze. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi scosse elettriche.
• Ci sono segni di bruciature sulla spina
• I poli della spina sono deformati • Accertarsi che la macchina sia installata il più vicino possibile a una presa a
• I fili interni del cavo di alimentazione sono esposti o rotti muro in modo da poter staccare facilmente la spina del cavo di alimentazione
• Il rivestimento del cavo di alimentazione presenta delle crepe, è rovinato in caso di emergenza.
o danneggiato
• Quando il cavo di alimentazione è piegato, l'alimentazione si spegne e
si riaccende
• Parte del cavo di alimentazione si surriscalda

• Quando l'interruttore di circuito della macchina si disattiva (Off), contattare

l'assistenza tecnica. Se viene attivato (On), potrebbero verificarsi scosse
elettriche, incendi, emissione di fumo o l'attivazione del salvavita del locale.
4
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

AVVERTENZA Requisiti per l'utilizzo della macchina

• Se la macchina adotta uno dei comportamenti anomali di seguito elencati,
spegnere immediatamente l'interruttore di alimentazione. Dopo aver staccato
l'alimentazione, assicurarsi di estrarre la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla ATTENZIONE
presa a muro, quindi contattare il rappresentante del servizio di assistenza e
segnalare il problema. Utilizzando la macchina con il cavo di alimentazione • Non guardare direttamente la fonte luminosa. Potrebbe danneggiare la vista.
danneggiato potrebbero verificarsi incendi e scosse elettriche.
• Quando si abbassa l'ADF, non mettere le mani sotto le ceniere o sul vetro
• La macchima emette funo
di esposizione. Le mani e le dita resterebbero intrappolate e potrebbero
• La macchina emana odori sgradevoli
verificarsi delle lesioni.
• Sono caduti all'interno della macchina alcuni oggetti metallici o altri
corpi estranei • Tenere le mani lontane dalla fessura di uscita carta del vassoio libretti del
• Acqua o altri liquidi sono penetrati all'interno della macchina finisher quando lo si estrae o lo si spinge nell'unità di pinzatura del finisher.
Le dita potrebbero restare intrappolate nello spazio vuoto tra le unità e
riportare lesioni.
Requisiti per il riposizionamento delle macchine
• Installare o rimuovere le opzioni dopo aver scollegato la spina del cavo di
alimentazione dalla presa a muro e dopo aver controllato che la temperatura
dell'unità principale non sia superiore alla temperatura ambiente. In caso
contrario, ciò potrebbe causare ustioni.
ATTENZIONE
• Quando si sposta la macchina non afferrare il pannello di controllo. In caso
contrario, si potrebbe danneggiare e potrebbero verificarsi malfunzionamenti Requisiti per la gestione delle parti interne della macchina

Italiano
o lesioni.

• Se è necessario sollevare la macchina per spostarla o trasportarla a un

altro piano, contattare l'assistenza tecnica. Se dovesse cadere o ribaltarsi,
potrebbe non funzionare correttamente e provocare lesioni all'utilizzatore.
AVVERTENZA
• Non rimuovere sportelli, coperchi o viti diversi da quelli esplicitamente
• Dopo avere spostato l'unità, utilizzare il blocco delle ruote per posizionarla.
menzionati nel presente manuale. All'interno della macchina sono presenti
Altrimenti la macchina potrebbe muoversi o ribaltarsi e provocare lesioni.
componenti ad alta tensione che possono provocare scosse elettriche.
• Prima di spostare la macchina, assicurarsi di aver scollegato il cavo di Inoltre all'interno della macchina vi sono componenti laser che possono
alimentazione dalla presa a muro e accertarsi che i cavi di linea e tutti gli provocare la cecità. Rivolgersi al rappresentante di vendita o di assistenza
altri cavi di connessione siano stati rimossi. In caso contrario, il cavo di se i componenti interni della macchina necessitano di manutenzione,
alimentazione potrebbe essere danneggiato e potrebbero quindi verificarsi regolazione o riparazione.
incendi e scosse elettriche. • Non disassemblare o modificare questa macchina. In caso contrario,
potrebbero verificarsi incendi e scosse elettriche. Tenere presente inoltre
che l’esposizione ai componenti laser presenti all’interno della macchina può
causare cecità.

ATTENZIONE
• All'interno della macchina vi sono componenti che diventano molto caldi. Nel
rimuovere la carta inceppata, non toccare aree diverse da quelle specificate
nel presente manuale. Se si toccano aree non specificate, si potrebbero
riportare ustioni.

5
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

ATTENZIONE AVVERTENZA
• Sebbene la macchina sia dotata di un apposito dispositivo che ne • Di seguito vengono illustrati i messaggi di avvertenza riportati sui sacchetti di
consenta l'uso in sicurezza, fare attenzione a non toccare i rulli durante il plastica utilizzati per l'imballaggio di questo prodotto:
funzionamento. I rulli potrebbero "pizzicare" l'utilizzatore prima di fermarsi • Non lasciare materiali in polietilene (sacchetti, ecc.) forniti insieme a
completamente. questa macchina alla portata di neonati e bambini piccoli. È possibile
che si verifichino soffocamenti se i materiali in polietilene entrano in
• Per pulire l'interno della macchina, contattare il rappresentante commerciale contatto con il naso o la bocca.
o il servizio di assistenza tecnica. Se l'interno della macchina non viene pulito
regolarmente, la polvere si accumula. Tale accumulo di polvere potrebbe
provocare incendi e guasti.

• Quando si sostituisce o si rimuove la carta inceppata, fare attenzione a non

ATTENZIONE
incastrare o ferirsi le dita. • Non aprire i contenitori di toner pieni con eccessiva forza, schiacciandoli
• L'unità di fusione diventa calda. Quando si rimuove l'unità di fusione, o comprimendoli. Il toner fuoriuscito può essere ingerito accidentalmente o
attendere almeno 20 minuti dopo aver aperto il coperchio e verificare che macchiare i vestiti, le mani e il pavimento.
l'unità di fusione non sia più calda della temperatura ambiente. In caso
• Non stampare su fogli pinzati, fogli di alluminio, carta carbone o qualsiasi
contrario, ciò potrebbe causare ustioni.
altro tipo di carta conduttiva. In caso contrario, possono verificarsi incendi.
• Pulire le aree intorno al rullo dopo aver controllato che la macchina sia spenta • Tenere fuori dalla portata dei bambini le schede SD e i dispositivi di memoria
e la temperatura dell'unità principale non sia superiore alla temperatura USB. In caso di ingestione accidentale di una scheda SD o di un dispositivo
ambiente. In caso contrario, ciò potrebbe causare ustioni. di memoria USB, consultare immediatamente un medico.
• Non inserire le mani nella parte interna del rilegatore ad anello e nello
Italiano

• Non lasciare i seguenti articoli alla portata dei bambini:

spazio sotto il vassoio del rilegatore ad anello. Altrimenti, le dita potrebbero • Toner (nuovo o usato)
rimanere incastrate. • Contenitori del toner pieni
• Componenti che sono stati a contatto con il toner

Requisiti per la gestione dei consumabili • Quando si rilega manualmente la carta con un dispositivo di apertura degli
anelli, fare attenzione alle dita per evitare di ferirsi.

• Nel rimuovere la carta inceppata, aggiungere o sostituire il toner (nuovo o

usato), non inalare il toner.
AVVERTENZA
• Se, durante la manipolazione del toner si verifica quanto segue, effettuare
• Non conservare il toner (nuovo o usato) o i contenitori del toner pieni innanzitutto le procedure di primo soccorso. Se necessario, consultare un
in prossimità di fiamme libere. Il toner può prendere fuoco, si potrebbero medico.
verificare incendi e riportare lesioni. • In caso di inalazione del toner, praticare gargarismi con abbondante
acqua e recarsi all'aria aperta.
• Non gettare nel fuoco gli articoli di seguito indicati. Il toner prende fuoco a
• In caso di ingestione del toner, diluirne il contenuto gastrico bevendo
contatto con la fiamma nuda e si possono riportare ustioni.
molta acqua.
• Toner (nuovo o usato)
• Se il toner entra in contatto con gli occhi, sciacquarli immediatamente
• Contenitori del toner pieni
con abbondante acqua.
• Componenti che sono stati a contatto con il toner
• Quando si rimuove la carta inceppata, si aggiunge o sostituisce il toner
• Non assorbire le fuoriuscite di toner (anche se usato) utilizzando un
(nuovo o usato), stare attenti a non macchiare di toner la pelle o i vestiti.
aspirapolvere. Il toner aspirato potrebbe incendiarsi o esplodere a causa
di scariche elettriche all'interno dell'aspirapolvere. È comunque possibile
utilizzare un aspirapolvere industriale adatto all'aspirazione del toner. Se
il toner viene rovesciato, rimuoverlo lentamente con un panno umido per
evitare che si sparga ulteriormente.
6
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Etichette di sicurezza della macchina

ATTENZIONE
• Se il toner (nuovo o usato) entra in contatto con la pelle o i vestiti macchiandoli,
procedere come segue: Posizione delle etichette AVVERTENZA e ATTENZIONE
• In caso di contatto accidentale con la pelle, lavare la parte interessata
con abbondante acqua e sapone. Questa macchina ha etichette di AVVERTENZA e ATTENZIONE nelle posizioni sotto
• Se il toner entra in contatto con i vestiti, lavare l'area macchiata con indicate. Per motivi di sicurezza, seguire le istruzioni e utilizzare l’apparecchio attenendosi
acqua fredda. Non utilizzare acqua calda, perché il calore fissa il toner alle indicazioni.
nel tessuto rendendo impossibile la rimozione della macchia.

• Quando si sostituisce un contenitore pieno di toner (anche se usato) o Unità principale

consumabili pieni di toner, fare attenzione che il toner non schizzi. Dopo
aver rimosso i consumabili e aver chiuso l'eventuale coperchio, metterli in
1
un sacchetto.
2

Italiano
3

6 5
4

EAQ001

1.
Tenere dita e altre membra del corpo lontane dalle parti mobili. Non estrarre altre unità
mentre si sostituisce l'unità di sviluppo.

2.
Non esercitare pressione sull'unità interna dopo averla estratta dal corpo della macchina. In
caso contrario, l'unità interna potrebbe uscire dalla propria sede e cadere.
7
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

3. 12.
Per un corretto utilizzo della vaschetta di recupero toner, consultare la sezione relativa ai Questa etichetta indica il peso dell'unità. Tuttavia, questa etichetta è destinata ai tecnici e agli
consumabili a pagina 6. operatori che sono stati formati. Non sollevare l'unità se è dotata di questa etichetta.
4 e 5.
Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con un’etichetta. Le dita potrebbero restare 13.
incastrate e il contatto potrebbe causare lesioni. L'interno potrebbe essere molto caldo. Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con
6. un’etichetta. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.

Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi

14.
infortuni.
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. Il telo dell'unità di collegamento potrebbe
essere molto caldo. Pertanto, è necessario fare molta attenzione durante la rimozione di
7 8 9 8 10 carta inceppata.

LCT ampio a tre vassoi

2
Italiano

7
11

9 7 13

14
12

EAQ011

7, 8 e 9.
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi
infortuni. DWR002
10.
1.
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. La superficie e l'interno dell'unità di
Parti molto calde. Non toccare le parti su cui è applicata un’etichetta. In caso contrario,
fusione possono diventare molto calde. Pertanto, è necessario fare molta attenzione durante
potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.
la rimozione di carta inceppata.
11.
2.
Non toccare le parti indicate dall'etichetta. Queste parti possono surriscaldarsi. Attendere
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. L’interno dell’unità può essere molto
che queste parti si raffreddino prima di toccarle. In caso contrario si possono verificare
ustioni. I tempi di raffreddamento possono essere anche di venti minuti dopo aver stampato caldo.
in modo continuativo numerose pagine.

8
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

2. (Questa etichetta è presente su entrambi i vassoi.)

Vassoio a grande capacità
Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con un’etichetta. Le dita potrebbero restare
incastrate e il contatto potrebbe causare lesioni.

Vassoio bypass multiplo

1
1

EAQ008

1.
Parti molto calde. Non toccare le parti su cui è applicata un’etichetta. In caso contrario,
potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.

Italiano
DFV009

LCT ampio a due vassoi 1.

Tenere le mani lontano dal vassoio bypass multiplo durante le operazioni di rimozione degli
inceppamenti. In caso contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.
1

EAQ009

1 e 3.
Parti molto calde. Non toccare le parti su cui è applicata un’etichetta. In caso contrario,
potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.
9
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Finisher SR5090 o finisher libretti SR5100 Finisher SR5110

8
1

2
7

EAQ004

5 1.
Italiano

3 Quando si apre e si chiude lo sportello anteriore, tenere le mani lontane dai cardini. I cardini
costituiscono un pericolo. Se non si osserva questa precauzione, le dita potrebbero restare
4 incastrate.

2.
L'interno potrebbe essere molto caldo. Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con
un’etichetta. È possibile che le dita rimangano intrappolate, provocando ferite.
EAQ002

1 e 2.
Durante il funzionamento, i rulli che trasportano la carta ruotano. Fare attenzione a non
toccare i rulli durante il funzionamento. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.

3 e 4.
Tenere le mani a distanza di sicurezza dal vassoio finisher libretti quando si estrae o si
inserisce l'unità di pinzatura del finisher, o si deve rimuovere della carta inceppata. In caso
contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.

5 e 6.
Quando si deve sostituire la cartuccia o rimuovere della carta inceppata nell'unità di pinzatura
a sella, fare attenzione alle parti sporgenti dello sportello anteriore.

7 e 8.
L’interno dell’unità può essere molto caldo. Non toccare le parti su cui è applicata un’etichetta.
In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.
10
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Lato sinistro
Finisher libretti SR5120

Lato destro

3
1

Italiano
EAQ005

3.
Tenere le mani a distanza di sicurezza dal vassoio finisher libretti quando si estrae o si
inserisce l'unità di pinzatura del finisher, o si deve rimuovere della carta inceppata. In caso
EAQ003
contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate. Prestare attenzione e non toccare il vassoio
1.
del finisher libretti durante il funzionamento. In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.
Quando si apre e si chiude lo sportello anteriore, tenere le mani lontane dai cardini. I cardini
costituiscono un pericolo. Se non si osserva questa precauzione, le dita potrebbero restare
4.
incastrate.
Tenere le mani a distanza di sicurezza dal vassoio finisher libretti quando si estrae o si
inserisce l'unità di pinzatura del finisher, o si deve rimuovere della carta inceppata. In caso
2.
contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.
L'interno potrebbe essere molto caldo. Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con
un’etichetta. È possibile che le dita rimangano intrappolate, provocando ferite.

11
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Unità di piegatura multipla Introduttore copertine

3
EAR001

1.
Italiano

La parte su cui è apposta l'etichetta è molto calda e potrebbe causare ustioni. Tenere mani
e braccia lontane da quest'area.

DFV013

1, 2 e 3.
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. L'interno dell'unità di piegatura multipla
può essere molto caldo. Pertanto, è necessario fare molta attenzione durante la rimozione
di carta inceppata.

12
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Rifilatrice Rilegatore ad anello

1
1 2

DFV014

1.
Quando viene rimossa la carta inceppata, mantenere le mani lontane dalla lama di taglio

Italiano
interna. Se non si segue questa avvertenza, è infatti possibile che la lama di taglio provochi
ferite alle dita.

EAR002

1.
Tenere lontana l’altra mano quando si chiude lo sportello della cartuccia. In caso contrario, le
dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.

2.
Tenere le mani lontano dalle parti contrassegnate con un’etichetta. Le dita potrebbero restare
incastrate e il contatto potrebbe causare lesioni.

3.
Quando vengono rimossi i libretti rilegati, mantenere le mani lontane dall’uscita della carta.
In caso contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.

13
 1. Informazioni sulla sicurezza per questa macchina

Rilegatore professionale Unità intermedia di raffreddamento

2 DFV004

1.
Queste etichette indicano il peso dell'unità e ne descrivono la modalità di sollevamento. Sono
Italiano

tuttavia destinate specificamente ai tecnici dell'assistenza clienti. Non sollevare l'unità che
riporta queste etichette.

DFV016

1.
Quando si rimuovono i libretti rilegati, tenere le mani lontane dal vassoio di sinistra del
rilegatore professionale. In caso contrario, le dita potrebbero rimanere incastrate.

2.
Non inserire le mani troppo all'interno dell'unità. Le parti in movimento all'interno possono
provocare ferite.

14
 2. Altre informazioni per questa macchina

Impilatore ad alta capacità Leggi e normative

1 2
Divieti relativi alla copia e alla stampa
Non copiare o stampare alcun elemento la cui riproduzione sia proibita per legge.
La copia o la stampa dei seguenti elementi è generalmente proibita dalle legislazioni locali:
banconote, marche da bollo, obbligazioni, certificati azionari, cambiali, assegni, passaporti,
patenti di guida.
L’elenco precedente rappresenta solo una guida e non è completo. Ricoh non si assume
responsabilità in merito alla completezza o alla precisione di tale elenco. Per qualsiasi
domanda relativa alla legalità delle operazioni di copia o stampa di particolari documenti,
rivolgersi a un consulente legale.

Sicurezza laser

Per tipo 1, 2, 3, 4 e 5
Questa macchina è conforme ai requisiti della normativa IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-
1:2014) per i prodotti laser di classe 1. La macchina contiene un VCSEL (Vertical Cavity

Italiano
Surface Emitting Laser) con lunghezza d'onda pari a 772–792 nanometri. L'angolo di
divergenza del fascio è 5,5 gradi (minimo) e 7,9 gradi (massimo) nella direzione verticale
e 5,5 gradi (minimo) e 7,9 gradi (massimo) nella direzione orizzontale, mentre i raggi laser
vengono generati nella modalità Onda continua (CW). Il VCSEL ha quaranta fonti luminose e
DFV005
la potenza di uscita massima di ciascuna fonte luminosa è 1,23 milliwatt.
1. Sul lato posteriore della macchina è apposta la seguente etichetta:
Non cercare di entrare nell'impilatore ad alta capacità. In caso contrario, potrebbero
verificarsi infortuni.

2.
Non toccare le parti contraddistinte da un’etichetta. L'interno dell'impilatore ad alta capacità
può essere molto caldo. Pertanto, è necessario fare molta attenzione durante la rimozione
di carta inceppata.
Attenzione
L'uso di comandi o regolazioni o l'esecuzione di procedure diverse da quelle specificate
in questo manuale potrebbe causare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
Simboli per l'interruttore di accensione
Per l'unità di identificazione supporti tipo S3
Di seguito vengono illustrati i simboli per l'interruttore di accensione utilizzati con questa
macchina: L'unità di identificazione supporti (opzionale) è conforme ai requisiti della normativa IEC
: ACCESO 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) per i prodotti laser di classe 1. L'unità di identificazione
: SPENTO supporti contiene un VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) con lunghezza d'onda
: STANDBY pari a 772–792 nanometri. L'angolo di divergenza del fascio è di 5,3 gradi (minimo) e di 7,9
gradi (massimo) nella direzione verticale e di 5,3 gradi (minimo) e 7,9 gradi (massimo) nella
direzione orizzontale e i fasci laser sono generati in modalità Onda continua (CW). VCSEL
15
 2. Altre informazioni per questa macchina

presenta dodici fonti luminose e la potenza totale massima in uscita è di 2,5 milliwatt.
Sul lato inferiore della macchina è apposta la seguente etichetta. Filiali all’estero e informazioni sulla rumorosità
Conformemente ai requisiti per l'apposizione del "marchio GS" TUV, di seguito sono
riportati i dati della sede UE o della società rappresentante.

Filiali all’estero
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands
Attenzione
Rumorosità
L'uso di comandi o regolazioni o l'esecuzione di procedure diverse da quelle specificate
in questo manuale potrebbe causare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.

Note per gli utenti dei paesi UE

Nome modello: Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320
Direttiva EMC
Produttore: Avvertenza sui prodotti di classe A
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo. 143-8555, Giappone Avvertenza:
Questa apparecchiatura è conforme alla Classe A di CISPR 32. In un ambiente residenziale
Italiano

questo apparecchio può provocare interferenze radio.

Importatore:
Non essendo un elettrodomestico, questa macchina non è conforme alla direttiva 2009/125/
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V. CE del Parlamento europeo e del Consiglio, modificata nel 2013.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands

Dichiarazione di conformità
Avviso per gli utenti dei paesi del SEE
Questo prodotto soddisfa i requisiti essenziali e le disposizioni della Direttiva 2014/53/UE.

La dichiarazione di conformità CE è disponibile accedendo all'URL: [Link]

products/ce_doc2/
selezionando il prodotto interessato.

Banda frequenza funzionamento: 2400 - 2483,5 MHz

Potenza di radiofrequenza massima: inferiore a 20.0 dBm

16
 2. Altre informazioni per questa macchina

Informazioni per gli utenti sulle apparecchiature Marchi registrati

The SD è un marchio di fabbrica di SD-3C, LLC.
elettriche ed elettroniche
Gli altri nomi di prodotto citati in questo manuale sono utilizzati a scopo puramente
Utenti dei Paesi in cui il simbolo mostrato in questa sezione è stato identificativo e possono essere marchi di fabbrica dei rispettivi proprietari. Si rinuncia
specificato nella legislazione nazionale per la raccolta e lo smaltimento espressamente a qualsiasi diritto su tali marchi.
di materiali elettronici
I nostri prodotti contengono componenti di alta qualità e sono progettati per facilitarne il
riciclaggio.
I nostri prodotti e i relativi materiali di imballaggio sono contrassegnati dal simbolo di seguito.

Il simbolo indica che il prodotto non deve essere trattato come rifiuto comune. Esso va smaltito a
parte mediante i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta appropriati disponibili. Attenendosi a queste
istruzioni si può essere certi che il prodotto venga trattato correttamente, riducendo l’impatto
che avrebbe sull’ambiente e la salute umana qualora non venisse smaltito correttamente.

Italiano
Riciclando i prodotti si contribuisce alla tutela delle risorse naturali e dell’ambiente.

Per informazioni dettagliate sui servizi di ritiro e riciclaggio previsti per questo prodotto, si
prega di rivolgersi al negozio presso cui è stato acquistato, oppure di contattare il rivenditore
o il servizio di assistenza/rappresentante di zona.

Altri utenti
Per smaltire il prodotto al termine della sua vita utile, si prega di rivolgersi alle autorità locali
o al negozio presso cui è stato acquistato, oppure di contattare il rivenditore o servizio di
assistenza/rappresentante di zona.

Per gli utenti in India

Questo prodotto, inclusi componenti, consumabili, parti e ricambi, è conforme alla normativa
"India E-waste Rule" e vieta l'uso di piombo, mercurio, cromo esavalente, bifenili polibrominati
o eteri di difenile polibrominato in concentrazioni superiori allo 0,1% del peso e allo 0,01% del
peso per il cadmio, fatta eccezione per quanto riportato nella normativa.

17
 Italiano

18
19

Italiano
 Italiano

20
 Español

Información de 1. Información de seguridad de esta

máquina
seguridad
2. Más información sobre esta máquina

Para información no contenida en los

manuales en papel, consulte los manuales
en línea disponibles en nuestra web
([Link] o vía el panel de
mandos.

Lea atentamente este manual antes de utilizar la máquina y

guárdelo a mano para consultarlo en el futuro. Para un uso
seguro y correcto, lea "Información de seguridad" antes de
utilizar la máquina.
Español
Contenido Cómo leer los manuales

Cómo leer los manuales........................................................................................................... 1 Símbolos utilizados en los manuales

1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina En este manual se utilizan los siguientes símbolos:

Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad utilizados con esta máquina......................... 2

Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad....................................................................... 3
Hace referencia a los elementos que hay que tener en cuenta al usar esta máquina y a las
Precauciones de seguridad...................................................................................................... 3 posibles causas de atascos de papel, daños en los originales o pérdida de datos. Asegúrese
Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina................................................................................. 7 de leer estas explicaciones.

2. Más información sobre esta máquina

Leyes y normativas................................................................................................................. 15 Indica explicaciones adicionales sobre las funciones de la máquina e instrucciones sobre
Marcas comerciales................................................................................................................ 17 cómo resolver los errores de usuario.

Este símbolo aparece al final de cada sección. Le indica dónde puede encontrar información
relevante.

[]
Indica los nombres de las teclas que aparecen en el panel de mandos o en la pantalla de la
máquina.

Español
(principalmente, Europa y Asia), (principalmente, Europa), o (principalmente,
Asia)
(principalmente Norteamérica)
Las diferencias entre las funciones de los modelos de la región A y la región B se indican
mediante estos dos símbolos. Lea la información indicada por el símbolo correspondiente a
la región del modelo que está utilizando. Para obtener más información sobre qué símbolo
corresponde al modelo que está utilizando, consulte Administración del dispositivo.

1
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Exención de responsabilidades Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad

En la medida en que lo permita la legislación aplicable, el fabricante no será responsable de
utilizados con esta máquina
ningún daño causado por fallos de esta máquina, pérdida de documentos o datos, o el uso
o no uso de este producto y los manuales de producto que se proporcionan con el mismo.
Asegúrese siempre de realizar copias o tener copias de seguridad de los datos registrados Prohibición
en esta máquina. Es posible que se borren documentos y datos por un error operativo o
alguna avería de la máquina.
En ningún caso el fabricante será responsable de documentos creados por usted mediante Precaución
esta máquina, ni cualquier resultado de los datos ejecutados por usted.

Señal general de acción obligatoria

Notas
El contenido de este manual está sujeto a cambios sin previo aviso. No tocar
Algunas de las ilustraciones de este manual pueden presentar ligeras diferencias respecto
a la máquina.
Para una buena calidad de impresión, el fabricante recomienda el uso de tóner original del
No tirar al fuego
fabricante.
El fabricante no se hace responsable de los daños o gastos derivados del uso de piezas que
no sean las originales del fabricante en sus productos de oficina.
No usar un aspirador

Tipos de máquina Mantener fuera del alcance de los niños

Español

Compruebe de qué tipo es su máquina antes de leer los manuales.

• Tipo 1: Pro 8300S Precaución, corre el riesgo de pillarse las
• Tipo 2: Pro 8310S manos o los brazos
• Tipo 3: Pro 8320S
• Tipo 4: Pro 8310 Precaución, superficie caliente
• Tipo 5: Pro 8320

Determinados tipos de máquina pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países. Si desea

información más detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
Algunas opciones pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países. Si desea información más
detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
En función del país en que se encuentre, determinadas unidades pueden ser opcionales. Si
desea información más detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.

2
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad Precauciones de seguridad

Requisitos para la ubicación e instalación de las máquinas

ADVERTENCIA
Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar la muerte o lesiones graves si no
se siguen las instrucciones.
ADVERTENCIA
• Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones cerca o en el interior de esta
máquina, ya que, de lo contrario, se podría producir un incendio o una
PRECAUCIÓN descarga eléctrica:
• Usar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc.
Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar lesiones leves o moderadas o • Colocar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc.
daños a la propiedad si no se siguen las instrucciones. • Colocar contenedores con líquidos o pequeños objetos metálicos

PRECAUCIÓN
• No coloque la máquina en un entorno húmedo o con polvo. De lo contrario,
puede producirse un incendio o una descarga eléctrica.

• No coloque la máquina en una superficie inestable o inclinada. De lo

contrario, la máquina podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones.

• No coloque objetos de peso sobre la máquina. De lo contrario, la máquina

podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones.

Español
• No obstruya las rejillas de ventilación de la máquina. De lo contrario, podría
provocar un incendio al sobrecalentar los componentes internos.

• Si se utiliza esta máquina en una habitación mal ventilada o estrecha de

forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, o si se imprime
un gran volumen de materiales, asegúrese de ventilar suficientemente la
habitación.

3
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Requisitos para el uso de enchufes y cables de alimentación PRECAUCIÓN

• Asegúrese de insertar completamente el enchufe del cable de alimentación
en la toma de la pared. Además, no los inserte en tomas de pared flojas e
inestables, ya que es probable que se produzca un fallo de contacto. Hacerlo
ADVERTENCIA podría generar calor.

• Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones, ya que, de lo contrario, podría • Al desconectar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared, asegúrese de
provocar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica: tirar del enchufe y no del cable. No tire del cable de alimentación con fuerza.
• Usar una tensión de alimentación o frecuencias que no sean las Hacer esto podría dañar el cable de alimentación, pudiendo llegar a producir
indicadas en las especificaciones un incendio o descarga eléctrica.
• Usar adaptadores con varias tomas
• Usar cables prolongadores • Asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe de la toma de la pared y de limpiar las
• Tocar las clavijas del enchufe del cable eléctrico con cualquier objeto clavijas, así como la zona de alrededor al menos una vez al año. Si deja que
metálico se acumule el polvo en el enchufe, podría producirse un incendio.

• Evite cualquiera de las siguientes acciones en los cables eléctricos, ya que, • Si realiza operaciones de mantenimiento en la máquina, desconecte el cable
de lo contrario, podría provocar un incendio o descarga eléctrica: de alimentación de la red por seguridad.
• Dañarlos
• Si no utiliza la máquina durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, como por
• Agruparlos
ejemplo, en vacaciones, asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe del cable de
• Modificarlos
alimentación de la toma de pared por motivos de seguridad.
• Colocar objetos pesados sobre ellos
• Tirar de ellos con fuerza
• Alimentación eléctrica
• Doblarlos a la fuerza
220-240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
• No toque el enchufe del cable con las manos húmedas. Hacerlo puede Asegúrese de conectar el cable de alimentación a una fuente de
provocar una descarga eléctrica. alimentación del tipo arriba indicado.
Para los usuarios de Noruega, este producto también se ha diseñado para
• Los cables de alimentación suministrados solo pueden utilizarse con esta
un sistema de distribución de la alimentación de TI con voltaje de fase a fase
Español

máquina. No pueden utilizarse con otros dispositivos. Tampoco utilice cables

no suministrados con esta máquina. De lo contrario, puede producirse un de 230 V.
incendio o una descarga eléctrica.

• Para evitar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe Requisitos durante emergencias
y el cable de la toma de pared al menos una vez al año para comprobar
su estado. Si se produce alguna de las siguientes condiciones, no siga
utilizando ni el enchufe ni el cable de alimentación y consulte a su distribuidor
o representante de servicio.
• Hay marcas de quemaduras en el enchufe ADVERTENCIA
• Las clavijas del enchufe están deformadas
• No toque la máquina si ha caído un rayo en una zona próxima. Hacerlo
• Los cables del interior del cable de alimentación están expuestos o rotos
podría provocar una descarga eléctrica.
• El revestimiento del cable de alimentación está agrietado, fisurado o
dañado • Asegúrese de instalar la máquina lo más cerca posible de una toma de
• Al doblar el cable de alimentación, la máquina se apaga y se enciende pared para poder desconectar el enchufe del cable de alimentación de forma
• Parte del cable de alimentación se calienta sencilla en caso de emergencia.

• Si el disyuntor de la máquina se desactiva, póngase en contacto con su

representante del servicio. Si lo activa, se podría producir una descarga
eléctrica, un incendio, humo o que salten los plomos de la sala.

4
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

ADVERTENCIA Requisitos para el uso de la máquina

• Si la máquina se comporta de forma extraña, corte la alimentación eléctrica
de inmediato. Tras desactivar la alimentación eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe
del cable de alimentación de la toma de pared y póngase en contacto con su PRECAUCIÓN
representante de servicio para comunicarle el problema. El uso continuo del
cable de alimentación puede provocar un incendio o descarga eléctrica. • No mire directamente hacia la fuente de luz. De lo contrario, podría sufrir
• La máquina desprende humo daños en los ojos.
• La máquina desprende olores
• Al bajar el ADF, no coloque las manos en las bisagras ni en el cristal de
• Han caído objetos metálicos u otros objetos extraños en el interior de
exposición. Las manos o los dedos quedarían atrapados, lo que podría
la máquina
provocar una lesión.
• Ha entrado agua u otros líquidos en el interior de la máquina
• Mantenga las manos fuera del alcance de la ranura de salida de papel de
la bandeja de folletos del finisher al sacarla o empujarla en la unidad de
Requisitos para cambiar la ubicación de las máquinas grapado del finisher. Los dedos pueden quedar atrapados en el hueco de la
máquina, provocando lesiones.

• Instale o elimine las opciones después de desconectar los enchufes del

cable de administración de la toma de pared y de confirmar que la unidad
PRECAUCIÓN principal no está más caliente que la temperatura ambiente. Si no, usted se
• Cuando traslade la máquina, no la sujete por el panel de mandos. De lo quemará.
contrario, podría dañarse el panel de mandos, causar una avería o provocar
alguna lesión.
Requisitos para la manipulación del interior de la máquina
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina elevándola para su reubicación en otra
planta, póngase en contacto con su representante de servicio. Una caída o
vuelco de la máquina puede producir una lesión o averías.
ADVERTENCIA

Español
• Después de mover la máquina, utilice el dispositivo de fijación para fijar la
máquina. De lo contrario, la máquina se podría mover o volcar, causando
• No retire tapas ni tornillos si no se indica explícitamente en el presente
lesiones.
manual. Hay componentes de alto voltaje en el interior de la máquina que
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina, asegúrese de desenchufar el cable de pueden provocar descargas eléctricas. También hay componentes láser en
alimentación de la toma de pared y confirme que se han retirado los cables el interior de la máquina que pueden provocar ceguera. En caso de que
de línea y el resto de cables de conexión. De lo contrario, el cable de los componentes internos de la máquina necesiten mantenimiento, ajuste
alimentación podría sufrir daños, lo que podría provocar un incendio o una o reparación, póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de
descarga eléctrica. servicio técnico.
• No desmonte ni modifique esta máquina. Hacerlo podría producir una
descarga eléctrica o un incendio. Además, la exposición a los componentes
láser del interior de la máquina puede provocar ceguera.

PRECAUCIÓN
• Hay componentes a temperaturas muy altas en el interior de la máquina. A la
hora de retirar el papel mal colocado, no toque las áreas no especificadas en
este manual. Si toca las áreas no especificadas, puede sufrir quemaduras.

5
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

PRECAUCIÓN ADVERTENCIA
• Aunque la máquina está diseñada para que un dispositivo de seguridad • A continuación, se explican los mensajes de advertencia que se indican en la
proteja a los usuarios de cualquier lesión, procure no tocar los rodillos durante bolsa de plástico utilizada para el embalaje de este producto:
el funcionamiento de la máquina. Los dedos podrían quedar atrapados entre • No deje los materiales de polietileno (bolsas, etc.) suministrados con
los rodillos antes de que estos se detengan por completo. esta máquina al alcance de bebés y niños pequeños. El contacto con
materiales de polietileno a través de la boca o la nariz puede producir
• Póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de servicio para asfixia.
limpiar el interior de la máquina. Si el interior de la máquina no se limpia
periódicamente y el polvo se acumula, se puede producir un incendio y
averías.

• Al sustituir el papel o retirar el papel atascado, tenga cuidado de no hacerse

PRECAUCIÓN
daño ni pillarse los dedos. • No abra a la fuerza los contenedores de tóner cuando haya tóner en su
• La unidad de fusión alcanza temperaturas altas. Al retirar la unidad de interior. No los apriete ni aplaste. Un vertido de tóner puede provocar una
fusión, espere 20 minutos o más tras abrir la tapa y asegúrese de que la ingestión accidental o ensuciar la ropa, las manos o el suelo.
temperatura de la unidad de fusión no es superior a la de la habitación. Si
• No utilice hojas de papel con grapas, láminas de aluminio, papel de carbón
no, usted se quemará.
ni ningún otro tipo de papel conductivo. Hacerlo podría provocar un incendio.
• Limpie las áreas alrededor del rodillo de resistencia después de confirmar • Guarde las tarjetas SD o los dispositivos de memoria flash USB fuera del
que la máquina esté apagada y la unidad principal no esté más caliente que alcance de los niños. Si algún niño ingiere por accidente una tarjeta SD o
la temperatura ambiente. Si no, usted se quemará. dispositivo de memoria flash USB, consulte inmediatamente con un médico.
• Mantenga las manos alejadas del interior de la encuadernadora con • No deje los siguientes elementos en un lugar al que puedan acceder los
canutillos y del espacio situado bajo la bandeja de la misma. De lo contrario, niños:
podría engancharse los dedos. • Tóner (nuevo o usado)
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior
• Componentes en contacto con tóner
Requisitos para la manipulación de consumibles
Español

• Al encuadernar papel de forma manual con el abridor de anillas, tenga

cuidado de no pillarse los dedos.

• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

ADVERTENCIA asegúrese de no inhalar el tóner.
• No almacene tóner (nuevo o usado) ni contenedores con tóner en su interior • Si se da cualquiera de las siguientes situaciones al manejar el tóner, reciba
en un lugar con una llama abierta. El tóner podría entrar en combustión y primero los primeros auxilios y, a continuación, acuda a un médico si fuera
provocar quemaduras o un incendio. necesario.
• Si inhala el tóner, realice gárgaras con una cantidad abundante de agua
• No arroje al fuego los siguientes elementos. El tóner entrará en combustión
y diríjase a un lugar donde pueda respirar aire fresco.
en contacto con una llama abierta, provocando quemaduras.
• Si ingiere el tóner, diluya el contenido gástrico con una gran cantidad
• Tóner (nuevo o usado)
de agua.
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con los ojos, lávelos con abundante agua.
• Componentes en contacto con tóner
• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),
• No aspire el tóner vertido (incluido tóner usado) con una aspiradora. El tóner
tenga cuidado de no mancharse la piel o la ropa.
absorbido puede entrar en combustión o causar una explosión por contacto
eléctrico en el interior del aspirador. No obstante, puede utilizar un aspirador
industrial específico para tóner. Si se vierte tóner, limpie el tóner vertido
utilizando un paño seco, para que el tóner no se disperse.

6
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina

PRECAUCIÓN
• Si se mancha de tóner (nuevo o usado) la piel o la ropa, lleve a cabo las
siguientes acciones: Posiciones de las etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con la piel, lave la zona afectada con agua
abundante y jabón. Esta máquina dispone de etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN en los siguientes
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con la ropa, lave la zona manchada con
lugares. Por su seguridad, siga las instrucciones y manipule la máquina tal como se indica.
agua fría. Calentar el área manchada con agua caliente fijará el tóner al
tejido y puede hacer imposible la eliminación de la mancha.

• Al sustituir un contenedor con tóner (incluido tóner usado) o consumibles Unidad principal
con tóner, evite que se produzcan salpicaduras. Después de retirar los
consumibles usados y cerrar la tapa del contenedor (si hay una tapa 1
disponible), colóquelos en una bolsa. 2

Español
3

6 5
4

EAQ001

1.
No toque las piezas móviles con las manos o cualquier otra parte del cuerpo. No retire
ninguna otra unidad cuando sustituya el revelador.

2.
No empuje hacia abajo la unidad interna que ha sido extraída. Si lo hace, podría hacer que
la unidad interna cayera.

7
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

3. 12.
Para una correcta manipulación de la botella de tóner residual, consulte "Requisitos para la Esta etiqueta indica el peso de la unidad. Esta etiqueta va dirigida solamente a los técnicos
manipulación de consumibles". y usuarios que hayan recibido formación. No levante ninguna unidad que lleve esta etiqueta.

4 y 5. 13.
Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. De lo contrario, los El interior puede estar muy caliente. Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas
dedos podrían quedar atrapados y producirse alguna lesión. con una etiqueta. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.

6. 14.
No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones. No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. La web de la unidad de fusión puede
alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas. Se debe tener precaución a la hora de extraer un
papel atascado.
7 8 9 8 10

LCT de grandes formatos de tres bandejas

7
11
Español

9 7 13

14
12

EAQ011

7, 8 y 9.
No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.

10.
DWR002

No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. El interior y la superficie de la unidad de 1.
fusión podrían estar muy calientes. Se debe tener precaución a la hora de extraer un papel Zonas con temperaturas elevadas. No toque las piezas con una etiqueta sobre las mismas.
atascado. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.

11. 2.
No toque las partes indicadas por la etiqueta. Estas partes podrían estar muy calientes. No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. El interior de la máquina podría alcanzar
Espere y no las toque hasta que se enfríen. En caso contrario, podría quemarse. Estas temperaturas muy elevadas.
partes podrían tardar hasta 20 minutos en enfriarse después de imprimir una gran cantidad
de páginas de forma continua.
8
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

2. (Esta etiqueta está presente en las dos bandejas).

Bandeja de gran capacidad
Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. De lo contrario, los
dedos podrían quedar atrapados y producirse alguna lesión.

Bandeja bypass múltiple

1
1

EAQ008

1.
Zonas con temperaturas elevadas. No toque las piezas con una etiqueta sobre las mismas.
De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.
DFV009

LCT de grandes formatos de dos bandejas 1.

Mantenga las manos alejadas de la bandeja bypass múltiple al retirar el papel atascado. De
lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.
1

Español
2

EAQ009

1 y 3.
Zonas con temperaturas elevadas. No toque las piezas con una etiqueta sobre las mismas.
De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.
9
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Finisher SR5090 o plegador de folletos SR5100 Finisher SR5110

8
1

2
7

EAQ004

5 1.
3 Al abrir y cerrar la tapa delantera, mantenga las manos alejadas de las bisagras. Las bisagras
son peligrosas. Corre el riesgo de atraparse los dedos si no tiene la precaución de mantener
4 las manos alejadas.
Español

2.
El interior puede estar muy caliente. Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas
con una etiqueta. Podría atraparse los dedos y sufrir alguna lesión.
EAQ002

1 y 2.
Durante el funcionamiento de la impresora, los rodillos que transportan el papel giran. Tenga
cuidado de no tocar los rodillos durante la acción. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.

3 y 4.
No toque la bandeja del plegador de folletos mientras extrae o introduce la unidad de grapado
del plegador o retira papel atascado. De lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.

5 y 6.
Tenga cuidado con las piezas que sobresalen de la tapa frontal al reemplazar el cartucho
en la unidad de cosido en caballete o al retirar un papel atascado de la unidad de cosido en
caballete.

7 y 8.
El interior de la máquina podría alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas. No toque las piezas
con una etiqueta sobre las mismas. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones.
10
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Lado izquierdo
Plegador de folletos SR5120

Lado derecho

3
1

EAQ005

3.
No toque la bandeja del plegador de folletos mientras extrae o introduce la unidad de grapado
del plegador o retira papel atascado. De lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.

Español
EAQ003
Tenga cuidado de no tocar la bandeja del finisher de folletos durante la operación. De lo
1.
contrario pueden producirse lesiones.
Al abrir y cerrar la tapa delantera, mantenga las manos alejadas de las bisagras. Las bisagras
son peligrosas. Corre el riesgo de atraparse los dedos si no tiene la precaución de mantener
4.
las manos alejadas.
No toque la bandeja del plegador de folletos mientras extrae o introduce la unidad de grapado
del plegador o retira papel atascado. De lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.
2.
El interior puede estar muy caliente. Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas
con una etiqueta. Podría atraparse los dedos y sufrir alguna lesión.

11
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Unidad de plegado múltiple Intercalador

3
EAR001

1.
La pieza que tiene la etiqueta pegada está muy caliente y puede provocarle quemaduras.
Mantenga sus manos y brazos alejados de ella.
Español

DFV013

1, 2 y 3.
No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. El interior de la unidad de plegado múltiple
podría alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas. Se debe tener precaución a la hora de extraer
un papel atascado.

12
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Cizalla Encuadernadora de canutillos

1
1 2

DFV014

1.
Mantenga las manos alejadas de la cuchilla interna cuando extraiga papel atascado. De lo
contrario, podría sufrir cortes en los dedos.

Español
EAR002

1.
Mantenga la otra mano alejada cuando cierre la tapa del cartucho. De lo contrario, los dedos
podrían quedar atrapados.

2.
Mantenga las manos alejadas de las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. De lo contrario, los
dedos podrían quedar atrapados y producirse alguna lesión.

3.
Cuando extraiga folletos encuadernados, mantenga las manos alejadas de la salida de
papel. De lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.

13
 1. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Encuadernadora perfecta Unidad Buffer Pass

2 DFV004

1.
En estas etiquetas se indica el peso de la unidad y se explica cómo levantarla. Las etiquetas
están pensadas para los técnicos del cliente. No eleve la unidad que presenta estas etiquetas.
Español

DFV016

1.
Cuando extraiga folletos encuadernados, mantenga las manos alejadas de la bandeja
izquierda de la encuadernadora perfecta. De lo contrario, los dedos podrían quedar
atrapados.

2.
No introduzca la mano dentro de la unidad. Las partes móviles del interior podrían causar
lesiones.

14
 2. Más información sobre esta máquina

Apiladora de gran capacidad Leyes y normativas

1 2
Duplicación e impresión prohibidas
No realice copias ni imprima ningún artículo cuya reproducción esté prohibida por la ley.
La copia o la impresión de los siguientes artículos, normalmente está prohibida por la ley:
billetes bancarios, timbres fiscales, bonos, certificados de acciones, efectos bancarios,
cheques, pasaportes y permisos de conducir.
La lista anterior es tan solo una guía orientativa y no contiene todas las prohibiciones. No
asumimos responsabilidad alguna relacionada con su precisión e integridad. Si tiene alguna
pregunta relacionada con la legalidad de copiar o imprimir ciertos artículos, póngase en
contacto con su asesor legal.

Seguridad para láser

Para los tipos 1, 2, 3, 4 y 5

Esta máquina cumple con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) para
productos láser de clase 1. La máquina contiene un VCSEL (láser de emisión superficial
con cavidad vertical), de 772–792 nanómetros de longitud de onda. El ángulo de divergencia
del rayo es de 5,5 grados (mínimo) y 7,9 grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y de 5,5
grados (mínimo) y 7,9 grados (máximo) en la dirección horizontal; los rayos láser se generan
DFV005 en modo de onda continua (CW). El VCSEL tiene 40 fuentes de luz y la potencia máxima de

Español
1. salida de cada una es de 1,23 milivatios.
No intente introducir la mano en la apiladora de alta capacidad. De lo contrario pueden En la parte posterior de la máquina se encuentra pegada la siguiente etiqueta:
producirse lesiones.

2.
No toque las piezas indicadas con una etiqueta. El interior de la apiladora de alta capacidad
puede alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas. Se debe tener precaución a la hora de extraer
un papel atascado.
Precaución
El uso de controles o ajustes, o la ejecución de procedimientos distintos de los especificados
Símbolos del interruptor de alimentación en este manual pueden provocar una exposición a radiación peligrosa.

Los símbolos de interruptor de encendido que se usan en esta máquina son los siguientes: Para la unidad de identificación de soportes tipo S3
: ENCENDIDA
La unidad de identificación de soportes (opcional) cumple con los requisitos de IEC 60825-
: APAGADO
1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) para productos láser de clase 1. Media Identification Unit contiene
: EN ESPERA.
un VCSEL (láser de emisión superficial con cavidad vertical), de 772–792 nanómetros de
longitud de onda. El ángulo de divergencia del haz luminoso es de 5,3 grados (mínimo) y 7,9
grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y 5,3 grados (mínimo) y 7,9 grados (máximo) en la
15
 2. Más información sobre esta máquina

dirección horizontal; y los rayos láser se generan en modo Onda continua (Continuous Wave
o CW). El VCSEL tiene 12 fuentes lumínicas y la potencia máxima de salida total es de 2,5 Filiales internacionales e Información sobre emisiones de ruido
milivatios.
En la parte inferior de la máquina se encuentra pegada la siguiente etiqueta. Según lo estipulado en los requisitos del "símbolo GS", se proporcionan a continuación los
detalles de la oficina de la UE o de la empresa representante.

Filiales en el exterior
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Países Bajos
Emisión de ruido

Precaución
El uso de controles o ajustes, o la ejecución de procedimientos distintos de los especificados
en este manual pueden provocar una exposición a radiación peligrosa.

Directiva EMC
Nota para los usuarios de los países de la UE
Nombre de modelo: Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320 Advertencia sobre los productos de Clase A
Fabricante: Advertencia:
Ricoh Co., Ltd. Este equipo cumple con la Clase A de la norma CISPR 32. Es posible que este equipo, en un
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokio. 143-8555, Japón entorno residencial, provoque interferencias de radio.
Al no tratarse de un electrodoméstico, esta máquina no se ajusta a la directiva 2009/125/
CE revisada en 2013 que trata sobre los requisitos de diseño ecológico aplicables a los
Importador:
productos.
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Español

Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, Países Bajos

Declaración de conformidad
Aviso a los usuarios de los países del AEE
Este producto cumple los requisitos esenciales y provisiones de la Directiva 2014/53/EU.

Para consultar la Declaración de Conformidad de la CE visite la URL [Link]

products/ce_doc2/
y seleccionando el producto aplicable.

Banda de frecuencia operativa: 2400 - 2483,5 MHz

potencia máxima de radiofrecuencia: menos de 20,0 dBm

16
 2. Más información sobre esta máquina

Información para el usuario acerca de equipos Marcas comerciales

SD es una marca comercial de SD-3C, LLC.
eléctricos y electrónicos
Otros nombres de productos mencionados en el presente documento lo son únicamente
Usuarios de otros países donde el símbolo que se muestra en esta para su identificación y pueden ser marcas comerciales de sus respectivas empresas.
sección se ha especificado en la ley nacional sobre recogida y Renunciamos a cualquier derecho sobre dichas marcas.
tratamiento de desechos electrónicos
Nuestros productos contienen componentes de alta calidad y están diseñados para facilitar
el reciclaje.
Nuestros productos y su embalaje están marcados con el siguiente símbolo.

El símbolo indica que el producto no debe tratarse como residuo municipal. Debe eliminarse
de forma independiente mediante los sistemas de devolución y recolección disponibles.
Al seguir estas instrucciones, se garantiza que el producto sea tratado correctamente y
contribuye a reducir los posibles efectos negativos que podrían afectar al medio ambiente
y la salud si la máquina no se manipula correctamente. El reciclaje de productos ayuda a
conservar los recursos naturales y a proteger el medio ambiente.

Si desea obtener más información detallada sobre los sistemas de recogida y reciclaje para

Español
este producto, póngase en contacto con el establecimiento en el que lo adquirió, con su
distribuidor habitual o con el servicio técnico/departamento de ventas.

Resto de usuarios
Para desechar correctamente este producto, póngase en contacto con las autoridades
locales, el establecimiento en el que lo adquirió, su distribuidor habitual o con el servicio
técnico/departamento de ventas.

Para usuarios en la India

Este producto, incluidos componentes, consumibles, piezas y repuestos, cumple con la
normativa "India E-waste Rule" y prohíbe el uso de plomo, mercurio, cromo hexavalente,
bifenilo polibromado o éteres de difenilo polibromado en concentraciones superiores al 0,1
% en peso y el 0,01 % en peso para cadmio, a excepción de lo establecido en las cláusulas
de exención de la norma.

17
 Español

18
19

Español
 Español

20
 Català

Informació sobre 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta

màquina
seguretat
2. Informació addicional per aquesta
màquina

Per a informació no inclosa en els manuals en

paper, vegeu els manuals en línia disponibles
al nostre web ([Link] o via
el panell de control.

Llegiu aquest manual amb atenció abans d'utilitzar aquesta

màquina i tingueu-lo a l'abast de la mà per tal de poder
consultar-lo en el futur. Per a la vostra seguretat i un ús
correcte, llegiu la Informació sobre seguretat d'aquest manual
abans de fer servir la màquina.
Català
Taula de matèries Com llegir aquests manuals

Com llegir aquests manuals..................................................................................................... 1 Símbols utilitzats als manuals

1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina Aquest manual utilitza els símbols següents:

Significats dels símbols de seguretat que s'utilitzen amb aquesta màquina........................... 2

Significats de les etiquetes de seguretat.................................................................................. 3
Indica punts en què s'ha de parar atenció durant el funcionament de la màquina i explica
Precaucions de seguretat que cal prendre.............................................................................. 3 possibles causes per les quals s'encalla el paper, es produeixen danys als originals o es
Etiquetes de seguretat d'aquesta màquina.............................................................................. 7 perden dades. Llegiu aquestes explicacions.

2. Informació addicional per aquesta màquina

Legislació i normatives........................................................................................................... 15 Indica informació addicional sobre les funcions de la màquina i instruccions sobre com
Marques comercials................................................................................................................ 17 solucionar els errors d'usuari.

Aquest símbol apareix al final dels apartats. Indica on podeu obtenir més informació rellevant.

[]
Mostra els noms de les tecles que apareixen al panell de visualització o de control de la
màquina.

(principalment, Europa i Àsia), (principalment, Europa) o (principalment, Àsia)

(principalment, Amèrica del Nord)
Les diferències entre les funcions dels models de la Regió A i la Regió B s'indiquen mitjançant
dos símbols. Llegiu la informació indicada pel símbol que correspon a la regió del model que
utilitzeu. Per obtenir més informació sobre quin símbol correspon al model que utilitzeu,

Català
vegeu "Informació específica de model", Administració del dispositiu.

1
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Avís d'exempció de responsabilitat Significats dels símbols de seguretat que

Sempre que ho permetin les lleis aplicables, en cap cas el fabricant serà responsable dels
s'utilitzen amb aquesta màquina
danys que es puguin derivar de les avaries o fallides d'aquesta màquina, de les pèrdues
de les dades registrades, o de l'ús o no ús d'aquest producte i dels manuals d'usuari que
l'acompanyen. Prohibició
Assegureu-vos sempre de copiar o crear còpies de seguretat de les dades registrades en
aquesta màquina. Els documents o les dades poden suprimir-se degut a errors operatius o
a avaries de la màquina. Precaució
En cap cas el fabricant serà responsable dels documents creats amb aquesta màquina o
dels resultats obtinguts a partir de les dades executades per l'usuari.
Indicador general d'acció obligatòria

Notes
No ho toqueu
El contingut d'aquest manual és subjecte a modificacions sense avís previ.
Algunes de les il·lustracions d'aquest manual poden ser lleugerament diferents de la màquina.
Per a una bona qualitat d'impressió, el fabricant recomana l'ús del seu tòner original.
No ho llanceu al foc
El fabricant no es responsabilitzarà dels danys o de les despeses que puguin derivar-se de
l'ús de peces que no siguin les seves originals amb els vostres productes d'oficina.

No utilitzeu una aspiradora

Tipus de màquina
Comproveu quin tipus de màquina teniu abans de llegir els manuals. Mantingueu-ho fora de l'abast dels nens

• Tipus 1: Pro 8300S

• Tipus 2: Pro 8310S Precaució, us podríeu enganxar les mans o
• Tipus 3: Pro 8320S els braços
Català

• Tipus 4: Pro 8310

• Tipus 5: Pro 8320 Precaució, superfície calenta

És possible que alguns tipus de màquines no estiguin disponibles en alguns països. Per
obtenir-ne més informació, poseu-vos en contacte amb el distribuïdor local.
És possible que algunes opcions no estiguin disponibles en determinats països. Per obtenir-
ne més informació, poseu-vos en contacte amb el distribuïdor local.
En funció del vostre país de residència, pot ser que algunes unitats siguin opcionals. Per
obtenir-ne més informació, poseu-vos en contacte amb el distribuïdor local.

2
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Significats de les etiquetes de seguretat Precaucions de seguretat que cal prendre

Requisits per ubicar i instal·lar la màquina

AVÍS
Indica una situació potencialment perillosa que, si no se segueixen les instruccions, podria
provocar la mort o una lesió greu.
AVÍS
• Eviteu emprendre les següents accions prop o dins la màquina, ja que es
podria provocar un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica:
PRECAUCIÓ • Fer servir productes inflamables com ara esprais, dissolvents, etc.
• Deixar a prop productes inflamables com ara esprais, dissolvents, etc.
Indica una situació potencialment perillosa que, si no se segueixen les instruccions, podria • Deixar recipients amb líquids o petits objectes metàl·lics
provocar lesions lleus o considerables o bé danys materials.

PRECAUCIÓ
• No dipositeu la màquina en un entorn humit o amb pols. Si ho feu, es podria
provocar un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica.

• No col·loqueu la màquina en una superfície inestable o inclinada. Si ho feu,

la màquina es podria tombar i causar-vos lesions.

• No col·loqueu objectes pesants sobre la màquina. Si ho feu, la màquina es

podria tombar i causar-vos lesions.

• No obstruïu les sortides d'aire de la màquina. Si ho feu, es podria provocar

un incendi, ja que els components interns se sobreescalfarien.

• Si feu servir aquesta màquina de manera continuada durant un període de

temps perllongat o per imprimir un volum alt de materials dins una habitació
mal ventilada o petita, assegureu-vos que l'habitació disposi de bona

Català
ventilació.

3
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Requisits per utilitzar els endolls i cables PRECAUCIÓ

• Assegureu-vos que heu introduït totalment l'endoll del cable d'alimentació a
la presa de terra. De la mateixa manera, no l'endolleu a preses inestables, ja
AVÍS que la connexió podria fallar. Si ho feu, es podria produir un sobreescalfament.

• Eviteu emprendre les següents accions ja que, si ho feu, es podria provocar • Quan desconnecteu l'endoll de la presa de la paret, assegureu-vos que
un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica: estireu sempre l'endoll i no pas el cable. No estireu el cable d'alimentació
• Utilitzar una tensió d'alimentació o unes freqüències diferents a les amb massa força. Si ho feu, podríeu danyar el cable d'alimentació i es podria
indicades en les especificacions provocar un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica.
• Utilitzar adaptadors amb diversos sòcols
• Desconnecteu l'endoll de la presa de la paret i netegeu les clavilles i la zona
• Utilitzar allargadors
del seu voltant com a mínim una vegada l'any. L'acumulació de pols a l'endoll
• Tocar les clavilles de l'endoll del cable d'alimentació amb alguna cosa
comporta un perill d'incendi.
metàl·lica
• Quan feu el manteniment de la màquina, desconnecteu el cable d'alimentació
• Eviteu qualsevol de les accions següents amb als cables d'alimentació, ja
de la presa de terra per raons de seguretat.
que es podria provocar un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica:
• Danyar-los • Si no utilitzeu la màquina durant un període llarg de temps com ara festius
• Agrupar-los consecutius, assegureu-vos de desconnectar l'endoll del cable d'alimentació
• Alterar-los de la presa de terra per raons de seguretat.
• Posar-hi objectes pesats a sobre
• Estirar-los amb massa força • Font d'alimentació
• Doblegar-los amb massa força
220-240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
• No manipuleu l'endoll del cable d'alimentació amb les mans humides. Si ho Assegureu-vos de connectar el cable d'alimentació a una font d'alimentació
feu, podríeu rebre una descàrrega elèctrica. com l'anterior.
Per als usuaris a Noruega, aquest producte també està dissenyat per a un
• El cable o cables d'alimentació subministrats només es poden fer servir
sistema de distribució d'energia IT amb un voltatge en fase de 230V.
amb aquesta màquina. No poden fer-se servir amb altres dispositius que no
siguin aquesta màquina. Tampoc utilitzeu cables d'alimentació que no siguin
els cables d'alimentació subministrats amb aquesta màquina. Si ho feu, es
podria provocar un incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica.
Requisits en cas de donar-se una situació d'emergència
• Per evitar incendis o una descàrrega elèctrica, desconnecteu l'endoll i el
Català

cable d'alimentació de la presa de terra com a mínim una vegada a l'any

i comproveu-los. Si es produeix alguna de les condicions anteriors, no AVÍS
feu servir el cable d'alimentació i consulteu amb el vostre distribuïdor o
representant del servei tècnic. • No toqueu aquesta màquina si ha caigut un llamp a les proximitats. Fer-ho
• Que no hi hagi marques de cremades a l'endoll. podria provocar una descàrrega elèctrica.
• Que les clavilles de l'endoll no s'hagin deformat.
• Que els fils interns del cable estiguin exposats o estiguin trencats, etc. • Assegureu-vos d'instal·lar la màquina tan prop com sigui possible d'una
• El recobriment del cable d'alimentació està esquerdat, abonyegat o presa de terra per poder desconnectar l'endoll del cable d'alimentació
danyat fàcilment en cas de donar-se una situació d'emergència.
• Que en doblegar el cable d'alimentació, el dispositiu no s'apagui i es
torni a encendre
• Que el cable de corrent no s'escalfi

• Quan el disjuntor de la màquina estigui en la posició "Off", poseu-vos en

contacte amb el representant de servei tècnic. Si col·loqueu la posició en "On",
poden produir-se descàrregues elèctriques, incendis, fums o saltar els ploms.

4
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

AVÍS Requisits per fer servir aquesta màquina

• Si la màquina presenta alguna mena de funcionament inusual segons s'indica
a continuació, apagueu-la immediatament. Després d'apagar-la, assegureu-
vos de desconnectar l'endoll del cable d'alimentación de la presa i, tot PRECAUCIÓ
seguit, poseu-vos en contacte amb el servei tècnic i informeu del problema.
Si continueu fent servir aquest cable, es podria provocar un incendi o una • No mireu directament a la font de llum. Si ho feu, us podeu danyar els ulls.
descàrrega elèctrica.
• Quan abaixeu l'ADF, no poseu les mans en les frontisses o sobre el vidre
• La màquina treu fum
d'exposició. Podríeu enganxar-vos les mans o els dits i fer-vos mal.
• La màquina emet olor
• Ha caigut algun objecte de metall o altres objectes estranys dins la • Mantingueu les mans allunyades de la ranura de sortida del paper de la
màquina safata de fullets del finisher en retirar-la de la unitat grapadora del finisher o
• S'ha vessat aigua o altres líquids dins la màquina introduir-la-hi. Us podríeu enganxar els dits i fer-vos mal.

• Instal·leu o elimineu opcions en desconnectar l'endoll del cable d'alimentació

Requisits per reubicar la màquina en un altre lloc de la presa de terra i assegureu-vos que la unitat principal no sobrepassa la
temperatura ambient. Si no, us cremareu.

PRECAUCIÓ Requisits per manipular l'interior de la màquina

• Quan mogueu la màquina, no l'agafeu pel panell de control. Si ho feu,
podríeu fer malbé el panell de control, provocar una avaria o lesionar-vos.

• Si voleu transportar la màquina o alçar-la per traslladar-la a una altra planta,

AVÍS
poseu-vos en contacte amb el vostre representant de servei tècnic. En • No traieu cap tapa o cargol a banda dels que es diu de forma explícita en
cas que us caigués o es tombés, podria lesionar-vos o provocar un mal aquest manual. Dins la màquina hi ha components d'alta tensió que poden
funcionament. causar una descàrrega elèctrica. Així mateix, dins la màquina també hi ha
components làser que poden causar ceguesa. Poseu-vos en contacte amb
• Després de desplaçar la màquina, feu servir la rodeta per fixar-la al seu lloc.
el representant de vendes o del servei tècnic si cal ajustar, reparar o fer el
Si no ho feu així, la màquina podria moure's o tombar-se i lesionar-vos.
manteniment a algun dels components interns de la màquina.
• En moure la màquina, assegureu-vos que desendolleu el cable d'alimentació • No desmunteu o feu alteracions a la màquina. Si ho feu, podríeu provocar un

Català
de la presa de terra i comproveu també que n'heu extret la resta de cables. incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica. De la mateixa manera, exposar els ulls
Si no ho feu així, el cable d'alimentació podria fer-se malbé i ocasionar un als components làser de l'interior de la màquina també pot causar ceguesa.
incendi o una descàrrega elèctrica.

PRECAUCIÓ
• Hi ha parts dins la màquina que presenten temperatures molt elevades. Si el
paper s'encalla, no toqueu parts que no siguin les especificades en aquest
manual. Si toqueu aquestes parts, podríeu patir cremades.

• Encara que la màquina ha estat dissenyada de tal manera que un dispositiu

de seguretat protegeix els usuaris perquè no es facin mal en manipular-la,
tingueu cura de no tocar els rodets en fer-ho. Els rodets poden pessigar
abans d'aturar-se completament.

5
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

PRECAUCIÓ AVÍS
• Poseu-vos en contacte amb el vostre representant de vendes o de servei • A continuació, es descriuen els missatges d'advertència que hi ha a les
tècnic quan vulgueu netejar l'interior de la màquina. Si l'interior de la màquina bosses de plàstic que s'utilitzen per a l'embalatge d'aquest producte:
no es neteja amb regularitat, a mesura que es vagi acumulant pols, podria • No deixeu els materials de polietilè (bosses, etc.) que es subministren
ocasionar un incendi o un mal funcionament. amb aquesta màquina prop de nadons i nens petits. Si els materials de
polietilè entren en contacte amb la boca o el nas hi ha perill d'asfíxia.
• En substituir o extreure paper encallat, aneu amb compte de no agafar-vos
els dits ni fer-vos mal.

• La unitat de fusió s'ha escalfat massa. En retirar la unitat de fusió, espereu

20 minuts o més després d'obrir la tapa i confirmar que la temperatura de la
PRECAUCIÓ
unitat de fusió no és superior a l'ambient. Si no, us cremareu.
• No obriu amb massa força ni aixafeu o premeu recipients de tòner mentre el
• Netegeu les zones al voltant del rodet de resistència després de confirmar tòner encara és a dins. Si es vessés el tòner podria causar-vos una ingestió
que la màquina està apagada i la unitat principal no sobrepassa la accidental o embrutar-vos la roba, les mans o el terra.
temperatura ambient. Si no, us cremareu. • No utilitzeu fulls de paper grapats, paper d'alumini, paper carbó o qualsevol
• No toqueu l'interior de l'enquadernadora de canonets ni l'espai de sota la tipus de paper que sigui conductiu. Si ho feu, es podria provocar un incendi.
safata d'aquesta enquadernadora. Us hi podeu atrapar els dits. • Mantingueu les targetes SD i dispositius de memòria flash USB fora de
l'abast dels nens. Si un nen s'empassa per accident una targeta SD o
dispositiu de memòria flash USB, consulteu immediatament amb un metge.
Requisits per manipular els consumibles
• No deixeu els següents elements en un lloc on els nens puguin arribar-hi:
• Tòner (nou o usat)
• Recipients de tòner quan encara hi ha tòner en el seu interior
AVÍS • Peces unides al tòner

• Quan enquaderneu paper manualment amb un obridor d'anelles, aneu amb

• No emmagatzemeu contenidors de tòner (nou o usat) en llocs no hi hagi
compte de no enganxar-vos-hi els dits.
flames si encara hi ha tòner en el seu interior. El tòner podria inflamar-se i
provocar-vos cremades o un incendi. • Quan traieu paper encallat, o reompliu o substituïu el tòner (nou o usat),
assegureu-vos de no inhalar tòner.
• No llanceu cap dels següents elements al foc. El tòner s'inflamaria en entrar
en contacte amb les flames i us podria provocar cremades. • Si es produeix alguna de les següents situacions mentre esteu manipulant
Català

• Tòner (nou o usat) el tòner, busqueu primers auxilis d'emergència i, tot seguit, consulteu a un
• Recipients de tòner quan encara hi ha tòner en el seu interior metge si és necessari.
• Peces unides al tòner • En cas d'inhalar tòner, feu gàrgares amb una gran quantitat d'aigua i
desplaceu-vos cap a un entorn amb aire fresc.
• No aspireu tòner vessat (incloent tòner utilitzat) amb una aspiradora. El tòner
• En cas d'ingerir tòner, diluïu el contingut gàstric amb una gran quantitat
aspirat podria provocar un incendi o una explosió pel contacte elèctric que
d'aigua.
es produeix dins l'aspiradora. Tanmateix, podeu utilitzar una aspiradora
• En cas que us entri tòner als ulls, renteu-vos-els amb una gran quantitat
industrial de tòner compatible. Si el tòner es vessés al terra, retireu-lo amb
d'aigua.
cura amb un drap humit per tal que no s'escampi.
• Quan traieu paper encallat, o reompliu o substituïu el tòner (nou o usat),
tingueu cura de no embrutar-vos la pell o la roba.

6
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Etiquetes de seguretat d'aquesta màquina

PRECAUCIÓ
• Si el tòner (nou o usat) entra en contacte amb la pell o la roba i us embruteu,
preneu les mesures següents: Posicions de les etiquetes d'AVÍS i PRECAUCIÓ
• Si el tòner entra en contacte amb la pell, netegeu la zona afectada
minuciosament amb aigua i sabó. Aquesta màquina porta etiquetes d' AVÍS i de PRECAUCIÓ en els punts que s'indiquen
• Si el tòner entra en contacte amb la roba, renteu la zona tacada amb a continuació. Per a la vostra seguretat, seguiu les instruccions i manipuleu la màquina tal
aigua freda. Si escalfeu la zona tacada aplicant-hi aigua calenta, el com s'indica.
tòner penetrarà encara més dins el teixit i treure la taca podria arribar
a ser impossible. Unitat principal

• Quan canvieu el recipient del tòner (inclòs tòner utilitzat) o consumibles

1
amb tòner, aneu amb compte que el tòner no esquitxi. Després d'haver tret
2
els consumibles usats i tancar la tapa del recipient, en cas d'haver-n'hi ha
alguna, poseu-ho tot dins una bossa.

Català
6 5
4

EAQ001

1.
No toqueu les peces mòbils amb les mans o qualsevol altra part del cos. No traieu cap altra
unitat quan substituïu el revelador.

2.
No exerciu cap força sobre la unitat interna que s'ha extret. Si ho feu, la unitat interna podria
caure al terra.
7
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

3. 12.
Per manipular correctament l'ampolla de tòner residual, vegeu la pàgina 6 "Requisits per Aquesta etiqueta indica el pes de la unitat. Aquesta etiqueta només va dirigida als tècnics
manipular els consumibles". i als usuaris que hagin rebut formació. No aixequeu cap unitat que tingui aquesta etiqueta.

4 i 5. 13.
No acosteu les mans a les parts indicades per una etiqueta. Podríeu enganxar-vos-hi els Pot ser que la temperatura de l'interior sigui molt alta. No acosteu les mans a les parts
dits i fer-vos mal. indicades per una etiqueta. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.

6. 14.
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió. No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. La cinta de la unitat de fusió podria estar
molt calenta. Cal prendre precaucions a l'hora de treure el paper encallat.

7 8 9 8 10
LCT grans formats de 3 safates

9
2

7
11

9 7 13

14
12
Català

EAQ011

7, 8 i 9.
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.
DWR002

1.
10.
Parts amb una elevada temperatura. No toqueu les parts que duen una etiqueta enganxada.
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. L'interior i la superfície de la unitat de fusió
Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.
podrien estar molt calents. Cal prendre precaucions a l'hora de treure el paper encallat.

2.
11.
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. L'interior de la màquina pot arribar a
No toqueu les parts marcades amb una etiqueta. Aquestes parts poden escalfar-se molt.
temperatures molt elevades.
Espereu i no les toqueu fins que es refredin. Si ho feu, podríeu cremar-vos. Les parts poden
trigar fins a 20 minuts a refredar-se després d'imprimir un gran nombre de pàgines de forma
continuada.

8
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

2. (Aquesta etiqueta està enganxada a totes dues safates.)

Safata de gran capacitat
No acosteu les mans a les parts indicades per una etiqueta. Podríeu enganxar-vos-hi els
dits i fer-vos mal.

Safata bypass múltiple

1
1

EAQ008

1.
Parts amb una elevada temperatura. No toqueu les parts que duen una etiqueta enganxada.
Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.
DFV009

LCT grans formats de 2 safates 1.

No acosteu les mans a la safata bypass múltiple quan extraieu paper encallat. Si ho feu,
podríeu enganxar-vos els dits.
1

Català
2

EAQ009

1 i 3.
Parts amb una elevada temperatura. No toqueu les parts que duen una etiqueta enganxada.
Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.
9
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Finisher SR5090 o plegador de fullets SR5100 Finisher SR5110

8
1

2
7

EAQ004

5 1.
3 Quan obriu i tanqueu la tapa davantera, mantingueu les mans allunyades de les frontisses.
Les frontisses són un perill. Podríeu enganxar-vos els dits si no preneu aquesta precaució.
4
2.
Pot ser que la temperatura de l'interior sigui molt alta. No acosteu les mans a les parts
indicades per una etiqueta. Us hi podeu atrapar els dits i lesionar-vos.
EAQ002

1 i 2.
Català

Durant el funcionament, els rodets que transporten el paper giren. No toqueu els rodets
durant el funcionament. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.

3 i 4.
Mantingueu les mans allunyades del plegador de fullets quan estireu o introduïu la unitat de
grapes del finisher o quan traieu paper encallat. Si ho feu, podríeu enganxar-vos els dits.

5 i 6.
Vigileu amb les parts que sobresurten de la tapa frontal en substituir el cartutx a la unitat
d'enquadernació amb grapa o retirar el paper encallat de la unitat d'enquadernació amb
grapa.

7 i 8.
L'interior de la màquina pot arribar a temperatures molt elevades. No toqueu les parts que
duen una etiqueta enganxada. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.
10
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Costat esquerre
Plegador de fullets SR5120

Costat dret

3
1

EAQ005

3.
Mantingueu les mans allunyades del plegador de fullets quan estireu o introduïu la unitat de
grapes del finisher o quan traieu paper encallat. Si ho feu, podríeu enganxar-vos els dits. No
EAQ003
toqueu la safata del plegador de fullets durant el funcionament. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una
1.
lesió.
Quan obriu i tanqueu la tapa davantera, mantingueu les mans allunyades de les frontisses.
Les frontisses són un perill. Podríeu enganxar-vos els dits si no preneu aquesta precaució.
4.

Català
Mantingueu les mans allunyades del plegador de fullets quan estireu o introduïu la unitat de
2.
grapes del finisher o quan traieu paper encallat. Si ho feu, podríeu enganxar-vos els dits.
Pot ser que la temperatura de l'interior sigui molt alta. No acosteu les mans a les parts
indicades per una etiqueta. Us hi podeu atrapar els dits i lesionar-vos.

11
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Unitat de plec múltiple Intercalador

3
EAR001

1.
La temperatura de la part amb l'etiqueta enganxada és molt alta i podríeu cremar-vos.
Mantingueu-hi les mans i els braços allunyats.

DFV013

1, 2 i 3.
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. L'interior de la unitat de plec múltiple pot
arribar a temperatures molt elevades. Cal prendre precaucions a l'hora de treure el paper
encallat.
Català

12
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Guillotina Enquadernadora de canonets

1
1 2

DFV014

1.
No toqueu la fulla de tall interna quan retireu papers encallats. Si no ho feu així, podríeu
lesionar-vos els dits amb la fulla de tall.

EAR002

1.
Allunyeu l'altra mà quan tanqueu la tapa del cartutx. Si ho feu, podríeu enganxar-vos els dits.

Català
2.
No acosteu les mans a les parts indicades per una etiqueta. Podríeu enganxar-vos-hi els
dits i fer-vos mal.

3.
Quan retireu fullets enquadernats, no toqueu la sortida del paper. Si ho feu, podríeu
enganxar-vos els dits.

13
 1. Informació de seguretat per aquesta màquina

Enquadernadora perfecta Unitat Buffer pass

2 DFV004

1.
Aquestes etiquetes indiquen el pes de la unitat i descriuen com aixecar-la. Tanmateix,
aquestes etiquetes estan destinades als enginyers dels clients. No aixequeu cap unitat que
porti aquestes etiquetes.

DFV016

1.
Català

Quan traieu els fullets enquadernats, mantingueu les mans allunyades de la safata esquerra
de l'enquadernadora perfecta. Si ho feu, podríeu enganxar-vos els dits.

2.
No inseriu les mans a la unitat. Les parts mòbils de l'interior poden causar lesions.

14
 2. Informació addicional per aquesta màquina

Apilador de gran capacitat Legislació i normatives

1 2
Duplicació i impressió prohibides
No copieu ni imprimiu elements la reproducció dels quals estigui prohibida per llei.
En general, la còpia o la impressió dels elements següents està prohibida per les lleis
nacionals:
bitllets, timbres fiscals, bons, certificats d'accions, xecs bancaris, xecs, passaports i
permisos de conduir.
La llista anterior s'inclou només a mode de referència i no és inclusiva. No assumim cap
responsabilitat per la seva completesa o exactitud. Si teniu alguna pregunta sobre la legalitat
de copiar o imprimir certs documents, consulteu el vostre assessor jurídic.

Seguretat del làser

Per al tipus 1, 2, 3, 4 i 5
Aquest màquina compleix amb els requisits d'IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN 60825-1:2014) per a
productes làser de classe 1. La màquina conté un VCSEL (làser d'emissió superficial amb
cavitat vertical), de 772–792 nanòmetres de longitud d'ona. L'angle de divergència del raig és
de 5,5 graus (mínim) i de 7,9 graus (màxim) en la direcció vertical, i de 5,5 graus (mínim) i de 7,9
graus (màxim) en la direcció horitzontal, i els raigs làser es generen en mode d'ona contínua.
DFV005
El VCSEL té quaranta punts de llum, amb una potència màxima d'1,23 mil·liwatts cadascun.
1.
La següent etiqueta està enganxada a la part posterior de la màquina:
No intenteu introduir-vos a l'apilador de gran capacitat. Si ho feu, podríeu patir una lesió.

2.

Català
No toqueu les parts indicades per una etiqueta. L'interior de l'apilador de gran capacitat pot
arribar a temperatures molt elevades. Cal prendre precaucions a l'hora de treure el paper
encallat.

Precaució
L'ús de controls o d'ajustos o el funcionament de procediments diferents dels especificats
Símbols de l'interruptor d'alimentació en aquest manual pot causar una exposició a radiació perillosa.

Els símbols d'interruptor d'alimentació que s'utilizen en aquesta màquina són els següents: Per al tipus d'unitat d'identificació de mitjans S3
: significa ENCESA.
: significa APAGADA. La unitat d'identificació de mitjans (opcional) compleix els requisits d'IEC 60825-1:2014 (EN
: significa EN ESPERA. 60825-1:2014) per a productes làser de classe 1. Media Identification Unit conté un VCSEL
(làser d'emissió superficial amb cavitat vertical), de 772–792 nanòmetres de longitud d'ona.
L'angle de divergència del raig és de 5,3 graus (mínim) i de 7,9 graus (màxim) en la direcció
vertical, i de 5,3 graus (mínim) i de 7,9 graus (màxim) en la direcció horitzontal, i els raigs

15
 2. Informació addicional per aquesta màquina

làser es generen en mode d'ona contínua. El VCSEL té dotze fonts lumíniques i la potència
màxima total de sortida és de 2,5 mW. Delegacions a l'estranger i informació d'emissió de soroll
La següent etiqueta està enganxada a la part posterior de la màquina.
D'acord amb els requisits del "Símbol GS" de TUV, tot seguit s'especifiquen les dades de
l'oficina de la UE o l'empresa representant.

Delegacions a l'estranger
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands
Emissió de sorolls
Precaució
L'ús de controls o d'ajustos o el funcionament de procediments diferents dels especificats
en aquest manual pot causar una exposició a radiació perillosa.

Nota per als usuaris dels països de la UE Directiva EMC

Nom del model: Pro 8300S, Pro 8310S, Pro 8320S, Pro 8310, Pro 8320
Advertència sobre productes de Classe A
Fabricant:
Ricoh Co., Ltd. Avís:
3-6 Nakamagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tòquio. 143-8555, Japó L'equip compleix amb les especificacions de Classe A de la norma CISPR 32. En un entorn
residencial aquest equip pot causar interferències.
Aquesta màquina no és un aparell domèstic i no s'ajusta a la Directiva ErP 2009/125/EC,
Importador:
revisada l'any 2013.
Ricoh Europe SCM B.V.
Blankenweg 24, 4612 RC Bergen op Zoom, The Netherlands

Declaració de conformitat
Notificació als usuaris dels països de l'EEE
Aquest producte compleix les condicions i disposicions bàsiques de la Directiva 2014/53/EU.
Català

La Declaració de conformitat de la CE està disponible a través de l'URL: [Link]

com/products/ce_doc2/
i en seleccionar el producte al qual s'aplicaria.

Banda de freqüència en funcionament: 2400 - 2483,5 MHz

Potència màxima de radiofreqüència: menys de 20,0 dBm

16
 2. Informació addicional per aquesta màquina

Marques comercials
Informació de l'usuari sobre equips elèctrics i electrònics
SD és una marca comercial d'SD-3C, LLC.

Usuaris dels països on la presència d'aquest símbol en aquesta secció Els noms d'altres productes utilitzats en aquest manual s'inclouen únicament amb un objectiu
s'hagi especificat per una llei nacional de recollida i tractament de il·lustratiu i poden ser marques comercials de les empreses corresponents. Manifestem que
residus electrònics no tenim cap dret sobre aquestes marques.

Els nostres productes contenen components d'alta qualitat i estan pensats per facilitar el
reciclatge.
Els nostres productes i embalatges porten la marca següent.

El símbol indica que el producte no s'ha de processar com a residu municipal, sinó que s'ha
d'eliminar per separat a través del sistema de recollida i reciclatge corresponent. Si seguiu
aquestes instruccions garantireu que el producte es processa correctament i ajudareu a
reduir els possibles efectes adversos sobre el medi ambient i la salut que es podrien produir
amb una manipulació incorrecta. Reciclar els productes ajuda a preservar els recursos
naturals i protegir el medi ambient.

Si voleu informació més detallada sobre els sistemes de recollida i reciclatge d'aquest
producte, poseu-vos en contacte amb l'establiment en què el vau adquirir, el vostre
distribuïdor local o els vostres representants de vendes o servei tècnic.

Resta d'usuaris

Català
Si voleu eliminar aquest producte, poseu-vos en contacte amb les autoritats locals,
l'establiment en què el vau adquirir, el vostre distribuïdor local o els vostres representants de
vendes o servei tècnic.

Per a usuaris a l'Índia

Aquest producte, inclosos components, consumibles, peces i recanvis, compleix la norma
"India E-waste Rule" i prohibeix l'ús de plom, mercuri, crom hexavalent, bifenils polibromats
o difenil èters polibromats en concentracions superiors al 0,1 % en pes i 0,01 % en pes per a
cadmi, excepte allò establert a les exempcions de la norma.

17
 Català

18
19

Català
 Català

20
© 2018
 EN GB DE DE FR FR IT IT
ES ES CA ES

D0BX-7212
Operator's Guide How to Read the Manuals

Manuals Provided with This Machine

Original Instructions

Useful Functions

Getting Started

Copy

Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Adjustment Settings for Operators

Print

Scan

Document Server

Troubleshooting

Maintenance

For information not found in paper manu-

als, see the online manuals available on our
web site ([Link]

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals........................................................................................................................... 9
Disclaimer......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Notes.................................................................................................................................................................11
Machine Types................................................................................................................................................. 12
Names of Major Features............................................................................................................................... 13
Model-Specific Information.............................................................................................................................14
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations................................................................................................ 15
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine...............................................................................................................................19
How to Use the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................................22
Read HTML Manuals...................................................................................................................................22
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel.......................................................................................... 22
3. Useful Functions
Booklet Printing.................................................................................................................................................23
Perfect Binding..................................................................................................................................................24
Finishing to a regular size............................................................................................................................25
Notes on Configuring the Perfect Binding................................................................................................. 26
Ring Binding......................................................................................................................................................28
Notes on Configuring the Ring Binding..................................................................................................... 29
Fold....................................................................................................................................................................31
Using the Multi-Folding Unit........................................................................................................................31
Using the Booklet Finisher........................................................................................................................... 35
Registering Custom Paper................................................................................................................................38
Overview of Paper Settings.........................................................................................................................38
Custom Paper Registration Workflow........................................................................................................ 40
How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen.............................................................................40
How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen.............................................................................. 42
Registering a Custom Paper........................................................................................................................ 44
Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit...............................................................49
Modifying a Custom Paper......................................................................................................................... 55
Custom Paper Settings.................................................................................................................................55
Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper.......................................................................... 59

1
 Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions................................................................................61
Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings..................................................................................... 62
Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card.................................................................................................... 63
Deleting a Custom Paper.............................................................................................................................63
Managing the Master Library.....................................................................................................................64
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel............................................................. 65
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel.........................................................65
Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection........................................................................... 66
Configuring the Connection App................................................................................................................68
How to Use the Application Site..................................................................................................................... 70
Setting Up..................................................................................................................................................... 70
Displaying the Application Site...................................................................................................................71
Installing Applications..................................................................................................................................72
Updating Applications.................................................................................................................................73
Uninstalling Applications.............................................................................................................................74
Managed Items Screen............................................................................................................................... 75
When Messages Appear............................................................................................................................76
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel..................................................................... 78
Allowing Remote Operations......................................................................................................................78
Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel.............................................................................79
4. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................81
Guide to Functions of the Attention Light....................................................................................................85
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................87
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................87
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller............................................. 99
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel.........................................................100
Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel.................................................................................................102
Turning On/Off the Power........................................................................................................................... 103
Turning On/Off the Power....................................................................................................................... 103
Turning On the Main Power..................................................................................................................... 103
Turning Off the Main Power..................................................................................................................... 104
Saving Energy............................................................................................................................................104

2
 Transfer heater switch............................................................................................................................... 106
Adjusting the Display.....................................................................................................................................107
How to Use the [Home] Screen....................................................................................................................110
Main Icons on the [Home] Screen........................................................................................................... 112
Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys....................................................................................113
[Printer Status] Screen............................................................................................................................... 114
[Tray Paper Settings] Screen.................................................................................................................... 115
[Information] Screen..................................................................................................................................117
[Web Browser] Screen............................................................................................................................. 118
Possible Operations on the Application Screen..................................................................................... 120
Changing the Display Language............................................................................................................. 121
System Reset.............................................................................................................................................. 122
How to Use Each Application.......................................................................................................................123
Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Standard Application.............123
How to Use the [Copier] Screen.............................................................................................................. 126
How to Use the [Document Server] Screen.............................................................................................127
How to Use the [Printer] Screen............................................................................................................... 131
How to Use the [Scanner] Screen............................................................................................................132
Switching Screen Patterns.........................................................................................................................144
Logging In the Machine................................................................................................................................ 145
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed........................................................................................145
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel................................................................................145
User Code Authentication Using a Printer Driver....................................................................................146
Logging In Using the Control Panel......................................................................................................... 146
Logging Out Using the Control Panel...................................................................................................... 147
Logging In Using an IC Card....................................................................................................................148
Logging Out Using an IC Card................................................................................................................ 149
Using a Smart Device to Log in to the MFP............................................................................................. 149
Using a Smart Device to Log out from the MFP...................................................................................... 150
Auto Logout Function.................................................................................................................................150
Logging In Using a Driver......................................................................................................................... 151
Logging In Using Web Image Monitor....................................................................................................152
Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................................ 152

3
 User Lockout Function............................................................................................................................... 152
Changing the Login Password..................................................................................................................152
5. Copy
Auto Reduce / Enlarge................................................................................................................................. 155
Duplex Copying.............................................................................................................................................157
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation...................................................................................... 159
Combined Copying....................................................................................................................................... 161
One-sided Combine..................................................................................................................................163
Two-sided Combine.................................................................................................................................. 164
Copying onto Envelopes...............................................................................................................................167
Copying onto Envelopes from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)..............................................................167
Copying onto Envelopes from the Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................................. 168
Sort..................................................................................................................................................................169
Changing the Number of Sets..................................................................................................................169
Storing Data in the Document Server...........................................................................................................170
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Placing Originals........................................................................................................................................... 171
Recommended Original Sizes and Weights...........................................................................................171
Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select.................................................................................................174
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass................................................................................................ 176
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder.....................................................................................178
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................180
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 180
Loading Paper into Tray 1........................................................................................................................ 182
Loading Paper into the A3/11 × 17 Tray Unit.......................................................................................184
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3............................................................................................................. 185
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)................................................................................ 186
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray.......................................................................................... 188
Loading Paper into the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................................. 189
Loading Paper into the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray................................................................191
Loading Paper into the Interposer............................................................................................................ 193
Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder.............................................................195
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 198

4
 Using Small Thick Paper........................................................................................................................... 200
Changing the Paper Size.............................................................................................................................. 204
Precautions for Changing the Paper Size................................................................................................204
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3...............................................................................................204
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray............................................................................ 208
Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................... 213
Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray................................................. 219
Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected....................................................................... 226
Changing to a Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................................227
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 228
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 228
Paper Weight Conversion Table..............................................................................................................262
Unusable Paper......................................................................................................................................... 264
Paper Storage............................................................................................................................................265
Changing Tray Paper Settings...................................................................................................................... 266
Accessing Tray Paper Settings..................................................................................................................266
Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Tray 1 to 6, Tray A, Tray T1 to T4)...........................................267
Tray Paper Settings....................................................................................................................................269
Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker...........................................................................294
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for Operators] Screen..................................................................... 303
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators....................................................................................... 304
Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations....................................................................... 304
Printing with Adjusted Settings..................................................................................................................306
Menu Items and Functions............................................................................................................................ 308
Setting Values.................................................................................................................................................314
Main Unit: Image Position.........................................................................................................................314
Main Unit: Image Quality.........................................................................................................................316
Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output...............................................................................................................317
Main Unit: Maintenance...........................................................................................................................320
Finishing:Finisher 1.................................................................................................................................... 322
Finishing:Finisher 2.................................................................................................................................... 331
Finishing: Fold............................................................................................................................................ 340

5
 Finishing: Perfect Binder............................................................................................................................ 356
Finishing:Stacker........................................................................................................................................358
Finishing: Interposer.................................................................................................................................. 359
8. Print
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer................................................ 361
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM.......................................................................361
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File..........................................................364
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen...............................................................................................367
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties................................................................................................... 367
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box......................................................................................367
Displaying the Printer Driver Help............................................................................................................370
Standard Printing........................................................................................................................................... 372
When using the PCL 6 printer driver........................................................................................................ 372
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets................................................................................................................... 373
When using the PCL 6 printer driver........................................................................................................ 373
Types of two-sided printing...................................................................................................................... 373
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 375
Configuring envelope settings using the control panel.......................................................................... 375
Printing on envelopes using the printer driver......................................................................................... 375
9. Scan
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder................................................................................................. 377
Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/confirming a computer's information...377
Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/confirming a computer's
information................................................................................................................................................. 379
Registering the shared folder of the destination computer in the address book...................................381
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder............................................................................................. 383
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations........................................................................................................385
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder................................................................................................. 386
Entering the path to the destination manually......................................................................................... 386
Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations.............................................................. 388
Sending files to an FTP server................................................................................................................... 388
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail......................................................................................391
Specifying the Destination or Recipient................................................................................................... 393

6
 Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book.................................................................393
Entering an E-mail Address Manually..................................................................................................... 396
Selecting the Destination from Recent Destinations................................................................................ 397
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server............................................................................ 397
Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder............................................................................... 399
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents.............................................................................................. 402
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files.................................................................................................... 402
Previewing the Contents of a Stored Document......................................................................................403
Sending a Stored File................................................................................................................................406
Managing Stored File............................................................................................................................... 407
Specifying Access Privileges for Stored Files.......................................................................................... 413
Storing the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card....................................414
Specifying the File Type................................................................................................................................ 417
Notes About and Limitations of File Types.............................................................................................. 418
Specifying Scan Settings............................................................................................................................... 420
10. Document Server
Storing Data................................................................................................................................................... 421
Printing Stored Documents............................................................................................................................ 424
Interrupting a Print Job.............................................................................................................................. 425
Changing the Number of Print Copies while Printing Is in Progress......................................................426
Sample Print............................................................................................................................................... 427
Printing a Specified Page..........................................................................................................................427
11. Troubleshooting
Getting Started...............................................................................................................................................429
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound........................................................................................ 429
When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel............... 430
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................................................. 434
When Messages Appear..............................................................................................................................443
When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated.......................................................443
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function.......................................444
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function..................................................................... 449
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function..................................................................463
When Other Messages Appear...............................................................................................................479

7
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function................................................... 487
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies.................................................................................................. 487
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted........................................................................................ 491
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function..................................................................................500
Checking the Error Log..............................................................................................................................500
If USB Connection Fails.............................................................................................................................501
When You Cannot Print............................................................................................................................ 501
Other Printing Problems............................................................................................................................ 503
Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner Function.............................................................................. 512
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files.................................................................................................. 512
When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected......................................................................................... 515
Clearing Misfeeds......................................................................................................................................... 517
Removing Jammed Paper......................................................................................................................... 517
Removing Jammed Staples....................................................................................................................... 522
Removing Jammed Ring Combs...............................................................................................................522
Removing Punch Waste............................................................................................................................ 523
Removing Staple Waste........................................................................................................................... 523
Removing Waste Paper............................................................................................................................ 523
12. Maintenance
General Requirements...................................................................................................................................525
Dos and Don'ts.......................................................................................................................................... 525
Saving Printouts......................................................................................................................................... 527
Backing Up Hard Disk Data..................................................................................................................... 527
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables............................................................................................. 528
Where to Put Your Machine..................................................................................................................... 536
Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine...........................................................536
Maintaining Your Machine...........................................................................................................................541
How to Clean the Machine...................................................................................................................... 541
Cleaning the Exposure Glass and Scanning Glass................................................................................541
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder.......................................................................................................542
Cleaning the Power Cord Plug.................................................................................................................543
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers......................................................................................................... 545
Useful Information..................................................................................................................................... 547

8
1. How to Read the Manuals

Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

Indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Device Management.

9
 1. How to Read the Manuals

Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.

10
 Notes

Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

11
 1. How to Read the Manuals

Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.
• Type 1: Pro 8300S
• Type 2: Pro 8310S
• Type 3: Pro 8320S
• Type 4: Pro 8310
• Type 5: Pro 8320
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.

12
 Names of Major Features

Names of Major Features

In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Auto Document Feeder ADF
• ADF Double-feed Detection kit Type-S7 ADF double-feed detection kit
• Attention Light Type C2 Attention Light
• LCIT RT5130 Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
• Wide Large Capacity Tray Wide LCT (in this manual, "wide LCT" refers to the three-tray wide
LCT and the two-tray wide LCT)
• LCIT RT5110 Three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray (Three-tray wide LCT)
• Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5120 Two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray (Two-tray wide LCT)
• Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S9 Banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT
• Multi Bypass Tray BY5020 Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• Multi Bypass Attachment Kit for Vacuum Feed LCIT Type S9 Multi bypass attachment kit
• Multi Bypass Banner Sheet Tray Type S9 Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• Bridge Unit BU5010 Bridge unit of two-tray wide LCT
• A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5020 A3/11 × 17 tray unit
• Decurl Unit DU5070 Decurl unit
• Cover Interposer Tray CI5040 Interposer
• Buffer Pass Unit Type S11 Buffer pass unit
• Perfect Binder GB5010 Perfect binder
• Multi-Folding Unit FD5020 Multi-folding unit
• Ring Binder RB5030 Ring binder
• Trimmer Unit TR5050 Trimmer
• High Capacity Stacker SK5040 High capacity stacker
• SR5000 series Output tray for Banner Sheet Type S6 SR5000 series output tray for banner
sheet
• Output Jogger Unit Type M25 Output jogger
• Shift Sort Tray SH5000 Shift tray
• Bridge Unit BU5020 Finisher bridge unit
• RPIP Interface Box Type S3 Interface box
• File Format Converter Type M19 File format converter

13
 1. How to Read the Manuals

Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.

EAR407

The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 208–240 V

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.

14
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows:
You can use the copy function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
• Copier mode

Function Option

Copying from the multi bypass tray (Tray A) One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and three-tray
wide LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and two-tray
wide LCT

Copying onto tab stock One of the following options is required:

• Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• LCT
• Three-tray wide LCT
• Two-tray wide LCT

• Shift Sort One of the following options is required:

• Stack • Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• High Capacity Stacker

Staple One of the following options is required:

• Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120

Staple (Center) • Booklet Finisher SR5100*1

• Booklet Finisher SR5120

15
 1. How to Read the Manuals

Function Option

Punch One of the following combinations of options is

required:
• Finisher SR5090*1 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1 and punch
unit
• Finisher SR5110 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and punch unit

• Z-fold One of the following combinations of options is

• Letter Fold-out required:

• Letter Fold-in • Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit

• Double Parallel Fold • Booklet Finisher SR5120 and multi-

folding unit
• Gate Fold

Half Fold One of the following combinations of options is

required:
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit

Fore Edge Cut Booklet Finisher SR5120 and trimmer

Perfect Binding Perfect binder

Ring Binding Ring binder

*1 You can use this function on Type 1 machine only.

• Printer mode

Function Option

Printing from the multi bypass tray (Tray A) One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and Three-tray
wide LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and Two-tray
wide LCT

16
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Function Option

• Staple One of the following options is required:

• Shift Collate • Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120

Printing onto tab stock One of the following combinations of options is

required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• LCT
• Three-tray wide LCT
• Two-tray wide LCT

Punch One of the following combinations of options is

required:
• Finisher SR5090*1 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1 and punch
unit
• Finisher SR5110 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and punch unit

• Z-fold One of the following combinations of options is

• Letter Fold-out required:

• Letter Fold-in • Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit

• Double Parallel Fold • Booklet Finisher SR5120 and multi-

folding unit
• Gate Fold

Half Fold One of the following combinations of options is

required:
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit

Fore Edge Cut Booklet Finisher SR5120 and trimmer

Perfect Binding Perfect binder

17
 1. How to Read the Manuals

Function Option

Ring Binding Ring binder

Adobe PostScript 3 PostScript 3 unit

IPDS IPDS unit

XPS XPS unit

*1 You can use this function on Type 1 machine only.

• Scanner mode

Function Option

Searchable PDF OCR unit

• Others

Function Option

Communicate via wireless LAN Wireless LAN board

Registering a custom paper with the Media Media Identification Unit

Identification Unit

18
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Manuals for This Machine

The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:

Format Manuals

Printed manuals • Safety Information

CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide(HTML manuals)

Manuals displayed on the control panel • Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)

Web page • Operator's Guide

• Safety Information
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Paper Fundamentals
• Driver Installation Guide(HTML manuals)

Operator's Guide
Contains excerpts from the following manuals such as the descriptions of the machine's basic
operations and frequently used functions. It also provides explanations of how to resolve error
messages that appear.
Safety Information
Contains the explanation about "Safety Information". Be sure to read this manual before you start
using the machine. The manual also provides information about various regulations and
environmental compatibility.
Preparation
Explains the preparation procedure to use the machine, and describes the control panel. It also
explains paper specifications and how to load paper. It also explains how to use the Master
Library in which different print settings for various papers can be registered and describes the
frequently used functions and useful features.
Basic Operations
Describes the following functions that are equipped on the machine in its standard configuration.
• Copier/Document Server
Explains how to configure the machine to use the copier function. It also explains various
copier features and describes how to operate and configure the original settings. It also
explains how to use the document server.

19
 2. Manuals Provided with This Machine

• Printer
Explains how to print using the printer driver, and describes various print features.
• Scanner
Explains how to scan paper data on the machine and store or transfer the scanned data to a
computer.
Device Management
Explains how to connect the machine to a network and operate the machine under a network
environment. It also explains how to configure the system initial settings and register the address
book.
Maintenance and Management
Explains how to replace consumables. It also describes the installation requirements and cleaning
procedure of the machine and explains how to resolve problems that occur. It also explains how to
configure the items of Adjustment Settings for Operators.
Security Guide
This manual is intended for the administrator of this machine. It explains various security functions
available on the machine that allow you to prevent unauthorized use of the machine and changing
and copying of the data.
For enhanced security, it is recommended to perform the followings:
• Install the Device Certificate
• Enable SSL
• Change the user name and password of the administrator
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide.
Be sure to read this manual when configuring the enhanced security functions and authentication.
Specifications
Explains the specifications of the machine and its options.
Paper Fundamentals
Explains the properties of different types of paper and how to handle them.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.

• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Machine" in the Security Guide.
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an IT security
certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from [Link]
ccmanual/pro_8300_8310_8320/en/download_admin.html and [Link]
services/device/ccmanual/pro_8300_8310_8320/en/download_user.html. This information is

20
 Manuals for This Machine

about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified machine, be sure to read it
before operating the machine so you can make the correct settings before using it.
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
DHCP Option 204

21
 2. Manuals Provided with This Machine

How to Use the Operating Instructions

This section describes the operating instructions of this machine.

Read HTML Manuals

• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• The required display resolution is 1,024 × 768 pixels or greater.
• In the help on the top right of the top page, you can check how to use the HTML manuals. The help
topics explain the icons and buttons that are displayed in the HTML manuals.

Search by entering a keyword

You can search through the HTML manuals.

This section explains how to search for "duplex".

1. Enter "duplex" in the search box on the top left of the top page.
2. Click .
A list of titles or descriptions that include "duplex" appears.
A search result appears in the search result window. In addition you can use the drop-down menu
to select a manual.
3. Click a title to display the item you want to read.

• Use keywords to search for items you want to query. Depending on the keyword you enter, related
keywords might also appear.
• Items including the used keyword is appear in the search result window.
• If you put a space between keywords, pages that contain both keywords are displayed. For
example, if you enter "duplex" and a space and "staple", items including both words appear in the
search result window.

Read the HTML manuals on the control panel

You can also read the HTML manuals on the control panel. For details, see page 112 "Main Icons on
the [Home] Screen".

22
3. Useful Functions
This chapter describes useful functions such as booklet printing, folding, ring binding, perfect binding. It
also explains how to register Custom Paper and use the remote desktop function.

Booklet Printing
You can bind the printed documents in the center.

• The paper types that can be used for booklet printing from the printer driver are as follows:
• Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple,
Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
Magazine

CKN120

Specifying the Booklet Printing Settings

If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, booklet printing can be specified in the "Booklet:" list on the
[Frequently Used Settings] tab or in the [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] menu on the [Detailed Settings]
tab.

• If the information icon ( / ) is displayed next to the "Booklet:" list, you cannot specify booklet
printing. Click the information icon ( / ) to check why booklet printing is unavailable.
• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page breaks may occur.
• By combining the booklet printing and combine printing functions, you can print multiple pages
onto a single sheet and bind them to form a booklet. For details about combine printing, see
"Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page", Basic Operations.
• If you specify a custom size paper for the booklet printing function using the PostScript 3 printer
driver and the length of the short edge of the paper is equal to or shorter than half the length of the
long edge of the paper, the job will be canceled.

23
 3. Useful Functions

Perfect Binding
When this function is selected, the machine applies heated glue to printed sheets to form a book block,
encloses the book block in a cover sheet, and then trims away excess paper.
You can use this function on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.

• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".
• About paper sizes for which the Perfect Binding can be specified, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• The paper types that can be used for Perfect Binding are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange,
Pink, Red, Gray, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
Guide to perfect bound booklets

BZH095

1. Book block
The bulk of the booklet, enclosed by the cover sheet.
2. Head edge
The edge that forms the booklet's top end.
3. Cover
The sheet enclosing the book block.
4. Spine
The booklet's bound edge.
5. Tail edge
The edge that forms the bottom end of the booklet.
6. Fore edge
The edge that forms the booklet's opening side.

24
 Perfect Binding

Specifying the Perfect Binding Settings

If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the Perfect Binding can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab.

• Apply Perfect Binding to a single book block that contains 10 sheets or more.
• If plain paper is used, a book block of up to 200 sheets can be bound with Perfect Binding. The
maximum number of sheets that can be bound as a single book block varies depending on the
thickness of the paper used in the book block.
• Perfect Binding can be applied to bind a book block with a spine thickness of 23 mm or less.
• Collate is automatically enabled if the Perfect Binding is specified.

Finishing to a regular size

Specify the size of the finished bound booklets and cut three edges to a regular size.
Book block paper and cover sheet compatibility
If you specify finishing to a regular size, you can select one of the following sizes: A4 , B5 JIS ,
A5 , 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2
We recommend that you use the cover sheet size with the book block paper sizes as shown in the
following table.

Required finished size Book block Cover

A4 SRA4 13 × 191/5
226 × 310 mm*1 13 × 19
13 × 18
SRA3
12 × 18
123/5 × 191/5
123/5 × 181/2

B5 JIS A4 A3
81/2 × 11 11 × 17
16K 11 × 15
8K

A5 B5 JIS B4 JIS
11 × 15

25
 3. Useful Functions

Required finished size Book block Cover

81/2 × 11 9 × 12*1 13 × 191/5

13 × 19
12 × 18
123/5 × 191/5
123/5 × 181/2

51/2 × 81/2 71/4 × 101/2 10.5 × 14.5*1

*1 Specify the custom size in [Tray Paper Settings].

Notes on Configuring the Perfect Binding

Conditions where Perfect Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur
Perfect Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• Tray A is specified as the source tray.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.
• Cover Sheets is specified.
• Slip Sheets is specified.
• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function is specified.
• Paper is ejected with its printed side facing up.
• Ring Binding is specified.
• Perfect binder is not attached.
• Perfect Binding cannot be used for the selected tray, paper size, or paper type.
• Perfect Binding cannot be used for the selected paper orientation.
• The number of sheets exceeds the maximum Perfect Binding number.
• Sheets of paper to be bound using Perfect Binding are thicker than 200 sheets of plain paper.
Functions that will be canceled when Perfect Binding is applied to bind sheets of paper
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Perfect Binding at the same time:

26
 Perfect Binding

• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching
• Sub Paper Size*1
*1 The setting is applied to inside pages only.

27
 3. Useful Functions

Ring Binding
When this function is selected, the machine punches holes along the long edge of the paper and binds
sheets with ring combs. Ring Binding can be applied to A4 or Letter (81/2 × 11) size paper.
You can use this function on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.

• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".
• The paper types that can be used for Ring Binding are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray,
Transparency, Tab Stock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)

BZH091

Specifying the Ring Binding Settings

If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the Ring Binding can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab.

• When binding output sheets with ring combs, specify the number of sheets to be bound between 2
and 100. If there is only one sheet, it will be punched with ring comb holes but not bound.
• If you are using 50-sheet type ring combs, you can bind up to 50 sheets of plain paper into a
single booklet. If you are using 100-sheet type ring combs, you can bind up to 100 sheets of plain
paper into a single booklet. The number of sheets that can be bound with ring combs varies
depending on paper weights.
• When binding 4 or fewer sheets of paper with a ring binding comb, it is recommended to use a
50-sheet comb, not a 100-sheet one.
• Collate is automatically enabled if the Ring Binding is specified.

28
 Ring Binding

Notes on Configuring the Ring Binding

Conditions where Ring Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur
Ring Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• Tray A is specified as the source tray.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.
• Slip Sheets is specified.
• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function is specified.
• Paper is ejected with its printed side facing up.
• Perfect Binding is specified.
• Ring binder is not attached.
• Ring combs have run out.
• The hole punch receptacle is full.
• Ring Binding cannot be used for the selected tray, paper size, or paper type.
• Ring Binding cannot be used for the selected paper orientation.
• The number of printed sheets exceeds 50 when Ring Binding with 50-sheet type ring combs is
specified.
• The number of printed sheets exceeds 100 when Ring Binding with 100-sheet type ring
combs is specified.
• Sheets of paper to be bound with 50-sheet type ring combs are thicker than 50 sheets of plain
paper.
• Sheets of paper to be bound with 100-sheet type ring combs are thicker than 100 sheets of
plain paper.
• Ring combs are set in reverse orientation.
• Ring combs of a size that is not supported by the ring binder are used.
• The punch unit is not attached.
• Different types of ring combs (50-sheet type and 100-sheet type ring combs) are used
together.
Functions that will be canceled when the Ring Binding is applied to bind sheets of paper
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Ring Binding at the same time:

29
 3. Useful Functions

• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching

30
 Fold

Fold
Printed documents can be folded using the optional Finisher and multi-folding unit or the optional
Booklet Finisher attached to the machine.

• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".

DWP070

Specifying the Fold Settings

If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the fold function can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab. For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.

• Collate is automatically enabled if Half Fold or Multi-sheet Fold is specified.

Using the Multi-Folding Unit

Printed documents can be folded using the optional Finisher and multi-folding unit attached to the
machine.
You can select the fold type from the following six types: Z-fold, Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out,
Double Parallel, and Gate Fold.
If you select the [Multi-sheet Fold] check box in the printer driver, you can apply Half Fold, Letter Fold-
in, or Letter Fold-out to up to three sheets of paper of the same size at one time.

31
 3. Useful Functions

Folding positions

Select the fold position in the printer driver.

• The paper types that can be used for fold function are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, Bond,
Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
The finished form may vary depending on the paper size. The following table shows the examples of A3
size paper folded in each fold type. For details, see the printer driver Help.

Print Data Folding Position

Fold Types
Direction Print Inside Print Outside Not Specified

Z-fold - -

Half Fold -

Letter Fold-
-
in

Letter Fold-
Portrait - -
out

Double
-
Parallel

Gate Fold -

32
 Fold

Print Data Folding Position

Fold Types
Direction Print Inside Print Outside Not Specified

Z-fold - -

Half Fold -

Letter Fold-
-
in

Landscape Letter Fold-

- -
out

Double
-
Parallel

Gate Fold -

• For details about which paper sizes are compatible with which fold or Multi-sheet Fold, see
"Specifications for Multi-Folding Unit", Specifications.
• If you apply the Multi-sheet Fold function with letter fold-in to B5 JIS size paper, the folded sheets
will be different in size to sheets folded without the Multi-sheet Fold function.

1 2

CNH002

1. Multi-sheet Fold not applied

2. Multi-sheet Fold applied
• When printing a large number of copies with the Z-fold function, it is recommended to attach the Z-
fold support tray to the finisher. For details on attaching the Z-fold support tray to the finisher, see
page 92 "When using the Z-fold function" or page 93 "When using the Letter Fold-out
function".

33
 3. Useful Functions

Notes on configuring the fold function

Conditions where fold function will be canceled
Fold function will be canceled when:
• Paper size or type which is not compatible with the fold function is selected.
• The machine is made to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is set.
• A paper type on which Multi-sheet Fold cannot be applied is selected.
• Multi-sheet Fold is specified but the paper sizes are different.
• Multi-sheet Fold is specified but the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number available
for the fold function.
• A combination of paper orientation and fold position that cannot be folded is selected.
• Paper is fed from an optional interposer.
• Multi-folding unit is not installed.
Functions that will cause job reset to occur when combined with the fold function
• Slip Sheets*1
• Separation Sheets*1
• Staple*2
• Punch
• Ring Binding
• Perfect Binding
• Half Fold configured on the Booklet Finisher
*1 Job reset occurs only when combined with Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double

Parallel, or Gate Fold.

*2 Job reset occurs only when combined with Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double

Parallel, or Gate Fold. It can be specified along with Z-fold except when Staple (Center) is selected
(using the Booklet Finisher).
Functions that will be canceled when combined with the fold function
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Booklet Binding at the same time:
• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching
• Ejecting paper with the printed side facing up

• If the information icon ( / ) is displayed next to the "Fold:" list, you cannot specify fold
function. Click the information icon ( / ) to check why fold function is unavailable.

34
 Fold

• If you cannot make fold function settings even with a multi-folding unit installed, options may not be
set correctly in the printer driver. To correct the printer driver's option settings, see "Specifying the
Option Configuration or Paper Settings Manually", Driver Installation Guide.
• When stapling Z-folded paper, fewer sheets than normal can be stapled together. This is because
a single Z-folded sheet is equivalent to 10 non-Z-folded sheets. For the number of sheets that can
be stapled, see "Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or "Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5120", Specifications.
• Depending on the temperate and humidity conditions of the machine's environment and the type of
paper being folded, use of the fold function can cause toner smearing, which can occasionally
result in spoilt prints.
• Wrinkling can occur when applying letter fold-out to B4 JIS , A3 , 81/214 , 11 × 17 , 8K
, or larger sheets. In some cases, you may have to use A4 sheets or smaller when applying
folds in combination with the reduction function.
• Print quality over fold lines might be reduced. This is due to cracking within the fused toner. Loss of
surface along fold lines can also occur with some types of paper. To avoid possible wastage, print
a single test sheet before beginning a print run.
• Printing will stop if the number of printed sheets exceeds tray capacity. If this happens, remove
printed sheets from the folding unit tray to resume printing.

Using the Booklet Finisher

When the optional Booklet Finisher is attached to the machine, you can fold printed documents in half.
Half Fold

CNP014

Half Fold positions

Select the position for folding printed documents in half in the printer driver.
When [Half Fold: Print Inside (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, each piece of printed paper is folded
in half with the printed side facing inside, and it is output to the finisher booklet tray.

35
 3. Useful Functions

When [Half Fold: Print Outside (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, each piece of printed paper is
folded in half with the printed side facing outside, and it is output to the finisher booklet tray.
When [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, the printed paper is folded in half
with the printed side facing inside, and it is stacked onto the finisher booklet tray.

• The paper types that can be used for Half Fold function are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Tab Stock, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple,
Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
The finished form may vary depending on the paper size. The following table shows the examples of A3
size paper folded in each fold type. For details, see the printer driver Help.

Folding Position
Print Data Direction
Print Inside Print Outside Multi-sheet fold

Portrait

Landscape

• For details about which paper sizes are compatible with which Half Fold function, see
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR5100" or "Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR5120",
Specifications.

Notes on configuring the Half Fold function

If [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified and the number of sheets specified to
be folded exceeds the maximum folding number, the machine first folds the maximum number of sheets
that can be folded together, and then it folds the remaining sheets. Up to six sheets can be folded at a
time.
Conditions to reset a job combined with the Half Fold function
A job is reset if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.

36
 Fold

• Slip Sheets is specified.

• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function on multi-folding unit is specified.
• Ring Binding is specified.
• Perfect Binding is specified.
• The machine is printing a report.
• The half fold function cannot be used for the selected paper size or type.
• [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified but the paper sizes are
different.
• [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified but the number of sheets
exceeds the maximum folding number.
• No requirements for specifying collate are fulfilled.
• Booklet Finisher is malfunctioning.
• Booklet Finisher is not attached.
Functions that will be canceled when combined with the Half-fold function
The following functions will be canceled when combined with the Half-fold function:
• Ejecting paper with the printed side facing up

• If the information icon ( ) is displayed next to the "Fold:" list, you cannot specify Half Fold
function. Click the information icon ( ) to check why Half Fold function is unavailable.
• If the Half Fold function is specified, folded paper cannot be output with the printed side facing up.
• If you cannot make Half Fold function settings even with a Booklet Finisher installed, options may
not be set correctly in the printer driver. To correct the printer driver's option settings, see
"Specifying the Option Configuration or Paper Settings Manually", Driver Installation Guide.

37
 3. Useful Functions

Registering Custom Paper

Using the paper settings function of the machine, you can specify the paper type, size, weight and
various other properties of paper that you want to use and register the settings as "Custom Paper". Also,
you can achieve satisfactory printing results easily by specifying the paper settings for a commercially
available paper brand that is widely used from the Master Library.

Overview of Paper Settings

Tray paper settings

You need to specify the paper sizes and types for paper trays in order to properly print on the
paper loaded in the paper trays. You can configure these settings in the tray paper settings.
The machine has functions such as a master library and custom paper settings that make it easy to
configure the tray paper settings.
You can specify the tray paper settings in the following ways:
• Assign a custom paper to a paper tray
• Manually specify the paper settings such as a size and type for a paper tray
Master library
The master library contains settings such as paper types, paper weights, and machine operating
conditions (for example, paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions) that are
customized for each major commercially available paper products and also for each major paper
types.
To use the settings in the master library, you must first select the name or type of your paper from
the master library. The paper settings will be registered to a custom paper. The master library
makes it easy to get the best results from your paper.
Custom paper
You can register each type of paper that you use as a "Custom Paper" by setting a name, size,
type, weight, and other advanced settings in "Tray Paper Settings".
This function is convenient because you can register certain types of paper that you often use as
custom paper.
"Custom Paper" can also be set from the master library.
The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings with the media catalog
information on the print controller when using the print controller.
Custom papers can be registered in the following ways:
• Select the paper's name or type from the master library
• Modify a custom paper that has already been registered
• Manually specify the paper's settings such as the type and weight you want to use

38
 Registering Custom Paper

Under the custom paper's advanced settings, you can specify the machine operating conditions
such as paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions. The master library contains the
advanced settings that are preconfigured so that you do not need to configure them.
When you change the paper's settings such as the type and weight of the custom paper you
register, the paper's advanced settings are initialized.
Only the machine administrator can change the advanced settings. For details, contact your
machine administrator.
Saves all types of registered custom paper to an SD card at one time.
Saved custom papers can be restored and used as a custom paper again.

Relationships between functions

Printer
Machine
controller

Master Library

- Paper Type
- Paper Weight
- Paper Size
- Other settings

1 4
SD card
7
2
- Paper Type Media catalog
Custom Paper
- Paper Weight information
3 - Paper Size
- Other settings
5
1
6

Tray Paper Settings 8 Paper tray information

EAR106

1. You can import paper settings from the Master Library and register it as custom paper.
2. You can export all types of custom paper to an SD card at one time.
3. You can import and register the custom paper that you have exported to an SD card.
4. You can register custom paper by manually specifying its settings such as the type and weight you
want to use.
5. You can configure the tray paper settings by assigning a custom paper to each paper tray.
6. You can configure paper settings such as sizes and types manually for each tray.

39
 3. Useful Functions

7. The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings on the machine with the media
catalog information on the print controller when using the print controller.
8. The machine automatically synchronizes the tray paper settings on the machine and the paper tray
information on the print controller when using the print controller.

• Only the device administrator can configure the [Advanced Settings] for custom paper.
• For details about the recommended paper for use with this machine, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• For details about the media catalog information, see the manual provided with the print controller.

Custom Paper Registration Workflow

Step Using the Master Library Not using the Master Library

1 Select paper in the Master Library, and Register paper as custom paper by
register it as custom paper specifying a paper type, weight and other
• See page 44 "Selecting paper to settings as you want
import from the Master Library or SD • See page 45 "Registering a paper
card" whose paper name is not displayed in
• See page 45 "Registering a paper the Master Library"
whose paper name is not displayed in
the Master Library"

2 Select the registered custom paper in the "Tray Paper Settings" for the paper tray
• See page 266 "Specifying a custom paper"

• When using the registered custom paper, see page 266 "Specifying a custom paper".
• When specifying the paper size and type individually and not using the custom paper, see
page 267 "Manually specifying a paper's size and type".

How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen

This section explains the items on the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
This screen appears when you press [CustomPaper Management] on the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.

40
 Registering Custom Paper

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

DWP153

1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search for papers in the list of custom papers. Press [Search] again to return to the list of
custom paper types from the search result. For details, see page 61 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying
the Conditions".
2. [Add New]
Press this key to register a new type of custom paper. For details, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".
3. [Delete]
Press this key to delete the selected custom paper from the list. For details, see page 63 "Deleting a Custom
Paper".
4. [Paper Identification]
Scans the paper using the Media Identification Unit, and searches for a type of paper with the closest settings
from the registered custom paper.
For details, see page 49 "Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit".
5. Item name
Displays an item name in the custom paper list. The items to be displayed can be selected from the following:
• [No.] (fixed item)
• [Paper Name] (fixed item)
• [Paper Brand] (initial display)
• [Paper Size] (initial display)
• [Paper Weight] (initial display)
• [Manufacturer]
• [Paper Thickness]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Color]

41
 3. Useful Functions

• [Coated Paper Type]

• [Prepunched]
• [Textured]

• You can specify whether or not to display each item except [No.] and [Paper Name].
• You can sort the custom paper list by pressing each item name.
• To select an item to display on the custom paper list, press the list icon ( ) to display the [Select Item
Displayed/Arrange Order] screen, and then select the item by selecting the check box. You can also
change the display order by dragging the item on the screen.
6. [Import]
Press this key to import custom paper from the Master Library or SD card. For details, see page 44
"Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card".
7. [Export]
Press this key to export all types of custom paper to an SD card.
For details, see page 63 "Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".
8. [Print the Settings]
Press this key to print the parameters of the custom paper settings. For details, see page 62 "Printing the
Parameters of Custom Paper Settings".
9. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the list of custom paper to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
10. List of custom papers
The list of registered custom papers is displayed.
A custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray is indicated by the icon , and a custom paper that is
assigned to more than one trays is indicated by the icon .
Also, one of the following icons is displayed next to [No.]:
: A custom paper that is created as new
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library and then modified

How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen

This section explains the items on the [Import From Master Library] screen.
This screen is displayed when you press [Import] on the [Custom Paper Management] screen, and then
select [From Master Library].

42
 Registering Custom Paper

1 2 3 4

DWP154

1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search the papers in the paper list. Press [Search] again to return to the list of custom paper
from the search result. For details, see page 61 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions".
2. [Paper Identification]
Scans paper with the Media Identification Unit, and then searches the master library for a custom paper with
settings that are similar to those of the scanned paper. For details, see page 49 "Registering a Custom Paper
with the Media Identification Unit".
3. Item name
Displays the item names in the Master Library list. The items specified in the "Custom Paper Management"
screen are displayed.
Also, you can sort the Master Library list by each displayed item. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
4. [Import]
Select an item in the Master Library list, and press [Import] to import the selected paper as custom paper. For
details, see page 44 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card" and page 45
"Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library".
5. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the Master Library list to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
6. List of papers in the library
The list of all types of custom paper registered in the Master Library is displayed.

• The contents in the master library on your machine might differ slightly from those shown in the
illustrations in this manual.

43
 3. Useful Functions

Registering a Custom Paper

You can register up to 1000 custom papers.

Check the product name, size, and type of your paper before registering it.
Check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the paper tray that you want to use. Tray
compatibility depends on the paper's size and type. For details about the paper sizes and types that can
be used, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

• When the number of registered custom papers reaches the maximum, you will not be able to
register a new custom paper. Delete any unnecessary custom papers from the list, and then try
registering again. For details, see page 63 "Deleting a Custom Paper".

Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
To import data from an SD card, insert the SD card into the media.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library] or [From SD Card].
5. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
Select an item by selecting its check box.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
You can select two or more types of paper.

6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].

44
 Registering Custom Paper

8. Press [Exit].
9. Press .
10. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom paper,
see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".

Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library

If the paper you want is not in the library's paper list or you don't know the name of the paper, use the
following procedures:
• Selecting the paper's type from the master library
The master library contains the optimum printing conditions not only for each commercially
available paper but also for each type of paper.
Even if you don't know the brand name of a paper, you can register the paper as the custom paper
by selecting a paper of the matching paper type and weight from the Master Library.
• Manually specifying a paper's type and weight
You can register a custom paper by manually specifying its type and weight.
Selecting the paper's type from the master library
You can select the type of paper from the master library and register it as a custom paper.

• Specify [Paper Type] and [Paper Weight] as the items to be displayed in the Custom Paper
Management screen. For details about selecting the displayed items, see page 40 "How to
Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen".

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Select the most appropriate combination of type and weight for your paper.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.

45
 3. Useful Functions

6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
When selected, custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
9. Press .
10. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper
name setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the
custom paper, see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Manually specifying a paper's type and weight

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Add New].

4. Press [Paper Name].

5. Enter the name of the paper.
You can enter up to 38 half-width characters. You can register Different Custom Paper under
the same name.

46
 Registering Custom Paper

6. Press [Paper Size].

7. Select a paper size.
8. Press [Paper Weight].
9. Specify the paper's weight.
You can also specify [Paper Thickness].
10. Press [Paper Type].
11. Specify the paper type.
12. Specify other items, such as [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched],
[Textured], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] as necessary.
13. Press [Save Paper].
The [Save Custom Paper] screen is displayed.
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [OK], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
14. Press [Save].
15. Press [Program].
16. Press [Exit].
Custom paper is saved under the smallest unregistered number.
17. Press .
18. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Coated Paper Type]. If you want
to use matte paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Coated
Paper Type].
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.

Registering a new custom paper by modifying an existing paper

You can open and modify the settings of a registered custom paper and register them as a new custom
paper.
This function is useful when registering paper that is the same type as an existing paper, but a different
size.
Depending on which settings you modify, details of a newly registered custom paper will be as follows:

47
 3. Useful Functions

• When the settings of the selected custom paper are not changed:
All settings of the selected custom paper ([Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Weight], and [Paper
Type], including the attributes specific to the print controller) are copied to the newly registered
custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Thickness], [Apply Duplex], [Apply Auto
Paper Select], or [Advanced Settings] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper and its advanced settings are reset
to their default values according to the changes that are applied to the settings.
When modifying a custom paper that is registered from the master library, you can change its [Paper
Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] settings. You can also confirm the
brand name and the version of data from [Paper Brand].

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select a type of custom paper to refer to.

4. Press .
5. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To
cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Add New].

48
 Registering Custom Paper

8. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".

• Custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select the existing custom paper.
9. Press [Save].
10. Press [Program].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press .
13. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.

Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit

When you scan paper with the Media Identification Unit, the Media Identification Unit searches custom
paper in the master library. When custom paper with configurations that are similar to those of the
scanned paper is found, it is displayed.

Part names and functions of the Media Identification Unit

1 2 3
DFZ012

1. Power lamp
Lights up when a USB cable is connected and the Media Identification Unit is ready to start scanning paper.
2. Scanning lamp
Lights up when paper is inserted into the scanning area.

49
 3. Useful Functions

After the paper is removed, it flashes while paper is being scanned.

3. Error lamp
Lights up when an error occurs.
4. Paper scanning area
Insert the paper you want to scan here.

Connect the Media Identification Unit

1. Connect the USB cable to the USB host interface on the back of the machine.
• USB host interface

DSD018

How to register paper scanned by the Media Identification Unit as custom paper
Registering a paper from the master library with the Media Identification Unit

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Press [Paper Identification].

50
 Registering Custom Paper

6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.

DFZ009

The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
7. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Import].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Exit].
The selected custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
10. Press .
11. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• The list displayed in Step 6 includes custom paper with configurations whose match rates are
80% or higher.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom
paper, see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Registering a new custom paper with the Media Identification Unit

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].

51
 3. Useful Functions

3. Press [Add New].

4. Press [Scan the Value].

5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.

DFZ009

6. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
7. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
8. Press [Add New].
9. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".

• The custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select an existing custom paper.
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Program].

52
 Registering Custom Paper

12. Press [Exit].

13. Press .
14. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• When you register and scan custom paper using the Media Identification Unit, following items
are automatically specified:
• Paper weight
• Coated paper other than matte paper
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Modifying the registered custom paper settings using the Media Identification Unit

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.
4. Press .
5. Press [Scan the Value].
6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.

DFZ009

7. Change the settings.

8. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the

53
 3. Useful Functions

[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
9. Press [Overwrite].
10. Press .
11. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Specifying a custom paper for paper trays with the Media Identification Unit

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Press [Paper Identification].
5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.

DFZ009

The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
6. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
7. Press .
8. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Edit the Settings] in Step 6.

54
 Registering Custom Paper

Modifying a Custom Paper

Before modifying a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
print controller.
You can only change the [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select]
settings for a custom paper that is registered from the master library.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press .
5. Change the settings.
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To
cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Overwrite].
8. Press .
9. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.

Custom Paper Settings

Paper Brand
Displays brand name and data version of the custom paper registered from the master library.
Brand name and data version is displayed only for the custom paper registered from the master
library.
Manufacturer
Displays the manufacturer's name.

55
 3. Useful Functions

Paper Name
Specify the name of the custom paper using up to 38 characters.
Paper Size
Select the paper's size from the regular sizes or specify a [Custom Size].
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches) vertically,
and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
If the banner sheet tray is attached, you can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm
(3.94 and 13.00 inches) vertically, and between 139.7 and 700.0 mm (5.50 and 27.55 inches)
horizontally.
Paper Weight
Specify the weight (g/m2) of the custom paper. Specify the paper weight between [Paper Weight
1] and [Paper Weight 8]. For details about the relationship between the paper weight and ream
weight, see "Paper weight", page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". Paper weight can
also be scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
Paper Thickness
Specify the thickness (µm) of the custom paper. You can also scan paper thicknesses using the
Media Identification Unit.
Paper Type
Specify the type of the custom paper.
Coated Paper Type
Specify whether or not the custom paper is coated. The type of coating finish (other than matte
paper) can also be scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
Paper Color
Specify the color of the custom paper.
Prepunched
Specify whether or not the custom paper is punched.
Textured
Specify whether or not the custom paper is embossed.
Apply Duplex
Specify whether the duplex function is enabled for the custom paper.
Apply Auto Paper Select
Specify whether the auto paper select function is enabled for the custom paper.
Auto Adjust Image Position
Perform automatic adjustment of the print position on the back side of custom paper allocated to
the tray. You can use this function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

56
 Registering Custom Paper

Use the following procedure to perform adjustment:

1. Load 9 sheets of paper in the tray.

2. Press [Auto Adjustment] for "Print Adjustment Sheet/Scan:".
A total of 9 sheets, comprising 3 blank sheets, 3 adjustment sheets, and 3 blank sheets, is
delivered.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to start scanning the adjustment sheets.
Scan the front and back of each of the 3 adjustment sheets.
4. After completing scanning, press [Auto Adjustment].
5. Check the displayed adjustment result, and then press [Apply].
The setting value that reflects the adjustment result is applied.
6. Press [Exit] to finish.

• To check the print position only, load 9 sheets of paper in the tray, and then press [Print] for "
Test Print:".
• Adjust the print position using [Manual Adjust Image Position] or [Registration to Align Front
and Back Images Using Template] if a satisfactory adjustment result could not be obtained
using [Auto Adjust Image Position]. For details about using [Registration to Align Front and
Back Images Using Template] for adjustment, see page 59 "Adjusting the Image Position of
Either Side of the Paper".
Manual Adjust Image Position
Adjust the print position manually on the custom paper allocated to the tray. For details, see
page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Scan the Value
Obtain the paper weight and thickness, coating information, and identification data using the
Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Update the Value
Obtain the identification data using the Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Advanced Settings
Specify the advanced settings for the paper.
Only the machine administrator can specify these settings.
Advanced settings can be changed even if the selected custom paper is assigned to a paper tray.
For details, contact your machine administrator.

57
 3. Useful Functions

You can change settings for [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper
Select] if a custom paper has already been registered using the master library.
Settings that you can change depend on the following:

Custom papers that have been Custom papers that have been
Settings registered using the master library registered by specifying paper
(listed with an icon or ) types and weight ( )

Paper Brand Not Available -

Manufacturer Not Available -

Paper Name Available Available

Paper Size Available Available

Paper Weight Not Available Available

Paper Thickness Not Available Available

Paper Type Not Available Available

Coated Paper Type Not Available Available

Paper Color Not Available Available

Prepunched Not Available Available

Textured Not Available Available

Apply Duplex Available Available

Apply Auto Paper Select Available Available

Scan the Value Available Not Available

Update the Value Available Available

Advanced Settings Available*1 Available*1

*1 Can be changed only by the machine administrator.

• Before changing these settings, check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the
paper tray that you want to load the paper in. Tray compatibility depends on the paper's size and
type.

58
 Registering Custom Paper

Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper

Adjusts the image position so it is the same on either side of the paper.
First, print a template and measure the length of the specified area. Next, enter the length on the
machine to adjust the position of the image.
Specify the size of each piece of paper you use. Specified settings are saved as custom paper settings,
so that you can use the registered settings next time.
You need administrator privileges to adjust the image position.

Preparations

Before adjusting image positions, perform the following:

• Skew correction with the print controller
First of all, perform skew correction with the print controller. For details, see the manuals for the
print controller.
• Print a template
After performing skew correction, print a template included on the supplied CD-ROM. Select a
template whose size is the same with the paper that includes an image whose position you want to
adjust on the machine.
• Measure the template
When you print the template, arrows are printed in the corners.
Measure the length from the corners of the paper to the peaks of the arrows and from the peaks to
the peaks of the arrows, and then write the length in the box on the template. Perform these for both
sides of the paper.

2
DFZ010

1. The length from the peak of one arrow to the peak of another arrow
2. The length from the corner of the paper to the peak of the arrow

59
 3. Useful Functions

Entering the value

When you specify the lengths of the template after measuring them, the values to adjust the image
position are automatically calculated and applied.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.

4. Press .
5. Press [Advanced Settings].
6. Enter the login user name and password of the administrator if an authentication screen
appears.
The authentication screen does not appear if you log in as an administrator.
7. Press [Reg Align Frt&Bck Img Use Template].
8. Enter the value you wrote on the printed template.
Enter the measured values in the corresponding fields on the [Side 1] and [Side 2] tabs.
Select the item you want to enter and use the numeric keypad to enter the value.
You can enter values from 0.1 to 999.9 mm in 0.1-mm increments.

60
 Registering Custom Paper

9. Press [Apply].
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Save Paper]
12. Press [Overwrite].
13. Press .
14. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• For details about how to register a custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom Paper".

Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions

You can specify search parameters to search for types of paper from the lists of paper types, such as
custom types of paper and the master library.
The following conditions can be specified for paper searches: [No.], [Paper Brand], [Manufacturer],
[Paper Name], [Paper Size (Regular)], [Paper Size (Custom)], [Paper Weight], [Paper Thickness],
[Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched], [Textured], [Apply Duplex], and
[Apply Auto Paper Select].

61
 3. Useful Functions

1. Press [Search] on each screen.

2. Press each condition to specify search parameters, and then enter a search string.
To add a search string, press .

3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Search].
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.

Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings

You can print the parameters for registered custom paper from the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
You can print 1000 custom paper settings at a time.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to print.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.

62
 Registering Custom Paper

4. Press [Print the Settings].

5. Press [Print the Settings].
6. Press .
7. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card

You can save all types of registered custom paper to the paper library in an SD card at one time.
Up to 1,000 custom papers can be saved in the library.
Each saved custom paper is assigned a sequential number from 0001. New data overwrites existing
data if both the paper names and paper size settings are the same.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Insert an SD card into the media slot.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
4. Press [Export].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press .
8. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

Deleting a Custom Paper

Before deleting a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
print controller.
You can export custom papers to an SD card. For details about backing up custom papers, see page 63
"Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".

63
 3. Useful Functions

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper that you want to delete.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.

4. Press [Delete].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
7. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

• You cannot delete a custom paper that is currently assigned to a paper tray.
• You cannot delete a custom paper that is being used with the print controller. For details, see the
manual provided with the print controller.

Managing the Master Library

To update the master library, do the following:

To update the master library
Contact your service representative for details.
To copy the data of the paper library in the SD card to another machine of the same model
You can import the paper settings from the database in an SD card.
For details, see page 44 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card".

64
 Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel

Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from

the Control Panel
The screen of a computer or DFE connected on a network can be displayed and operated on the
machine's control panel by using the app installed on the machine.
Using the machine's control panel, you can remotely operate a computer or DFE, and perform
operations such as instructing the machine to print.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely
Use the remote desktop client application to connect to a remote computer.
You can connect to an RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) server that supports RDP Version 8.0
(compatible).
Connecting to a DFE Remotely
Use the DFE connection application to connect to a DFE remotely.
The DFE connection icon is displayed only when a DFE is connected to the machine. Also, the
name of the DFE connection icon varies depending on the type of DFE to be connected.

• You can connect to only one computer or DFE at one time.

• This function cannot be used while you are operating on the screen of the machine's control panel
remotely (see page 78 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel").
• Up to six computers and only one DFE can be registered as the destinations.
• Press the Enter key twice to confirm the input text when using Microsoft IME (Roman input) on Fiery
to enter Japanese characters while connecting to Fiery.

Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel

This section describes the procedure for connecting to a computer/DFE remotely from the control panel
of the machine.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely from the Control Panel

1. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

2. Press .
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Select a destination.
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the computer is displayed on the machine's
control panel.

65
 3. Useful Functions

For details about how to create a new destination, see page 66 "Creating a Destination of
Remote Desktop Connection".
6. To end the remote connection, press [Menu] ( ) and then press [Disconnect].
Connecting to DFE Remotely from the Control Panel

1. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

2. Press .
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the DFE connection icon.
5. Enter the login information for connecting to the DFE, and then press [Login].
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the DFE is displayed on the machine's control
panel.
Menu Displayed during Remote Connection
During remote connection, you can perform the following functions by pressing [Menu] ( ).
Keyboard
Displays a software keyboard.
Select External Keyboard
Select the type of connected keyboard. After replacing the keyboard with another type,
disestablish the remote connection and then establish it again.
EFI Certification
Edit the authentication information. This item is displayed only when the connection destination
is a DFE and the target device is Fiery.
Disconnect
Terminate the remote connection.

• You can also register a remote desktop app or DFE connection app to a function key and start the
app by pressing the function key. For details about the function keys, see page 113 "Changing
Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
• The current remote connection session continues even when you press [Home] ( ) or other items
and the remote desktop client app move to background. Also, the current remote connection
session continues even after the machine restarts by a system reset.

Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection

To connect from the machine's control panel to a computer (RDP server) remotely, create a destination
for the remote connection by using the following procedure:

66
 Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel

Use the following procedure to configure a connection destination.

1. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

2. Press .
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Add Connection].
Specify the following items:
Host
Label
Specify the name under which to register the destination information.
Host
Specify the host name (IP address) of the destination.
Port
Specify the port number of the destination.
Default: [3389]
Credentials
Username
Enter the login user name.
Password
Enter the login password.
Domain
Enter the domain name.
Settings
Screen
• Colors
Specify the display color of the screen. You can select from the following:
• High Color (16 Bit)
• True Color (24 Bit)
• Highest Quality (32 Bit)
Default: [Highest Quality (32 Bit)]
Advanced
• Enable Gateway
Specify whether or not to use the gateway.

67
 3. Useful Functions

Default: [OFF]
• Gateway Settings
You can configure this setting if [Enable Gateway] is set to [ON]. You can specify
the following items:
• Host
Enter the host name.
• Port
Enter the port number.
Default: [443]
• Username
Enter the user name.
• Password
Enter the password.
• Domain
Enter the domain name.
• Security
Specify the encryption setting.
• Automatic
• RDP
• TLS
• NLA
Default: [Automatic]
6. Press [Return] ( ) at the bottom center of the screen.
7. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
The settings are saved as a new destination.
8. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

Configuring the Connection App

This section explains the setting items of the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
The configured settings are shared by the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
Configure the Connection App using the following procedure.

1. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

2. Press .

68
 Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel

3. Press the [APPS] tab.

4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Menu] ( ).
6. Press [Settings].
The configuration screen is displayed.
Power Saving
Close idle Connections
Specify the time to wait before closing a session when the screen display is turned off.
Specify a value between 0 (do not disconnect) and 5 (minutes), in increments of one
minutes.
Default: [5]
Security
Accept all Certificates
Specify whether or not to accept all certifications.
Default: [OFF]
Clear Certificate Cache
Clears the certificate cache.
7. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

69
 3. Useful Functions

How to Use the Application Site

By using the Application Site, you can download applications for your machine. You can also update or
uninstall downloaded applications.
To use Application Site, you need to configure an environment to connect to the Internet.
Configuring an environment to connect to the Internet
• Proxy Settings
In an environment where a proxy server is used, configure the proxy settings as follows:
• [Screen Features] > [WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Proxy Settings]
• Web Image Monitor > [Device Management] > [Configuration] > [RC Gate Proxy
Server]
• DNS Configuration
• [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Interface Settings] > [Network]

• For details about this machine's settings, see "System Settings", Device Management.
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Notes on backing up the application settings
It is recommended that you create a backup of the settings items for each application using the
device's export function in case you need to restore an application that has been installed. For
details about the export function, see "Managing Device Information", Security Guide.

Setting Up

If you are accessing the Application Site for the first time, configure the following settings:
• Specify the region
• Configure the extension code (if necessary)

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press .
3. Press the [Application Site] icon ( ).
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to use the Application Site. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply the
update immediately, or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
4. Press [Next].

70
 How to Use the Application Site

5. In [Region], specify the region in which you are using the machine.

6. If you have been notified of the extension code by your sales representative, enter the
code in [Extension Code (Optional)], and then press [Next].
7. Carefully read the terms of service. If you agree to all the terms, select the [I agree with
the terms of service] checkbox, and then press [OK].

• A message asking whether to save cookies in the web browser may be displayed while you
configure the settings. When this message appears, press [OK] to complete the configuration.

Displaying the Application Site

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press .
3. Press the [Application Site] icon ( ).
The screen that shows the list of applications is displayed.
There are two types of application list screens:
• Show all applications
All available applications are displayed in the list. Press the [All] tab to view them on this
screen.

71
 3. Useful Functions

• Show the applications in separate categories

Applications are organized for each function of the machine. Press the [Search by Category]
tab to view them on this screen.

• To view information such as the server maintenance information of the Application Site, press
[Information] that is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

Installing Applications

The procedure to install applications is described below.

• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can install applications. To
log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login Method", Security
Guide.

1. On the application list screen, select the application you want to install.

2. Press [Install].
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to install the application. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply the

72
 How to Use the Application Site

update immediately, or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
3. In the confirmation screen, press [Install].
Carefully read the terms of service, if available.
Depending on the application, a product key is required. Contact the sales representative of the
application.
A message appears when the installation is completed.
4. Press [Close].

• Depending on the application that is being installed, a message indicating that the application
cannot be installed because JavaVM is disabled may be displayed. If this message appears,
enable JavaTMPlatform under [Extended Feature Settings] in Web Image Monitor.
• The contact information of the installed application is displayed on the screen of each application.

Updating Applications

The procedure to update applications is described below.

You can update all applications together or select them separately.

• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can update the
applications. To log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login
Method", Security Guide.

1. If updates are available for some applications, a message appears in the upper part of
the screen for several seconds when the application list screen is displayed.

If [Updated Application Notice] in [Newly Arrived Update Notice] in [Managed Items] is set to
[Off], this message will not appear. For details, see page 75 "Managed Items Screen".
You can check whether there are any updates by pressing the [Update Apps.] tab in [Admin.
Menu]. If there is an update, go to Step 3.
2. Press [Update].
3. Press [Update All] to update all the applications that are displayed. Press [Update] of
each application to update only some of them.
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to perform an application update. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply

73
 3. Useful Functions

the update immediately or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
4. On the confirmation screen, press [Update].
A message appears when the installation is completed.
5. Press [Close].

• Even after the message in Step 1 disappears, you can open the screen in Step 3 by pressing
Admin. Menu, which is displayed in the upper right corner of the application list screen. The
number of applications that can be updated is displayed to the right of [Admin. Menu].

Uninstalling Applications

The procedure to uninstall applications is described below.

• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can uninstall applications.
To log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login Method", Security
Guide.

1. Press [Admin. Menu] in the upper right corner of the application list screen.

2. Press the [Managed Items] tab.

3. Press [Application List/Uninstallation].
4. Press the [Uninstall] button of the application you want to uninstall.
5. On the confirmation screen, press [Uninstall].
A message appears when the uninstallation is completed.
6. Press [Close].

74
 How to Use the Application Site

• Only the applications that have been installed in the Application Site can be uninstalled.

Managed Items Screen

This section explains the Managed Items screen under Admin. Menu.

1. Press [Admin. Menu] in the upper right corner of the application list screen.
2. Press the [Managed Items] tab.
The Managed Items screen appears.

1 4
2 5

3 6

EAR160

1. [Application List/Uninstallation]
On this screen, you can uninstall applications. For details, see page 74 "Uninstalling Applications".
2. [Region/Extension Code]
The same screen as the one displayed when you access the Application Site for the first time appears,
and you can configure the extension code again. For details see page 70 "Setting Up".
3. [Newly Arrived/Update Notice]
• Newly Arrived Application Notice
If set to [On], a message notifying that a new application can be downloaded appears at the
bottom left of the screen. In the application list screen, new applications appear with a New icon
( ).
• Updated Application Notice
If set to [On], a message notifying that installed applications are ready for update appears at the
bottom left of the screen. The message also appears at the upper part of the screen when starting
the application site.
4. [Auto Update]
If set to [On], installed applications are updated automatically. You can also specify the time to execute
the update.

75
 3. Useful Functions

5. [Firmware Management]
On the screen that will be displayed, you can perform the following operations. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
• [Update Firmware]
Updates the firmware of the machine. The update can be applied immediately or at the specified
time. You can change or cancel the specified time later.
• [Restore Firmware]
Reverts the current version of the firmware to the previous version of it.
6. [Terms of Service]
Displays the terms of service for accessing the Application Site.

When Messages Appear

This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.
If a problem occurs, we recommend that you first check the information in the [Information] section of the
Application Site. The server maintenance information is described in [Information].

Message Cause Solution

JavaVM has not been JavaVM has not been Enable JavaTMPlatform under
started. Install the started. [Extended Feature Settings] in Web
application after JavaVM Image Monitor.
starts.

Failed to download the No connection to the Check the server maintenance

application. installation server can be information in [Information]. Also check
established. if the network settings ([DNS
An error has occurred. Configuration] and [Proxy Settings])
Failed to install the are correctly configured. For the
application. network settings, see page 70 "How to
Cannot connect to server Use the Application Site".
which installs applications.
Check maintenance
information on Information
screen or network settings.

Could not update the

firmware.

A server error has occurred. An unexpected error has

occurred on the server.

76
 How to Use the Application Site

Message Cause Solution

The specified page cannot An error has occurred on the Check the server maintenance
be found. Application Site. information in [Information].

There is insufficient space to The available internal Delete unnecessary applications.

store internally, delete any storage is insufficient.
unnecessary applications.

Could not restore the The firmware has not been No recovery can be performed unless
firmware because the updated from the the firmware of the machine has been
required data does not exist. Application Site. updated from the Application Site.

77
 3. Useful Functions

Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the

Control Panel
You can monitor the control panel screen or operate the machine remotely from a Web browser running
on a computer that is connected to the same network. You can also turn off or lock the screen to prevent
unintended operations of the machine.
To allow a remote connection to the control panel, enable [Remote Panel Operation] from the User
Tools screen of the machine.

• Only the device administrator can configure the remote connection to the control panel.
• You cannot use the function while using a remote desktop app or DFE connection app.

Allowing Remote Operations

The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box appears when the administrator requests remote
operation or monitoring of the machine while a user operates the machine. Specify how to respond to a
connection request from the following, depending on the operational situation.
• To deny remote operations or monitoring by the administrator:
Press [Prohibit].
• To allow the administrator to only monitor the screen of the machine:
Press [Allow Monitoring].
• To allow the administrator to remotely operate the machine remotely:
Press [Allow Remote Operation].
When remote operation starts, the status of the remote operation is displayed in the bottom-right area of
the control panel screen.

• The message displayed on the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box varies
depending on the request content submitted by the administrator.
• If no item is pressed within 30 seconds after the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box
has appeared, the remote operation or monitoring starts automatically.
• The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box does not appear when no operation is
performed on the machine for more than 180 seconds.
• The following functions are not enabled when a remote operation or monitoring connection is
established:
• Power Saving Function
• System Reset Timer

78
 Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel

• The administrator is disconnected from the machine if any of the following occurs while the
connection is active:
• Any remote operation is not performed on the machine by the administrator for the duration
specified in [Set Remote Connection Timeout]*1
• The machine is turned off
• The control panel is being restarted
• The administrator can view the screen of the machine remotely while a connection is active. To view
a screen containing information that the administrator does not want you to see, such as an ID,
password, or other confidential information, terminate remote operation.
*1 The default of [Timeout (min.)] is 30 minutes. For details about the settings, see page 79 "Enabling the
Remote Connection to the Control Panel".

Terminating a Remote Operation

A remote operation can be terminated by the following procedure:

1. Tap [Admin. is operating remotely] or [Deny admin.'s operation, tap here] displayed in
the bottom-right area of the control panel screen.
The system message dialog box is displayed.
2. Press [Disconnect].
The end message is displayed, and the remote operation is terminated.

• A remote operation may be terminated by the administrator.

• When an operation on the machine screen is locked, any remote operation cannot be terminated
by operating the machine screen.

Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel

• If the items "Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions" and password setting are not displayed,
consult your sales or service representative.

1. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

2. Press the [User Tools] ( ) icon in the Home screen.
3. Press [Basic Settings for Extended Devices].
4. Press [Remote Panel Operation].
5. Set [Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions] to [ON].

79
 3. Useful Functions

6. Configure other items as necessary.

Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions
Specify whether or not to enable the remote operation and monitoring functions.
Default: [OFF]
Remote Connection URL
The URL (IP address and port) is displayed when Remote Panel Operation/Monitoring is
enabled.
Activate Monitoring Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for monitoring.
Set Monitoring Password
Enter the password for monitoring the machine.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot monitor the machine unless specifying the password.
Activate Remote Operation Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for remote operations.
Set Remote Operation Password
Enter the password for operating the machine remotely.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot operate the machine remotely unless specifying the password.
Set Remote Connection Timeout
If the administrator establishes a remote connection with the machine but performs no remote
operation for the specified duration, the connection with the administrator will be terminated
automatically. Specify a value between 3 and 60 minutes.
Default: [30 minutes]
7. Press the [Home] ( ) icon at the center bottom of the screen.

80
4. Getting Started
This chapter describes preparations for using the machine and operating instructions.

Guide to Names and Functions of Components

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.

You can load and scan originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

Front and left view

1 2 3

9
10

EAR123

1. Main power switch

To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
2. ADF
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.

81
 4. Getting Started

If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
3. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
4. Control panel
See page 100 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel".
5. Toner cartridge cover
Open to change toner cartridges.
6. Front left cover
Open to remove paper jams or turn on/off the AC power switch.
7. Front right cover
Open to remove paper jams.
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–3)
Load paper here. Tray 1 is a tandem tray where paper on the left side automatically moves to the right when
paper there has run out.
An indicator on the front left side of the tray lights while paper is feeding.
9. Transfer heater switch
The switch is inside the front left cover. See page 106 "Transfer heater switch".
10. AC power switch
Press to completely turn off the power of the machine. The AC power switch must be kept on in normal use.
The switch is inside the front left cover. For details, see page 525 "Dos and Don'ts".

82
 Guide to Names and Functions of Components

Front and right view

EAQ124

1. Attention light
See page 85 "Guide to Functions of the Attention Light".
This is optional for a Type 1 machine but is attached to other models.
2. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.

83
 4. Getting Started

Rear and right view

1 2 3

EAQ125

1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
2. Remote Administration Service Connecting Port
Use this to employ the remote administration service (RICOH @Remote) over the Internet. Depending on the
country, region, or environment, RICOH @Remote may be unavailable.
3. Earth leakage breaker
Protects users from electric shock. For details about checking the earth leakage breaker, see page 545
"Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers".

• If you perform a large amount of print jobs in a high-temperature environment, the print jobs may
be suspended and the machine's inner fans near the vents continue running to cool the machine.
• The fan inside the machine near the vents may continue running to cool the machine after a large
print job.

84
 Guide to Names and Functions of Components

Guide to Functions of the Attention Light

• Do not push or pull the attention light when installed to the machine. Doing so may result in
damage or malfunction of the attention light or the machine.

CUV121

The attention light notifies the user by light when there is a paper jam or no paper is left.
The colors of the lamp and their meanings are as follows:

Lamp Status

The bottom lamp lights blue. Printing

The bottom lamp flashes blue. • Scanning

• Data in

The top lamp lights red. Error occurred

(Example)
• When the service call message appears
• Paper jam
• Out of paper
• Out of toner
• Memory overflow
• Waste toner bottle full
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".

85
 4. Getting Started

Lamp Status

The top lamp flashes yellow. Warning

(Example)
• Toner has nearly run out.
• Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".

86
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

You can use the copy function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
For the names of the options, see page 13 "Names of Major Features".
For the options required for certain functions, see page 15 "Functions Requiring Optional
Configurations".

Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options

Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12

13 10
14
11

1
15
15 9

10

22

23 20 19 18 17 16
21 EAR122

87
 4. Getting Started

Type 1 machine

2 5 6 7 8 24 10
9
12
13

11
1

25
15 9

10
26

23

22 28 27 18 17 16
EAR136

1. Trimmer
Cuts the fore edge of the book block after the book block is saddle stitched.
2. Booklet Finisher SR5120
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
3. High capacity stacker
Consists of the following paper trays:
• Stacker upper tray
• Stacker tray
The stacker upper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper, and stacker tray can hold up to 5,000 sheets of
paper. You can connect up to two high capacity stackers.
4. Ring binder
Binds sheets of paper with a ring comb.

88
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

5. Multi-folding unit
Applies the following folds: Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, Gate Fold, and Z-
fold.
6. Interposer
Inserts cover or slip sheets into copied or printed paper.
7. Decurl unit
Flattens curls from sheets to prevent paper jams.
8. ADF double-feed detection kit
Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the ADF.
9. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
10. Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
11. Two-tray wide LCT
Holds up to 4,800 sheets of paper. You can load paper whose sizes are up to SRA3 or 13 × 191/5. You can
connect up to two two-tray wide LCTs.
12. Banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the two-tray wide LCT.
13. Multi bypass attachment kit
Attaches the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the two-tray wide LCT.
14. Bridge unit of two-tray wide LCT
Connects a two-tray wide LCT to an additional wide LCT.
15. Three-tray wide LCT
Holds up to 4,000 sheets of paper. You can load paper sizes up to SRA3 or 13 × 191/5.
16. LCT
Holds up to 4,550 sheets of paper.
17. Interface box
Allows you to connect extended options to the machine.
18. A3/11 × 17 tray unit
You can load A3, 11 × 17 or larger size paper in Tray 1 using this unit. If you install the A3/11 × 17 tray unit
on your machine, you cannot use it as a tandem tray.
An indicator on the front left side of the tray lights while paper is feeding.
19. Buffer pass unit
Cools copies or prints.
20. Perfect binder
Applies adhesive to the spine of gathered pages to bind them in a booklet.

89
 4. Getting Started

21. Finisher Bridge Unit

This option is required for connecting another manufacturer's finisher.
22. Finisher SR5110
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
23. SR5000 series output tray for banner sheet
Allows you to output paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8 mm (19.21 inches) or longer on Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
24. Attention light
The machine’s operation status is indicated by lights. This is optional for a Type 1 machine but is attached to
other models.
See page 85 "Guide to Functions of the Attention Light".
25. Shift tray
This tray is capable of sorting and stacking printed sheets by copy or print job.
26. Booklet Finisher SR5100
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
27. Finisher SR5090
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
28. Output jogger
Jogs the sheets delivered to the finisher shift tray

• You cannot install multiple finishers simultaneously.

• You cannot install the ring binder and perfect binder simultaneously.
• If you have connected two high capacity stackers, you cannot install the multi-folding unit, the ring
binder, or the perfect binder.
• You can install the multi-folding unit only if either Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 is
installed.

90
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

• You can install the ring binder or the perfect binder only if one of the following options is installed:
Finisher SR5110, Booklet Finisher SR5120, or the high capacity stacker.
• You can install the trimmer only if Booklet Finisher SR5120 is installed.
• The multi bypass tray (Tray A) can be attached only if either the LCT, the two-tray wide LCT, or the
three-tray wide LCT. However, you can attach the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the two-tray wide
LCT only if the multi bypass attachment kit is installed.

Removing prints from finisher during printing

This section describes how to suspend a large copy or print job when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
Depending on the image you are copying or printing, prints might not stack properly. If this happens,
suspend the job, remove the prints and then restart the job.
If Delivered to Finisher Shift Tray 1

1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 1.

EAQ128

1. [Suspend / Resume] key

2. [Remove Paper] key
2. Press the [Remove Paper] key.
3. After the tray is lowered, remove the delivered paper.

EAQ129

91
 4. Getting Started

4. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.

If Delivered to Finisher Shift Tray 2

1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 2.

EAQ126

1. [Suspend / Resume] key

2. Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray 2.

EAQ127

3. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.

When using the Z-fold function

To use the Z-fold function, you must attach the Z-fold support tray.
Finisher SR5110 and Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher shift tray
Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the two protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray.

92
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

EAQ130

Multi-folding unit

1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set
it in place.

CWR002

When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit, lift it up and slide
the tray to the left, and then lower it.

CWR003

When using the Letter Fold-out function

To use the Letter Fold-out function and the Multi-sheet Fold function at the same time, install the Z-fold
support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding unit for letter fold-out.

93
 4. Getting Started

CWR007

1. Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit

2. Output holding unit for letter fold-out

1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set it in
place.

CWR002

2. Pull out the output holding unit for letter fold-out.

CWR008

When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding
unit for letter fold-out, return each to their previous positions.

94
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

CWR009

When ejecting paper weighing less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120

When printing on paper weighing less than 52.2g/m2, set the Z-fold support tray that is provided with
the finisher on the finisher shift tray.

1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key on Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, and
then remove the delivered paper.
See page 91 "Removing prints from finisher during printing".
2. Pull out the extension tray on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.

EAQ138

95
 4. Getting Started

3. Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.

EAQ137

4. Press the [Suspend/Resume] key to resume printing.

When ejecting carbonless paper weighing less than 63g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120

When printing on carbonless paper weighing less than 63g/m2, set the Z-fold support tray that is
provided with the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
For details about how to attach the Z-fold support tray, see page 95 "When ejecting paper weighing
less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120".

• Depending on the brand of the paper being used, the paper may be ejected normally even when
the Z-fold support tray is not attached.
• When the Z-fold support tray is attached, output sheets may not be stacked neatly.

When ejecting envelopes to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120

When printing on envelopes (with triangular flap) and ejecting them to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120, set the Z-fold support tray that is provided with the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
For details about how to attach the Z-fold support tray, see page 95 "When ejecting paper weighing
less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120".

• When the Z-fold support tray is attached, the stack of the output sheets may not be aligned as
cleanly as when the support tray is not attached.

96
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

When Continuously Printing on Coated Paper a Large Number of Copies to be Ejected

to the Finisher Booklet Tray

When ejecting to Booklet Finisher SR5120 a large number of booklets printed on coated paper larger
than A4, fold down the finisher booklet tray as shown in the figure below.

DTY001

• The finisher booklet tray can be folded in two angles.

• The approximate number of copies that can be ejected when the finisher booklet tray is not folded
is as follows:
• When binding 2–5 sheets: 45 copies
• When binding 6–10 sheets: 23 copies
• When binding 11–15 sheets: 15 copies
• When binding 16–20 sheets: 10 copies
• When binding 21–30 sheets: 5 copies

When ejecting thick paper or envelopes to the upper tray of the high capacity stacker

Attach the supplied thick paper support tray when ejecting the following paper to the upper tray of the
high capacity stacker:
• Thick paper longer than the length of B4 JIS
• Envelopes that exceed 332 mm (13.1 inches) in length

97
 4. Getting Started

DWP023

Precautions for using Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher SR5100

• Remove printouts from Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher SR5100 by lifting them
straightforwardly from the left side. If you remove printouts at an angle or towards the front, the shift
tray may rise and catch them.

EAQ143

• When moving the finisher, do not hold the guide covers. Otherwise, the covers might be damaged.

EAQ144

1. Guide covers
• Do not hit the finisher (for instance, do not hit the surface of the finisher repeatedly to arrange stacks
of paper neatly).

98
 Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options

Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller

• OCR unit
Allows you to use the searchable PDF function. This is an option for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
• PostScript 3 unit
Allows you to print by Adobe PostScript 3 printer driver.
Allows you to output documents using the PDF Direct Print function, and store documents in PDF
format using Print from Storage Device function.
• XPS unit
Allows you to print XPS files.
• IPDS unit
Allows you to print using Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to communicate over wireless LAN.
• File format converter
Allows you to download the documents that are stored in the Document Server. This is an option for
Type 1, 2, and 3 machines. See "Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor",
Basic Operations.
• Printer controller
Allows you to print by Fiery controller.
You can only attach the file format converter or printer controller.
The wireless LAN board cannot be used together with the following components:
• Gigabit Ethernet port
• Interface box*1
*1 When used for connecting another manufacturer's finisher.

99
 4. Getting Started

Guide to the Names and Functions of the

Machine's Control Panel
You can use the copy function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

1 2 3 45 6

13 12 11 10

14
15

16 17
EAR134

100
 Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel

1. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See page 110 "How to Use the [Home] Screen" and page 123 "How to Use Each
Application".
2. [Check Status] key
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
3. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or the toner runs out.
4. [Energy Saver] key
Press to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode. When the machine is in Sleep mode, press the key again
to recover the machine from sleep. See page 104 "Saving Energy".
5. Energy saver indicator
When the machine is in Low Power mode, the energy saver indicator is lit. In Sleep mode, the energy saver
indicator flashes slowly.
6. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch.
7. Data In indicator (printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs from a computer. See Print.
8. [ ] key (Enter key)
Press to confirm values entered or items specified.
9. [Start] key
Press to start copying, printing, scanning, or sending.
10. [Clear] key
Press to delete a number entered.
11. [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning or printing.
12. Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies and data for the selected function.
13. Display adjustment keys
Allows you to adjust the displayed image.
See page 107 "Adjusting the Display".
14. Control panel reset key
Press to restart the control panel. Used when operating from the control panel becomes unresponsive.
15. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device. For details, see "Inserting/Removing a Memory
Storage Device", Preparation.

101
 4. Getting Started

16. Media access lamp

Lights up when an SD card is inserted in the media slot.
17. USB Host Interface
Connect a keyboard, mouse, or other USB device.

Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel

To improve usability, you can adjust the angle of the control panel.

1. Position the control panel at the horizontal angle that you require.

EAQ139

2. Position the control panel at the vertical angle that you require.

EAQ140

102
 Turning On/Off the Power

Turning On/Off the Power

You can use the ADF and the address list on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

Turning On/Off the Power

• Do not push the main power switch repeatedly.

• When you push the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds after it is confirmed that the main
power indicator has lit up or gone out.
• If the main power indicator does not light up or go out in 5 minutes after you push the main power
switch, contact your service representative.
The main power switch is on the top left of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off.
Confirm how much power the options draw, and then plug them into an outlet that is nearby but
separate from the outlet that the main machine is plugged into.

• This machine automatically enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode if you do not use it for a while.
For details, see page 104 "Saving Energy".

Turning On the Main Power

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.

CWW213

103
 4. Getting Started

• After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that the machine is
initializing. Do not switch the power off during this process. Initialization takes about 16 minutes.
However, the time for initialization may differ depending on which options are installed on the
machine.
• If the machine does not turn on even if you press the main power switch, open the front left cover
and make sure that the AC power switch is turned on. For details about the AC power switch, see
page 525 "Dos and Don'ts".
• Application icons appear on the [Home] screen as the applications start running.

Turning Off the Main Power

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.

• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.

1. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.

Saving Energy

This machine has the following energy saving functions.

Low Power mode
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, the display will turn off and
the machine goes into Low Power mode. The machine uses less electricity in Low Power mode.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Low Power mode
under [Low Power Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
You can change the machine's settings to enter Low Power mode when you press the [Energy
Saver] key. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Low Power mode, do one of the following:

104
 Turning On/Off the Power

• Lift the ADF

• Place an original in the ADF
• Press the [Check Status] key
Sleep mode
If the machine remains inactive for a specified period or the [Energy Saver] key is pressed, it enters
Sleep mode to further reduce the electricity it consumes. For details, see "System Settings", Device
Management.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Sleep mode, do one of the following:
• Lift the ADF
• Place an original in the ADF
• Press the [Energy Saver] key
• Press the [Check Status] key

• When the machine is in Low Power mode, the [Energy Saver] key is lit. In Sleep mode, the [Energy
Saver] key flashes slowly.
• The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When a warning message appears
• When paper is jammed
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing
• During communication with external equipment
• When the hard disk is active
• When the service call message appears
• When the ADF, machine's cover, or ADF cover are opened
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When one of the following screens is displayed:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management

105
 4. Getting Started

• Tray Paper Settings

• When the remote administration service notification screens is displayed.
• When data is being processed
• When a recipient is being registered in the address list
• When the sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
• When the screen of a document that was stored under the printer function appears (The
machine enters Low Power mode if this happens)
• When the internal cooling fan is active
• When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor

Transfer heater switch

If the machine's interior temperature is not sufficiently high—for instance, on a winter morning—the
transfer roller's resistance value may increase temporarily, resulting in image quality degradation. To
prevent this, the machine is equipped with a transfer heater.

1. Open the front left cover.

2. If the machine's interior temperature is not sufficiently high—for instance, on a winter
morning—turn on the transfer heater switch.
Otherwise, set it to the standby position.

EAR133

1. Transfer heater switch

3. Close the front left cover.

106
 Adjusting the Display

Adjusting the Display

You can adjust the color, brightness and display position of the control panel screen using the display
adjustment keys in the bottom right part of the control panel.
To adjust the display and unlock it, press and hold the Up and Down buttons at the same time for five
seconds.

• The setting is saved automatically if you do not perform any operation for more than 10 seconds
while configuring the setting.

1 2 3

DWP083

1. Mode button
Press this button to start or end display adjustment. This button also selects or deselects the setting item when
you are adjusting the display.
2. Up button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item above when moving between the items.
The value increases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.
3. Down button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item below when moving between the items.
The value decreases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.

107
 4. Getting Started

Display adjustment screen

Setting range Initial

Setting item Content
value

Contrast Adjust the overall contrast of all colors in RGB 0-255 55

ContrastRed Adjust the contrast in red (digital setting) 0-255 50

ContrastGreen Adjust the contrast in green (digital setting) 0-255 50

ContrastBlue Adjust the contrast in blue (digital setting) 0-255 50

Filter Select the spatial filter setting Non, 0-4 Non

Gamma Specify the gamma value setting 0.1-3.0 1.0

Backlight Adjust the brightness 0-31 31

InputSelect Select an image source to display DVI/RGB DVI

Adjust the horizontal position to display the 5-253 128

OSD HPosition
display adjustment screen (OSD)

Adjust the vertical position to display the 63-210 128

OSD VPosition
display adjustment screen (OSD)

Specify the opacity setting of the display 0-7 0

OSD Effect
adjustment screen (OSD)

108
 Adjusting the Display

Setting range Initial

Setting item Content
value

Specify the time to wait before closing the Non, 5-60*1 30

OSD Timeout
display adjustment screen (OSD)

Restore Default Select to initialize the settings - -

Save Data Select to save the data - -

Select to cancel selection, or hide the display - -

Cancel
adjustment screen (OSD)

Status Select to display the status screen - -

*1 Select the time from 5-10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60.

109
 4. Getting Started

How to Use the [Home] Screen

You can use the copy function, Document Server function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1,
2, or 3 machines only.
The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Langs. Widget to it. The [Home] screen and the screen of each function may
differ depending on the optional units that are installed.
To display the [Home] screen, press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1 2 3 4

15 6

7 7

14 13 12 11 10 9 8
EAQ101

1. Machine status display

Displays the machine status.
2. Job status display
Displays the status of the first job in the job list.
3. Remaining toner icon
Shows the remaining amount of toner.

110
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

4. Logged-in user icon

This key is displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press the icon while [Login] is displayed,
the login screen appears. If you are already logged in to the machine, the logged-in user name is displayed.
Press the icon while you are logged-in to log out from the machine.
For details about how to log in and out, see page 145 "Logging In the Machine".
5. Function keys
For details, see page 113 "Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
6. Application list icon
Press to display the application list. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen.
To use an application displayed in the [Widgets] tab and [Program] tab, create a shortcut for the application
on the [Home] screen. For details, see "Customizing the [Home] Screen ", Preparation.
7. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen.
8. [Counter]
Press to display or print the total number of printed sheets. See page 547 "Counter".
9. [Media Information] / /
Press to remove the inserted SD card or USB flash memory device from the media slot. For details, see
"Removing an SD Card" or "Removing a USB Flash Memory Device", Preparation.
10. Remote operation message
Displays the connection status when you are connected to the control panel from a computer. For details
about "Remote Panel Operation", see page 78 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel".
11. [Menu]
Displays the menu screen of the application you are using. Depending on the application you are using, this
key may be disabled. You can also press this key in the [Home] screen to restore the [Home] screen's settings
to their defaults.
12. [Home]
Press to display the [Home] screen.
13. [Return]
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications are used.
Depending on the application you are using, this key may be disabled. You can specify whether this key is
enabled or not in some applications. For details about the settings, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
14. System message
Displays messages from the machine system and applications.
15. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see page 112 "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen".

111
 4. Getting Started

You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Preparation.

• You can change the [Home] screen's wallpaper. For details, see "Changing the [Home] Screen's
Wallpaper", Preparation.
• You can switch modes by pressing icons on the [Home] screen. You can also switch modes by
pressing the function keys.
• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• While scanning an original using the scanner function
• When accessing the following screens:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Current Job / Job History
• During interrupt copying
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See "Screen Features", Device Management.

Main Icons on the [Home] Screen

The following icons are displayed on the [Home] screen as a factory default:

Icon Description

Copier (Classic) Press to display the copier function's screen.

For details about how to use the copier function, see "Copy/Document
Server", Basic Operations.

Scanner (Classic) Press to display the scanner function's screen.

For details about how to use the scanner function, see page 377
"Scan".

Printer (Classic) Allows you to make settings for using the machine as a printer easily.
For details about how to use the printer function, see page 361 "Print".

112
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

Icon Description

Document Server Press to store or print documents on the machine's hard disk.
For details about how to use the Document Server function, see
"Copy/Document Server", Basic Operations.

User Guide Press to display the manuals for the machine.

User Tools Press to display the screen for the machine's initial settings.

Printer Status Press to display the device information screen. For details, see
page 114 "[Printer Status] Screen".

Tray Paper Settings Press to display the Tray Paper Settings screen. For details, see
page 115 "[Tray Paper Settings] Screen".

Adjustment Settings for Press to display the Adjustment Settings for Operators screen. For
Operators details, see page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".

You can add icons to the [Home] screen to customize the machine. For details about adding icons to the
[Home] screen, see "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen", Preparation.

Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys

You can switch modes by pressing the function keys on the top of the screen.
1

EAR102

113
 4. Getting Started

1. Function Keys
You can use the function keys when [Function Key] in Screen Features is enabled. See "Screen Features",
Device Management.
[Printer Status], [Tray Paper Settings] and [Adjustment Settings for Operators] are fixed items, and cannot be
changed. For detail about each function, see page 114 "[Printer Status] Screen", page 115 "[Tray Paper
Settings] Screen", and page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
You can assign frequently used functions to the 6 other keys to the right.
You can register often used functions to the function keys by using the following procedure:

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Screen Device Settings].
5. Press [Function Key Settings].
6. Select the [Function Key] check box.
7. Select from [Function Key 1]-[Function Key 6] to which you want to assign a function.
8. Press [Allocated Function].
9. Select a function you want to register from the list.
10. Press [Display Name].
11. Enter the function name to display on the key.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
The function key is registered to the top of the screen.

[Printer Status] Screen

Press [Printer Status] among the function keys to display the device information screen.
In the device information screen, you can view the status of the supplies and paper in the main unit and
in each optional unit, and the list of jobs.

114
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

4
1

EAR103

1. Supply / Paper Information

Displays errors prompting to replenish supplies or notifying the waste toner bottle being full, and information
such as the set status and remaining amount of toner. Also displays the settings and remaining amount of
paper in each tray.
2. Job Information
Displays the list of jobs.
3. [Supply Status]
Press [Supply Status] to view the Paper, Maintenance Info, Data Storage, Machine Address Info, and Inquiry
information.
For details, see "Checking Machine Status and Settings", Preparation.
4. Machine Front View
Shows the machine configuration, the tray used for printing, error status, and other information.

[Tray Paper Settings] Screen

Press [Tray Paper Settings] among the function keys to display the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
In the [Tray Paper Settings] screen, you can specify the paper settings for the trays and interposer, and
configure the settings for functional papers.

115
 4. Getting Started

1 2

EAR104

1. [Paper Tray] tab

Displays the list that shows the setting details of each tray and interposer.
The icon indicates the tray that is configured manually or does not support duplex printing.
The icon indicates the tray that is manually configured or excluded from the source of automatic paper
selection.
The [Allocate Paper] screen is displayed when you select a tray. If you select the interposer, the [Interposer
Settings] screen is displayed.
For details about the paper settings for the paper tray, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
2. [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab
Displays the list of settings for front cover, back cover, designation, slip, and separation sheets.
When you select a functional paper, the functional paper settings screen is displayed.
3. The machine front view
Displays information such as the machine configuration, tray used for printing, error status, and other
information.
4. [CustomPaper Management]
Displays the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
For details about the [Custom Paper Management] screen, see page 40 "How to Use the [Custom Paper
Management] Screen".

116
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

[Information] Screen

To raise awareness of resource conservation, you can configure the machine to display the reduction in
paper usage.
When user authentication is enabled, the screen is displayed when you log in to the machine. When
user authentication is not enabled, the screen is displayed after returning from Sleep mode or after a
system reset. The [Information] screen appears when the power is turned on, regardless of the
authentication settings.
1 2 3

EAR105

1. [Prev.] / [Crnt.]
Press to switch between the [Information] screen of the previous count period and that of the current count
period.
2. Paper Reduction
Shows the amount of paper saved by using the duplex and combine printing functions. The figure indicates the
percentage of paper saved from the total of all the paper used. As the figures become greater, the number of
the trees increases. If the paper reduction ratio exceeds a certain level, the trees will bear fruit.
Press the balloon to display the following items:
• Total Print Pages:
Total number of pages printed in the current count period is displayed.
• 2 sided Utilization:
The ratio of 2-sided prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
• Combine Utilization:
The ratio of combined prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
3. [Close]
Press this to close the [Information] screen and return to operation.
4. Count periods
The current and previous count periods are displayed.

117
 4. Getting Started

5. Message
A message from the administrator is displayed.

• Depending on the machine settings, the [Information] screen may not be displayed. For details, see
"Managing Eco-friendly Counter", Security Guide.
• You can also use Web Image Monitor to check the usage status. For details about how to check
them, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• Under [Eco-friendly Counter Period / Administrator Message] in [System Settings], you can check
"Count Period", "Administrator Message", "Display Information Screen", and "Display Time". Only
the administrator can change the settings. For details, see "Managing Eco-friendly Counter",
Security Guide.

[Web Browser] Screen

The machine has a web browser that allows you to view Web pages.
You must first configure the network settings in [Screen Features]. For details about the settings, see
"Screen Features", Device Management.
To start a web browser on the control panel, press , and then press the [Web Browser] icon on the
[APPS] tab.
1 2 3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

EAR107

1. Tab
Press to switch screens. To display the URL bar, press the tab of the Web page.

118
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

2. URL bar
Press this bar to enter the URL of a Web page. You can type the URL of a Web page that you want to display
by pressing the address bar.
3. Menu
Press [Menu] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center to open this menu.
4. [Refresh]/[Stop]
Press to refresh a Web page.
While a Web page is refreshing, [Stop] appears.
5. [Forward]
Press to return to the previous Web page after pressing [Return] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
6. [New tab]
Press to open a new tab.
7. [New incognito tab]
Press to open a new tab that leaves no record in the browser history or search history.
8. [Share page]
Press to share Web pages with other devices.
9. [Find on page]
Press to type a word and search for it on the current Web page.
10. [Request desktop site]
Press to switch the Web page display mode from the mobile version to the desktop version.
11. [Save for offline reading]
Press to save the Web page for offline reading.
12. [Page info]
Press to display the URL or server certificate of the Web page that you are accessing.
13. [Print]
Press to specify the printing conditions such as paper sizes and duplex printing. For details, see "Printing a
Web Page", Preparation.
14. [Save PDF File]
Press to save the PDF file displayed on the browser. You can save the file to an SD card or USB flash memory
device. For detail, see "Saving PDF files downloaded from Web pages", Preparation.
15. [Settings]
Press to specify security settings and other browser settings. For details, see "Browser Settings", Preparation.

• For precautions on accessing external servers using the Web Browser, see "Checking the security
of the browser function", Preparation.

119
 4. Getting Started

Possible Operations on the Application Screen

This section describes the home screen, and explains the operations that can be performed on the
operation screen of some applications.
• Pinch-in
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then pinch the fingers together to zoom out the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DWP061

• Pinch-out
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then spread the fingers apart to zoom in the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DWP062

• Flick
Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen to switch between screens.

DWP063

• Long tap

120
 How to Use the [Home] Screen

Place your finger on the screen and hold it there until the next screen appears. You can display the
menu screen of the application you are using.

DWP064

• Drag
Slide your finger while pressing the screen. You can move an icon to where you want to place it on
the screen.

DWP065

• While using applications other than any of Standard Application, you may enter text for the
operations explained above.

Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Language & input].
5. Press [Change Language].
6. Select the language you want to display.
7. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

121
 4. Getting Started

• You can specify which display languages are available in [Select Switchable Languages]. For
details, see "Screen Features", Device Management.

System Reset

After finishing a job, the machine waits a specified length of time and then restores its settings to the
default values specified under Function Priority. This function is called "System Reset".
For the procedure for specifying default settings under Function Priority, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
To change the length of time that the machine waits before restoring its settings to their default values,
use the System Auto Reset Timer setting. See "Timer Settings", Device Management.

122
 How to Use Each Application

How to Use Each Application

You can use the copy function, Document Server function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1,
2, or 3 machines only.
You can open the function screens by pressing icons such as [Copier (Classic)], [Printer (Classic)], or
[Scanner (Classic)] on the [Home] screen.
There are two types of application screens.
Standard Application Screen
Functions and settings that are used frequently are shown on the top screen. Flick the screen up or
down to select a setting item. When you select an item, the pull-down menu appears, or the setting
item pops up. For details about operations on this screen, see page 126 "How to Use the [Copier]
Screen", page 127 "How to Use the [Document Server] Screen", page 131 "How to Use the
[Printer] Screen", and page 132 "How to Use the [Scanner] Screen".
Other Application Screen
Other functions and the application for configuring and adjusting the machine are shown on this
screen. Printer status, tray paper settings, operator adjustment, other items are available on the
other application screen.

Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Standard
Application

The display panel shows the operation status, messages, and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by lightly pressing
them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like . Keys
appearing as cannot be used.

123
 4. Getting Started

Machine Features screen

EAR108

1. Function screen
You can customize the default settings of the machine system, copier, Document Server, printer, and
scanner function. See "System Settings", Device Management, "Copier / Document Server Features"
Preparation, "Printer Features" Preparation, or "Scanner Features" Preparation.
2. [User Tools]
Press this to use the following items:
• Screen Features
Press to customize the default settings of the operating system installed on the control panel. See
"Screen Features", Device Management.
• Machine Features
Press to display Machine Features screen.
• Counter
Press to check or print the counter value. See "Counter", Maintenance and Management.
• Inquiry
Press to find out where to order expendable supplies and where to call when a malfunction occurs.
• Address Book Management
Press to display the Address Book.
Standard applications' screen
You can use [Program], [Interrupt], and [Sample Copy] on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

124
 How to Use Each Application

1 2 3 4 5

EAQ109

1. [Simple Scrn]
Press to switch to the simple screen. See page 144 "Switching Screen Patterns".
2. [Reset]
Press to clear the current settings.
3. [Program]
Press to register frequently used settings, or to recall registered settings. See "Registering Frequently Used
Functions", Preparation.
4. [Interrupt]
Press to make interrupt copies. See "Interrupt Copy", Basic Operations.
5. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a single set of copies or prints to check print quality before making multiple sets. See
"Sample Copy", "Sort", Basic Operations.

125
 4. Getting Started

How to Use the [Copier] Screen

1 2 3 4 5

7
EAR110

1. Operational status and messages

Displays operational status and messages.
2. Frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios
You can register up to two frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios other than the preset ratios under
[Reproduction Ratio] in the User Tools menu. For details, see "Reproduction Ratio", Preparation.
3. [Store File]
Allows you to store documents in the Document Server.
4. Original, Quantity, and Copy
Displays the numbers of originals scanned, copies set, and copies made.
5. [Check Modes]
Press the key to confirm the current settings.
6. Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch, and Fold functions
Displays settings that can be selected for sorting, stacking, stapling, punching, and folding copies.
You can register frequently used staple, punch, and fold functions under [Input / Output] in the User Tools
menu. For details, see "Input / Output", Preparation.
7. Available functions
Press a function to display its menu. When you select a function, is displayed under the key.
8. Original and scanning settings
Use this area to specify the original type, image density level, and other settings.

126
 How to Use Each Application

How to Use the [Document Server] Screen

You can organize documents stored in the Document Server in folders.

You can view a list of the documents in a folder by touching the folder key.

Folder list screen

1 2

6 4

EAR111

File list screen

8 9

10

13
11

12 EAR112

1. Operational status and messages

Displays operational status and messages.

127
 4. Getting Started

2. [No.], [Folder Name], and [Created Date/Time]

Press the item to sort the folders. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
3. [New Folder]
Press to create a new folder.
4. [Edit Folder]
Press to change the folder name or password, or to delete the folder.
5. Folder keys
Press to display the list of stored files in the folder. If a password has been specified for a folder, a lock icon
appears to the left of the folder name.
6. Keys for searching for folders
You can search for folders by number or name.
7. List and Thumbnails
Displays keys for switching the display between list and thumbnails.
8. [User Name], [File Name], and [Date]
Press the item to sort the files. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
9. [Up One Level]
Press to display the list of folders.
10. Page, Quantity, and Print
Displays the number of originals stored in memory, number of sets to be printed, and prints made.
11. Operation keys
Press to operate stored files.
If the file you want to select is not displayed in the list, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll the screen.
12. Icons
Displays an icon that indicates the function used to store the document. If a password has been specified for a
file, a lock icon appears to the left of the user name for the file.
The following icons appear in the list of the Document Server to indicate the function used to store a document.

Function Icon

Copier

Printer

13. Keys for searching for files

You can search for documents by user name or file name.
[Thumbnail] screen
In thumbnail view, reduced versions of the stored documents are displayed. This is useful for
checking a document's content on the file list screen.

128
 How to Use Each Application

• Some stored documents may not be displayed, depending on the security settings.
• For details about how to check the files stored using the scanner function, see page 137 "[Select
Stored File] screen under the scanner function".

[Preview] screen under the Document Server function

This section explains the items that appear on the [Preview] screen and how to preview stored
documents.
The [Preview] screen denotes the screen that allows confirming contents of the scanned documents.
To preview stored documents, select the documents you want to preview on the file list screen, and then
press [Preview].

129
 4. Getting Started

8
3

7 6 5 EAR113

1. [Exit]
Closes the preview display.
2. Display File
Displays the file name.
If you have selected two or more files for preview, press [Switch] to switch between them.
3. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages and page size.
4. [Switch]
Flips the page of the selected file.
5. Display Position
Indicates the location of the displayed preview image when the image is enlarged.
6. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Moves the display area in the direction indicated by the arrow.
7. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]
Scales the displayed page down or up.
8. Preview image
Displays a preview of scanned documents. Double-tapping the image allows you to enlarge and display it at
the original magnification. The position where you tapped the image is displayed in the center of the preview
area when the preview image is magnified.

• When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview screen function may become
unusable.

130
 How to Use Each Application

• The preview display is also not available when the paper size is larger than A3 or if the image file is
corrupt. If the image file is corrupt, store it again.

How to Use the [Printer] Screen

1 2 3

5
6

7
8

9
EAR114

1. Operational status or messages

Displays current machine status, such as "Ready", "Offline", and "Printing...". Information about the print job
(user ID and document name) appears in this section.
2. Paper tray status indicators
Displays paper tray settings.
3. [Print from Memory Storage Device]
Press to display the screen for printing files stored on memory storage devices directly.
4. [Job Reset]
Press to cancel the current print job.
If you press it when the Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is canceled.
5. [Job Operation]
Press to suspend a job being processed.
6. [Form Feed]
Press to print all the data left in the machine's input buffer.
7. [Spooling Job List]
Press to display spooled jobs.

131
 4. Getting Started

8. [Error Log]
Press to display the error logs of print jobs sent from a computer.
9. [Print Jobs]
Press to display print jobs sent from a computer.

How to Use the [Scanner] Screen

[Email] screen

This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

14

10

13

12

11
DWP133

1. [Reg. No.]
Press this key to specify the destination using a five-digit registration number.
2. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
3. Email / Folder
Press these tabs to switch between the [Email] screen and [Scan to Folder] screen.
• When (Email) is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When (Folder) is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
Switch the screen also when sending the same files by both e-mail and Scan to Folder.
4. E-mail icon
Indicates that the [Email] screen is displayed.

132
 How to Use Each Application

5. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, press this key, and then enter the e-mail addresses
using the soft keyboard that appears.
6. [Recent]
Press this key to select destinations that have been recently specified using [Manual Entry]. If there are multiple
recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
7. Switch screens
Press to switch to the [WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen or the [DSM scanner] screen. If you are using the
WSD scanner, [WSD Dest.] appears. If you are using the DSM scanner, [DSM Destination] appears.
8. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
9. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
10. Destination list
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press
[ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
The ( or ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
11. [Text], [Subject], [Security], [Sender Name], and [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether or not
to use Message Disposition Notification.
12. [Select Stored File]
Allows you to send the documents stored in the Document Server.
13. [Send File Type / Name]
Press to specify settings such as file format and file name.
14. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.

[Scan to Folder] screen

This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Folder.

133
 4. Getting Started

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

14

10

13

12

11
DWP134

1. [Reg. No.]
Press to specify a destination using a five-digit registration number.
2. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
3. Email / Folder
Press to switch between the [Scan to Folder] screen and [Email] screen.
• When (Email) is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When (Folder) is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
Also switch the screen when sending a file simultaneously by both Scan to Folder and e-mail.
4. Scan to Folder icon
Shows that the [Scan to Folder] screen is displayed.
5. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, specify Scan to Folder destinations on the screen
displayed by pressing this key.
6. [Recent]
Press this key to select destinations that have been recently specified using [Manual Entry]. If there is more than
one recent destination, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
7. Switch screens
Press to switch to the [WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen or the [DSM scanner] screen. If you are using the
WSD scanner, [WSD Dest.] appears. If you are using the DSM scanner, [DSM Destination] appears.
8. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.

134
 How to Use Each Application

9. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
10. Destination list
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
11. [Text], [Subject], [Security], [Sender Name], and [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, e-mail security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether
or not to use Message Disposition Notification. The entries will be used for e-mail transmission when sending
files simultaneously by Scan to Folder and e-mail. For details, see "Sending Scanned Documents to a Client
Computer", Basic Operations.
12. [Select Stored File]
Allows you to send the documents stored in the Document Server.
13. [Send File Type / Name]
Press to specify settings such as file format and file name.
14. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.

[WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen

This section explains the layout of the screen that allows you to send scan files using WSD (Push Type).
1 2 3

DWP135

1. [Update]
Press this key to update the destination list.

135
 4. Getting Started

2. WSD
This tab is highlighted whenever the machine is used as a WSD scanner.
3. [WSD Dest.]
Press to switch to the [Email] screen or [Scan to Folder] screen.
4. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
5. Destination field
The specified destination is displayed here. You can specify only one destination.
6. Destination list
The list of available destinations is displayed here.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to move through the list.
7. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.

[DSM scanner] screen

This section explains the layout of the screen that allows you to send scan files using DSM.
1 2

DWP136

1. DSM
This tab is highlighted whenever the machine is used as a DSM scanner.
2. [DSM Destination]
Press to switch to the [Email] screen or [Scan to Folder] screen.
3. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.

136
 How to Use Each Application

4. Destination field
The specified destination is displayed here. You can specify only one destination.
5. Destination list
The list of available destinations is displayed here.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to move through the list.
6. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.

[Select Stored File] screen under the scanner function

This section describes how the list of stored files is displayed.

To display stored files, press [Select Stored File] on the initial scanner display. You can organize files
stored in folders. You can view a list of the files in a folder by touching the folder key.

Folder list screen

1 2

7 3

4
5
6

EAR145

137
 4. Getting Started

File list screen

8 9 10

11
12

13
15

14 EAR117

1. [No.], [Folder Name], and [Created Date/Time]

Press the item to use to sort the folders. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
2. [Cancel]
Press to return to the previous screen.
3. [New Folder]
Press to create new folder.
4. [Edit Folder]
Press to change the folder name or password, or to delete the folder.
5. Folder keys
Press to display the list of stored files in the folder. If a password has been specified for a folder, a lock icon
( ) appears to the left of the folder name.
6. Keys for searching for folders
You can search for folders by number or name.
7. List/Thumbnails
You can select whether to display stored files as a list or as thumbnails.
8. [Send]
Press this to send a stored file by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
9. [Manage / Delete File]
Press this to delete stored files or change the file data.
10. [User Name], [File Name], and [Date]
Press to sort the files using the selected item. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort. However, the
files cannot be sorted in reverse delivery.

138
 How to Use Each Application

11. [Details]
Press this to display details about the selected file.
12. [Preview]
Press this to display a preview of the selected file. For details, see "Checking a stored file selected from the
list", Basic Operations.
13. List of stored files
Displays the list of stored files.
If the file you want to select is not displayed in the list, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll the screen.
14. Icons
If a password has been specified for a file, a lock icon ( )appears to the left of the user name for the file.
Displays an icon that indicates the color mode of the document.

Color mode Icon

Black & White, Gray scale

Full color

15. Keys for searching for files

You can search for documents by user name or file name.

• Depending on the security setting, some files may not appear in the list.
• Files stored under functions other than the scanner function do not appear on this screen.

[Check Modes] screen under the scanner function

Use the [Check Modes] screen to check scanning and transmission settings.
Pressing [Check Modes] switches the screen from the initial scanner display to the [Check Modes]
screen.

139
 4. Getting Started

[Check Modes] screen

1 2

5
DWP139

1. Transmission function icon

Displays the icon of the transmission function in use.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
The ( or ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
2. Sender and destination
Displays the sender and transmission destinations.
3. Send
Displays transmission settings such as sender and subject.
You can also check the security settings (encryption and signature).
4. Store File Setting
Displays settings for storing documents selected in [Store File].
5. [Expand Group Dest.]
Press to display the members of the group, when a group is specified as the destination.
6. Original
Displays Scan Settings, Original Feed Type, and other scanning settings.

• While this machine is being used as a WSD scanner, only the settings specified directly on the
machine can be displayed.

140
 How to Use Each Application

[Preview] screen under the scanner function

Use the [Preview] screen to check that originals have been scanned correctly.
This section explains about the [Preview] screen that can be used before sending files by e-mail or Scan
to Folder, or the DSM scanner.
Before you start scanning, press [Preview]. If you scan originals while [Preview] is selected, the [Preview]
screen appears.
You can start or cancel sending the files after checking the preview and the scan settings used for
scanning.
1 2

9 4
5

8 7 6
DWP140

1. [Cancel Sending]
Press to close a preview and interrupt a transmission.
2. [Send]
Press to close a preview and continue a transmission.
3. Display File
Displays a file's name and size.
4. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode.
5. [Switch]
Press to change the page of the scanned original that is displayed.
6. Display Position
Displays the position of an image when enlarged.

141
 4. Getting Started

7. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Press to shift the displayed area.
8. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]
Press to reduce or enlarge the displayed preview.
9. Preview image
Displays a preview of scanned documents. Double-tapping the image allows you to enlarge and display it at
the original magnification. The position where you tapped the image is displayed in the center of the preview
area when the preview image is magnified.

• Preview is not available if you are scanning by WSD. View the scanned images on the destination
computer instead.
• Preview is not available if a file is scanned using [Store to HDD]. You can view a stored file using the
[Preview] screen displayed from the list of stored files. For details about viewing a stored file, see
"Checking a stored file selected from the list", Basic Operations.
• Preview is not available if you select [High Compression PDF] as the file type.
• Preview might not be displayed if scanning failed or the image file is corrupted. If this is the case, scan
the original again.

[Scanned Files Status] screen under the scanner function

This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the [Scanned Files Status] screen.
Use the [Scanned Files Status] screen to check e-mail transmission and Scan to Folder results.
Press [Scanned Files Status] to display the [Scanned Files Status] screen.

Up to nine transmission results are displayed at the same time. Press [ ] or [ ] to switch between results.

142
 How to Use Each Application

[Scanned Files Status] screen

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8
9

10

DWP141

1. Date / Time
Displays the time and date transmission was specified by this machine or the time and date when
Completed, Error, or Cancelled was confirmed.
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission function used.
The ( ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
3. Destination
Displays the transmission destination.
If you have selected multiple destinations, the first selected destination is displayed.
Other destinations appear as "+ X" (X indicates the number of destinations.) when sending files by e-
mail.
4. Sender
Displays the sender name.
5. File Name
Displays the stored file name of files that are simultaneously sent and stored, or of stored files that are
sent.
6. Errors Descriptions
Press to display likely causes of the scanner function errors.
7. Status
Displays one of the following transmission statuses: Completed, Trnsmtg., Waiting..., Error, or Cancelled.
8. [Cancel]
To cancel transmission, select a file whose status is "Waiting...", and then press [Cancel].

143
 4. Getting Started

9. [Print List]
Press to print transmission results.
10. [ ]/[ ]
Press to scroll the screen.

• You cannot check scanner function transmission results in the [Job History] screen. To check
transmission results, press [Scanned Files Status].
• Depending on security settings, some transmission results might not be displayed.

Switching Screen Patterns

This section explains how to switch to the simple screen and the keys that are displayed.
Only the main functions can be used.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

1. Press [Simple Scrn] on the upper left of the screen.

This illustration shows the copier function's simple screen.

EAR119

1. [Key Color]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is effective on the simple screen only.

• To return to the initial display, press the same key used in Step 1.

144
 Logging In the Machine

Logging In the Machine

When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication

screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.

• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see "Configuring User Authentication", Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".

• If authentication fails, the "Authentication has failed." message appears. Check that the Login User
Name and Login Password are correct.

User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel

If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.

1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].

• To log out, press the [Energy Saver] key after jobs are completed, or press and hold [Reset].

145
 4. Getting Started

User Code Authentication Using a Printer Driver

If User Code Authentication is active, specify the User Code in the printer properties of the printer driver.
For details, see the printer driver Help.

• When logged in through User Code Authentication, you do not have to log out.

Logging In Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.

2. Press [User Name].

146
 Logging In the Machine

3. Enter a login user name.

4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a login password.
6. Press [Login].

• If authentication fails, the "Cannot log in." message appears. Check that the Login User Name and
Login Password are correct.
• When User Code Authentication is active, a different screen appears. See page 145 "User Code
Authentication Using the Control Panel".

Logging Out Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.

1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.

2. Press [OK].

147
 4. Getting Started

Logging In Using an IC Card

Log in to the machine by waving an IC card over the machine when Quick Card Authentication is
specified.

• Wave only one IC card over the machine at a time.

When using an IC card registered with your login user name and password:

1. Wave it over the NFC card reader.

DWP047

You will log in to the machine.

When using an IC card not registered with your login user name and password:

1. Wave it over the NFC card reader.

DWP047

The registration screen is displayed.

2. Enter the login user name and password registered to the machine's address book.
3. Press [Register].
4. Press [Exit].
5. Wave the card over the NFC card reader.
You will log in to the machine.

148
 Logging In the Machine

• If a user waves an IC card over a machine another user is logged in to, the user who logged in
previously is logged out and the newer user logs in.
• You can also log in to the machine by pressing [Login Using Keyboard] and entering your login
user name and password.

Logging Out Using an IC Card

Log out from the machine by waving your IC card over the machine when Quick Card Authentication is
specified.

• Wave only one IC card over the machine at a time.

1. Wave your IC card over the NFC card reader.

DWP047

You will log out from the machine.

• You can also log out from the machine by pressing [Logout] in the top right corner of the screen.

Using a Smart Device to Log in to the MFP

When operating a machine for which user authentication is specified, you can log in to the machine
without entering a user name and password by holding your smart device near its operation panel.
For details about RICOH Smart Device Connector, see the manuals for RICOH Smart Device Connector.

• To use this function, enable the Quick Card Authentication function and Bluetooth Authentication
Plugin.

149
 4. Getting Started

• Register the smart device to the MFP using the Quick Card Authentication function before using this
function.
• If the machine's Bluetooth setting is enabled and Quick Card Authentication is set to "Bluetooth",
you can log in to the machine by holding a smart device over the operation panel.
• To use a smart device, it is necessary to enable the Bluetooth setting and start RICOH Smart Device
Connector.
• The smart device's hardware and operating system must support Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).

1. Check that the Bluetooth function of the smart device is enabled.

2. On the operation panel of the machine, display the authentication screen of Quick Card
Authentication.
3. On the menu of RICOH Smart Device Connector, flick the screen to the left or right to
select [Login Machine].
4. Press [Login / Logout].
5. Touch the smart device to the Bluetooth label on the operation panel of the machine.
The smart device is connected with the machine, and login is now complete.

• You cannot log in to the MFP by holding the smart device near its operation panel while the MFP is
in Sleep mode.
• If a user waves a smart device over a machine another user is logged in to, the user who logged in
previously is logged out and the newer user logs in.

Using a Smart Device to Log out from the MFP

If the machine's Bluetooth setting is enabled and Quick Card Authentication is set to "Bluetooth", you can
log out from the machine by holding the smart device over the operation panel.

1. Touch the smart device to the Bluetooth label on the operation panel of the machine.
You will be logged out from the machine.

• You can also log out from the machine by pressing [Logout] in the top right corner of the screen.

Auto Logout Function

This machine has an auto logout function.

If the machine is idle for a specified period, the user is automatically logged out.

150
 Logging In the Machine

Logging In Using a Driver

Enter your login user name and password as registered in the machine. You need only do this the first
time you access the machine.
The procedure is explained using Windows 10 as an example.
Logging in using a printer driver

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System].

2. Click [Control Panel].
3. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
5. Click the [Advanced Options] tab.
6. Select the [User Authentication] check box.
7. If you want to encrypt the login password, click [Driver Encryption Key...].
If you do not want to encrypt the password, proceed to Step 10.
8. Enter the driver encryption key already set on the machine.
9. Click [OK] to close the [Driver Encryption Key] dialog box.
10. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
11. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing preferences].
The printing preferences dialog box appears.
12. Specify the user authentication setting.
13. Enter a login user name and login password already set on the machine or the server
for user authentication.
Be sure to enter the same login user name and login password that is registered on the
machine or the server.
If you do not enter a valid login user name and login password, printing will not start.
14. Click [OK] to close the [Authentication] dialog box.
15. Click [OK] to close the printing preferences dialog box.

• Depending on the application in use, the properties specified in this procedure may not take
effect.
• If you log in using the driver, you do not need to log out when you finish.

151
 4. Getting Started

Logging In Using Web Image Monitor

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine via Web Image Monitor.

1. Open a web browser.

2. Enter "[Link] machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter a Login User Name and Login Password, and then click [Login].
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved. If you do not want to save them, configure your web browser's settings so that this
information is not saved.

• For User Code Authentication, enter a User Code in the [Login User Name] box, and then click
[Login].
• The procedure may differ depending on the web browser used.

Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine via Web Image Monitor.

1. Click [Logout].

• Delete the cache memory of a web browser after logging out.

User Lockout Function

This machine has a User Lockout function.

If an incorrect password is entered the number of times specified by the administrator, the User Lockout
function prevents further login attempts under the same user name.
Even if the locked out user enters the correct password later, authentication will fail and it will not be
possible to use the machine.
For details about releasing a locked out user, see "User Lockout Function", Security Guide.

Changing the Login Password

You can use alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering login user passwords.
You can register up to 128 single-byte characters.

152
 Logging In the Machine

The passwords are case-sensitive. Keep this in mind when registering them.

• Do not disclose the password to outsiders. Similarly, do not write the password down and leave it
where others can see it.
• Change the password periodically.
• Make the password difficult to guess.
Password Policy
This machine has a password policy.
Only passwords meeting the specified criteria for level of complexity and minimum number of
characters can be registered. For details about the criteria, see "Specifying the Extended Security
Functions", Security Guide.
Passwords can contain the following characters:
• Upper case letters: A to Z (26 characters)
• Lower case letters: a to z (26 characters)
• Numbers: 0 to 9 (10 characters)
• Symbols: (space) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _` { | } ~ (33 characters)
Some characters are not available, regardless of whether their codes are entered using the
keyboard or the control panel.
Changing the login password using the control panel

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [Login] twice.
5. Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
6. Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press [Address Book Management].
9. Select the user.
10. Press [Auth. Info].
11. Press [Change] for [Login Password].
12. Enter a new login password, and then press [OK].
13. If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then press
[OK].
14. Press [OK].

153
 4. Getting Started

15. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.

16. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Changing the login password using Web Image Monitor

1. Open a web browser.

2. Enter "[Link] machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter the login user name and login password, and then click [Login].
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Select the user or group.
7. Click [Change].
8. Click [Change] next to [Login Password] in the [Authentication Information] area.
9. Enter the new password in the [New Password] box.
10. Enter the new password in the [Confirm Password] box.
11. Click [OK] three times.
Changing the login password for the printer driver

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System].

2. Click [Control Panel].
3. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing preferences].
The printing preferences dialog box appears.
5. Specify the user authentication setting.
If you are using the PCL 6 printer driver, click the [Detailed Settings] tab, click [Job Setup],
and then click [Authentication...] in the [Job Setup] area.
6. Enter a login password already set on the machine or the server for user
authentication.
Be sure to enter the same login password that is registered on the machine or the server.
If you do not enter a valid login password, printing will not start.
7. Click [OK] to close the [Authentication] dialog box.
8. Click [OK] to close the printing preferences dialog box.

154
5. Copy
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Copy function. It also describes how to
store documents in the Document Server of the machine and how to print or manage the stored files.
You can use the Copy function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

Auto Reduce / Enlarge

The machine automatically detects the original size and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio
based on the paper size you select.

CKN008

• If you select a reproduction ratio after pressing [Auto Reduce / Enlarge], [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]
is canceled and the image cannot be rotated automatically.
This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.
If the orientation in which your original is placed is different from that of the paper you are copying onto,
the machine rotates the original image by 90 degrees and fits it on the copy paper (Rotate Copy). For
example, to reduce A3 (11 × 17) originals to fit onto A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, select a paper tray
containing A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, and then press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]. The image is
automatically rotated. For details about Rotate Copy, see "Rotate Copy", Basic Operations.
The original sizes and orientations you can use with this function are as follows:
(mainly Europe and Asia)

Original location Original size and orientation

Exposure glass A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , 81/2 × 13

ADF A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , B6 JIS , 11

× 17 , 81/2 × 11 1
, 8 /2 × 13

155
 5. Copy

(mainly North America)

Original location Original size and orientation

Exposure glass 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 *1, 81/

2 × 13
2/
5
*1, 81/
2 × 11
, 51/2 × 81/2

ADF 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 *1, 81/2 × 132/5 *1, 81/2 × 11

, 51/2 × 81/2 , 81/2 × 101/2 , 10 × 14 , A3
, A4

*1 You can switch the initial setting to determine whether the machine detects either 81/2 × 14 or 81/2 ×
132/5 .

1. Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].

2. Select the paper size.

3. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• For details about the base point, see "Reducing or Enlarging Originals", Basic Operations.

156
 Duplex Copying

Duplex Copying
Copies two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto a 2-sided page. During copying, the image is
shifted to allow for the binding margin.

CKN009

There are two types of Duplex.

1 Sided 2 Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.
2 Sided 2 Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on one 2-sided page.
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals ( or
).
Original orientation and completed copies
To copy on both sides of the paper, select the original and copy orientation according to how you
want the printout to appear.

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

157
 5. Copy

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].

2. Make sure that [Duplex] is selected. If [Duplex] is not selected, press [Duplex].
3. Select [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [2 Sided 2 Sided] according to how you want the
document to be output.
To change the original or copy orientation, press [Orientation].
For details about the setting, see page 159 "Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation".

4. Press [Original Orientation].

5. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].

158
 Duplex Copying

7. Place the originals.

8. Press the [Start] key.

• You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
• Translucent paper
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• Transparencies
• Envelopes
• Tab stock
• Carbonless paper
• When an odd number of originals are placed in the ADF, the back of the last page of copied
paper is blank.
• For details about the sizes, orientations, and weights of paper that can be used in the Duplex
function, see "Specifications for the Main Unit", Specifications.
• You can specify the margins under [Edit] in User Tools. For details, see "Edit", Preparation.

Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation

Select the orientation of the originals and copies if the original is two-sided or if you want to copy onto
both sides of the paper.
• Top to Top

CKN011

• Top to Bottom

CKN012

1. Press [Orientation].

159
 5. Copy

2. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.

3. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:].

4. Press [OK].

• The default is [Top to Top]. You can change the default orientation under [Original Orientation in
Duplex Mode] and [Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode] in User Tools. For details about these
settings, see "General Features", Preparation.

160
 Combined Copying

Combined Copying
This mode can be used to select a reproduction ratio automatically and copy the originals onto a single
sheet of copy paper.
The machine selects a reproduction ratio between 25 and 400%. If the orientation of the original is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to
make copies properly.
Orientation of the original and image position of Combine
The image position of Combine differs according to original orientation and the number of originals
to be combined.
• Portrait ( ) originals

CKN015

• Landscape ( ) originals

CKN016

Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)

The default value for the copy order in the Combine function is [From Left to Right]. To copy
originals from right to left in the ADF, place them upside down.
• Originals read from left to right

161
 5. Copy

CKN010

• Originals read from right to left

CKN017

• If you selected [2 Sided] for [Original:] or [Combine 2 Sides] for [Copy:], you can change the
orientation. For details, see page 159 "Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation".
• If the calculated reproduction ratio falls below the minimum reproduction ratio, the calculated
reproduction ratio will be adjusted to the minimum ratio. If this happens, with some ratios, parts of
the image might not be copied.
• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for combining, the last page is
left blank as shown.

CKN013

• You can change the order of combined images under [Copy Order in Combine] in User Tools. For
details, see "Edit", Preparation.
• You can change the type of separation line under [Separation Line in Combine] in User Tools. For
details, see "Edit", Preparation.

162
 Combined Copying

• You can select whether to erase a 3 mm (0.1 inches) boundary margin around four edges of each
original in combined copying. This setting can be changed under [Erase Original Shadow in
Combine] in User Tools. For details, see "Edit", Preparation.

One-sided Combine

Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.

CKN014

There are six types of One-Sided Combine.

1 Sided 2 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.

163
 5. Copy

1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].

2. Press [Combine].
3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].
If you selected [2 Sided], you can change the orientation.

4. Make sure that [Combine 1 Side] is selected.

5. Select the number of originals to combine.
6. Press [Original Orientation].
7. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. Select the paper size.
10. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

Two-sided Combine

Combines various pages of originals onto two sides of one sheet.

164
 Combined Copying

CKN074

There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.

1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 1-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
1 Sided 16 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies 16 1-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
2 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 2-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.

1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].

2. Press [Combine].

165
 5. Copy

3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].

4. Press [Combine 2 Sides].

5. Press [Orientation].
6. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.
7. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:], and then press [OK].
8. Select the number of originals to combine.
9. Press [Original Orientation].
10. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
11. Press [OK].
12. Select the paper size.
13. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

166
 Copying onto Envelopes

Copying onto Envelopes

This section describes how to copy onto regular size and custom size envelopes. Place the original on
the exposure glass and place the envelope in the multi bypass tray (Tray A) or wide LCT.
Specify the thickness of the paper according to the weight of the envelopes you are printing on. For
details about the relationship between paper weight and paper thickness and the sizes of envelopes that
can be used, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
About handling envelopes, supported envelope types, and how to load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".

• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes. If the Duplex function is specified, cancel the
setting.
To copy onto custom size envelopes, you must specify the envelope's dimensions. Specify the horizontal
and vertical length of the envelope.

DFX003

: Horizontal
: Vertical
Be sure to include the fully open flap in the horizontal dimension.

Copying onto Envelopes from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)

1. Load the envelopes face up in the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
2. Press [Tray A].

167
 5. Copy

3. Press [Paper Size].

4. Specify the envelope size, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Paper Type].
6. Press [Next].
7. Select [Envelope], and then press [OK].
8. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• For details about using envelopes, see page 167 "Copying onto Envelopes".

Copying onto Envelopes from the Wide Large Capacity Tray

Before using this function, specify the paper size and type under [Tray Paper Settings]. For the paper
type, select [Envelope]. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".

1. Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.

2. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• For details about using envelopes, see page 167 "Copying onto Envelopes".

168
 Sort

Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.

Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.

1. While "Copying..." is displayed, press the [Stop] key.

2. Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.

3. Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.

• The number of sets you can enter in Step 2 differs depending on when the [Stop] key is pressed.

169
 5. Copy

Storing Data in the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
You can check the stored documents on the Document Server screen. For details about the Document
Server, see page 421 "Document Server".

1. Press [Store File].

2. Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.

3. Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Make the scanning settings for the original.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies. If you want to store another
document, do so after copying is complete.

• To stop scanning, press the [Stop] key. To resume a paused scanning job, press [Continue] in the
confirmation screen. To delete scanned images and cancel the job, press [Cancel Copying]. The
originals placed in the ADF will be ejected. Press [Job List] to display the [Job List] screen. For
details, see "Types of Screens to Manage Jobs", Preparation.
• When placing the original on the exposure glass, press the [ ] key after all the originals have
been scanned.
• For details about printing stored documents, see page 424 "Printing Stored Documents".
• For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see page 408 "Changing stored
document information".
• For details about how to specify a folder, see "Arranging Stored Documents Using Folders", Basic
Operations.

170
6. Paper Specifications and Adding
Paper
Describes how to load originals and sheets and about their specifications.

Placing Originals
You can place originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

Recommended Original Sizes and Weights

This section describes the sizes and weights of originals that can be placed in the ADF or on the
exposure glass.
(mainly Europe and Asia)

Original location Original size Original weight

Exposure glass Up to A3

ADF A3 –B6 JIS (Japanese Industrial 40.0–128.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

(One-sided originals) Standard) Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 *1

ADF A3 –A5 52.0–128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

(Two-sided originals) 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 *1 Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)

ADF A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , 52.3–81.4 g/m2 (14.0–

(Mixed Sizes mode) 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 21.7 lb. Bond)
, 81/2 × 14

*1 51/2 × 81/2 can be used only in the scanner function.

(mainly North America)

Original location Original size Original weight

Exposure glass Up to 11 × 17

ADF 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 40.0–128.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

(One-sided originals) A3 –A5 *1 Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)

171
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Original location Original size Original weight

ADF 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 52.0–128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

(Two-sided originals) A3 –A5 *1 Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)

ADF 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 52.3–81.4 g/m2 (14.0–

(Mixed Sizes mode) , 10 × 14 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 21.7 lb. Bond)
A3 , A4

*1 A5 can be used only in the scanner function.

• About 220 originals can be loaded in the ADF. Specifications can vary depending on the type and
condition of the paper.
• You can place originals of two different sizes only at a time in the Mixed Sizes mode.

Maximum scan area

This section explains the size of the area the machine can scan and detect.
When placing an original on the exposure glass
This section explains the maximum scan area when the original is placed on the exposure glass.
• Maximum scan area of the exposure glass

2 3

CJV619

1. Positioning mark
2. Vertical size:
297 mm (11.7 inches)
3. Horizontal size:
432 mm (17.1 inches)
• Maximum standard original size for the exposure glass:
A3 , 11 × 17

172
 Placing Originals

When placing an original into the ADF

This section explains the maximum scan area when the original is placed in the ADF.
• Maximum scan area of the ADF

1 2

CJV620

1. Vertical size:
297 mm (11.7 inches)
2. Horizontal size:
• In copier mode:
1,260 mm (49.7 inches)
• In scanner mode:
432 mm (17.1 inches)
• Maximum standard original size for the ADF:
A3 , 11 × 17

Missing image area

Even if you place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass correctly, margins of a few millimeters on
all four sides of the original might not be copied.
Missing Image Area

3 4 CVA089

1. Leading edge:
• When you use paper other than coated paper: 5.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.20 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight
1–Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.16 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 8)

173
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• When you use coated paper: 7.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.28 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 2), 5.0 ± 0.5mm
(0.20 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.16 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 4–
Paper Weight 8)
2. Trailing edge:
• When you use paper other than coated paper: 5.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.20 ± 0.04inches) (Paper Weight
1–Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 8)
• When you use coated paper: 7.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.28 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 2), 5.0 ± 1.0mm
(0.20 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 4–
Paper Weight 8)
3. Left edge: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm (0.08 ± 0.06 inches)
4. Right edge: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm (0.08 ± 0.06 inches)

• The missing image area can be changed. For details, consult the administrator or contact your
service representative. If plain paper that weighs less than 70 g/m2 or coated paper that weighs
less than 105 g/m2 is registered as custom paper from the master library, the missing image area
for the leading edge is set to approximately 5 mm. Depending on the paper's condition, the reverse
side's missing image area and its registered values may be different.

Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select

The following sizes and orientations of originals are detected automatically:

(mainly Europe and Asia)

Original B5 JIS B6 JIS

A3 B4 JIS A4 A5 A5
location

Exposure *1 *1 *1, *2 *1 *1 ×*1,*3 ×

glass

ADF *4

Original location 11 × 17 81/2 × 11 81/2 × 13

Exposure glass × ×*2 *7

ADF *5 *6 *7

: Detectable size, ×: Undetectable size

*1 If you want to switch the detectable sizes from these sizes to 8K and 16K, contact your service
representative.

174
 Placing Originals

*2 Default is A4. If you want to switch the detectable size from A4 to 81/2 × 11, contact your service
representative.
*3 If you want to make A5 size detectable, contact your service representative.

*4 You cannot use the two-sided scanning mode.

*5 Default is 11 × 17. If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 8K, contact your service
representative.
*6 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 16K, contact your
service representative.
*7 Default is 81/2 × 13. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 13 to 81/4 × 13 or 8 × 13,
contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)

Original 81/2 × 14 81/2 × 11 81/2 × 11 51/2 × 51/2 ×

11 × 17
location 81/2 81/2

Exposure *3 *3 ×*6
glass

ADF *1 *2 *4 *5

Original location 10 × 14 71/4 × 101/2 A3 A4

Exposure glass × × × ×*3

ADF

: Detectable size, ×: Undetectable size

*1 Default is 11 × 17. If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 11 × 15, contact your
service representative.
*2 Default is 81/2 × 14. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 14 to 81/2 × 13, contact
your service representative.
*3 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to A4, contact your
service representative.
*4 Default is 81/2 × 11 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 71/4 × 101/2 ,
contact your service representative.
*5 Default is 81/2 × 11 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 8 × 10 ,
contact your service representative.
*6 If you want to make 51/2 × 81/2 size detectable, contact your service representative.

• Originals whose size is non-auto detectable will be scanned at the wrong paper size if fed in from
the ADF.

175
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• If the size of your original cannot be detected automatically, you must specify its size. If the size is
not specified, part of the image may be cropped or not output satisfactorily. For details about how
to specify the size of the originals, see "Specifying Original Sizes", or page 420 "Specifying Scan
Settings".

Originals that are difficult to detect the size

If the original type is one of the following, the machine might not detect its size correctly and the
receiver's machine might print it on paper of the wrong size. The machine may also fail to copy or print
the image on an appropriate size of paper.
If the original type is one of the following, select the paper size manually:
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
• Originals which partially contain a solid image
• Originals which have solid images at their edges
• Originals with glossy surfaces
• Bound originals of more than 10 mm (0.4 inches) in thickness, such as books

Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure glass. Your
hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.

• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.

1. Lift the ADF.

Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be
detected correctly.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.

176
 Placing Originals

CWW353

1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.

• When you place a thick book or three-dimensional original on the exposure glass and lower the
ADF, the back side of the ADF rises up to accommodate the original. Keep your hands away from
the hinges at the back of the ADF when you close it.

CWW354

• Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking this
precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that will be scanned.
• For details about how to specify the size of the originals, see "Specifying Original Sizes", or
page 420 "Specifying Scan Settings".
• For details about the sizes of originals that can be used, see page 171 "Recommended Original
Sizes and Weights".

Left original beeper

The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your originals on the exposure
glass after scanning.
You can change the beeper setting under [Alert Sound: Original left on Exposure Glass] in the User
Tools menu. For details, see "General Features", Preparation.

177
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may cause the machine to detect
the size of the original incorrectly or display a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place
originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

1
2

EAQ151

1. Sensors
2. Original guide

1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.

2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.

EAQ152

1. Limit mark

• For information on using the ADF, see "Specifying the Settings for Originals", Basic Operations.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ADF.
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the original before placing it in the ADF.
• When originals are loaded in the ADF, the bottom plate rises automatically.

178
 Placing Originals

• Do not add paper to the ADF after the bottom plate has risen automatically.
• You can specify when the bottom plate of the ADF rises. For details, see "General Features", Device
Management.
• Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking this
precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that will be scanned.
• For details about the sizes and weights of originals that you can place in the ADF, see page 171
"Recommended Original Sizes and Weights".

Non-compatible originals for the Auto Document Feeder

Placing unsuitable originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds or black lines, or result in damage to
the originals.
Place the following types of originals on the exposure glass instead:
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with adhesive tape, glue or paste stuck to them
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin or highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper

• The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.

179
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Loading Paper
This chapter describes how to load paper into the paper tray or multi bypass tray (Tray A).
You can use the copy function and ADF on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only. You can load and scan
originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine. You can use perfect binder interposer on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5
machines only.

Precautions for Loading Paper

• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick glossy sheets. To prevent such problems, be sure to
fan glossy sheets thoroughly before loading them.
When loading paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the following diagram:

• Even if paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not be
possible, depending on the paper type.
• When loading 52.3 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond) paper into paper trays or loading translucent paper into
the wide LCT or the multi bypass tray (Tray A), always use long grain paper.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled. For details about
settings for flattening out curled paper, see page 319 "0310 Correct Output Paper Curl".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.
• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• When paper in trays that are set to automatically eject unnecessary tab stock sheets runs out,
reload the tab stock from the beginning of the cycle (the first sheet).
• When you load paper into the paper tray for the first time or when you change the size or type of
paper in the paper tray, be sure to specify the appropriate paper settings in Tray Paper Settings.
For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".

180
 Loading Paper

• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.

Fanning the paper

• If you load coated paper, label paper, or thick paper of 163.1–300.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Cover–
165.0 lb. Index) in the three-tray wide LCT, it is important that you fan the sheets thoroughly.
Misfeeds may occur if paper is not fanned thoroughly.

1. Loosen the stack by riffling the sheets.

CVA068

2. Holding its shorter ends, flex the stack back and forth to create space between the sheets.
Repeat this several times.

CVA069

181
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

CVA070

3. Make sure there is space between the sheets.

CVA071

Loading Paper into Tray 1

(mainly Europe and Asia)

Tray 1 can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 from Tray 1, contact your service
representative.
(mainly North America)
Tray 1 can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A4 from Tray 1, contact your service
representative.

• When paper loaded in the right side of Tray 1 runs out, paper on the left is automatically shifted to
the right. Do not pull out Tray 1 while the tray is moving paper; wait until sounds stop coming from
the tray.
• If Tray 1 is closed too quickly, the paper in the tray may force the right tray's side fence to slip out
of place. If the paper misfeeds because of this, open the tray, adjust the fence, and close the tray
slowly.
• For the right stack, align the right edge of the paper with the right edge of the tray. For the left
stack, align the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the tray.

182
 Loading Paper

1. Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.

CWW301

2. Square the paper and load it print side down.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• Whole tray pulled out

CWW302

• Left half of the tray pulled out

CWW303

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

• You can load paper even if Tray 1 is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 1
is in use.

183
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Loading Paper into the A3/11 × 17 Tray Unit

(mainly Europe and Asia)

A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold A3 paper only. If you want to print on A4 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
81/2 × 14 , or 81/2 × 11 , contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold 11 × 17 paper only. If you want to print on A3 , A4 , B4 JIS ,
81/2 × 14 , or 81/2 × 11 , contact your service representative.

• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DER058

2. Square the paper and load it print side down.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

DER059

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

184
 Loading Paper

Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3

Each paper tray is loaded in the same way.

In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 2.

• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW306

2. Square the paper and load it print side down.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW307

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

185
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 2 and 3 by adjusting the positions of side fences and
end fence. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray".

Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)

Use the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to use transparencies, translucent paper, and paper that cannot be
loaded in the paper trays.

• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0 g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.

1. Set the side fences to the paper size, and then square the paper and load it print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW309

186
 Loading Paper

2. Set the end fence.

CWW311

1. End fence
2. Extender
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right by pressing the stopper down.

CWW312

3. Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray A).

CWW313

1. Elevator switch
The lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the tray is going up, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down the tray if you want to either add paper or remove jammed
ones.

187
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger sheets in the multi bypass tray
(Tray A).
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 198 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the multi bypass tray (Tray A). Envelopes must be loaded in a specific
orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• Specify the sizes of paper that are not automatically detected. For details about the sizes that can
be detected automatically, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". For details
about how to specify sizes, see page 226 "Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically
Detected".
• When copying from the multi bypass tray (Tray A), see "Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray
A)", Basic Operations.

Loading tab stock into the multi bypass tray (Tray A)

When setting tab stock, always use the tab fence. Tabs must be set at the right side of the multi bypass
tray (Tray A).

CWW308

1. Tab fence
2. End fence

Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray

The LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.

(mainly Europe)
Tray 6 can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 , or 51/2 × 81/2
from Tray 6, contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)

188
 Loading Paper

Tray 6 can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A5 , B5 JIS , A4 , or 51/2 × 81/2
from Tray 6, contact your service representative.

• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW315

2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW316

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 4 and Tray 5 by adjusting the positions of side fence
and end fence. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray".

Loading Paper into the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray

The three-tray wide LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.

• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.

189
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DER074

2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

DER075

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.

• If you select Paper Weight 5 to 7, [Coated: Glossy], [Coated: Matte], or [Label Paper] in [Tray
Paper Settings], air is blown out automatically to fan the paper loaded in the three-tray wide LCT.
Fan this paper before loading it. For details, see page 181 "Fanning the paper".
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the three-tray wide LCT by adjusting the positions of side
fences and end fence. For details, see page 213 "Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide
Large Capacity Tray".
• You can load envelopes in the three-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".

190
 Loading Paper

Loading Paper into the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray

The two-tray wide LCT is identified as Tray T1, Tray T2, Tray T3, and Tray T4.

• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.

• When you use paper of Paper Weight 7 with a convex curl greater than 5 mm, or paper of Paper
Weight 8 with a convex curl greater than 3 mm, a paper jam may occur if the height of the stacked
paper is less than 4 mm. To use paper in such condition, set the paper in the tray as follows:
• Set as many as 5 to 10 more sheets than the number of sheets you intend to print
• Correct the curl amount before setting the paper
• Turn over the paper so that the paper is with a concave curl.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DWP072

2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

DWP073

3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.

191
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the two-tray wide LCT by adjusting the positions of side
fence and end fence. For details, see page 219 "Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide
Large Capacity Tray".
• You can load envelopes in the two-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• When you are using a special printing feature such as banner printing, cover page, and separation
sheets, the indicator on the front side of the tray remains lit until printing is completed. You cannot
reload paper while the indicator remains lit.

Attaching the small tab end fence to the two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray

When loading the following paper, attach the small tab end fence:
• B5 (width: 182 mm; length: 257 mm)–SRA4 (width: 225 mm; length: 320 mm) of Paper
Weight 8
• Carbonless paper of Paper Weight 2 or less
• Label paper
To print on carbonless paper of Paper Weight 0, open the front cover, pull out the drawer unit, and then
wipe with a dry and clean cloth six ribs each on the front and back sides in the figure before printing.
Wipe off dirt or toner on the top and side of each rib. Toner smear may appear on the printed paper if
prints are made while the ribs are stained.

EAQ142

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

192
 Loading Paper

2. Take out the small tab end fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the paper
source tray.

DWP662

3. Set the side fences to the size of the paper to be loaded, and then load paper into the
tray.
4. Attach the small tab end fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you
loaded while pressing the release button of the end fence.

DSC098

5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.

• Replace the small tab end fence after use.

Loading Paper into the Interposer

• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly scanned or paper jams.

193
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

1. While pressing the release lever, align the side fences with the paper size to be loaded.

EAQ131

2. Load paper orderly.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Align the side fences gently against the paper you loaded, if necessary.

EAQ132

• Load paper with its printed side up (the front side). If you are using the booklet finisher, load sheets
print side down.
• Load paper in the interposer in the same orientation as paper in the paper tray.
• The staple position or punch hole position will be on the left side of the paper, when you are facing
the machine.
• When loading paper larger than A4 (81/2 × 11) , pull out the paper extender.
• To load the paper in the interposer, align the orientation of originals in the ADF as shown below.

Interposer ADF

194
 Loading Paper

Interposer ADF

Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder

• The length/size of cover sheets depends on the thickness of the spine.

• Load paper in the orientation.
• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly detected or paper jams.
Estimating the thickness of the spine
This section explains how to calculate the approximate spine thickness and the cover sheet length
and size.
Note that the length and size of a cover sheet depends on the thickness of the book block spine.
The following list shows examples for A4 or 81/2 × 11 size, 80.0 g/m2 (21.0 lb. Bond) paper:
• 10-sheet book block: 1 mm (0.04 inches)
• 30-sheet book block: 3 mm (0.12 inches)
• 50-sheet book block: 5 mm (0.20 inches)
• 80-sheet book block: 8 mm (0.32 inches)
• 100-sheet book block: 10 mm (0.40 inches)
• 200-sheet book block: 20 mm (0.80 inches)
Specify the cover sheet size based on the thickness of the book block spine. Use the following
equation to calculate the length of the cover sheet:
Minimum length of cover sheet (mm/inch) = "length of book block sheet (mm/inch)" × 2 +
"thickness of spine (mm/inch)"
To perfect bind a booklet with the following dimensions, specify a cover sheet length of at least
440 mm (17.4 inches):

195
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

1 3

CWW369

1. Length of book block sheet

2. Thickness of spine
3. Length of cover sheet
Orientation and binding position of covers and originals
This section explains the orientation and binding positions of covers and originals.
Place covers and originals in the orientation in which they are read.

Placing the cover Placing the book block

Binding position
in the interposer sheet in the ADF

Left binding

Top binding*1

Right binding

*1 Select (unreadable orientation) in Original Orientation, and then select top binding.

196
 Loading Paper

1. While lightly pinching the side fence, align it with the paper size to be loaded.

CWW323

2. Load paper face up and neatly stacked.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW324

• You cannot perfect bind a booklet if the thickness of the book block's spine exceeds 23 mm (0.9
inches).
• Depending on your machine, the procedure for selecting the orientation of covers and originals for
the printer function might be slightly different. For details, refer to the procedure for your machine.
• Depending on your machine, the procedure for selecting the orientation of covers and originals
might be slightly different. For details, refer to the procedure for your machine.
• When loading thick paper of 251.0 g/m2 (138.8 lb. Index) or heavier in the interposer trays of
the perfect binder, make sure the grain of the paper is perpendicular to the feed direction.
• If you are loading sheets that are likely to stick together (such as sheets of coated paper), be sure
to fan them thoroughly before loading. Fanning them will help prevent jams and allow them to be
fed in one sheet at a time.
• The perfect binding process may scratch glossy paper.

197
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper

Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not be printed correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Settings for the User Tools
• Copier mode
Specify [Yes] for [Letterhead Setting] in [Input / Output] under the Copier / Document Server
Features menu, and then place the original and paper as shown below.
• Printer mode
Specify [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)] for [Letterhead Setting] in [System] under the Printer
Features menu, and then place the paper as shown below.
For details about the letterhead settings, see "Input / Output", or "System", Preparation.
Original orientation and paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Meaning

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face up.

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face down.

• Original orientation

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Readable orientation

198
 Loading Paper

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Unreadable • Copy
orientation

• Scanner

• Paper orientation
• Copier mode

Multi bypass tray

Trays 2–3 or A3/11
Copy side Tray 1 (Tray A), LCT, or
× 17 tray unit
wide LCT

One-sided

Two-sided

• Printer mode

Multi bypass tray

Trays 2–3 or A3/11
Print side Tray 1 (Tray A), LCT, or
× 17 tray unit
wide LCT

One-sided

199
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Multi bypass tray

Trays 2–3 or A3/11
Print side Tray 1 (Tray A), LCT, or
× 17 tray unit
wide LCT

Two-sided

• In copier mode:
• For details about how to make two-sided copies, see page 157 "Duplex Copying".
• In printer mode:
• To print on letterhead paper when [Auto Detect] is specified for [Letterhead Setting], you must
specify [Letterhead] as the paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, one-
sided output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all
paper is output facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and two-
sided printing. Note also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for
one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see page 373 "Printing on Both Sides of
Sheets".

Using Small Thick Paper

When loading paper with a paper weight of 200 gsm (110 lb. index) or more and a vertical paper
length (short side) of 210 mm (8.27 inches) or less, move the lever in the drawer unit to raise the height
of the paper transfer unit.
This is applicable to the following types of paper:

200
 Loading Paper

3 2

EAQ146

1. Short side
2. Long side
3. Paper feed direction

Paper Weight Paper Size Short side Long side

200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.

Index) A4 210 mm 297 mm
Paper Weight 5–8

200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.

Index) A5 148 mm 210 mm
Paper Weight 5–8

200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.

Index) B5 182 mm 257 mm
Paper Weight 5–8

200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.

139.7 mm 215.9 mm
Index) 51/2×81/2
(5.5 inches) (8.5 inches)
Paper Weight 5–8

200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.

Index) 16K 195 mm 267 mm
Paper Weight 5–8

201
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Moving the lever in the drawer unit

• Move the lever only when using the applicable types of paper. Otherwise, return the lever to its
original position.

1. Open the front cover, then pull out the drawer unit.

EAQ147

The lever is located in the recess of the drawer unit.

2. Lower the lever in the direction of the arrow.

EAQ148

202
 Loading Paper

3. Check that the indicator decal on the back of the lever is visible.

EAQ149

The height of the paper transfer unit is changed to allow the applicable types of paper to be fed.

EAQ150

203
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Changing the Paper Size

You can scan originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

Precautions for Changing the Paper Size

• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

• Do not change the size of the paper for the specified printing tray while documents are being
scanned or printed.

• (mainly Europe and Asia)

Tray 1 and Tray 6 of the LCT can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes
from Tray 1, contact your service representative.
• (mainly North America)
Tray 1 and Tray 6 of the LCT can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on other paper
sizes from Tray 1, contact your service representative.
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold A3 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes from
A3/11 × 17 tray unit, contact your service representative.
• (mainly North America)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold 11 × 17 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes
from A3/11 × 17 tray unit, contact your service representative.
• After loading paper whose sizes are not detected automatically, be sure to specify the appropriate
paper size in [Tray Paper Settings]. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. For details, see page 226
"Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".

Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3

The paper size setting is changed in the same way for each paper tray.

204
 Changing the Paper Size

In the following example procedure, the paper size setting for Tray 2 is changed.

• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW306

2. Remove paper if loaded.

3. Release the lock on the side fences.

CWW325

205
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

4. While pressing down the release lever, slide the side fences until they are aligned with the
paper size you want to load.

CWW326

5. While pressing down on both sides of the end fence, slide it until it is aligned with the size
of paper to you want to load.

CWW327

6. Square the paper and load it print side down.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW370

7. Re-lock the side fences.

Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and side fences or end fence.

206
 Changing the Paper Size

CWW328

8. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.

Loading Custom Size Paper

When loading custom size paper in Tray 2 or 3, use the following procedure to lock the end fence:

1. While pressing down on both sides of the end fence, slide the end fence until it is aligned
with the bottom edge of the paper you want to load.

DSC301

2. Hold the grip of the end fence and pull it upward, and then release it.
Make sure the stopping claws are extended and the end fence is securely locked.

207
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

DSC302

• When loading standard size paper, hold the grip of the end fence and push it downward, and
then set it back in its original position.

Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray

• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW371

2. Remove paper if loaded.

208
 Changing the Paper Size

3. Pull out the screws fixing the side fences.

CWW329

4. Set the paper size selector in the innermost part of the tray to the new paper size.

CWW334

5. Set the side fences to the size you want.

CWW330

209
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

6. Fasten the side fences with the screws.

CWW331

7. Set the end fence along the paper size.

CWW332

8. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

CWW333

210
 Changing the Paper Size

9. If you load A4 or 81/2 × 11 size paper, set the end fence according to the paper size.

2
3

CWW357

1. A4
2. 81/2 × 11
3. Tab stock
10. Fasten the end fence using the screw provided.

CWW358

11. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• As for changing paper sizes of Tray 6, contact your service representative.

• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.

Attaching the tab sheet holder to the Large Capacity Tray

When loading tab stock, attach the tab sheet holder.

211
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

1. Open the front cover of the LCT, and then take out the tab sheet holder.

CWW335

2. Close the front cover.

3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW315

4. Set the side fences and end fence to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load
it.
5. Attach the tab sheet holder.

CWW336

6. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• Tab stock can be loaded only in Tray 4 and Tray 5.

212
 Changing the Paper Size

• When loading tab stock, shift the end fence for A4 , 81/2 × 11 to position 3 before setting the
end fence for tab stock. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity
Tray".
• Replace the tab sheet holder after use.

Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray

• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DER074

2. Remove paper if loaded.

3. Release the end fence.

DER076

213
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

4. Loosen the screws holding the side fences in position.

DER077

5. When loading paper wider than 257 mm, lock the supporting plate (large) in place by
hooking its edge on the side fence.

DWP843

6. Load paper by aligning the paper with the left side of the paper tray.
Place paper with print side up.
Load a stack of paper about 5–10 mm (0.2–0.4 inches) high.
Make sure the paper rest on top of the supporting plates on both sides.

1
DER078

1. Supporting plates

214
 Changing the Paper Size

7. Take the grip of the side fences with your fingers, and adjust the side fences to the paper
size.
Set the paper flush against the protrusions in the bottom of the inner side fence.
Check that the scale numbers on the top of the side fences are roughly the same.

DER079

8. Hold the grip of the side fence at the back of the paper tray, then turn the screws slowly to
fasten it in place.
Fasten the front side fence in the same way.

CWW341

9. Load additional sheets, if necessary.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

DER081

215
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

10. Tightly fit the end fence to the loaded paper, and then re-lock the end fence again.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and end fence.

DER082

11. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
• You can load envelopes into the three-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".

Attaching the tab fence in the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray

When loading tab stock, attach the tab fence.

1. Open the front cover of the three-tray wide LCT, and then take out the tab fence.

DER083

2. Close the front cover.

216
 Changing the Paper Size

3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DER074

4. Set the side fences to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load it.
5. Attach the tab fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you loaded
while pressing the release button of the end fence.

CWW345

6. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• Replace the tab fence after use.

Attaching the postcard side fences in the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray

When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length, attach the
postcard side fences.
The three-tray wide LCT is equipped with two types of postcard side fences: the long type and the short
type. Use the longer pair for Tray 4 and the shorter pair for Trays 3 and 5.

217
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

1. Open the front cover of the three-tray wide LCT, and then pull the postcard side fences
and screws out.

DER085

2. Close the front cover.

3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

CWW372

4. Fit the indentation on the bottom of the postcard side fence with the limit mark into the
head of the screw on the bottom of the inner side fence.
5. Fit the hole on the top of the postcard side fence into the projection on the top of the side
fence.
Set the other postcard side fence to the front side fence in the same way.

218
 Changing the Paper Size

6. Fasten the postcard side fences with the screws.

CWW347

7. Align the end fence and side fences with the paper size to be loaded, and then load the
paper.
8. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• Replace the postcard side fences after use.

Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray

• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DWP072

2. Remove paper if loaded.

219
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

3. Release the end fence.

DWP074

4. Release the side fence.

DWP075

5. Load paper by aligning the paper with the left side of the paper tray.
Place paper with print side up.
Load a stack of paper about 5–10 mm (0.2–0.4 inches) high.
Make sure the paper rest on top of the supporting plates on both sides.

DWP076

When you load paper that is 204 mm (8.04 inches) or smaller, remove the supporting plates from
the bottom of the paper tray.

220
 Changing the Paper Size

DWP077

1. Supporting plates
6. Take the grip of the side fences with your fingers, and adjust the side fences to the paper
size.
Set the paper flush against the protrusions in the bottom of the inner side fence.
Check that the scale numbers on the top of the side fences are roughly the same.

DWP078

7. Load additional sheets, if necessary.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

DWP079

8. Tightly fit the end fence to the loaded paper, and then re-lock the end fence again.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and end fence.

221
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

DWP080

9. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.

• Do not push in the paper presser on the upper part of the side fence. If it is pushed in, return it to its
original position by hand.
• When printing on normal paper that is 487.8 mm (19.20 inches) long or more with a thickness of
Paper Weight 2 or below or coated paper with a thickness of Paper Weight 3 or below, output
paper may bend in the paper output tray so that it may curl or clog in the paper output entrance. In
this case, use long-grain paper. If the output paper still bends when coated long-grain paper of
Paper Weight 3 or below, remove the output paper one by one or place a single sheet of paper in
the shift tray then resume printing.
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
• You can load envelopes into the two-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• When you load paper that is 420.0 mm (16.54 inches) or wider in the banner sheet tray of the
two-tray wide LCT, load it as follows:
• Press the elevator switch to move the bottom plate down until the lamp goes out, and then
open the cover and load the paper.
• Hold the paper lengthwise and load it little by little.
• If you load thin paper or coated paper, load it little by little. Press down on the paper while
you load it so that the paper loaded in the bottom is not dragged.
• If you load thick paper, load it little by little and align the side fence with the horizontal side of
the paper.
• Check that the paper is correctly positioned against the back of the paper feed tray and the
label on which is printed the paper sizes for the paper tray.
• When you load paper that is 420.0-559.9 mm (16.54–22.00 inches) wide, use two short-
end fences.

222
 Changing the Paper Size

3
DWP841

1. Side fence extension

2. Side fence
3. Short-end fences
• When you load paper that is 560.0-700.0 mm (22.00–27.55 inches) wide, use one long-
end fence.
1
2

DWP842

1. Side fence extension

2. Side fence
3. Long-end fences
• When you load paper, load the paper and set the auxiliary side fence. Align the auxiliary
side fence against the side of the paper that is higher than the side fence extension.
• When you load paper whose horizontal length is 487.8 mm (19.20 inches) or more, or
paper weight 8 (300.1–350 gsm), use the banner sheet supporting plate.

223
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

DWQ022

• If you are not using the banner sheet supporting plate, hook it on the screw under the banner
sheet two-tray wide LCT.

Attaching the tab fence in the two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray

When loading tab stock, attach the tab fence.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.

DWP072

2. Take out the tab fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the paper tray.

DWP081

3. Set the side fences to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load it.

224
 Changing the Paper Size

4. Attach the tab fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you loaded
while pressing the release button of the end fence.

DER098

5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.

• Replace the tab fence after use.

Loading envelopes into Two-tray Wide LCT

• Open the flaps, and load the envelopes with their flaps pointing to the right side of the paper tray.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air inside and flatten edges or
creases.
• Straighten curled or warped envelopes before loading (keep the amount of curling or warping for
each envelope within 5 mm).

5mm

DSC095

• Set the envelopes so that the difference in the height of the stacks is less than 10 mm.

225
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

10mm

Min.

Max.

DSC096

• When loading an envelope that has an self-adhesive flap and releasing paper, make sure the
releasing paper is not curled or peeled off.

Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected

If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, specify the paper size using the control panel.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
4. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Press [Paper Size].
7. Select the loaded paper size, and then press [Save Paper].

8. Press .

226
 Changing the Paper Size

9. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• For details about paper sizes selected automatically, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing on a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you must return the setting to [Auto Detect]. Reload the paper, and select
[Auto Detect] in step 6.

Changing to a Custom Paper Size

When the custom size paper is loaded, the user must specify the paper size using the control panel.

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
4. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Press the [Paper Size].
7. Press [Custom Size].
8. Press the setting value next to [A:].
9. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].

10. Press the setting value next to [B:].

11. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Save Paper].
14. Press .
15. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

227
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Recommended Paper
This chapter describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and how to store paper.
You can use the copy function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.

• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a staple clogging or paper jam
may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them correctly,
or a misfeed might occur.
Tray 1

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. 1,000 sheets × 2

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
A4
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

81/2 × 11

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. *1 1,000 sheets × 2

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
81/2 × 11

A4

*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.

228
 Recommended Paper

Tray 1 (A3/11 × 17 tray unit)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. 1,000 sheets

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
A3
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

11 × 17

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. *1 1,000 sheets

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
A4 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2
× 11 , 81/2 × 14

A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , 81/2 × 11
, 81/2 × 14

*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
Trays 2 and 3

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 500 sheets
Bond–141.0 lb. Index) automatically:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS 1
, 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4
× 13 , 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K
, SRA3

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4
× 13 , 8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 101/2
1

, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K

, 12 × 18

229
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 500 sheets
Bond–141.0 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

81/4 × 14 , 8 × 10 , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 18 , 12 × 18 , SRA4 ,
226 × 310 mm , 310 × 432 mm
, 81/2 × 132/5

81/4 × 14 , 8 × 10 , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4 ,
226 × 310 mm , 310 × 432 mm
, 81/2 × 132/5

52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb. Custom size: 500 sheets

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–457.2 mm

Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 5.50–18.00 inches

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS *1

Transparencies A4 *1 *2

*1 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*2 Transparencies can be fed only from Tray 2.

230
 Recommended Paper

Multi bypass tray (Tray A)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 500 sheets
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover) automatically:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5

A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS
, B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , SRA3
*2

A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12
× 18

231
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. *1 500 sheets

Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 ×
14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
8K , 16K , 11 × 15 , 11 ×
14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
*2, 13 × 19 *2, 123/ × 191/
5 5
*2, 123/ × 181/ *2, 13 × 18
5 2
*2, 12 × 18 , SRA4 *2, SRA4

, 226 × 310 mm *2, 226 × 310

mm , 310 × 432 mm *2, 81/2 ×
132/5

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 ×
14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 *2, 13 ×
19 *2, 123/5 × 191/5 *2,
123/5 × 181/2 *2, 13 × 18 *2,
SRA3 *2, SRA4 *2, SRA4 , 226
× 310 mm *2, 226 × 310 mm ,
310 × 432 mm *2, 81/2 × 132/5
*2

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Custom size: *3 500 sheets

Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*4
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm*5

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*4

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches*5

232
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS *6

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *6

Tab stock*7 A4 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 *6

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5

Envelopes 10 sheets
163.1–216.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*4
Cover–79.9 lb. Cover)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm*5
Paper Weight 5

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*4

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches*5

*1 Select the paper size. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*2 The paper sizes specified above cannot be used if the LCT is installed.
*3 Enter the paper size. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*4 When the LCT is installed, the maximum custom width is 305.0 mm (12.1 inches). When the two-tray or
three-tray wide LCT is installed, the maximum custom width is 330.2mm (13.1 inches). Also note that
when the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) is installed, the minimum vertical size of custom
paper changes depending on the horizontal size as shown below:
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–19.20 inches); vertical: 100 mm (3.93 inches) or more
Horizontal: 487.7–700.0 mm (19.20–27.55 inches); vertical: 210 mm (8.27 inches) or more
*5 When the banner sheet tray is installed, the maximum horizontal length of custom size paper is 700.0
mm (27.55 inches).
*6 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*7 The tab fence is required.
LCT (Trays 4 and 5)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Select the paper size using the 1,000 sheets
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover) paper size selector:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5 A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11
1 1
, 5 /2 × 8 /2

233
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Translucent paper A4 , B5 JIS *1

Label paper*2 A4 , 81/2 × 11 *1

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *1

Tab stock*3 A4 , 81/2 × 11 *1

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5

*1 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*2 You can load paper into Tray 5 only.
*3 The tab sheet holder is required.
LCT (Tray 6)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. 2,550 sheets

Bond–60.0 lb. Cover)
A4
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 4

81/2 × 11

52.3–163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. *1 2,550 sheets

Bond–60.0 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 4
A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 ,
51/2 × 81/2

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 51/2 ×
81/2

Translucent paper A4 , B5 JIS *2

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *2

234
 Recommended Paper

*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
*2 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
Three-tray wide LCT (Trays 4 and 6)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 1,000 sheets
Bond–141.0 lb. Index) automatically:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
1 1
13 , 5 /2 × 8 /2 , SRA3

235
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 1,000 sheets
Bond–141.0 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *1, 81/2

× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
1 2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5

A4 , A5 , A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *1, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K ,
16K , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , 12 ×
18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
132/5

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Custom size: 1,000 sheets

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

236
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Paper sizes that can be detected –

Coated: Matte automatically:

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–141.0 lb. Index) A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray –

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–141.0 lb. Index) A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *1, 81/2
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
1
8 /2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *1, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K ,
16K , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
132/5

237
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Custom size: –

Coated: Matte
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B5 JIS *2

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *2

Tab stock*3 A4 , 81/2 × 11 *2

52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6

Envelopes 10 sheets
163.1–216.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Cover–79.9 lb. Cover)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 5

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

*1 The postcard side fences are required to load paper that is between 100.0 and 139.2 mm (3.94 and
5.49 inches).
*2 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*3 The tab fence is required.

238
 Recommended Paper

Three-tray wide LCT (Tray 5)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 2,000 sheets
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) automatically:
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
1
JIS , 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , SRA3

239
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 2,000 sheets
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *2, 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
1 2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5

A4 , A5 , A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *2, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 12 × 18 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Custom size: 2,000 sheets

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
7
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

240
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Paper sizes that can be detected –

Coated: Matte automatically:

40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
7 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray –

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *2, 81/2
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
7 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
1
8 /2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *2, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
1 2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5

241
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Custom size: –

Coated: Matte
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*2
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*2
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B5 JIS *3

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *3

Tab stock*4 A4 , 81/2 × 11 *3

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

Label paper A4 , 81/2 × 11 *3

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

Envelopes 10 sheets
163.1–300.0 g/m2 (79.9 lb. Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*2
Cover–165.0 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 5–Paper Weight 7

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*2

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

*1 When a paper jam occurs while printing is performed on paper of Paper Weight 0, pull out the drawer
unit check that there is no paper left inside the upper part of the machine, and then remove the paper.
Also, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in the direction so that the grain direction is
aligned with the feed direction.
*2 The postcard side fences are required to load paper that is between 100.0 and 139.2 mm (3.94 and
5.49 inches).
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.

242
 Recommended Paper

*4 The tab fence is required.

Two-tray wide LCT (Trays T1 to T4)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 2,400 sheets
Bond–193.3 lb. Index) automatically:
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11
× 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
1 1 1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4

243
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 2,400 sheets
Bond–193.3 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
A6 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 ×
13 , 8 /2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
1

81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm ,
310 × 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS , B6
JIS , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 8K , 16K , 11 × 15
, 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2
, 13 × 18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310
mm , 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
2
13 /5

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Custom size: 2,400 sheets

Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
8
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

244
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Paper sizes that can be detected –

Coated: Matte automatically:

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

Bond–193.3 lb. Index) A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
1 1 1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray –

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.

Bond–193.3 lb. Index) B5 JIS , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 ×
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 ,
8 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 13
1 1
, 8 /4 × 14 , 8 /4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 81/2 × 132/5

245
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Custom size: –

Coated: Matte
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B5 JIS *2

Transparencies*3 A4 , 81/2 × 11 *2

Tab stock*4 A4 , 81/2 × 11 –

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0*1–Paper Weight
8

Label paper*9 A4 , 81/2 × 11 –

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0*1–Paper Weight
8

Envelopes *5, *6, *7 10 sheets

163.1–300.0 g/m2 (79.9 lb. 240 × 332 mm, 235 × 120 mm,
Cover–165.0 lb. Index) 120 × 235 mm, 105 × 241 mm,
Paper Weight 5–Paper Weight 7 110 × 220 mm

246
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Carbonless paper *8 Paper sizes that can be detected –

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. automatically:
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11
8 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
1 1 1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4

247
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Carbonless paper *8 Select the paper size using the Tray –

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb. Paper Settings menu:
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight A6 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 ×
8 13 , 8 /2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
1

81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm ,
310 × 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS , B6
JIS , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 8K , 16K , 11 × 15
, 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2
, 13 × 18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310
mm , 310 × 432 mm , 81/2
2
×13 /5

Carbonless paper *8 Custom size: –

40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
8

Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

Perforated paper A4 –

*1 When a paper jam occurs while printing is performed on paper of Paper Weight 0, pull out the drawer
unit check that there is no paper left inside the upper part of the machine, and then remove the paper.

248
 Recommended Paper

Also, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in the direction so that the grain direction is
aligned with the feed direction.
*2 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
*3 Fan the paper thoroughly so that the sheets do not stick to each other when reloading the paper that
has been output.
*4 The tab fence is required.
*5 Open the flaps, and load the envelopes with their flaps pointed toward the right side of the paper tray.
*6 Enter the sizes of the envelopes including their flap sizes using the Tray Paper Settings function.
*7 Sizes do not include flap sizes.
*8 Attach the small tab end fence when loading carbonless paper of paper weight 2 or less.
*9 The small tab end fence is required.
Two-tray wide LCT (When the banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT is installed) (Tray 1 or 3)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 720 sheets
Bond–193.3 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8 A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , 310 × 432mm

52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Custom size: 720 sheets

Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm

Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray *1

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×

Bond–193.3 lb. Index) 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 310 ×
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
432mm

249
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Custom size: *1

Coated: Matte
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8

Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches

Carbonless paper Select the paper size using the Tray *1

52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Paper Settings menu:

Bond–193.3 lb. Index) A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 310 ×
432mm

Carbonless paper Custom size: *1

52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm

Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches

*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.

250
 Recommended Paper

Interposer

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 200 sheets × 2
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) automatically:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
1
JIS , 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

251
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 200 sheets × 2
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13

, 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
1 2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 ×
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
8K , 16K , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , SRA4 , 226 ×
310 mm , 310 × 432 mm ,
81/2 × 132/5

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Custom size: 200 sheets × 2

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm

Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

252
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Paper sizes that can be detected *1

Coated: Matte automatically:

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 ,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray *1

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm , 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 ×
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
8K , 16K , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , SRA4 , 226 ×
310 mm , 310 × 432 mm ,
81/2 × 132/5

253
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Custom size: *1

Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb. Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7

Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches

Translucent paper A3 , A4 , B5JIS *1

Transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *1

Tab stock A4 , 81/2 × 11 , 11 × 17 *1

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

Label paper A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , 81/2 × 14 *1

52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. , 81/2 × 11

Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7

*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
Interposer of the perfect binder

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb. Paper sizes that can be detected 200 sheets (or up to
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) automatically: 24 mm in height) ×
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 2

A3 , 8K , 13 × 19

11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 19

254
 Recommended Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb. Select the paper size using the Tray 200 sheets (or up to
Bond–165.0 lb. Index) Paper Settings menu: 24 mm in height) ×
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 2

B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 ,
11 × 15 , 13 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm

A3 , B4 JIS , 8K , 11 × 15 ,
13 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb. Custom size: 200 sheets (or up to

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) 24 mm in height) ×
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 2
Vertical: 257.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 364.0–487.7 mm

Vertical: 10.12–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 14.34–19.20 inches

Coated: Glossy Paper sizes that can be detected *1

Coated: Matte automatically:

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) A3 , 8K , 13 × 19
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7

11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 19

255
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Coated: Glossy Select the paper size using the Tray *1

Coated: Matte Paper Settings menu:

105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.

Bond–165.0 lb. Index) B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 ,
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7 11 × 15 , 13 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm

A3 , B4 JIS , 8K , 11 × 15 ,
13 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm

Coated: Glossy Custom size: *1

Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb. Vertical: 257.0–330.2 mm
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Horizontal: 364.0–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7

Vertical: 10.12–13.00 inches

Horizontal: 14.34–19.20 inches

*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
Paper thickness

Paper weight*1 Metric Bond paper Cover paper Index paper

Paper Weight 40.0–52.2 10.7–13.9 lb. 14.8–18.9 lb. 22.1–28.9 lb.

0*2 g/m2 Bond Cover Index

Paper Weight 52.3–63.0 14.0–16.9 lb. 19.0–23.0 lb. 29.0–34.9 lb.

1*2 g/m2 Bond Cover Index

63.1–80.0 17.0–21.0 lb. 23.1–29.9 lb. 35.0–44.0 lb.

Paper Weight 2
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

80.1–105.0 21.1–28.0 lb. 30.0–38.9 lb. 44.1–58.0 lb.

Paper Weight 3
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

256
 Recommended Paper

Paper weight*1 Metric Bond paper Cover paper Index paper

105.1–163.0 28.1–43.0 lb. 39.0–60.0 lb. 58.1–90.0 lb.

Paper Weight 4
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

163.1–220.0 43.1–58.9 lb. 60.1–80.9 lb. 90.1–121.0 lb.

Paper Weight 5
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

220.1–256.0 59.0–68.0 lb. 81.0–94.0 lb. 121.1–141.0 lb.

Paper Weight 6
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

256.1–300.0 68.1–80.0 lb. 94.1–110.0 lb. 141.1–165.0 lb.

Paper Weight 7
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

300.1–350.0 80.1–93.3 lb. 110.1–128.8 lb. 165.1–193.3 lb.

Paper Weight 8
g/m2 Bond Cover Index

*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 When loading paper of 40.0–63.0 g/m2 (10.7–16.9 lb. Bond), the edges may crease or the paper
misfeed depending on the paper type.

• Certain types of paper, such as translucent paper or transparencies, may produce noise when
delivered. This noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the multi
bypass tray (Tray A).
• You can specify whether or not the machine auto detects multi-sheet feeds in paper from every tray.
In "0302 When Double Feed is Detected" under the [Adjustment Settings for Operators], you can
also specify whether to suspend or continue the current jobs when a multi-sheet feed is detected.
However, depending on the condition of the paper, the machine may not detect a multi-sheet feed
correctly. For details about Adjustment Settings for Operators, see page 317 "0301 Double Feed
Detection".
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• The Adjust Paper Curl function might not be able to fully remove curl, depending on the type of
paper and the direction of its grain. If long grain paper does not uncurl properly, try short grain
paper instead. For details about the Adjust Paper Curl function, see page 319 "0310 Correct
Output Paper Curl".
• Depending on the paper's size, weight, and type, the copy/print speed may be slower than usual.

257
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• When loading envelopes, see page 260 "Envelopes".

• When copying or printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different
depending on which function you are using. For details, see page 198 "Loading Orientation-fixed
Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• If you load paper of the same size and same type in two or more trays, the machine automatically
feeds from one of the trays in which [Yes] is selected for [Apply Auto Paper Select] when the first
tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This saves interrupting a
copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. You can specify the paper
type of the paper trays under [Paper Type] tab. For details, see page 228 "Recommended Paper
Sizes and Types". For the setting procedure of the Auto Tray Switching function, see "General
Features", Device Management.
• The paper types you can select in Tray Paper Settings are only general classifications. Print quality
for every kind of paper in a classification is not guaranteed. For details, see page 264 "Unusable
Paper".
• If the surface of the paper is dusty, white spots might appear on prints. To remove dust, fan the
paper thoroughly.
• When loading label paper:
• Select [Label Paper] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings], and select an appropriate
paper weight under [Paper Weight].
• When loading transparencies:
• When copying onto transparencies, see "Copying onto transparencies", Basic Operations.
• To print on transparencies, select [Transparency] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings].
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
• Fan transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents transparencies from
sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
• When outputting to the high capacity stacker, specify the output tray as the stacker upper tray.
For details, see "General Features", Device Management.
• When loading translucent paper:
• When loading translucent paper, always use long grain paper, and set the paper direction
according to the grain.
• Translucent paper easily absorbs humidity and becomes curled. Remove curl in the translucent
paper before loading. For details about settings for flattening out curled paper, see "0310
Correct Output Paper Curl", Maintenance and Management.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
• When loading coated paper:

258
 Recommended Paper

• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use
matted paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
For details about the settings for using coated paper with custom paper, see page 44
"Registering a Custom Paper".
• When loading coated paper or glossy paper, always fan the paper before using it.
• If a paper jam occurs or if the machine makes a strange noise when feeding stacks of coated
paper, feed the coated paper one sheet at a time.
• To load coated paper into the wide LCT, you must specify [Coated: Glossy] or [Coated:
Matte] as the paper type and select an appropriate paper weight under [Paper Weight].
• When using carbonless paper, note the following:
• Carbonless paper can be used only when Two-tray Wide LCT is used along with Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 for post-processing.
• When using carbonless paper, you can attach no option except the high capacity stacker
between the machine and Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
• Duplex printing cannot be performed.
• Some types of carbonless paper have expiration dates. Purchase the amount you can use
within the time limit. Contact your paper retailer regarding the expiration dates and storage
methods.
• Depending on the paper weight or direction of the paper, paper jams may occur when reverse
output or duplex printing is performed. If the paper jams when thick long-grain paper is used, either
cancel the reverse output or duplex print settings, or to use short-grain or thin paper.

Thick paper

This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning thick paper.
When loading thick paper of 163.1 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Cover) or heavier in Trays 1–3, the wide LCT, multi
bypass tray (Tray A), or Trays 4 and 5 of the LCT, follow the recommendations below to prevent
misfeeds and loss of image quality.
• When loading thick paper into Trays 1–3, be sure to load at least 20 sheets. Also, be sure to
position the side fences flush against the paper stack.
• Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick smooth paper. To prevent such problems,
be sure to fan smooth paper thoroughly before loading them. If paper continues to become
jammed or feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the multi
bypass tray (Tray A).
• When loading thick paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the
following diagram. Not doing so might cause a paper jam, marked edges or the paper edges
to be folded. Using paper that is 209.0 g/m2 (77.4 lb. Cover) or heavier may also cause a
paper jam.

259
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper 64.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Paper heavier than 64.0 g/m2
Direction of paper grain
Bond) or less (17.1 lb. Bond)

• Select [Paper Weight 5], [Paper Weight 6], [Paper Weight 7], or [Paper Weight 8] as the paper
thickness for the tray in [Tray Paper Settings].
• Even if thick paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not
be possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might have prominent vertical creases.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled. For details about
settings for flattening out curled paper, see "Adjustment Settings for Operators", Maintenance and
Management.

Envelopes

This section describes loading envelopes.

• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Only envelopes that are at least 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) wide can be loaded.
To print on envelopes, load them into the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray (Tray A), and be sure to specify
an appropriate paper type.
To load envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the orientation with print side face up.

260
 Recommended Paper

CDL070

If you are printing onto side-opening envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the
orientation with print side face up. Flaps must be at the right side of the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray
(Tray A).

CDL081

Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
Storage of envelopes
Keep envelopes stored in sealed plastic bags and remove only the quantity needed. Do not add
envelopes during printing, as this might cause misfeeds.

• Be sure to specify the size of the envelope and flap size in [Tray Paper Settings]. For details, see
page 227 "Changing to a Custom Paper Size".
• When using envelopes, set [Paper Weight] in [Tray Paper Settings] to the same value as two sheets
of the paper used for the envelopes.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air inside and to flatten any edges
or creases. When envelopes are curled, flatten the envelopes so that the amount of curling is less
than 5 mm for paper whose paper weight is 52.3-299.9g/m2 or less than 3 mm for paper whose
weight is 300-400g/m2.
• Place one envelope at a time if you still get any of the following results:
• The envelope jams

261
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• The envelope is not fed

• Multiple envelopes are fed at the same time
• Humidity levels of over 50% can cause envelopes to come out creased or misprinted.
• Certain types of envelope might be delivered creased, soiled, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid fill on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.
• If the horizontal size of the envelope is 297 mm (11.7 inches) or less, a paper misfeed might occur.
If this happens, turn off Skew Detection. For details, see page 318 "0304 Skew Detection".
• When printing on envelopes thicker than 127.0 g/m2 (47.0 lb. Cover), do not use [П Curl
Correction Level: Large] or [U Curl Correction Level: Large] for "0310 Correct Output Paper Curl"
of [Adjustment Settings for Operators].

Paper Weight Conversion Table

The weight of paper is measured as paper weight or ream weight.

Paper weight is the weight of one square meter of a sheet of paper, measured in units of g/m2. Ream
weight is the weight in pounds of 500 sheets of the paper. The basic size varies depending on the type
(grade) of paper.
The basic sizes for each grade are as follow:
• Bond, Ledger: 17" × 22"
• Offset, Text: 25" × 38"
• Cover: 20" × 26"
• Index: 251/2" × 301/2"
Ream weight can be calculated using the following equation:
Ream weight (lb) = paper weight (g/m2) × dimension of paper (m2/sheet) × 500 (sheets)
The following table shows the relationship between paper weight and ream weight:

Ream weight

Paper weight Bond / Ledger Offset / Text Cover Index

(g/m2) (lb.) (lb. text) (lb. cover) (lb. index)

52 14 36 20 29

60 16 * 40 * 22 33

75 20 * 50 * 28 42

90 24 * 60 * 33 50

262
 Recommended Paper

Ream weight

Paper weight Bond / Ledger Offset / Text Cover Index

(g/m2) (lb.) (lb. text) (lb. cover) (lb. index)

105 28 * 70 * 39 58

108 29 73 40 * 60

118 31 80 * 44 65

120 32 * 81 45 67

135 36 90 50 * 75

148 39 100 * 55 82

162 43 110 60 * 90 *

176 47 120 65 * 97

199 53 135 74 110 *

216 58 146 80 * 120

244 65 165 90 * 135

253 67 171 94 140 *

256 68 173 95 142

270 72 183 100 * 150

297 79 201 110 * 165

307 82 208 114 170 *

325 87 220 120 180 *

351 94 237 130 * 194

398 106 269 147 220 *

405 108 274 150 224

Asterisks (*) indicate the most common weights for that category.

263
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Unusable Paper

• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of conductive
paper. Doing so can result in fire.

• To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper:
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Transparencies for color copying
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Faults can occur if you copy or print onto sides that are already printed. Take care to copy or print
onto unprinted sides only.

• To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:

• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Torn paper
• Paper with a dusty surface
• The following paper types are not supported by the perfect binder interposer and the interposer.
• Heavily curled paper
• Paper with staples or clips
• Torn paper
• Paper with penciled characters or images
• Folded paper
• The following paper types are not supported by the perfect binder interposer.
• Label paper
• Tab stock
• Cardstock

264
 Recommended Paper

• Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if the paper is not in good
condition.
• If you copy or print onto rough grain paper, the output image might be blurred.
• Do not load sheets that have already been printed onto by another machine. (Sheets can become
jammed if they have been improperly stored.)

Paper Storage

• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Store all your thick paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–
25°C (68–77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in plastic bags.
• Keep paper tightly sealed in a bag made of anti-humidity material even if the package of paper
has not been opened yet. If sheets of paper are not stored in an anti-humidity bag, store them in a
plastic bag and tightly seal it.

265
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Changing Tray Paper Settings

This section explains how to specify the size and type of the paper that is loaded in the source tray.
For an overview of the paper settings and how to register custom paper, seepage 38 "Registering
Custom Paper".

Accessing Tray Paper Settings

If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed might
occur because the correct paper size is not detected.

• If the specified paper type differs from the actual type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray, the
paper might misfeed, the toner might not fuse properly, or the print quality might be reduced.

Specifying a custom paper

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Select [Allocate from Media Catalog].

The custom papers that can be used in the selected tray appear.
The Master Library information is indicated by the icon.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
5. Select the custom paper that you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
After selecting a custom paper, you can check its type and color by pressing [Check Settings].
6. Press [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab.

266
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

7. Change the settings for the copy function (such as front cover sheet and designation
sheet), if necessary.
8. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Change Custom Paper Sett.] in Step 5.

Manually specifying a paper's size and type

1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Select [Manual Setting].
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Change the paper settings, and then press [Save Paper].
You can configure the following items:
• [Paper Size]
• [Paper Weight]
• [Paper Type]
• [Apply Duplex]
• [Apply Auto Paper Select]
7. Press [Save].
8. Press [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab.
9. Change the settings for the copy function (such as front cover sheet and designation
sheet), if necessary.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Tray 1 to 6, Tray A, Tray T1 to T4)

The optional units that your machine is equipped with determine the paper tray configuration.

267
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 10

9 11

EAQ121

1. Tray 1
2. Tray 2
3. Tray 3
4. Tray 4
5. Tray 5
6. Tray 6
7. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
8. Tray T1
9. Tray T2
10. Tray T3
11. Tray T4

268
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

Tray Paper Settings

This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1 to 6, Tray T1 to T4, the multi bypass tray (Tray A),
Interposer Tray and Perfect Binder Interposer Tray.
You can specify the settings for the [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab on Type 1, 2, or 3
machines only.
You can use perfect binder interposer on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.
When you assign a custom paper to a paper tray
• Auto Tray Switching is used for automatically switching between trays for custom papers that
have the same configured registration number.
• When printing in the Auto Paper Select mode, Auto Tray Switching switches between trays
that are configured for custom papers that meet all of the following conditions:
• The paper type is [Plain Paper] or [Recycled Paper] and both custom papers' paper
types are the same
• The paper weight is [Paper Weight 2] or [Paper Weight 3] and both custom papers'
paper weights are the same
• Both custom papers' paper sizes are the same

• If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed
might occur because the correct paper size is not detected.

• If you want to use preprinted paper, contact your service representative.

Paper Tray

This section explains the paper tray settings in the [Paper Tray] menu under [Tray Paper Settings].
Tray 1
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1.
Paper Size
• (mainly Europe)
A4
• (mainly North America)
81/ 2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)

269
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)

• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

270
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• (mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to 81/2 × 11 , contact
your service representative.
• (mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4 , contact your
service representative.
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 1 (when using the A3/11 × 17 tray unit)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1 (when using the A3/11 × 17 tray unit).
Paper Size
• (mainly Europe)
A3
• (mainly North America)
11 × 17
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink

271
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• (mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , or 81/2 × 11 , contact your service representative.
• (mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A3 , A4 , B4 JIS
, or 81/2 × 11 , contact your service representative.
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Trays 2 and 3
This section explains the paper tray settings for Trays 2 and 3.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 18 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]

272
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

You can specify a custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 457.2 mm (5.50 and 18.00 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency*1
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
*1 Tray 2 only.

273
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper] or [Transparency]
for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 4 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 4 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
• (mainly Europe)
A4
• (mainly North America)
81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue

274
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency], or
[Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• For details about how to specify paper size, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large
Capacity Tray". For details about the paper sizes that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".

275
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 4.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into Tray 4 is 216.0 g/m2 when the large
capacity tray is installed.
Tray 5 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 5 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
• (mainly Europe)
A4
• (mainly North America)
81/ 2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper

276
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• For details about how to specify paper size, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large
Capacity Tray". For details about the paper sizes that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 5.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into Tray 5 is 216.0 g/m2 when the large
capacity tray is installed.
Tray 6 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 6 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
• (mainly Europe)
A4
• (mainly North America)

277
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

278
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper] or [Transparency]

for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• (mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to B5 JIS , A5 , A5 ,
81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2 or 51/2 × 81/2 , contact your service representative.
• (mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4 , B5 JIS , A5 ,
A5 , 51/2 × 81/2 , or 51/2 × 81/2 , contact your service representative.
• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 6.
Trays 4 and 6 (when the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Trays 4 and 6 (when the three-tray wide LCT is
installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length,
attach the postcard side fences.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

279
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matted
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]

280
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency],
[Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 5 (when the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 5 (when the three-tray wide LCT is installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length,
attach the postcard side fences.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 0 (40.0–52.2g/m2) *1

281
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)

• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
*1 When printing on paper of Paper Weight 0, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in
the direction so that the grain direction is aligned with the feed direction.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper

282
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], [Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray T1 to T4 (when the two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray T1 to T4 (when the two-tray wide LCT is
installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

283
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 0 (40.0–52.2g/m2) *1
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
*1 When printing on paper of Paper Weight 0, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in
the direction so that the grain direction is aligned with the feed direction.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope

284
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Carbonless Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], [Envelope], [Tab Stock], or [Carbonless Paper] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
This section explains the paper tray settings for multi bypass tray (Tray A).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
Specify the paper size with the number keys when you select [Custom Size]. The paper sizes
that can be used differ depending on the machine's configuration.

285
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• When the LCT is installed:

Vertical: 100.0–305.0 mm (3.94–12.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the wide LCT is installed:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm (3.94–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the Wide LCT and the Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) are installed:
Horizontal: 139.7–700.0 mm (5.50–27.55 inches)
However, the minimum vertical size of custom paper changes depending on the
horizontal size as shown below:
• Horizontal: 139.7–487.7mm (5.50–19.20 inches); vertical: 100 mm (3.94
inches) or more
• Horizontal: 487.7–700.0mm (19.20–27.55 inches); v ertical: 210 mm (8.27
inches) or more
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red

286
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency],
[Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]

• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into the multi bypass tray (Tray A) is 216.0
g/m2.
Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when the interposer is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of the interposer.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B5 JIS ,
SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm , 226 × 310mm ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 ,
11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,

287
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper

288
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Perfect Binder Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when the Perfect Binder Interposer is
installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of the Perfect Binder
Interposer.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , B4 JIS , SRA3 , 310 × 432mm , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 ,
11 × 15 , 8K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 257.0 and 330.2 mm (10.12 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 364.0 and 487.7 mm (14.34 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet

This section explains the paper tray settings in the [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] menu
under [Tray Paper Settings].
Front Cover (Front Cover Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load front cover sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5

289
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]

• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Front Cover] settings only appear
when the front cover sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Back Cover (Back Cover Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load back cover sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4

290
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]

• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Back Cover] settings only appear
when the back cover sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Slip Sheet (Slip Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load slip sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3

291
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]

• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Slip Sheet] settings only appear when
the slip sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Sep. Sheet (Separation Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load separation sheets.
You can also specify the display time.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6

292
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]

• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] setting.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Sep. Sheet] settings only appear
when the separation sheet function is selected.
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Desig. Sheet 1–11 (Designation Sheet 1–11 Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load designation sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)

293
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)

Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]

• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Desig. Sheet 1–11] settings only
appear when the designation sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].

Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker

You can attach the ring binder and the high capacity stacker on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.

Using the ring binder

Removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray

• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap
your fingers if you do not.

294
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

1. Slightly lift the bound booklet and remove it, taking care not to scratch the tray with
the binding comb.

1 2

EAR159

• When removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray, be careful not to catch the rings on
the machine.
Inserting pages into an existing ring bound booklet

• When binding paper manually with the ring opener, take care not to trap or injure fingers.

You can use the ring stand and ring opener to insert new pages into the existing ring bound
booklets. Use these devices when you need to insert covers, replace existing pages, or add new
pages.

CET031

1. Ring stand
2. Ring opener

1. Punch holes into the pages that you want to insert into the ring bound booklet.

295
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

2. With the ring bound booklet closed, place the ring comb on the ring stand so that
each of the rings is in a groove on the stand.

CET032

3. Insert the spine of the ring comb into the fixing lug of the ring stand. Gently press
down on the ring comb to lock it into place.

CET033

4. Open the bound booklet to where you want to insert the new pages, and then place
one of your hands on the ring stand.

CET034

296
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

5. Insert the sharp end of the ring opener into one end of the ring comb, and then push
it all the way through the ring comb.

CET035

The rings of the comb will open as you push the ring opener through them.
6. Insert the new pages.
7. Holding the sides of the ring opener, carefully press down the opened rings.
To close a 50-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
smaller grooves.
To close a 100-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
larger grooves.

CET036

The rings of the comb will close as you press down with the ring opener.
8. Remove the ring comb from the ring stand.

• When using the ring opener, take care to avoid injuring self or others and damaging nearby
equipment.

297
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

Using the high capacity stacker

Stacker control panel
The high capacity stacker has a control panel that you can use to lower the stacker tray and
confirm the status of the high capacity stacker.

1 2 3 4

5 7
6
CGH007

1. Tray Moving Indicator

This flashes blue when the stacker tray is moving up or down. When the stacker tray has moved all the
way up and is in the standby state, the indicator turns off. When the stacker tray has moved all the way
down, the indicator lights up blue.
2. Lower Tray Button
Press this button to lower the tray. The tray cannot move if the stacker front cover is open.
3. Paper Jam Button
This is lit red when a paper jam occurs. Pressing this button lowers the stacker tray into the paper
removal position.
4. Cover of the Stacker Control Panel
5. Stacker Collecting Indicator
This flashes blue when the stacker tray is collecting output paper.
6. Stacker Full Indicator
This is lit red when the stacker tray is full.
7. Error Indicator
This is lit to indicate one or more of the following errors:
• The handcart is not properly set.
• The stacker front cover is open.
• Jammed paper is still inside the high capacity stacker.
Removing paper

• Use the stacker cart for transporting paper from the high capacity stacker. Do not use the
stacker cart for any other purpose.

298
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

• Do not attempt to get inside the high capacity stacker.

• The paper press might leave a mark on the top of the paper stack. To prevent this, put several
sheets of unwanted paper or a protective sheet between the paper press and the paper stack.

1. Open the cover of the stacker control panel, and then press the lower tray button.

CET019

To stop the lowering stacker tray, press the lower tray button again.
To resume lowering the tray, open and close the stacker front cover, and then press the lower
tray button again after the tray has risen completely.
When the stacker tray is fully lowered, the tray moving indicator stops flashing and remains lit.
2. Open the stacker front cover.

DER105

299
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

3. Carefully pull out the stacker cart.

DER106

Take care not to let the paper stack topple.

4. Rest the paper press on top of the paper stack.

CET022

5. Pull the lever on the paper press toward you.

CET023

6. Transport the paper to where it is required, and then unload the stacker cart.

300
 Changing Tray Paper Settings

7. Return the paper press to its original position.

CET024

8. Put the stacker cart back inside the high capacity stacker.

DER107

Be careful to push the stacker cart in straight, not at an angle.

DER108

9. Close the stacker front cover.

The stacker tray begins elevating automatically and the tray moving indicator begins flashing.
When the tray moving indicator stops flashing, the tray is fully elevated.

• Before moving the high capacity stacker, be sure to take the stacker cart out of the high
capacity stacker.

301
 6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper

302
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
This section explains Adjustment Settings for Operators and how to specify them.

How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for

Operators] Screen
This section explains how to use the Adjustment Settings for Operators.

1 2 3 4

5 6
EAR301

1. [-]
Press this key to collapse the hierarchical display of the adjustment items and display the group names of those
items.
2. [Reset]
Press this key to reset the settings/modifications currently configured. You cannot reset he settings/
modifications after pressing [Apply].
3. [Apply]
Press this key to apply the settings/modifications.
4. [To Print Screen]
Press this key to display the print screen. You can use this screen to view the changes you have made.
5. Adjustment items
Adjustment items are displayed in this area. When you select an item, its configuration screen will then open.
6. Configuration screen
Configure or modify the settings of the adjustment item you select.

303
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Accessing the Adjustment Settings for

Operators
1. Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators] at the upper left of the screen.
2. Select and change adjustment settings.
The method for changing the selected adjustment setting depends on the setting that you want to
change. For details, see page 304 "Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations".
3. Press [Apply].
4. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations

The following operations are available for each adjustment item:

• Value setting
• Item setting
• Executing
• Display only
Value setting
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the value respectively, or use the numeric keypad to enter
the value.

For some settings, move the slider right or left to increase or decrease the setting value.

304
 Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators

A numeric keypad appears to the left when you press the input box. Use the keypad to enter a
value.

• [×]: Press to delete the entered value character by character.

• [Clear]: Clear the entered value.
• [+/-]: Change the sign of the entered value from + (positive) to - (negative) and vice versa.
• [Enter]: Confirm the entered value.
For some items, you can select a value from the pull-down list that appears when you press the
input box. Select a value from the list.
Item setting
Select the item you require.

Executing
Press [Execute] to perform a selected function.

305
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Display Only
You can check the setting of the selected item.

Printing with Adjusted Settings

How the adjusted settings are applied to print jobs varies depending on the adjusted setting.
• Settings adjustable for each paper tray
• Settings adjustable for each paper size
Settings adjustable for each paper weight
These are settings adjustable for each paper weight.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing paper of the paper weight with the
applied setting.

Settings adjustable for each paper size

These are settings adjustable for each paper size.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing with a paper size that has the
applied settings.

306
 Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators

• For details about selecting the paper tray and paper size for printing, see the manuals for the
related functions.

307
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Menu Items and Functions

Main Unit: Image Position
For details about the following items, see page 314 "Main Unit: Image Position".

No. Item Description

0101 Image Position: With Feed Adjust the horizontal position of the print image.

0106 Select Test Pattern for Select the test image for adjusting the image position.
Image Position Adjustment This function is available for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

0108 ADF Double Feed Specify whether or not to detect multiple feeding of
Detection originals loaded in the Auto Document Feeder(ADF).
This function is available for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

Main Unit: Image Quality

For details about the following items, see page 316 "Main Unit: Image Quality".

No. Item Description

0202 Execute Image Quality Adjust the toner adhesion amount to the intermediate
Adjustment transfer belt during the image density adjustment.

0208 Avoid Paper Transfer Specify whether or not to enable the mode to reduce the
Shock Jitter: Feed Interval jitter*1 produced when paper enters the paper transfer
roller.

*1 The jitter occurs when the leading or trailing edge of paper that passes through the paper transfer unit is
transmitted to the drum unit via the intermediate transfer belt, causing banding.
Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output
For details about the following items, see page 317 "Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output".

No. Item Description

0301 Double Feed Detection Specify whether or not to detect double feeding of
paper.

0302 When Double Feed is Specify how the machine behaves when it detects a
Detected double feed.

0304 Skew Detection Specify whether or not to detect paper skew.

308
 Menu Items and Functions

No. Item Description

0310 Correct Output Paper Curl Specify the method for straightening curled sheets.

Main Unit: Maintenance

For details about the following items, see page 320 "Main Unit: Maintenance".

No. Item Description

0502 Execute Photoconductor Remove dust on the drum surface.

Refreshing

0517 Temperature / Humidity Display the internal temperature and humidity.

Inside

0518 Temperature / Humidity Display the external temperature and humidity.

Outside

0519 Display Banner for Specify whether or not to display the banner to indicate
Conditions Outside conditions outside the recommended operating
Optimal Range environment.

0522 Execute Charger Cleaning Clean the charge unit.

0523 Switch Print Screen Set the function displayed when pressing [To Print
Screen].

Finishing:Finisher 1
For details about the following items, see page 322 "Finishing:Finisher 1".

No. Item Description

0601 Staple Position for Booklet Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0602 Folding Position for Booklet Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0603 Staple Position: Across Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an
Feed 1 edge) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.

0604 Staple Position: Across Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the
Feed 2 staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.

309
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

No. Item Description

0605 Staple Position: With Feed Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0606 Punch Position: Across Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using
Feed Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0607 Punch Position: With Feed Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when
using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0609 Set Number of Folds for Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed
Booklet when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.

0636 Accuracy Priority for Set the accuracy priority for stapling.
Stapling

0637 Accuracy Priority for Set the accuracy priority for a booklet.
Booklet

Finishing: Finisher 2
For details about the following items, see page 331 "Finishing:Finisher 2".

No. Item Description

0701 Paper Alignment for Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the
Stapling: Across Feed staple function on Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher
SR5100.

0702 Paper Alignment for Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using
Booklet: Across Feed Booklet Finisher SR5090.

0703 Staple Position Adjust the staple positions (front and back parallel, and
back slant) with across feed for each specified paper
size.

0704 Staple Position for Booklet Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5090.

0705 Folding Position for Booklet Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5090.

0706 Folding Position for Adjust the folding position for a booklet by specified
Booklet: By Number of number of sheets with feed for each specified paper size.
Sheets

310
 Menu Items and Functions

No. Item Description

0707 Number of Sheets Align for Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one
Stapling time.

0708 Number of Sheets Align for Adjust the maximum number of prestack sheets for a
Booklet booklet for each specified paper size.

*1 Guide for alignment of printed paper. Printed paper is centered by the right and left guides.
Finishing: Fold
For details about the following items, see page 340 "Finishing: Fold".

No. Item Description

0801 Z-fold Position 1 Adjust the fold position of the end segment (S) when
using the fold unit.

0802 Z-fold Position 2 Adjust the overall fold size (L) of the Z-foldout sheets
when using the fold unit.

0803 Half Fold Position: 1 sheet Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (1 sheet
Fold fold) when using the fold unit.

0804 Half Fold Position: Multi- Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (multi-
sheet Fold sheet fold) when using the fold unit.

0805 Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of
sheet Fold letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold
unit.

0806 Letter Fold-out Position 1: Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
Multi-sheet Fold foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function
is enabled.

0807 Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (1
sheet Fold sheet fold) when using the fold unit.

0808 Letter Fold-out Position 2: Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets (multi-
Multi-sheet Fold sheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting will be
applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.

0809 Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1 Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S) of letter
sheet Fold fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.

311
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

No. Item Description

0810 Letter Fold-in Position 1: Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
Multi-sheet Fold fold-in sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.

0811 Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1 Adjust the fold size of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold)
sheet Fold when using the fold unit.

0812 Letter Fold-in Position 2: Adjust the fold size when Inside 3 Folding is executed
Multi-sheet Fold (Overlap Folding) when using the fold unit.

0813 Double Parallel Fold Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of
Position 1 double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.

0814 Double Parallel Fold Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of
Position 2 double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.

0815 Gate Fold Position 1 Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.

0816 Gate Fold Position 2 Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.

0817 Gate Fold Position 3 Adjust the fold position (S3) of the bottom segment 3 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.

Finishing: Perfect Binder

For details about the following items, see page 356 "Finishing: Perfect Binder".

No. Item Description

0901 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet
With Feed position when performing perfect binding.

0902 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position
Across Feed when performing perfect binding.

0903 Perfect Binding Finishing Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when
Angle trimming a deck of paper.

0904 Applying Binding Glue Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.

Finishing: Stacker
For details about the following items, see page 358 "Finishing:Stacker".

312
 Menu Items and Functions

No. Item Description

1007 Maximum Stack Quantity Set the maximum number of sheets for the stacker tray.
in Stacker Tray

Finishing: Interposer
For details about the following items, see page 359 "Finishing: Interposer".

No. Item Description

1101 Interposer Double Feed Set whether to detect double feed.

Detection

313
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Setting Values
Main Unit: Image Position

0101 Image Position: With Feed

Adjust the horizontal position of the print image.

You cannot individually adjust the image position on sides 1 and 2.

Side 1

Paper feed direction

Top

Left Right
(Leading Edge) (Trailing Edge)

Bottom
DGH005

Press [+] to shift the image to the right (trailing edge).

Press [−] to shift the image the left (leading edge).

Side 2

Paper feed direction

Top

Left Right
(Leading Edge) (Trailing Edge)

Bottom

CWY006

Press [+] to shift the image to the left (trailing edge).

Press [−] to shift the image to the right (leading edge).

314
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Paper Weight 0 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.1 mm

Paper Weight 1
Paper Weight 2
Paper Weight 3
Paper Weight 4
Paper Weight 5
Paper Weight 6
Paper Weight 7
Paper Weight 8

• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
• If the leading-edge margin on Side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur.
• If the trailing-edge margin on Side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur when
printing on the back side of paper during duplex printing.

Leading-edge margin Trailing-edge margin

Paper feed direction

CWY015

• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: With Feed: Side 1], [Image Position: With Feed: Side
2] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.

0106 Select Test Pattern for Image Position Adjustment

This function is available for Type1, Type2 and Type3.

Select the test image for adjusting the image position.

315
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

If [Copy Image] is selected, the image scanned using the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or exposure
glass is printed.
If [Frame Image] is selected, stripe test patterns are printed.

Setting Items Values Default Value

Test Pattern Copy Image Copy Image

Frame Image

0108 ADF Double Feed Detection

This function is available for Type1, Type2 and Type3.

Specify whether or not to detect multiple feeding of originals loaded in the Auto Document Feeder
(ADF).
If [On] is selected, the machine stops printing and displays a message reporting a paper jam when it
detects multiple feeding. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when you use creased,
scratched or torn originals, originals with holes, perforated originals, or originals with sticky notes or
tape affixed. In such a case, select [Off] to prevent erroneous detection.

Setting Items Values Default Value

Setting [On] [On]

[Off]

Main Unit: Image Quality

0202 Execute Image Quality Adjustment

Execute image density control manually.

The machine adjusts the image density. This operation takes about 30 seconds during which a message
appears on the control panel. Do not pull out the drawer while the message is being displayed.
If the density does not change after applying this function several times, contact your sales or service
representative.

Setting Items Values

Adjust Image Density Press [OK] to apply the setting.

316
 Setting Values

• The machine executes automatic image density adjustment after a set interval or after printing a
specified number of sheets. However, you can also manually initiate automatic image density
adjustment whenever you want.

0208 Avoid Paper Transfer Shock Jitter: Feed Interval

Specify whether or not to enable the mode to reduce the jitter*1 produced when paper enters the paper
transfer roller.
If "1" is selected, the machine adjusts the interval between sheets to reduce jitter. However, the
throughput may be reduced when you use paper larger than A4 or 81/2 × 14 . If this happens, turn
this setting off to improve the throughput.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Setting 0 1 0 1 –

*1 The jitter occurs when the leading or trailing edge of paper that passes through the paper transfer unit is
transmitted to the drum unit via the intermediate transfer belt, causing banding.

• Jitter does not occur with A4 , 81/2 × 14 or smaller paper.

• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Avoid Paper Transfer Shock Jitter: Feed Interval] in "Advanced
Settings" takes precedence.

Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output

0301 Double Feed Detection

Specify whether or not to detect double feeding of paper.

If [On] is selected, the machine stops when it detects paper double feeding, so as to prevent mixing of
unprinted paper.
The machine may not correctly detect double feeding when using special paper (two-ply paper such as
release paper). In such a case, select [Off].

317
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Setting Items Values Default Value

Tray 1 Off On
Tray 2 On
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray A
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4

• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Double Feed Detection] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.

0302 When Double Feed is Detected

Specify how the machine behaves when it detects a double feed.

If [Suspended] is selected, the machine, on detecting a double feed, stops printing and displays a paper
misfeed message.
If [Suspended After Paper Diversion] is selected, the machine stops printing if a double feed is detected,
then delivers the sheets to the paper trap inside the machine at the bottom left, and displays a paper
misfeed message.
This setting is enabled only if [Double Feed Detection] is set to [On].

Setting Items Values Default Value

Setting Suspended Suspended After Paper

Suspended After Paper Diversion
Diversion

0304 Skew Detection

Specify whether or not to detect paper skew.

318
 Setting Values

If the machine detects a paper skew when [On] is selected, the machine will stop printing and display a
message reporting a paper jam.
The machine may erroneously detect paper skew when using dark paper or paper printed to its edges.
In such a case, select [Off].

Setting Items Values Default Value

Tray 1 Off On
Tray 2 On
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray A
2 Sided
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4

• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Skew Detection] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.

0310 Correct Output Paper Curl

Specify the method for straightening curled sheets.

Select the method according to the direction and degree of curl.
If the paper is curled face up, select "U Curl Correction Level". If it is curled face down, select "П Curl
Correction Level". Depending on how much the paper is curled, specify the degree of correction by
selecting "Weak" or "Strong".

319
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Setting Items Values Default Value

Tray 1 U Curl Correction Level: Off U Curl Correction Level: Off

Tray 2 U Curl Correction Level: Small
Tray 3 U Curl Correction Level: Large
Tray 4 П Curl Correction Level: Off
Tray 5 П Curl Correction Level: Small
Tray 6 П Curl Correction Level: Large
Tray A
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4

Main Unit: Maintenance

0502 Execute Photoconductor Refreshing

Remove dust on the drum surface.

This operation takes about 4 minutes. Do not open the front covers during the operation.

Setting Items Values

Photoconductor Refreshing Press [OK] to apply the setting(s).

0517 Temperature / Humidity Inside

Display the internal temperature and humidity.

If your service representative requests it, report this information.

Setting Items Values

Temperature Value display only.

Humidity

320
 Setting Values

0518 Temperature / Humidity Outside

Display the external temperature and humidity.

If your service representative requests it, report this information.

Setting Items Values

Temperature Value display only.

Humidity

0519 Display Banner for Conditions Outside Optimal Range

Specify whether or not to display the banner to indicate conditions outside the recommended operating
environment.
Specify whether or not to display the banner when using the machine in conditions outside the
recommended operating environment.

Setting Items Values Default Value

High Temperature/Humidity Off On

Low Temperature/Humidity On

0522 Execute Charger Cleaning

Clean the charge unit.

If the printed copies have vertical creases, clean the charge unit. This may reduce the problem.
Do not open any covers during the operation.

Setting Items Values

Charger Cleaning Press [OK].

0523 Switch Print Screen

Set the function displayed when pressing [To Print Screen].

Setting Items Values Default Value

Setting Copier Copier

Printer

321
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Finishing:Finisher 1

0601 Staple Position for Booklet

Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position left, or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.

Paper feed direction

CWY016

322
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 1.0 -1.0 0.1 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0602 Folding Position for Booklet

Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position left or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.

323
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Folding position

Paper feed direction

CWY017

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 1.0 -1.0 0.1 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes

324
 Setting Values

0603 Staple Position: Across Feed 1

Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an edge) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the side edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward the
edge.

Leading Trailing
edge edge

Paper feed direction

DFZ001

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 2.0 -2.0 0.1 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

325
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

0604 Staple Position: Across Feed 2

Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the two stapling positions away from the center and each other or [ ] to move them
toward each other.

Leading Trailing
edge edge

Paper feed direction

DFZ002

326
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 115 -14.5 0.5 mm

B4 JIS SEF 75

A4 LEF 115

A4 SEF 28

B5 JIS LEF 75

B5 JIS SEF 0

11 × 17 SEF 98

81/2 × 14 SEF 34
81/ 2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF

81/2 × 11 LEF 98

81/2 × 11 SEF 34

8K SEF 85
16K LEF

16K SEF 12

Other Paper Sizes 115

0605 Staple Position: With Feed

Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the trailing edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward
the edge.

327
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Leading Trailing
edge edge

Paper feed direction

DFZ003

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 2.0 -2.0 0.1 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0606 Punch Position: Across Feed

Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position forward (up), or [ ] to move it backward (down).

328
 Setting Values

2 Holes Left 2 Holes Top

Paper feed direction

Paper feed direction
CVK007

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

2 Holes JP / EU 0.0 2.0 -2.0 0.5 mm

3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US

0607 Punch Position: With Feed

Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position toward the top edge (left) relative to the paper feed direction, or [ ] to
move it toward the bottom edge (right).

2 Holes Left 2 Holes Top

Paper feed direction

Paper feed direction

CVK008

329
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

2 Holes JP / EU 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.5 mm

3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US

0609 Set Number of Folds for Booklet

Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
You can adjust the paper folding strength by changing the number of folds per the booklet.
When you select "0", the default value, the finisher folds the booklet according to the number of sheets
in the booklet, as shown below.
• 1–6 sheets: 1 time
• 7–10 sheets: 2 times
• 11–30 sheets: 6 times
The value set here is added to the default values, which are 1, 2, and 3. Set a negative value to reduce
the number of times the finisher folds booklets. Set -1, -2, or -3 to not fold booklets that have 1 to 13
sheets, 14 to 15 sheets, or 16 to 25 sheets, respectively.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Number of Folds for Booklet 0 6 -6 1 times

0636 Accuracy Priority for Stapling

Set the accuracy priority for stapling.

Setting Items Values Default Value

Set Speed Priority Speed Priority

Accuracy Priority

0637 Accuracy Priority for Booklet

Set the accuracy priority for a booklet.

330
 Setting Values

Setting Items Values Default Value

Set Speed Priority Speed Priority

Accuracy Priority

Finishing:Finisher 2

0701 Paper Alignment for Stapling: Across Feed

Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the staple function on Finisher SR5090 or Booklet
Finisher SR5100.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 1.5 -1.5 0.5 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes

*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the
finisher.

331
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

0702 Paper Alignment for Booklet: Across Feed

Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 1.5 -1.5 0.5 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the
finisher.

0703 Staple Position

Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an edge) when using the Finisher SR5090 or Booklet
Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the side edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward the
edge.

332
 Setting Values

Leading Trailing
edge edge

Paper feed direction

CZC212

Adjust the vertical position of the staples (dual) when using the Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher
SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the two stapling positions away from the center and each other or [ ] to move them
toward each other.

Leading Trailing
edge edge

Paper feed direction

CZC215

333
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 3.5 -3.5 0.5 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes

0704 Staple Position for Booklet

Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the position left, or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.

Paper feed direction

CWY016

334
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF

12 × 18 SEF 1.8 -1.8

8K SEF 3.0 -3.0

Other Paper Sizes 1.8 -1.8

0705 Folding Position for Booklet

Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the position left or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.

Folding position

Paper feed direction

CWY017

335
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0706 Folding Position for Booklet: By Number of Sheets

Adjust the folding position. In left and right spread state, move to right with [ ] and left with [ ].

336
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF: 1-5 Sheets 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

A3 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
A3 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
A3 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
B4 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
B4 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
B4 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
B4 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
A4 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
A4 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
A4 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
A4 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
B5 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
B5 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
B5 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
B5 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
11 × 17 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 16 Sheets or More

337
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

81/2 × 14 SEF: 1-5 Sheets 0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

81/2 × 14 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 14 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 14 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
81/2 × 11 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
12 × 18 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
8K SEF: 1-5 Sheets
8K SEF: 6-10 Sheets
8K SEF: 11-15 Sheets
8K SEF: 16 Sheets or More
Other Paper Sizes: 1-5 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 6-10 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 11-15 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 16 Sheets or More

0707 Number of Sheets Align for Stapling

Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one time.

If too many sheets are delivered to the shift unit, the stacked sheets may not be correctly aligned due to
the paper type and paper condition.
If that happens, adjust the setting to the optimal value for the paper you are using.
When the number is less, it takes more time to align and productivity may fall.

338
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0 0 -1 1 sheet
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes

0708 Number of Sheets Align for Booklet

Adjust the maximum number of prestack sheets for a booklet for each specified paper size.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0 0 -2 1 sheet
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

339
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Finishing: Fold

0801 Z-fold Position 1

Adjust the fold position of the end segment (S) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

Paper feed direction

DWP561

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0802 Z-fold Position 2

Adjust the overall fold size (L) of the Z-foldout sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

340
 Setting Values

Paper feed direction

DWP561

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0803 Half Fold Position: 1 sheet Fold

Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

341
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

L1
S

Paper feed direction

DWP562

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0804 Half Fold Position: Multi-sheet Fold

Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.

342
 Setting Values

This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.

Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

L1
S

Paper feed direction

CWY007

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

343
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

0805 Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 sheet Fold

Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S2

Paper feed direction

DWP563

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF

B5 JIS SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

12 × 18 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0806 Letter Fold-out Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold

Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the
fold unit. This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).

344
 Setting Values

The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S2

Paper feed direction

CWY008

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

B4 JIS SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

A4 SEF

B5 JIS SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

81/2 × 14 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

81/ 2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0807 Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 sheet Fold

Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

345
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

S2

Paper feed direction

DWP563

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF

B5 JIS SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

12 × 18 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0808 Letter Fold-out Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold

Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting
will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

346
 Setting Values

S2

Paper feed direction

CWY008

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

B4 JIS SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

A4 SEF

B5 JIS SEF 0.0 3.0 -3.0 0.2 mm

81/2 × 14 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0809 Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1 sheet Fold

Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S) of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S L

Paper feed direction

DWP564

347
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0810 Letter Fold-in Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold

Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter fold-in sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S L

Paper feed direction

CWY009

348
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0811 Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1 sheet Fold

Adjust the fold size of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (LS).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S L

Paper feed direction

DWP564

349
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0812 Letter Fold-in Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold

Adjust the fold size when Inside 3 Folding is executed (Overlap Folding) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

S L

Paper feed direction

CWY009

350
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF

81/2 × 11 SEF 0.0

8K SEF -4.0
Other Paper Sizes

0813 Double Parallel Fold Position 1

Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.

L1
S1

Paper feed direction

DWP565

351
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0814 Double Parallel Fold Position 2

Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

L4

L3
S2

Paper feed direction

DWP566

352
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0815 Gate Fold Position 1

Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.

S1 S2

L3

Paper feed direction

DWP567

353
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0816 Gate Fold Position 2

Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.

S1 S2

L3

Paper feed direction

DWP567

354
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

0817 Gate Fold Position 3

Adjust the fold position (S3) of the bottom segment 3 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S3).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge.

L3
S3

Paper feed direction

DWP568

355
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

A3 SEF 0.0 4.0 -4.0 0.2 mm

B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes

Finishing: Perfect Binder

You can use the Perfect Binder on Type 1 or 2 machines only.

0901 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: With Feed

Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned horizontally.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image feed direction or reverse feed direction.

Spine of the book

Front
cover

Paper feed direction

EAR312

356
 Setting Values

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Setting 0.0 5.0 -5.0 0.1 mm

0902 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: Across Feed

Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned vertically.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image backward or forward.

Spine of the book

Front
cover

Paper feed direction

CWY010

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Setting 0.0 5.0 -5.0 0.1 mm

0903 Perfect Binding Finishing Angle

Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when trimming a deck of paper.
Make this adjustment if the three edges of the deck of paper cut by the perfect binder are not square.
Enter the distance from the square part at each edge.

357
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

Fore Edge

Tail Edge Head Edge

DWP570

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Head Edge 0.00 10.0 -10.0 0.10 mm

Tail Edge
Fore Edge

0904 Applying Binding Glue

Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.

If there is not enough glue, some pages may not stick.
If there is too much glue, the glue may be squeezed out of the binding and stick the pages together
making it difficult to open the booklet.

Default Max. Min.

Setting Items Step Unit
Value Value Value

Setting 0.00 0.30 -0.30 0.05 mm

Finishing:Stacker

1007 Maximum Stack Quantity in Stacker Tray

Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stacked on the stacker tray. The setting applies to
both the 1st and 2nd stackers.
The maximum number of sheets you can set differs depending on the size, thickness, and paper curl. Set
the maximum number by specifying a ratio based on the number of sheets. Select [Large Size] when
using paper whose vertical and horizontal lengths are 210 mm or longer whose area is 81/2 × 11 or
wider. Select [Small Size] when using other size paper.

358
 Setting Values

Major paper sizes that apply to each item are as follows:

• Large Size: A3 or larger (up to 13 × 191/5 ), B4 JIS , A4 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 11
• Small Size: B5 JIS , A5 , 51/2 × 81/2
If the unit detects that the number of sheets reaches the set upper limit, a warning message will appear.

Setting Items Values Default Value

Large Size 100% 100%

75%
50%
25%

Small Size 100% 50%

75%
50%
25%

Finishing: Interposer

1101 Interposer Double Feed Detection

Set whether to detect double feed.

If this is set to [On], the machine detects double feeding and so keeps unintended blank sheets out of the
delivered paper. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when using special paper.
To prevent erroneous detection of double feeding, set this to [Off].

Setting Items Values Default Value

Interposer Upper Tray Off Off

On

Interposer Lower Tray Off Off

On

359
 7. Adjustment Settings for Operators

360
8. Print
This chapter explains how to configure the printer driver, and describes notes and operational settings of
the printer function. It also explains how to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and how to print
from external media.

Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device

Software Manager Installer
Device Software Manager is a support utility for driver installation in Windows. Device Software
Manager helps you to detect the latest driver via the internet automatically according to the computer
you are using and install it with a simple procedure.

• Device Software Manager supports Windows OS only. To install the printer driver on Mac OS, see
the following sections:
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (OS X/macOS)", Driver Installation
Guide
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for USB Connection (OS X/macOS)", Driver Installation
Guide
• Follow the instructions of the installer to connect the USB cable.

Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM

1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.

If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [[Link]] in the root directory of the CD-
ROM.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].

361
 8. Print

3. Click [Install Online].

EAR663

4. Select [I accept the agreement] on the "License Agreement" screen, and then click [Install].
5. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
6. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
7. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].

DZC085

• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.

362
 Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer

• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
8. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

DZC086

The installation of the driver starts.

• If "Could not verify publisher" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue the
installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.

If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.

363
 8. Print

9. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

• After completing the installation, Device Software Manager icon is created on the desktop screen.

• You can update the installed printer driver with Device Software Manager.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", Driver Installation Guide.

Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File

1. Double-click the downloaded file.

2. Select [I accept the agreement] on the "License Agreement" screen, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Next] on the "Welcome to the Device Software Manager Setup Wizard" screen.
4. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
5. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
6. After completing the installation, select the [Run Device Software Manager] check box,
and then click [Finish].
The installation of Install Online is complete. Next, install the printer driver.
7. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, select [Agree], and then click [Next].

364
 Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer

8. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].

DZC085

• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.

• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
9. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

DZC086

The installation of the driver starts.

• If "The publisher could not be verified" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue
the installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.

365
 8. Print

If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
10. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

• Double-click the Device Software Manager icon created on the Finder of the computer to update
the printer driver.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", Driver Installation Guide.

366
 Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen

Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen

This chapter explains how to open the printer driver settings screen using Windows 10 as an example.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application.

Displaying the Printer Driver Properties

This section explains how to open the printer driver properties.

• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer settings. Log on as an Administrators
group member.
• You cannot change the machine default settings for individual users. Settings made in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users.

1. Right-click the [Start] menu, and then click [Control Panel].

2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Printer properties].

Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box

Displaying the [Printing preferences] dialog box from the [Start] menu

This section explains how to open the [Printing preferences] dialog box.

• When the printer driver is distributed from the print server, the setting values specified by the server
are displayed as the default for [Printing Defaults...].
• You cannot configure different print settings for each user. The settings configured in this dialog box
are used as the default.

1. Right-click the [Start] menu, and then click [Control Panel].

2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Printing preferences].

367
 8. Print

Displaying the [Printing preferences] dialog box in an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application. To make printer settings for a specific
application, open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from that application.
The settings displayed in the [Printing preferences] dialog box are applied as the default in the [Printing
preferences] dialog box opened in an application. When printing from an application, modify the
settings as required.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application. The following procedure explains how
to print documents from an application using WordPad in Windows 10 as an example.

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].

• Procedures for opening the [Printing preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application.
For details, see the printer driver Help or the manuals provided with the application.

Menu names and brief overview of each function

The following is an overview of the menus that are available on the [Detailed Settings] tab of the PCL 6
printer driver. For details about other items that can be configured from each menu, see the printer driver
Help.

• The available functions may vary depending on the optional units that are installed. For details
about the optional units required for this function, see "Functions Requiring Optional
Configurations", Device Management.
Job Setup menu
You can specify job type, the classification code, and authentication.
• For details about how to store data on the hard disk of this machine and print it using the
control panel, see "Storing Documents in the Hard Disk Drive and Printing Them", Basic
Operations.
• For details about how to store data in the Document Server and print it using the control
panel, see "Saving and Printing Using the Document Server", Basic Operations.
• For details about registering classification codes, see "Registering Classification Codes", Basic
Operations.
Basic menu
You can specify the original orientation, size, and print size.

368
 Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen

Paper menu
You can configure settings for the source tray, paper type, tab stock printing, and Letterhead
Setting.
• For details about tab stock printing, see "Tab Stock Printing", Basic Operations.
Cover/Slip/Designate menu
You can configure the settings for cover sheet, slip sheet, and chapter page.
• For details about front and back cover sheet, see "Cover Sheet", Basic Operations.
• For details about slip sheet, see "Slip Sheets", Basic Operations.
• For details about chapter page, see "Chapter Page", Basic Operations.
2 Sided/Layout/Booklet menu
You can configure combine printing, two-sided printing, and booklet printing settings.
• For details about specifying combine printing, see "Combining Multiple Pages into Single
Page", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying two-sided printing, see page 373 "Printing on Both Sides of
Sheets".
• For details about booklet printing, see page 23 "Booklet Printing".
Imposition menu
You can configure poster function settings.
• For details about poster function, see "Poster", Basic Operations.
Output Settings menu
You can configure the settings for the output tray, collate, separation sheet, and banner page.
• For details about collate, see "Collate", Basic Operations.
• For details about separation sheet, see "Separation Sheet", Basic Operations.
• For details about banner page, see "Banner Page", Basic Operations.
Finishing menu
You can configure staple, punch, fold, ring binding, perfect binding, and fore edge cut settings.
• For details about staple and fore edge cut, see "Staple", Basic Operations.
• For details about punch, see "Punch", Basic Operations.
• For details about fold, see page 31 "Fold".
• For details about ring binding, see page 28 "Ring Binding".
• For details about perfect binding, see page 24 "Perfect Binding".
Print Quality:Standard menu
You can configure settings such as resolution and toner saving.
• For details about toner saving, see "Conserving Toner When Printing", Basic Operations.

369
 8. Print

Print Quality:Advanced menu

You can configure settings such as color balance and vector/raster.
Effects menu
You can configure unauthorized copy prevention, watermark, and background numbering settings.
• For details about enabling watermark, see "Watermarks", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying unauthorized copy prevention, see "Printing Documents That Are
Not Authorized for Duplication", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying background numbering, see "Enabling Background Numbering"
Basic Operation.
Driver Options menu
Use this menu to provide functions concerned with controls peculiar to printer driver. For details,
see the printer driver Help.

Using one click presets

Some of the frequently used functions are registered under "One Click Preset List:" on the [Frequently
Used Settings] tab.
You can apply the relevant setting simply by clicking on the one click preset name. This helps to avoid
incorrect settings and misprints.
One click presets can be added, modified, and deleted as required. By using registered one click
presets, users without in-depth knowledge of the printer driver can utilize advanced printing functions
easily.
Follow the procedure to register one click presets.

1. Open the [Printing preferences] dialog box.

2. Make the settings you require.
3. Click [Register Current Settings...].
4. Enter a name and comment that describe the setting, and then click [OK].
5. Click [OK].

• For details about modifying and deleting one click presets, see the printer driver Help.

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

Displaying the printer driver Help

If you click [Help] in the setting dialog box for the printer driver, the Help contents corresponding to
the displayed screen appears.

370
 Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen

Displaying the descriptions of the items on the printer driver's settings dialog box
If a question mark button is displayed in the upper right corner of the setting dialog box for the
printer driver, a question mark sign will be displayed next to the mouse pointer by clicking that
button. Move this question mark over the item whose Help information you want to view, and then
left-click to display the Help information.

371
 8. Print

Standard Printing

• The default setting is two-sided printing. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off] for the
two-sided printing setting.

• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".

When using the PCL 6 printer driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
5. In the "Job Type:" list, select [Normal Print].
6. In the "Document Size:" list, select the size of the original to be printed.
7. In the "Orientation" area, select [Portrait] or [Landscape] as the orientation of the
original.
8. In the "Paper Type:" list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
9. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray that contains the paper you want to print
onto.
If you select [Auto Tray Select] in the "Input Tray:" list, the source tray is automatically selected
according to the paper size and type specified.
10. If you want to print multiple copies, specify a number of sets in the "Copies:" box.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

372
 Printing on Both Sides of Sheets

Printing on Both Sides of Sheets

This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.

• The types of paper that can be printed on both sides are as follows:
• Plain, Recycled, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory,
Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, White, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte),
Carbonless Paper

• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page breaks may occur.
• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".

When using the PCL 6 printer driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the method for binding the output pages in the "2 sided:" list.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Types of two-sided printing

You can select which way the bound pages open by specifying which edge to bind.

Orientation Open to Left Open to Top

Portrait

373
 8. Print

Orientation Open to Left Open to Top

Landscape

374
 Printing on Envelopes

Printing on Envelopes
Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel.

• To print on envelopes, load them into the optional wide Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Tray A, and
be sure to specify an appropriate paper type. See page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".

Configuring envelope settings using the control panel

1. Load envelopes in the paper tray.

About how to load envelopes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings] on the upper left of the screen.
3. Select the paper tray on the [Paper Tray] tab in which the envelopes are loaded.
When specifying the paper type or weight of envelopes as you want, check that [Manual Setting]
is selected.
When specifying the paper settings for envelopes by allocating from a registered custom paper,
select [Allocate from Media Catalog], select custom paper to use, and then press [Allocate to
Tray].
When specifying the setting values manually, proceed to the next step. After allocating the setting
values from the media catalog, proceed to Step 9.
4. Press [Edit the Settings].
5. Press [Paper Size], and select the envelope size.
6. Press [Paper Weight], and select the paper weight of the envelope.
7. Press [Paper Type], and select the appropriate item.
8. Press [Save Paper].
9. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Printing on envelopes using the printer driver

When using the PCL 6 printer driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].

375
 8. Print

4. In the "Document Size:" list, select the envelope size.

5. In the "Paper Type:" list, select [Envelope].
6. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 38 "Registering Custom
Paper".

376
9. Scan
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Scan function.
You can use the Scan function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

To send scanned files by Scan to Folder, you must first perform the following:
• Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/Confirming a computer's information
• Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/Confirming a computer's
information

• You can create the shared folder under Windows 7 or later, Windows Server 2008 or later, and
OS X 10.10 or later.
• Files can be sent via SMB using the SMB (139/TCP or 137/UDP) or CIFS (445/TCP) protocol.
• Files can be sent via SMB (139/TCP or 137/UDP) in a NetBIOS over TCP/IP environment only.
• Files cannot be sent via SMB in a NetBEUI environment.

Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/confirming a

computer's information

The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running Windows, and
how to confirm the computer's information. In these examples, Windows 10 is the operating system, and
the computer is a member in a network domain. Write down the confirmed information.

Step 1: Confirming the user name and computer name

Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [All apps].

2. Click [Windows System], and then click [Command Prompt].
3. Enter the command "ipconfig/all", and then press the [Enter] key.
4. Confirm the name of the computer.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].
You can also confirm the IPv4 address. The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4
address of the computer.

377
 9. Scan

5. Next, enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key. (Be sure to put a
space between "set" and "user".)
6. Confirm the user name.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].

• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.

Step 2: Creating a shared folder on a computer running Microsoft Windows

Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 10 and participating in a domain is used as an example.

• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.

• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.

1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, select [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
8. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].

378
 Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

Step 3: Specifying access privileges for the created shared folder

If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:

1. Right-click the folder created in Step 2, and then click [Properties].

2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].

• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address or
computer name, and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the
shared folder.
• For details about registering shared folders, see "Registering Folders", Device Management.

Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/confirming a

computer's information

The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running OS X/macOS,
and how to confirm the computer's information. macOS 10.13 is used in these examples.

Step 1: Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X/macOS

• You must log in as an administrator to create a shared folder.

1. Create the folder that you want to send scan files to.
2. On the Apple menu, click [System Preferences].
3. Click [Sharing].

379
 9. Scan

4. Select the [File Sharing] check box.

5. Click [Options...].
6. Select the [Share files and folders using SMB] check box.
7. Select the account that will be used to access the shared folder.
8. If the "Authenticate" screen appears, enter the password for the account, click [OK], and
then click [Done].
9. Under the [Shared Folders:] list, click [+] (new).
10. Select the folder you have created, and then click [Add].
11. Make sure that the permissions for the user who will access this folder are set to [Read &
Write].

• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address,
and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the shared folder.

Step 2: Confirming the computer's name and the user name

Confirm the computer name and the user name for the computer you will send scanned documents to.
Write down the confirmed information.

1. On the Apple menu, click [About This Mac].

2. Click [System Report...].
3. In the left pane, click [Software], and then confirm the computer name and user name
under "System Software Overview:".
The computer name is displayed under [Computer Name:].
The user name is displayed under [User Name:].

• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.
• To confirm the IP address: on the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...], and then click
[Network] on the System Preferences window. Then click [Ethernet]. The address displayed in the IP
address field is the IP address of the computer.

380
 Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

Registering the shared folder of the destination computer in the address book

You can register destinations to send scanned files in the address book. The registered destinations can
be selected easily by pressing the destination key that is displayed on the initial screen of the scanner
function.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Address Book Management].
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] next to "Name", enter the name you want to display as the destination,
and then press [OK].
6. Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
7. Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] in "Folder Authentication".
8. Press [Change] next to "Login User Name", enter the login user name on the destination
computer, and then press [OK].
9. Press [Change] next to "Login Password", enter the login password on the destination
computer, and then press [OK].
10. Re-enter the password for confirmation, and then press [OK].
11. Press [Folder].
12. Select a folder from [Browse Network].
1. Press [Browse Network].
2. Select the group to which the destination computer belongs. Browse for the domain name/
workgroup name.
3. Press the name of the computer you want to send the file to.
4. Select the shared folder on the destination computer.
5. Press [OK], and proceed to Step 13.
If the folder cannot be selected from Browse Network, proceed to Step 12.
13. Enter the computer name or IP address to specify a shared folder as the destination.
• Entering the computer name to specify a shared folder
1. Press [Change] after specifying the path name.
2. Specify the destination computer and a shared folder.
For example, if the computer name is "UserPC" and a shared folder name is "scan", use
"\\UserPC\scan" as the name of the destination folder.
3. Press [OK]
• Entering the IP address to specify a shared folder

381
 9. Scan

1. Press [Change] after specifying the path name.

2. Specify the destination computer and a shared folder.
For example, if the computer name is "[Link]" and a shared folder name is
"scan", use "\\[Link]\scan" as the name of the destination folder.
3. Press [OK]
14. Press [Connection Test].
15. When a message indicating that the connection has been successfully established
appears, press [Exit].

• If a message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see
page 463 "Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
16. Press [OK].
17. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.

382
 Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

• Before performing this procedure, see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder" and
confirm the details of the destination computer. See also "Registering Folders", Device
Management, and register the address of the destination computer to the address book.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Press the [Folder] tab.

5. Place originals.
6. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.

Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.

383
 9. Scan

• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].
• Press [Send File Type / Name], press [PDF], and then press [OK].
For information about other settings, see "Various Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
7. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see page 385 "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".
8. Press the [Start] key.

• If any of the machine's security functions are enabled, select the destination from the registered
folder only when you send files by Scan to Folder.
• If you have selected more than one destination, you can press [ ] or [ ] next to the destination
field to scroll through the destinations.
• To cancel a selected destination, press [ ] or [ ] to display the destination in the destination field,
and then press the [Clear] key. You can cancel a destination selected from the destination list by
pressing the selected destination again.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. For details, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder", Basic Operations.
• After scan files are sent, the destination and file name fields will be automatically cleared. If you
want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.
• You cannot switch the screen while WSD or DSM destinations are being specified. To clear the
specified destination, display the destination in the destination field, and then press the [Clear] key.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.

384
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
• Selecting the destination from the machine's address book
• Sending files to a shared network folder
• Sending files to an FTP server
• Selecting the destination from recent destinations

• You can specify multiple destinations.

• For details about sending a file to a destination that is registered in the machine's address book,
see page 393 "Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book".
• For details about sending a file over the network to a shared folder, see page 386 "Sending Files
to a Shared Network Folder".
• For details about sending a file to an FTP server using Send to Folder, see page 388 "Sending files
to an FTP server".
• For details about sending a file to a recently used destination, see page 397 "Selecting the
Destination from Recent Destinations".

385
 9. Scan

Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder

• When sending to a shared folder on a network, see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan
to Folder" and confirm the following items for the destination computer:
• Destination computer name
• Destination computer's user name and password
• Destination shared folder name
• Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the shared folder may require
authentication.
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following methods:
• Enter the path to the destination directly
• Specify the path by browsing the network for the destination

• If the firewall of an antivirus program is active, you may not be able to specify a shared folder on
the computer as a folder destination. If this is the case, see the antivirus program's Help.
• If Windows firewall is active and you cannot specify a shared folder on the computer as a folder
destination, the machine may be able to communicate with the computer by changing the
exceptions of the Windows firewall. For details, see Windows Help.

Entering the path to the destination manually

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.

386
 Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder

4. Enter the path for the folder.

In the following example path, the shared folder name is "user" and the computer name is
"desk01":
\\desk01\user
5. Press [OK].
6. Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
7. Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] for the password to display the soft keyboard.
8. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder exists.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
9. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
10. Press [OK].

• To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Edit] on the left side of the
destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder, and then press [OK].
• The connection test may take time.
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• If the client computer has a fixed IP address assigned to it, you can specify the IP address manually
by including it in the path name of the destination folder. For example, if the IP address is
"[Link]" and the shared folder name is "user", enter "\\[Link]\user" as the
path.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.

387
 9. Scan

Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
4. Select the domain or workgroup in which the destination folder is located.
5. Select the client computer that has the destination folder.
If you cannot find the computer you are looking for, press [Up One Level] and browse that level.
If authentication is required to access the selected computer, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
6. Select the destination folder.
When the selected folder has sub-folders, the sub-folders list appears.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search for the folder at that
level.
7. Press [OK] twice.

• Up to 100 computers or shared folders can be displayed.

• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have the write privileges for the shared folder
or there is not enough free hard disk space.

Sending files to an FTP server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP server.

388
 Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [FTP].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the server name field.
4. Enter a server name.
Instead of the server name, you can also use its IPv4 address.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
7. Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the subfolder name is
"lib": user\lib.
8. Press [OK].
9. Enter the user name according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
10. Enter the password according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] next to the password field to make the soft keyboard appear.
11. To change the port number which is set in [System Settings], press [Change] on the right
side of the port number field. Enter a port number using the number keys, and then press
the [ ] key.
12. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exists.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
13. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
14. Press [OK].

• The connection test may take time.

389
 9. Scan

• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• To change the registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left of the destination field
to display the soft keyboard, enter the new path, and then click [OK].
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges for the folder or there is
not enough free hard disk space.

390
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-

mail
1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Press the [Email] tab.

5. Place originals.
6. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.

Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].
• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name], and then press [OK].

391
 9. Scan

For information about other settings, see "Various Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
The settings explained in "Entering the E-mail Subject", "Entering the E-mail Message", "Security
Settings to E-mails", Basic Operations can also be specified.
7. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see page 393 "Specifying the Destination or Recipient".
8. To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name], and then press [OK].
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Sender", Basic Operations.
9. To use Message Disposition Notification, press [Recept. Notice].
If you select [Recept. Notice], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when the e-
mail recipient has opened the e-mail.
10. Press the [Start] key.

• This machine supports SMTPS (SMTP over SSL).

• This machine supports Web mail sending.
• If [Auto Specify Sender Name] on the [File Transfer] tab under [System Settings] is set to [On], you
can send e-mails without entering anything for [Sender Name]. For details, see "File Transfer",
Device Management.
• Depending on the security setting, the logged-in user may be specified as [Sender Name].
• To use Message Disposition Notification, log in to the machine as a user and specify the sender.
Note, however, that the [Recept. Notice] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail
software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification.
• If you press [Preview] and then start scanning, the [Preview] screen appears. You can use this
screen to check how the originals are scanned and the scan setting used for scanning. After
checking the preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not. For detail, see page 141
"[Preview] screen under the scanner function".
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• You can also store a scan file and simultaneously send it by e-mail. For details, see "Simultaneous
Storage and Sending by E-mail", Basic Operations.
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, subject, text, and file name fields will be
automatically cleared. If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local
dealer.
• You cannot switch the screen while WSD or DSM destinations are being specified. To clear the
specified destination, display the destination in the destination field, and then press the [Clear] key.
• You can specify whether to send a file as an e-mail attachment or by sending a URL link in [File
Emailing Method]. For details, see "Send Settings", Preparation.

392
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• When [Login User Address Priority] is set to [On], the login user's e-mail address is specified as a
destination after you log in to the machine and display the initial scanner screen. For details, see
"General Settings", Preparation.

Specifying the Destination or Recipient

This section explains how to specify the e-mail recipient or the destination folder.
The following methods of specifying the mail recipient or the destination folder are available:
• Selecting the destination from the machine's address book
• Entering the destination manually
• Selecting the destination from the recent destinations
• Searching and selecting the destination from LDAP server (only when sending files by e-mail)

• You can specify multiple destinations.

• Before you select destinations, make sure you have selected [To]. If necessary, press [Cc] or [Bcc],
and then select destinations.
• For details about entering the destination when using Scan to Folder, see page 386 "Entering the
path to the destination manually".

Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book

This section explains how to select the destination from the machine's address book.

• To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in advance. About the
settings, see Device Management for details.
• For details about registering destination folders in the machine's address book using SMB protocol,
see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder".
You can use the following methods to select destinations registered in the machine's address book:
• Select a destination from the list
• Select a destination by entering the registration number
• Select a destination by searching the machine's address book

Selecting a destination from the list

Select the destination from the destination list.

393
 9. Scan

1. In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.

The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears in the destination
field at the top of the screen.

• If the target destination does not appear, display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the
title.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.

Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers

Select the destination from the machine's address book using its registration number.

1. Press [Reg. No.].

2. Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned to the required
destination, and then press the [ ] key.
3. Press [OK].

394
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it

1. Press [Search Dest.].

2. To search by destination name, press [Name]. To search by e-mail address, press [Email
Address].
To search by folder name, select the [Folder] tab, and then press [Folder Name].
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Email Address].
3. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
4. Press [OK].
5. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then
press [OK].
6. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
7. Select a destination.
To send the file by e-mail, select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
8. Press [OK].

• If [LDAP Search] is set to [On] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings], check that [Address
Book] has been selected before executing the search.
• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [Email Address], and [Folder
Name], are registered in the machine's address book. For details, see "Registering Addresses and
Users", Device Management.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.

395
 9. Scan

For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".

• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.

Entering an E-mail Address Manually

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Enter the e-mail address.

3. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] may not be displayed.

• To change a registered destination e-mail address, press [Edit] to the left of the destination field to
display the soft keyboard, use the soft keyboard to enter the new address, and then click [OK].
• The e-mail address that is entered directly can be registered in the machine's address book. For
details, see page 399 "Registering a destination in the address book manually".

396
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Selecting the Destination from Recent Destinations

This section explains how to display destinations that have been recently entered directly, and how to
select one of those destinations.

1. Press [Recent].

2. Select a destination.
3. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security settings, [Recent] may not be displayed.

• If there are multiple recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
• The 10 most recent destinations for each destination type (e-mail, SMB, and FTP) are displayed.
Destinations are deleted in chronological order, oldest first.
• You can add recent destinations to the machine's address book. For details, see page 399
"Registering a destination in the address book manually".

Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server

This section explains how to search for an address registered in an LDAP server and specify it as an e-
mail destination.

• To use this function, an LDAP server must be connected to the network.

• The LDAP server must be registered and [LDAP Search] must be set to [On] in [Administrator Tools]
under [System Settings]. To configure the LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device
Management.
• You can specify whether or not to automatically obtain the shared folder information registered in
the LDAP server and overwrite the machine's address book. If you use this function, you do not
need to register the shared folder in the address book. For details about the settings, see "General

397
 9. Scan

Settings", Preparation. If the shared folder is not registered on the LDAP server, it must be registered
on the server or in the machine's address book.

1. Press [Search Dest.].

2. Select the LDAP server that appears next to [Address Book].

If authentication is required to access the selected server, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
3. To search by destination name, press [Name].
To search by e-mail address, press [Email Address].
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Email Address]. If you search by [Name], LDAP
server's settings determine whether the search is based on surname or first name. To configure the
LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
4. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the destination address.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Start Search].
7. Select the destination.
8. Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
9. Press [OK].

• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [Fax Destination], [Email
Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name], are registered in the LDAP server.
• If you specified [Search Options] on [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server] under [System
Settings], you can add a search condition for LDAP search on the [Advanced Search] screen. To
configure the LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.

398
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be impossible to specify it as the
destination. For details about the number of characters that can be specified, see "Values of
Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage Function", Preparation.
• You can register multiple e-mail addresses in individual LDAP server accounts. However, only one
e-mail address will be displayed as the search result. Usually, the address that was registered first
on the LDAP server is the address that is displayed.
• For details about configuring the advanced search options, see Steps 5 and 6 and Note of
"Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it", page 393 "Selecting
the Destination from the Machine's Address Book".

Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder

• When the Central Management function is in use, the address book is managed by the server and
[Prg. Dest.] is not available on the control panel of the machine. When registering destinations,
consult your administrator.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.

Registering a destination in the address book manually

1. Press the tab of the function you want to use.

399
 9. Scan

2. In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.

3. Press [Prg. Dest.].

4. Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see "Registering Addresses and
Users", Device Management.
5. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear. In such case, you cannot complete
the registration.
• You can also register a destination selected from the LDAP server. To register in the machine's
address book a destination searched for and selected from the LDAP server, display the
destination, and then press [Prg. Dest.].

Registering a recently used destination in the address book

1. Press the tab of the function you want to use.

2. Press [Recent].
3. Press [Program Dest.].

400
 Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

4. Press [Names], and then enter the name and other necessary information.
For details about entering the other information, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Device
Management.
5. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security settings, [Recent] may not be displayed.

• If there are multiple recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.

401
 9. Scan

Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

You can use the scanner function to store scanned documents in the machine. The documents that have
been stored using the scanner function can later be sent by e-mail or delivered to a shared folder.

Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files

• You can specify a password for each stored file. We recommend that you protect stored files from
unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Place originals.
5. Press [Store File].

6. Press [Store to HDD].

7. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name],
[Password], and [Select Folder].
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].

402
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

• Password
Press [Password], enter a password, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the password for
confirmation, and then press [OK].
• Select Folder
Press [Select Folder], specify the folder in which to save the stored files, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
10. Press the [Start] key.

• Stored files will be deleted after a set period. For details about specifying the period, see
"Administrator Tools", Device Management.
• Files stored under the scanner function cannot be printed from the machine's control panel. Print the
files from a client computer after receiving them on the computer.
• For details about storing data to a USB flash memory device or SD card, see page 414 "Storing
the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card".
• By pressing [Store to HDD + Send], you can simultaneously store scan files and send them. For
details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail" and "Simultaneous Storage and
Sending by Scan to Folder", Basic Operations.
• Only [Store to Memory Device] is available in [Store File] when PDF is selected as the File Type
and [Security] is specified in the PDF File Setting.
• You cannot specify [Store to HDD] if [Preview] is selected.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• After scan files are stored, the file information fields will be automatically cleared. If you want to
preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.

Previewing the Contents of a Stored Document

You can display the [Preview] screen and check a stored file on the machine or from the client computer.

Checking a stored file selected from the list

This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.

403
 9. Scan

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
For details about searching the stored document by user or document name, see "Searching by
User Name" and "Searching by File Name", Basic Operations.
4. Press [Preview].

• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
• You cannot preview documents stored as High Compression PDF files.
Stored File Preview Screen
1 2

7 6
DWP454

1. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another page.

404
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

2. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another file.
3. Display File
The name and size of the selected file appear.
4. Display Page
The page number of the previewed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode appear.
5. Display Position
When the preview is enlarged, the location of the part of the page displayed on the preview screen is
indicated.
6. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Press to shift the displayed area.
7. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]
In previewing, you can reduce or enlarge the file image.

• For details, see page 141 "[Preview] screen under the scanner function".
• You can reduce and enlarge the previewed image by double-tapping it, and scroll the
enlarged image by tapping it.

Checking stored files from a client computer

Using Web Image Monitor, you can also display the files stored in the machine on a client computer.
You can also check files stored under the copier, Document Server, and printer functions.
If you enter "http:// (machine IPv4 address, or host name)/" in the address bar of the client computer's
web browser, the top page of Web Image Monitor appears.

• You can also download the stored files.

• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor only within your local area network.
• For details about displaying or downloading stored files using Web Image Monitor, see
"Displaying Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor" or "Downloading Stored Documents with
Web Image Monitor", Basic Operations.
• For details about making settings for using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Device Management.
• For details about functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the
upper-right corner of the displayed screen.

405
 9. Scan

Sending a Stored File

This section explains how to send a stored file.

Stored files can be sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
There are two methods of sending stored files by e-mail. You can specify the sending method in
[Scanner Features]. For details, see "Send Settings", Preparation.
• To send the URL by e-mail:
In the [Send Settings] tab under [Scanner Features], [File Emailing Method], select [Send URL Link].
This method is useful when network restrictions prevent you sending attachments.
• To send an attached file by e-mail:
In the [Send Settings] tab under [Scanner Features], [File Emailing Method], select [Attach to
Email].

• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive an e-
mail message. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e-mail from a specified
sender, you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details about how to
do this, see your e-mail application's Help.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Select the file you want to send.
You can select multiple files.
The selected files are sent in the order they were selected.
If you press [Queue], only the files you have selected are displayed in the order they will be sent.
For details about searching the stored document by user or document name, see "Searching by
User Name" and "Searching by File Name", Basic Operations.
4. Press [OK] twice.
5. Press the [Email] or [Folder] tab.

406
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

6. If necessary, configure [Send File Type / Name].

7. Press the [Start] key.

• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
• When the URL has been sent by e-mail, the recipient can check the stored file by clicking that URL.
For details, see "Sending the URL by E-mail", Basic Operations.
• You can encrypt e-mail or attach a signature to it. For details, see "Security Settings to E-mails",
Basic Operations.
• If [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings] is set to [On], you
cannot send PDF or High Compression PDF files.
• You can specify [OCR Settings] only for the files stored with [OCR Settings].
• You can specify [High Compression PDF] only for the files stored with the [High Compression PDF]
setting.
• When multiple files are selected, all file types available for each file can be specified. However,
some files may not be sent with the specified file type depending on the settings specified when
stored.
• Full-color or gray scale documents stored using the [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)]
setting in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] set to [On] are sent as PDF or PDF/A files
even if you specify multi-page TIFF as the file type.
• Documents stored without specifying [OCR Settings] are sent as PDF or PDF/A files even if
you specify [OCR Settings].
• Documents stored as High Compression PDF files are always sent as High Compression PDF
files regardless of the file type setting.
• Documents stored without specifying [High Compression PDF] as the file type are sent as PDF
files even if you specify [High Compression PDF].

Managing Stored File

This section explains how to delete stored files and how to change the data for stored files.

407
 9. Scan

Deleting a stored file

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file you want to delete.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Delete File].
6. Press [Yes].

• Files waiting for sending cannot be deleted.

• You can also delete files stored in the machine by accessing the machine from a client computer
using Web Image Monitor. For detail about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Changing stored document information

You can change information for a stored file, such as the user name, file name, and password.

• Information for files waiting for being sent cannot be changed.

408
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

Changing a user name

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the user name you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears.
Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change User Name].
6. Enter a new user name.
The user names shown here are names that were registered in the address book. To change a
user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
7. Press [OK].
8. Make sure that the user name was changed.
9. Press [Reset].

• Using Web Image Monitor you can also change the user name of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.

409
 9. Scan

Changing a file name

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the file name you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears.
Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change File Name].
6. Enter a new file name.
7. Press [OK].
8. Make sure that the file name was changed.
9. Press [Reset].

• For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard
Applications)", Preparation.
• Using Web Image Monitor, you can also change the file name of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
Changing a password
Enter the password for accessing the stored file.

410
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the password you want to change.
A screen for entering the password appears. Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change Password].
6. Using the number keys, enter a new four to eight-digit password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Enter the same number again using the number keys.
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Reset].

• Using Web Image Monitor, you can also change the password of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.

Searching for stored documents

You can search for stored documents by user name or document name.
Searching by user name
You can search for a stored file by its user name.

411
 9. Scan

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [User Name].
4. Select the user name to be used for the search.
The user names shown here are names that were registered in the address book. To change a
user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
5. Press [OK].
The search begins, and then files belonging to the specified user appear.
Searching by file name
You can search for a stored file by its file name.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [File Name].
4. Enter the file name.
For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard
Applications)", Preparation.
5. Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose name starts with the entered string appear.

412
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

Specifying Access Privileges for Stored Files

If user authentication is set, you can specify access privileges for stored files when storing them in the
Document Server. You can also change the access privileges for files after they have been stored.
To configure or change the access privileges, the user must be logged in.
For details about logging in and out, see page 145 "Logging In the Machine".

Specifying access permissions when storing a file

Specify the access privileges before storing the file in the Document Server.

1. Press [Store File].

2. Press [Access Privileges].

3. Press [New Program].
4. Select the users or groups to whom you want to assign permission.
You can select more than one user.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
5. Press [Exit].
6. Select the user to whom you want to assign access permission, and then select the
permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press [OK].
9. Store files in Document Server.

Changing access privileges for previously stored files

This section explains how to change access privileges for a file stored in the Document Server.

413
 9. Scan

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.

3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the documents to be changed.
5. Press [Change Access Priv.].
6. Press [Program/Change/Delete].
7. To create a new user or group and specify its access privilege, press [New Program].
To change the access privilege of a registered user or group, proceed to Step 10.
8. Select the users or groups to whom you want to assign permission.
You can select more than one user.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
9. Press [Exit].
10. Select the user to whom you want to assign access permission, and then select the
permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Reset].

Storing the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card

This section explains how to save data on external media using the scanner function.

• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

414
 Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents

2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.

3. Insert an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot on the machine's control
panel.
For details about inserting an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot, see
"Inserting/Removing a Memory Storage Device", Preparation.
4. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
5. Place originals.
6. Press [Store File].

7. Press [Store to Memory Device].

8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.

Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].

415
 9. Scan

• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name], and then press [OK].
For information about other settings, see each section.
10. Press the [Start] key.
When scanning batches, place subsequent originals after the scan files have been sent.
When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears.
11. Press [Exit].
12. Remove the memory device from the media slot.
Remove the media from the media slot only after data has been written completely. Removing the
media while data is being written will result in corrupted data.
For details about removing an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot, see
"Inserting/Removing a Memory Storage Device", Preparation.

• The amount of time required to save files to a USB flash memory device or SD card will vary
according to the device's specifications.
• The documents stored on the memory storage device can be printed from the machine's control
panel. For details, see "Direct Printing from a Memory Storage Device", Basic Operations.
• The documents stored on the memory storage device cannot be sent from the machine's control
panel.
• Depending on the security settings, [Store to Memory Device] may not be displayed. For details,
see "Restricting Media Slot Access", Security Guide.
• You cannot specify where the data is saved. Files are saved in the root directory of the memory
storage device.
• If the memory storage device is partitioned, files are saved on the first partition.
• You cannot configure file information such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].
• The amount of free space on the memory device is displayed. Note that if the amount of free space
exceeds 10 GB, "9999.99 MB" will be displayed.
• To cancel writing, press the [Stop] key. If files are being written when writing is cancelled, any
partially written files are deleted. Only complete files are stored on the memory storage device.

416
 Specifying the File Type

Specifying the File Type

This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send.
File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, sending stored files by e-mail
or Scan to Folder, and saving files on a memory storage device.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file.
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about
file types, see "Notes about and limitations of file types" below.

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

2. Select a file type.

If the File Type is set to [PDF], configure PDF File Setting as required.
3. Press [OK].

417
 9. Scan

• If you select [Store to HDD] under [Store File], you can only select [High Compression PDF] or
[OCR Settings]. When sending stored files, you can select single-page or multi-page file types.
• The version of the created PDF files is 1.4.
• If [High Compression PDF] is selected in the PDF File Setting under the File Type, you can reduce
the file size without changing the character legibility of uncompressed PDF files. PDF/A is suitable
for storing data for a long period of time. For the limitations that apply to each file type, see "Notes
about and limitations of file types" below.
• When you select [High Compression PDF], you can select Standard (Fast) mode and Text Priority
(Slow) mode. When you select Text Priority (Slow) mode, the machine makes high compression
PDF files with a higher imaging quality than PDF files made in Standard (Fast) mode.

Notes About and Limitations of File Types

Depending on the file format you select, the following limitations will apply:
Single Page [TIFF / JPEG]
• Originals scanned in black and white are sent as TIFF files.
• According to the settings specified for [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] under
[Scanner Features], originals scanned in full color or gray scale are sent in one of the
following file types:
• [On] : JPEG file
• [Off] : TIFF file
Multi-page [TIFF] or [PDF]
• When [Full Color: Text / Photo], [Full Color: Glossy Photo], [Gray Scale], or [Auto Color
Select] is specified under [Original Type] and [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] is set
to [On] under [Scanner Features], you cannot select [TIFF] under [Multi-page].
• Even if you select [TIFF] under [Multi-page], files stored in JPEG format are automatically
changed to multi-page PDF files and then sent.
High Compression PDF
• You cannot select [High Compression PDF] if:
• [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo], [Black & White:
Photo], or [Auto Color Select] is selected under [Original Type].
• [Reduce / Enlarge] is selected.
• [100 dpi] or [150 dpi] is selected as the resolution.
• [Preview] is selected.
• When the WSD or DSM destination list is used.

418
 Specifying the File Type

• If [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings] is set to [On],
[PDF] and [High Compression PDF] other than PDF/A cannot be selected.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0/Adobe Reader 6.0 and later versions support High Compression
PDF.
• If [High Compression PDF] is selected as the file type, areas of uneven shade may appear in
the halftone sections in the document. If this happens, change the PDF File Setting to [PDF/A]
or [PDF].
PDF/A
• [Security Settings] in the PDF File Setting cannot be selected.
OCR Settings
• You cannot select [OCR Settings] if:
• [TIFF/JPEG] or [TIFF] is selected as the file type.
• [100 dpi] or [150 dpi] is selected as the resolution.
• When the WSD or DSM destination list is used.

419
 9. Scan

Specifying Scan Settings

1. Press [Scan Settings].

2. Specify resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required.

For details about individual scan setting items, see "Scan Settings", Preparation.

3. Press [OK].

420
10. Document Server
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Copy function. It also describes how to
store documents in the Document Server of the machine and how to print or manage the stored files.

Storing Data
This section describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.

• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are
complete, and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press [Reset] to
cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When scanning by the scanner, make sure that all other operations are ended.
File Name
A file name such as "COPY0001" and "COPY0002" is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the file name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly. Depending on
the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name].
For details about the Address Book, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Device Management.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can specify a password for any stored document. A
protected document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is specified for
the documents, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file name.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [Document Server] icon.
3. Press [To Scanning Screen].
4. Press [Target Folder to Store].
5. Specify a folder in which to store the document, and then press [OK].
6. Press [User Name].
7. Specify a user name, and then press [OK].
The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the screen, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.

421
 10. Document Server

8. Press [File Name].

9. Enter a file name, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Password].
11. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for the password.
12. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].
13. Place the original.
14. Specify the original scanning conditions.
15. Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
After scanning, a list of folders will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Finish Scanning].

• For details about the keys that appear on the Document Server screen, see page 127 "How to Use
the [Document Server] Screen".
• When eight trays are installed, press [Other Settings], and then specify a folder to store the
document and password.
• To stop scanning, press the [Stop] key. To restart a paused scanning job, press [Continue] in the
confirmation screen. To delete saved images and cancel the job, press [Cancel Scanning]. The
original placed in the ADF will be ejected. Press [Job List] to display the [Job List] screen. For
details, see "Types of Screens to Manage Jobs", Preparation.
• You can omit the user name, file name, password, and folder in which to store the document. A file
name is specified automatically and the document is stored in the shared folder if you do not
specify a folder to store it in.
• You can enter up to 20 characters for a file name. In the list; however, up to 16 characters are
displayed as the file name. If above limits are exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters for
the file name.
• For details about how to specify a folder, see "Arranging Stored Documents Using Folders", Basic
Operations.
• If the ADF cannot detect the size of an original automatically, the scan will be made at the closest
available size.
• Data stored in the Document Server is specified to be deleted after three days (72 hours) by the
factory default. You can specify the period after which the stored data is deleted automatically
under [Auto Delete File in Document Server] in User Tools. For details, see "Administrator Tools",
Device Management.
• If you do not want stored documents to be automatically deleted, select [Off] in [Auto Delete File in
Document Server] before storing a document. If you select [On] later, data stored after will be
automatically deleted. For details, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.

422
 Storing Data

• You can protect documents by limiting access. For details, see "Specifying Access Permission for
Stored Documents", Basic Operations.
• For details about how to enter text, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard Applications)",
Preparation.

423
 10. Document Server

Printing Stored Documents

Prints stored documents on the Document Server.
The items you can specify on the printing screen are as follows:
• Paper tray
• The number of prints
• [Output/ Finisher] ([Output], [Finisher], [Folding Unit], [Perfect Binding], [Stacker])
• [Stamp] ([Background Numbering], [Preset Stamp], [User Stamp], [Date Stamp], [Page
Numbering], [Stamp Text], [Unauthorized Copy Prevention])
• [Cover/ Slip Sheet] ([Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Designate / Chapter], [Slip Sheet])
• [Edit] ([Margin Adj.], [Edit Image])
• [2 Sided / Book] ([1 Sided Print], [2 Sided Top to Top], [2 Sided Top to Bottom], [Specify Duplex
Pages], [Booklet], [Magazine])
For details about each function, see the each section.

1. Select a folder.

2. Select a document to be printed.

3. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat Step 2.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen], and then configure print
settings.
5. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
The maximum quantity that can be entered is 9999.
6. Press the [Start] key.

• If a password is specified for the document, enter it, and then press [OK].
• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.

424
 Printing Stored Documents

• Pressing [Reset] cancels every selection.

• Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
• Pressing [Keep 2 /1 Sided Settings] while more than one document is selected prints each
document according to the print settings when it was stored.
• Pressing [Back to File List] restores the document selection screen.
• You can search the target document using [User Name] or [File Name] situated in the left side of
the screen. For details about searching the target document, see page 411 "Searching for stored
documents".
• When two or more documents are selected, press [ ] or [ ] to confirm the user name, file name
and printing order of the document.
• The copy and printer features hold the specified printing conditions after the operation is over and
apply them at the next printing.
• When two or more documents are selected, the printing conditions are stored on the first document
but not on the succeeding documents.
• When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions specified for the first
document are applied to all the remaining documents.
• Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference in the size or resolution.
• When printing two or more documents while selecting the Sort function, you can confirm the finish
by printing only one copy. For details about sample print function, see page 427 "Sample Print".
• You can change the maximum print quantity under [Max. Copy Quantity] in User Tools. For details,
see "General Features", Preparation.
• Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your
computer. For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, see "Displaying Stored Documents with
Web Image Monitor", Basic Operations.

Interrupting a Print Job

1. Press the [Stop] key.

DWP353

425
 10. Document Server

2. Press [Cancel Printing].

Changing the Number of Print Copies while Printing Is in Progress

You can change the number of sets during printing.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.

1. Press the [Stop] key.

DWP353

2. Enter the number of sets anew with the number keys.

3. Press [Continue Printing].

Printing will be resumed.

• The number of sets you can enter in Step 2 differs depending on when the [Stop] key is pressed.

426
 Printing Stored Documents

Sample Print

When the number of sets is massive, you can print a single set in advance to check the printing order
and the printing conditions of the selected documents.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.

1. Select a folder.

2. Select the documents to be printed.

3. Press [To Printing Screen].
4. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
5. Select the Sort function ( ) under [Sort / Stack].
6. Press [Sample Copy].
Only one set will be printed.
7. If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.

• To cancel the printing, press [Suspend] in Step 7. The print screen will appear, enabling to select
another item.

Printing a Specified Page

You can print the specified page of the document selected on the document selection screen.
There are three ways to specify how to print a document.
1st Page
Print the first page of a document. When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the
respective documents is printed.

427
 10. Document Server

Specified Page
Print a single page in a document. Enter the page number in [Specified Page].
Specify Range
Print a range of pages in a document. Enter the number of the first page in [Start Number] and the
number of the last page in [End Number].

1. Select a folder.

2. Select the document to be printed.

3. Press [Print Specified Page].
4. Specify the page to print.

5. Enter the page or range to be printed with number keys as necessary.

6. Press the [Start] key.

428
11. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to resolve problems that have occurred.

Getting Started
This section describes the items to check when the machine does not work properly.

When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound

The machine beeps in various patterns to alert users that they have forgotten their originals or other
situations with the machine.
The beep patterns related to the exposure glass, scanner, copy, and Document Server functions are
produced on Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

Beep pattern Meaning Cause

Single short beep Notification Sound A control panel or screen key was
Login/Logout pressed. You also hear a beeping
sound in this pattern when you log in to
or out from the machine.

Short, then long beep Operation Invalid An invalid key was pressed on the
control panel or screen, or the entered
password was incorrect.

Single long beep Operation Completed A Copier/Document Server Features

job has finished.

2 long beeps Warm-up When the power is turned on or the

machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.

5 long beeps Auto Reset An auto reset was performed through

the simple screen of the Copier/
Document Server function or the
Scanner function.

5 long beeps repeated four Sound of Less Urgent Level An original has been left on the
times. exposure glass or paper tray is empty.

429
 11. Troubleshooting

Beep pattern Meaning Cause

5 short beeps repeated five Sound of Urgent Level The machine requires user attention
times. because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.

12 short beeps Blank Page Detected The first page of the original scanned
in the Copier/Document Server
function or the Scanner function has
been determined nearly blank.

• Users cannot mute the beeping sound of alert the machine is currently making. When the machine
is making the beeping sound to alert users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers
are repeatedly opened and closed within a short space of time, the beeping sound might continue
even after normal status has resumed.
• You can change the sound type and volume. For details about Sound, see "General Features",
Device Management.

When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the
Control Panel

The status of the machine is indicated by the indicator lamps on the control panel, the status icons, and
messages that appear. This section describes the location of the indicator lamp for the [Check Status]
key and explains where the status icons and messages appear on the control panel.

430
 Getting Started

2 3 3
EAR307

3
EAR308

1. Indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key

A lamp lights up in red or flashes yellow if manual operations are required. For details about the [Check
Status] screen, see page 433 "When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing".

431
 11. Troubleshooting

2. Status icons
A status icon appears on the control panel if paper is added or paper jams are cleared. For details about the
status icons that appear, see page 432 "When a status icon is displayed".
3. Messages
Messages appear on the control panel to indicate the status of the machine, such as error messages or status
messages. For details about the problems that cause messages to appear and the corrective actions to be
taken, see page 443 "When Messages Appear".

When a status icon is displayed

This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.
The Original Misfeed icon is displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.

Status Icon Status

: Paper Misfeed icon Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.

For details about removing jammed paper, see page 517
"Removing Jammed Paper".

: Original Misfeed icon Appears when an original misfeed occurs.

For details about removing jammed paper, see page 517
"Removing Jammed Paper".

: Load Paper icon Appears when paper runs out.

For details about loading paper, see page 180 "Loading
Paper".

: Add Toner icon Appears when toner runs out.

For details about adding toner, see page 528 "Adding
toner".

: Add Staple icon Appears when staples run out.

For details about adding staples, see page 533 "Adding
staples".

: Waste Toner Full icon Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
For details about replacing the waste toner bottle, see
page 531 "Replacing the waste toner bottle".

432
 Getting Started

Status Icon Status

: Hole Punch Receptacle Full icon Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
For details about removing punch waste, see page 523
"Removing Punch Waste".

: Waste Staple Full icon Appears when the waste staple receptacle is full. For details
about removing staple waste, see page 523 "Removing
Staple Waste".

: Service Call icon Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires

maintenance.

: Open Cover icon Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.

When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing

If the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key lights up or flashes, press the [Check Status] key to
display the [Check Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.
[Check Status] screen

4 3
EAR310

1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab

Indicates the status of the machine and each function.

433
 11. Troubleshooting

2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine or a function, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the corresponding function screen. Check the error message
displayed on the function screen and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the
problems described in error messages, see page 443 "When Messages Appear".
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine and each function.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The function is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The function cannot be used because an error has occurred in the function or machine. This icon may also
appear if the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key to light or
flash.

Problem Cause Solution

Documents and reports do There is no paper left. Load paper. For details about loading
not print out. paper, see page 180 "Loading Paper".

Documents and reports do The paper output tray is full. Remove the prints from the tray.
not print out.

An error has occurred. A item with the status "Error Press [Check] in the item where the
Occurred" in the [Check error has occurred. Then read the
Status] screen is defective. displayed message, and take the
appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".
You can use other functions normally.

When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

The descriptions related to copy and Document Server functions are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3
machines.

434
 Getting Started

Problem Cause Solution

The machine does not turn The AC power switch has Turn on the AC power switch. For
on. not been turned on. details about the AC power switch, see
page 525 "General Requirements".

When the machine is turned Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
on, the only icon that copier function are not yet
appears on the home screen ready.
is the [Copier (Classic)] icon.

The machine has just been Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
turned on and the User Tools copier function are not yet
screen is displayed, but the ready. Time required varies
User Tools menu has items by function. Functions
missing. appear in the User Tools
menu when they become
ready for use.

The indicator lamp remains In some cases, the machine Before you press the [Energy Saver]
lit and the machine does not does not enter Sleep mode key, check that Sleep mode can be
enter Sleep mode even when the [Energy Saver] key enabled. For details about enabling
though the [Energy Saver] is pressed. Sleep mode, see page 104 "Saving
key was pressed. Energy".

The display is turned off. The machine is in Low Power Press the [Check Status] key to cancel
mode. Low Power mode.

The display is turned off. The machine is in Sleep Press the [Energy Saver] key or the
mode. [Check Status] key to exit Sleep mode.

Nothing happens when the The power is turned off. Make sure the main power indicator is
[Check Status] key or the off, and then turn on the power.
[Energy Saver] key is
pressed.

The power turns off The Weekly Timer setting is Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
automatically. set to [Main Power Off]. details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Device
Management.

The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User For details about how to log in when
displayed. Code Authentication. User Code Authentication is enabled,
see page 145 "When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed".

435
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The Authentication screen Basic Authentication, Enter your login user name and user
appears. Windows Authentication, or password. For details about the
LDAP Authentication is set. Authentication screen, see page 145
"When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed".

An error message is still • When a misfeed After removing the misfed paper, fully
displayed, even if misfed message appears, it open the front cover, and then close it.
paper is removed. remains until you open For details about removing jammed
and close the cover as paper, see page 517 "Removing
required. Jammed Paper".
• Paper is still jammed in
the tray.

An error message is still One or more of the covers Close all the covers of the machine.
displayed, even if the that are not indicated are
indicated cover is closed. still open.

Images are printed on the You may have loaded the Load the paper correctly. For details
reverse side of the paper. paper incorrectly. about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Using curled paper often • Flatten the paper with your hands
causes misfeeds, soiled to straighten out the curl.
paper edges, or slipped • Load the paper up side down so
positions while staple or that the curled edges face
stack printing is performed. downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended
Paper".
• Place the cut paper on a flat
surface to prevent it from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see
page 265 "Paper Storage".

436
 Getting Started

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side or end fences • Remove the misfed paper. For
may not be set properly. details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see page 204
"Changing the Paper Size".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Paper of undetectable size • Remove the misfed paper. For
has been loaded. details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• If you load a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you need
to specify the paper size with the
control panel. For details about
specifying paper size using the
control panel, see page 226
"Changing to a Size That Is Not
Automatically Detected".

Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object on • Remove the misfed paper. For
the output tray. details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The staple cartridge is not Set the staple cartridge properly. For
set correctly. details about how to add staples, see
page 533 "Adding staples".

437
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently Small thick paper has been When feeding paper with a grammage
fed in long-edge feed (LEF) of 200 gsm or more and a paper
orientation. length of 21 cm (8.27 inches) or more,
pull the drawer unit out and operate
the lever of the paper transport unit to
raise its height. For details, see
page 200 "Using Small Thick Paper".

Misfeeds occur when The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
printing to envelopes. envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".

When printing to envelopes, The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
the envelopes may be fed in envelopes before you load them. Do
together, or the envelopes not stack envelopes over the specified
may not be fed. limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
mode. tray that is not set for duplex in "Tray Paper Settings" to enable
printing. duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper In "Tray Paper Settings", select a paper
mode. type that cannot be used for type that can be used for duplex
duplex printing. printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".

438
 Getting Started

Problem Cause Solution

Paper is bent. Paper may be bent when it is Change the output tray to the finisher
ejected from the finisher shift tray.
upper tray.

The print image is not • The machine has not Contact the machine administrator or
properly positioned on the detected the paper your service representative.
paper. type and/or width
correctly.
• The print position is not
aligned properly.

The machine does not turn The machine cannot perform Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
off in 16 minutes after the the shutdown procedure. machine does not turn off, contact your
main power is turned off. service representative.

An error has occurred when The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
the Address Book is changed while you delete operation.
changed from the display the multiple stored
panel or Web Image documents.
Monitor.

Cannot use Web Image When print volume limits are • For details about specifying print
Monitor to print documents specified, users cannot print volume limits, see "Managing
stored in Document Server. beyond their print volume Print Volume per user", Security
limit. Print jobs selected by Guide.
users who have reached • To view the status of a print job,
their print volume limits will see [Print Job History]. In Web
be canceled. Image Monitor, click [Job] on the
[Status/Information] menu. And
then click [Print Job History] in
"Document Server".

The function does not run or If you cannot carry out your Wait until the current job is completed
cannot be used. job, it may be that the before trying again.
machine is being used by For details about Function
another function. Compatibility, see page 442
"Function compatibility".

439
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Output paper to the stacker • Paper is curled. • When the paper is curled
tray does not align properly. • When using coated downward, select [П Curl
paper, the output Correction Level: Small] or [П
paper to the stacker Curl Correction Level: Large]
tray might fail to align under [Correct Output Paper
properly. Curl] in "Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
• When the paper is curled
upward, select [U Curl Correction
Level: Small] or [U Curl
Correction Level: Large] under
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
For details about the Adjustment
Settings for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".

Output paper to the stacker When the paper weight is Select [П Curl Correction Level: Small]
tray does not align properly. 280.0 g/m2 or more, and or [П Curl Correction Level: Large]
the paper size is A3, SRA3 under [Correct Output Paper Curl] in
or larger, the output paper "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
to the stacker tray might fail For details about the Adjustment
to align properly. Settings for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".

Fold
Problems Causes Solutions

Wrinkling occurs when Gate Wrinkling can occur if Gate When applying Gate Fold,
Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter Letter Fold-in, or Letter Fold-out
Fold-out is applied. Fold-out is applied to B4 JIS to paper larger than A4, we
(Japanese Industrial Standard) recommend you enable image
, A3 , 8 1/2" × 14" , 11" reduction and use paper no
× 17" , 12" × 18" , 8K , or larger than A4 .
larger sizes of paper.

440
 Getting Started

Problems Causes Solutions

When you print Z-folded paper, The Z-fold support tray is not Set the Z-fold support tray for
the machine indicates that the set. finisher or multi-folding unit. For
output tray is full even though details about how to add the Z-
the amount of output paper on fold support tray, see page 87
the tray is less than the stack "Guide to Functions of the
capacity. Machine's Options".

The multi-folding unit outputs The paper is curled. • Remove the paper, and
sheets with creased edges when then reload it upside
Gate Fold is applied. down.
• Remove the paper, and
then reload it in the
opposite direction.

The position of the fold is Multi-sheet Fold has been In [Output/Customize

incorrect when Letter Fold-in is specified when only one sheet is Function/Finisher] on the initial
applied to a B5 JIS sheet. being printed. copier screen, under [Folding
Unit], select [Letter Fold-in].
Press [Change], and then set
"Multi-sheet Fold" to [Off]. For
details about how to specify the
Multi-sheet Fold function, see
"Fold", Basic Operations.
When using the printer function,
change the printer driver Letter
Fold-in settings so that Multi-
sheet Fold is not specified.

• There are times when images might not turn out as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper,
see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

When multiple functions cannot be executed simultaneously

If you cannot carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another
job using a different function while the current job is being performed.
For details about Function compatibility, see page 442 "Function compatibility"

441
 11. Troubleshooting

Function compatibility

The following chart describes the different combinations for when multiple functions are used at the same
time. When viewing the HTML version of the manual, click "Enlarge and display" to enlarge the chart.
Function compatibility are produced on Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

Function Compatibility
The chart shows function compatibility when [Print Priority] is set to [Interleave].
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed or remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the [Interrupt] key is pressed to interrupt the preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are not possible.)

Mode after you select Copy Interrupt Copying Printer Scanner TWAIN Document Server Web Document Server

Scanning a Document to Store in

Print

Operations for Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Operations for Scanning
Operations for Copying

Operations for Copying

Document Server
Data Reception

Scanning

Scanning
Copying
Stapling

Stapling
Printing

Printing
Sort

Mode before you select

Operations for Copying
Copy Stapling *1 *1 *1 *4 *2 *2 *2 *3
Sort *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 *2
Operations for Copying
Interrupt Copying
Copying
Data Reception
Print

Printer Printing
Stapling *4 *3 *3
Operations for Scanning
Scanner
Scanning *2 *2 *2 *2
TWAIN Scanning
Operations for Document Server
Scanning a Document to Store in
Document Server
Document Server
Printing from Document Server *5 *5 *5
Web Document Server Printing *3

*1 Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all scanned and [New Job] appears.
*2 You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
*4 Stapling is not available.
*5 Simultaneous operation becomes possible after you press [New Job].

DSD004

• To print the Function compatibility table for confirmation, specify "Landscape" as the original
orientation.
• Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
• If the machine can perform multiple functions simultaneously, specify which function should have
priority in "Interleave Priority". The default is "Copier/Document Server". For details about
"Interleave Priority", see "General Features", Device Management.
• When the finisher is installed, you can specify the output tray where documents are delivered. For
details about Output Tray Settings, see "General Features", Device Management.
• While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function may take longer than
usual.

442
 When Messages Appear

When Messages Appear

This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.

When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated

Message Cause Solution

"Please wait." This message appears when Wait for a while. If the machine is not
you press the [Energy Saver] ready in 5 minutes, turn off the power
key or the [Check Status] and make sure the main power
key. indicator turns off. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the power
again. If the machine is still not ready
in 5 minutes, contact your service
representative.

"Please wait." This message appears when • Wait until the message
the machine is warming up. disappears. Do not turn off the
power while the message is
showing.
• Wait for a while. If the machine is
not ready in 10 minutes, turn off
the power and make sure the
main power indicator turns off.
Wait at least 10 seconds, and
then turn on the power again. If
the machine is still not ready in 5
minutes, contact your service
representative.

"Please wait." This message appears when Wait for a while. If the message does
you change the toner not disappear in 5 minutes, turn off the
cartridge. power and make sure the main power
indicator turns off. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the power
again. If the message remains
displayed for more than 5 minutes,
contact your service representative.

443
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Please wait." The current environmental • Check the optimum environmental

condition is outside the conditions for the machine and
recommended temperature move it to a different location.
range for the machine. • Leave the machine for a while
and allow it to adapt to the
environment.
For details about the optimum
environmental conditions for the
machine, see page 536 "Optimum
Environmental Conditions After Moving
the Machine".

"Shutting down... Please The shut down procedure • Follow the message that appears
wait. Main power will be has begun because the and wait until the machine has
turned off automatically. power was turned off while shut down. Do not turn on the
Maximum waiting time: 16 the machine was in standby power while this message is
minute(s)" mode or performing an displayed. If the power has been
operation. turned on, follow the message
that appears. For details about
turning on and off the power, see
page 103 "Turning On/Off the
Power".
• The shutdown time varies
according to the options that are
installed and the environmental
conditions of the location where
the machine is set up. If the main
power indicator remains lit after
16 minutes have elapsed, contact
your service representative.

Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

The messages related to copy and Document Server functions are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3
machines.

444
 When Messages Appear

• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

Message Cause Solution

"Adjusting the temperature The binding glue is being Wait until the glue has reached the
of the binding glue." heated. correct temperature for binding.

"Cannot delete the folder The folder cannot be deleted Unlock the locked original to delete it.
because it contains locked because it contains a locked For details about locked files, see
files. Please contact the file original. "Unlocking Stored Files", Security
administrator." Guide.

"Cannot detect original The original placed on the • Place the original on the exposure
size." exposure glass is a non- glass again. Face the original
standard size. down.
• If the machine cannot detect the
size of the original, specify the
size manually - do not use [Auto
Paper Select] mode or the [Auto
Reduce / Enlarge] function. For
details about specifying the
settings, see page 174 "Sizes
Detectable with Auto Paper
Select".

"Cannot detect original No original has been • Place the original correctly.
size." placed, or the original • Specify the original size.
placed on the exposure
• When placing an original directly
glass is a nonstandard size.
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the Auto
Document Feeder (ADF) triggers
the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the ADF 30
degrees or more.

445
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot display preview of The image data may have Press [Exit] to display the preview
this page." been corrupted. screen without a thumbnail.
If the selected document contains
several pages, press [Switch] on the
"Display Page" area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.

"Cannot punch this paper The Punch function cannot For details about paper sizes, see
size." be used with paper size "Specifications for Punch Unit",
selected. Specifications.

"Cannot staple paper of this The Staple function cannot Select an appropriate paper size. For
size." be used with the paper size details about paper sizes, see
selected. "Specifications for Finisher SR5090" or
"Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5100" or "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR5120", Specifications.

"Check paper size." An irregular paper size is If you press the [Start] key, the copy
set. will start using the selected paper.

"Duplex is not available with A paper size not available in Select an appropriate paper size. For
this paper size." Duplex mode. details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for the Main Unit",
Specifications.

"Exceeded the maximum The number of pages the For details about how to check the
number of sheets that can be user is permitted to copy has number of copies available per user,
used. Copying will be been exceeded. see "Managing Print Volume per user",
stopped." Security Guide.

"Exceeded the maximum A print job was canceled Specify fewer sheets for the Multi-sheet
number of multi-sheet fold. because more than the Fold function. For details about the
Printing will be cancelled." maximum number of Multi- maximum number of Multi-sheet Fold,
sheet Fold was specified. see "Specifications for Multi-Folding
Unit", Specifications.

446
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. No. of The number of sheets per set Check the maximum number of sheets
sheets possible for Ring exceeds the limit for Ring that can be ring bound. For details
Binding." Binding. about the limit for Ring Binding, see
"Specifications for Ring Binder",
Specifications.

"File being stored exceeded The scanned originals have Press [Exit], and then store again with
max. number of pages per too many pages to store as an appropriate number of pages.
file. Copying will be one document.
stopped."

"Magazine or Booklet mode You selected the Make sure originals to which the
is not available due to mixed "Magazine" or "Booklet" "Magazine" or "Booklet" function is
image mode." function for originals applied are scanned using the same
scanned using different function.
functions, such as copy and
printer.

"Maximum number of sets is The number of copies You can change the maximum copy
n." exceeds the maximum copy quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
("n" is replaced by a quantity. [General Features] under [Copier /
variable.) Document Server Features]. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see
"General Features", Preparation.

"Memory is full. nn originals The number of scanned Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
have been scanned. Press originals exceed the number and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Print] to copy scanned of pages that can be stored [Clear Memory] to cancel the scanning
originals. Do not remove in memory. data and not copy.
remaining originals."
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)

"Perfect Binding is not Mixed Sizes mode is Cancel Mixed Sizes mode, or specify
available for different paper specified. the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
sizes."

"Perfect Binding is not Perfect Binding is not Check the current settings. For details
available with the settings." possible under the settings about which functions are not
that you have specified. available when Perfect Binding is
specified, see "Perfect Binding", Basic
Operations.

447
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Perfect Binding is not Perfect Binding cannot be Select a proper finishing size. For
available with this finishing used with the finishing size details about proper finishing sizes, see
size." that you have specified. "Specifications for Perfect Binder",
Specifications.

"Press [Continue] to scan The machine checked if the Remove all copies, and then press
and copy remaining remaining originals should [Continue] to continue copying. Press
originals." be copied, after the scanned [Stop] to stop copying.
originals were printed.

"Ring Binding is not Mixed Sizes mode is Cancel Mixed Sizes mode, or specify
available for different paper specified. the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
sizes."

"Ring Binding is not Ring Binding cannot be Select a proper binding position. For
available with the selected applied in the position that details about proper binding positions,
position." you have specified. see "Ring Binding", Basic Operations.

"Ring Binding is not Ring Binding is not possible Check the current settings. For details
available with the settings." under the settings that you about which functions are not
have specified. available when Ring Binding is
specified, see "Ring Binding", Basic
Operations.

"Ring Binding is not Ring Binding cannot be used Select a proper paper size. For details
available with this paper with the paper size that you about proper paper sizes, see
size." have specified. "Specifications for Ring Binder",
Specifications.

"Stapling capacity The number of sheets per set Check the stapler capacity. For details
exceeded." is over the staple capacity. about the stapler capacity, see
"Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5120", Specifications.

"The selected folder is An attempt was made to edit For details about locked folders, see
locked. Please contact the or use a locked folder. "Unlocking Folders", Security Guide.
file administrator."

• If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in [Input / Output] of User Tools to [On], even if the
memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make
copies of the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed to scan and to copy the

448
 When Messages Appear

remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. For details about
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, see "Input / Output", Preparation.

Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

This section describes the principal messages that appear on the control panel, error logs or reports. If
other messages appear, follow their instructions.
The messages related to the Document Server function are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.

Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the printer function

• Before turning off the power, see page 103 "Turning On/Off the Power".

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded the maximum The ring combs currently Change to ring combs that are big
number of sheets possible loaded are too small for the enough to bind the sheets.
for Ring Binding with the number of sheets that need to
currently set binding ring be bound.
combs. Printing will be
stopped."

"Exceeded max. No. of The number of sheets per set Check the maximum number of
sheets possible for Ring exceeds the limit for Ring sheets that can be ring bound. For
Binding." Binding. details about the limit for Ring
Binding, see "Specifications for Ring
Binder", Specifications.

"Hardware Problem: An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
Ethernet" Ethernet interface. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: HDD" An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
hard disk. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: USB" An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
USB interface. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

449
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Hardware Problem: The wireless LAN board can Turn off the power, and thenconfirm
WirelessCard"(A "wireless beaccessed, but an error the wireless LAN boardis inserted
LAN board" isreferred to as wasdetected. correctly. Afterconfirmation, turn on
a "wireless card".) the poweragain. If the message
appearsagain, contact your
servicerepresentative.

"Hardware Problem: The wireless LAN boardwas Turn off the power, and thenconfirm
WirelessCard"(A "wireless connected while themachine the wireless LAN boardis inserted
LAN board" isreferred to as was turned on. correctly. Afterconfirmation, turn on
a "wireless card".) the poweragain. If the message
appearsagain, contact your
servicerepresentative.

"Load following paper in n. The printer driver settings are Check that the printer driver settings
To force print, select incorrect or the tray does not are correct, and then load paper of
another tray and press contain paper of the size the size selected in the printer driver
[Continue]." selected in the printer driver. into the input tray. For details about
("n" is replaced by a how to change the paper size, see
variable.) page 204 "Changing the Paper
Size".

"Paper in staple tray. Open If printing is stopped before it is Remove the paper remaining in the
cover and remove paper." finished, paper may remain in finisher.
the finisher.

"Paper size and type are The printer driver settings are • Check that the printer driver
mismatched. Select another incorrect or the tray does not settings are correct, and then
tray from the following and contain paper of the size or load paper of the size selected
press [Continue]. To cancel type selected in the printer in the printer driver into the
job, press [Job Reset]. driver. input tray. For details about
Paper size and type can how to change the paper size,
also be changed in User see page 204 "Changing the
Tools." Paper Size".
• Select the tray manually to
continue printing, or cancel a
print job. For details about how
to select the tray manually, or
cancel a print job, see "If an
Error Occurs with the Specified
Paper Size and Type", Basic
Operations.

450
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Paper type of n is The type of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper that is
mismatched. Select another does not match the paper type the same type as the specified paper
tray from the following and specified in the printer driver. type.
press [Continue]. Paper
type can also be changed
in User Tools."
(A tray name is placed at
n.)

"Contains incorrect Perfect Binding cannot be used Select a proper paper size. For
setting(s) for Perfect with the paper size that you details about proper paper sizes,
Binding." have specified. see "Specifications for Perfect
Binder", Specifications.

"Printer font error." An error has occurred in the Contact your service representative.
font settings.

"Cannot print because both The tray selected for other Reset the job. Be sure the tray you
the main and designation pages is the same as the one select for slip sheets is not providing
(chapter) sheets are set to for slip sheets. paper for other pages.
the same paper tray. Press
[Job Reset] to cancel the
job. To print the job again
specify different trays."

When using direct print from a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded the limit value • The size of the selected Files or groups of files larger than 1 GB
for total data size of the file exceeds 1 GB. cannot be printed.
selected files. Cannot select • The total size of the • When the total size of the multiple
more files." selected files exceeds 1 files that are selected exceeds 1
GB. GB, select files separately.
• When the size of the selected file
exceeds 1 GB, print from a
memory storage device using a
function other than the Direct
printing function.
You cannot select files of different
formats at the same time.

451
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Unable to access the • An error occurred when Save the file to a different memory
specified memory storage the machine accessed storage device, and then print again.
device." the memory storage
device or a file stored
on the memory storage
device.
• An error occurred when
the user used the Direct
printing function to print
from a memory storage
device.

Messages printed on the error logs or reports when you use the printer function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.
When print jobs are canceled

Message Cause Solution

"91: Error" Printing was canceled by Check that the data is valid.
the auto job cancel
function due to a command
error.

"A function which cannot A print job was canceled Cancel the function(s) not available
be used with Fold mode because a function(s) not with Fold. For details about the
was set. The job has been available with Fold was functions not available with Fold, see
cancelled." selected. page 31 "Fold".

"A function which cannot A function not available For details about which functions are
be used with Perfect with Perfect Binding has not available with Perfect Binding,
Binding was set. The job been selected. see page 24 "Perfect Binding".
was cancelled."

"A function which cannot A function not available For details about which functions are
be used with Ring Binding with Ring Binding has been not available with Ring Binding, see
was set. The job was selected. page 28 "Ring Binding".
cancelled."

452
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"A job via the network that Jobs with errors were Contact your administrator to check
was not printed exists stored because an error whether the machine is connected
because an error occurred. occurred with a print job correctly to the network. For details
It was stored as a job not via the network while the about how to check and print jobs
printed." error job storing function stored when print configuration
was enabled. errors occur, see "Printing of
documents stored when print
configuration errors occur", Basic
Operations.

"Address book is currently The address book remains Wait for a while and try again later.
in use by another function. in use by another function,
Authentication has failed." and authentication query is
not possible.

"All remaining print vol. The job slot information All job slots are occupied by other
allocated to other cent. could not be obtained, and devices. Check the status of the client
managed client. Job was the job was canceled. machine.
cancelled."

"An error occurred with the There is a problem with the Check the interface box settings.
interface box. The job has interface box.
been cancelled."

"Communication error with The job was canceled Check the status of the Central
central management server because a Central Management machine.
has occurred. The job has Management
been cancelled." communication error
occurred.

"Error occurred while You tried to store a file in On the printer driver, select a job
processing an the Document Server when type other than [Document Server] in
Unauthorized Copy the [Unauthorized Copy "Job Type:" or deselect
Prevention job. Job Prevention] was specified. [Unauthorized Copy Prevention].
cancelled."

"Error occurred while The [Enter User Text:] field On the printer driver's [Detailed
processing an on the [Unauthorized Settings] tab, click [Effects] in
Unauthorized Copy Copy Prevention for "Menu:". Select [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job Pattern Details] screen is Prevention], and then click [Details...]
cancelled." blank. to display [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern Details]. Enter
text in [Enter User Text:].

453
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Error occurred while The resolution is set to a On the printer driver, set the
processing an value less than 600 dpi resolution to 600 dpi or higher, or
Unauthorized Copy when [Unauthorized Copy cancel [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job Prevention] is specified. Prevention].
cancelled."

"Error occurred while A color other than black Specify black as the pattern color.
processing an was specified as the
Unauthorized Copy pattern color when a
Prevention job. Job command was used to
cancelled." specify Unauthorized
Copy Prevention for
Pattern for a document and
print it.

"Error occurred while In [Administrator Tools] Cancel Unauthorized Copy

processing an under [System Settings], Prevention Printing for the printer
Unauthorized Copy priority was specified to be driver. For details about how to
Prevention job. Job given to Unauthorized cancel the settings, see the printer
cancelled." Copy Prevention Printing driver Help.
set on this machine.

"Collate Cancelled" Collate was canceled. Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"You reach the usage limit. The number of pages the For details about print volume use
This job has been user is permitted to print limitation, see "Managing Print
cancelled." has been exceeded. Volume per user", Security Guide.

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum number of Specify fewer sheets for the Multi-
number of multi-sheet fold. Multi-sheet Fold was sheet Fold function. For details about
The job has been exceeded. the maximum number of Multi-sheet
cancelled." Fold, see "Specifications for Multi-
Folding Unit", Specifications.

"Fold is not available with Fold function is not Check the paper settings. For details
the settings. The job has available with the current about the limitations of the Fold
been cancelled." settings. function, see page 31 "Fold".

"Receiving data failed." Data reception was Resend the data.

aborted.

454
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Sending data failed." The machine received a Check if the computer is working
command to stop correctly.
transmission from the
printer driver.

"Staple error occurred. The The job was canceled by Check the number of sheets to be
job has been cancelled." the job reset condition for stapled together, and then try
stapling. printing again.

"Job cancelled because The job was cancelled Open the front cover of the stacker,
mixture of paper sizes because it contained and remove the paper.
detected." pages of mixed paper
sizes.

"The job was cancelled The job was cancelled Check the settings for Booklet
because the specified because the settings not printing.
settings are not applicable applicable to Booklet
for Booklet." printing were specified.

"The selected paper size is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper size, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper size is incorrect.

"The selected paper type is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper type, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper type is incorrect.

"Z-fold error." Z-folding was canceled. Check the tray, paper orientation,
print orientation, and Z-fold settings
again.

When there is a problem with the print settings

Message Cause Solution

"Booklet/Half Fold Error" The job was canceled Check the settings for saddle
because you specified invalid stitching or half fold.
settings for saddle stitching or
half fold.

455
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Classification Code is The classification code has not Enter the correct classification
incorrect." been entered, or the code.
classification code has been
entered incorrectly.

"Classification Code is The classification code is not Select [Optional] for

incorrect." supported with the printer classification code. For details
driver. about how to specify
classification code settings,
see "Configuring classification
codes", Basic Operations.

"Duplex Cancelled" Duplex printing was canceled. • Select an appropriate

paper size for the duplex
function. For details
about paper, see
"Specifications for the
Main Unit",
Specifications.
• Change the setting for
"Apply Duplex" in [Tray
Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the
paper tray. For details
about setting "Apply
Duplex", see page 269
"Tray Paper Settings".

"Exceeded Max. Pages The number of pages exceeds Reduce the number of pages
(Collate)" the maximum number of sheets to print.
that you can use Collate with.

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum number of multi- For details about the maximum
number of multi-sheet fold sheet folds (Half Fold) was number of multi-sheet folds
(Half Fold)." exceeded. (Half Fold), see page 31
"Fold".

"Output Tray Changed" The output tray was changed Specify the proper output tray.
because the paper size of the
specified output tray is limited.

456
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Perfect Binding is not Perfect Binding is not possible Check the current settings. For
available with the settings." under the settings that you details about which functions
have specified. are not available when Perfect
Binding is specified, see
page 24 "Perfect Binding".

"Perfect Binding is not Perfect Binding is not possible • Check the number of
available with this number of with the number of sheets that sheets.
sheets." you have specified. • Specify the proper
number of sheets.
For details about the proper
number of sheets, see
"Specifications for Perfect
Binder", Specifications.

"Print Overrun" Images were discarded while Select a lower resolution on

printing. the printer driver. For details
about how to change the
resolution setting, see the
printer driver Help.

"Punch Cancelled" Punch printing was canceled. Check the paper orientation,
print orientation, and then
punch position. Certain
settings can produce print
results that might not be as
expected.

"Ring Binding is not available Ring Binding is not possible Check the current settings. For
with the settings." under the settings that you details about which functions
have specified. are not available when Ring
Binding is specified, see
page 28 "Ring Binding".

"Staple Cancelled" Stapling printing was Check the paper orientation,

canceled. paper quantity, print
orientation, and staple
position. Certain settings can
produce print results that might
not be as expected.

457
 11. Troubleshooting

When documents cannot be stored in the Document Server

Message Cause Solution

"Document Server is not You cannot use the For details about using Document
available to use. Cannot Document Server function. Server function, contact your
store." administrator.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.

"Exceeded max. capacity The hard disk became full Delete some of the files stored in the
of Document Server. after a file was stored. Document Server or reduce the size
Cannot store." that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum file capacity Delete some of the files stored in the
files of Document Server. of the Document Server Document Server.
Cannot store." was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete Hold Print files (automatic) or
files. (Auto)" error job store function to unneeded files stored on the
store Normal Print jobs as machine.
Hold Print files, the
maximum file capacity for
file storage or Hold Print
file management
(automatic) was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
pages of Document Server. capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the
Cannot store." Server was exceeded. number of pages that you want to
send.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete unneeded files stored on the
pages. (Auto)" error job store function to machine.
store Normal Print jobs as Reduce the number of pages to print.
Hold Print files, the
maximum page capacity
was exceeded.

"Job cancelled because The hard disk became full Delete the files stored in the
capture file could not be after a file was stored. Document Server or reduce the file
stored: Exceeded max. size to be sent.
memory."

458
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Job cancelled because The maximum file capacity Delete the files stored in the
capture file could not be of the Document Server Document Server.
stored: Exceeded max. was exceeded.
files."

"Job cancelled because The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
capture file could not be capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the
stored: Exceeded max Server was exceeded. number of pages that you want to
pages per file." send.

"The specified folder in The specified folder is Unlock the folder or specify another
Document Server is locked. locked. folder number that can be used. For
Cannot store." details about locked folders, see
"Unlocking Folders", Security Guide.

When there is not enough free hard disk space

Message Cause Solution

"HDD Full" When you were printing Delete unneeded forms or fonts
with the PostScript 3 printer registered on the machine.
driver, the hard disk
capacity for fonts and
forms was exceeded.

"HDD Full" The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were printing a machine.
Sample Print, Locked Print, Alternatively, reduce the data size of
Hold Print, or Stored Print the Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
file. Print, or Stored Print file.

"HDD is full. (Auto)" The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were using the machine.
error job store function to Alternatively, reduce the data size of
store Normal Print jobs as the Temporary Print file and/or the
Hold Print files. Stored Print file.

459
 11. Troubleshooting

When there is not enough memory

Message Cause Solution

"84: Error" There is no work area Decrease the number of files sent to
available for image the machine.
processing.

When there is a problem with a parameter

Message Cause Solution

"86: Error" Parameters of the control Check the print settings.

code are invalid.

When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation

Message Cause Solution

"No response from the A timeout occurred while Check the status of the server.
server. Authentication has connection to the server
failed." was being established for
LDAP authentication or
Windows Authentication.

"Printing privileges have You have no privileges to Contact the owner of the document.
not been set for this print the PDF document
document." you tried to print.

"You do not have a The entered login user Check that the user name and
privilege to use this name or login password is password are correct.
function. This job has been not correct.
cancelled."

"You do not have a The logged in user is not For details about how to set
privilege to use this allowed to use the selected permissions, see "Limiting Available
function. This job has been function. Functions", Security Guide.
cancelled."

460
 When Messages Appear

When a user cannot be registered

Message Cause Solution

"Auto-registration of user Automatic registration of For details about automatic

information has failed." information for LDAP registration of user information, see
Authentication or Windows "Auto Registration to the Address
Authentication failed Book", Security Guide.
because the Address Book
is full.

"Information for user The user name for LDAP For details about user authentication,
authentication is already was already registered in a see "Configuring User
registered for another different server with a Authentication", Security Guide.
user." different ID, and a
duplication of the user
name occurred due to a
switching of domains
(servers), and so on.

When other errors occur

Message Cause Solution

"98: Error" The machine could not Turn off the power, and then back on
access the hard disk again. If the message appears
correctly. frequently, contact your service
representative.

"Compressed Data Error." The printer detected • Check the connection between
corrupt compressed data. the computer and the printer.
• Check that the program you
used to compress the data is
functioning correctly.

"Data Storage Error" You tried to print a Sample Contact your service representative.
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, or
to store a file in the
Document Server when the
hard disk was
malfunctioning.

461
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Error has occurred." A syntax error, etc., Check that the PDF file is valid.
occurred.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Files" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file,
the maximum file capacity
was exceeded.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Pages" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file, Reduce the number of pages to print.
the maximum page
capacity was exceeded.

"File system is full." PDF file does not print out Delete all unnecessary files from the
because the capacity of hard disk, or decrease the file size
the file system is full. sent to the machine.

"Folding Unit Error." There is a problem with the Contact your service representative.
multi-folding unit.

"I/O buffer overflow." An input buffer overflow • In [Printer Features], under

occurred. [Host Interface], select [I/O
Buffer], and then set the
maximum buffer size to a larger
value.
• Reduce the number of files
being sent to the machine.

"Insufficient Memory" A memory allocation error PCL 6

occurred. On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list. In some
cases, it will take a long time to
complete a print job.

462
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Memory Retrieval Error" A memory allocation error Turn off the power and then back on
occurred. again. If the message appears
again, replace the RAM. For details
about replacing the RAM, contact
your service representative.

"Paper Type Error" The specified paper type Re-obtain the latest paper type
name is not set in the information set in the machine.
machine.

If printing does not start, contact your service representative.

• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration
Page in conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page,
see "List / Test Print", Preparation.

Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

The messages related to the scanner function are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.

Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The destination computer name Check whether the computer name
path. Please check the or folder name is invalid. and the folder name for the
settings." destination are correct.

463
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified An antivirus program or a • Antivirus programs and

path. Please check the firewall is preventing the firewalls can prevent client
settings." machine from connecting to computers from establishing
your computer. connection with this machine.
• If you are using antivirus
software, add the program to
the exclusion list in the
application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list,
see the antivirus software
Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection,
register the machine's IP
address in the firewall's IP
address exclusion settings.
For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters for specifiable alphanumeric characters which can be entered,
the path." characters in a path has been and then enter it again. For details
exceeded. about the maximum enterable
number of characters, see "Values
of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Storage Function",
Preparation.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum enterable number Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters." of alphanumeric characters has characters which can be entered,
been exceeded. and then enter it again. For details
about the maximum enterable
number of characters, see "Values
of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Storage Function",
Preparation.

464
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum allowable Up to 100 jobs can be placed on
number of OCR jobs that can number of jobs on standby was standby by the OCR function.
be on standby for storing, exceeded because large Scan the next document after the
please wait. Try again after quantities of documents were current jobs have finished being
storing of the current job has stored by the OCR function. stored.
completed."

"File types have been If there are selected stored For details about the file formats
automatically set for some documents which cannot be used to transmit stored documents,
files because multiple files converted to a specified file see page 406 "Sending a Stored
were selected." format, those documents are File".
automatically converted to a
convertible format before they
are transmitted.

"Programmed. Cannot The destinations that were WSD destinations and DSM
program the destination(s) selected while registered to the destinations cannot be registered
that is not programmed in the program contain a folder to the program because they
address book." destination for which one of the cannot be registered in the
following destinations is set: address book. For manually
manually entered destination, entered destinations, register the
WSD destination, or DSM destinations in the address book,
destination and then try to register them to the
program again.

"Scanner records are full. "Print & Delete Scanner Print or delete Scanner Records.
Please check Scanner Records" in [Scanner Features] For details about Scanner
Features." is set to [Do not Print: Disable Features, see "General Settings",
Send], and Scanner Records Preparation.
are full.

465
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"The entered file name The file name contains a • Check the file name set at the
contains invalid character(s). character that cannot be used. time of scanning. For details
Enter the file name again about characters that can be
using any of the following 1 used in file names, see
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A "Specifying the file name",
to Z", "a to z", ". - _" Basic Operations.
• Check the file name specified
at the time of scanning. The
file name specified in the
Sending Scan Files to Folders
function cannot contain the
following characters:
\/:*?"<>|
The file name cannot start or end
with a period ".".

"The program is recalled. The currently logged-in user For details about how to set
Cannot recall the does not have permission to permissions, see "Restricting
destination(s) for which view the destination that was Usage of the Destination List",
access privileges are registered in the program. Security Guide.
required."

"The program is recalled. The destination stored in the Enter the destination directly to
Cannot recall the program could not be recalled send data separately.
destination(s) that is deleted because it was deleted from the
from the address book." address book.

"The program is recalled. The folder destinations for which A destination for which the
Cannot recall the folder the protection code was set protection code is set cannot be
destination(s) with protection were registered in the program. recalled by the program. Cancel
code(s)." the protection code setting or send
scanned files to the destination
separately.

466
 When Messages Appear

When documents cannot be scanned properly

Message Cause Solution

"All the pages are detected No PDF file was created Check whether the original is set
as blank. No file was because all the pages of the upside down.
created." scanned original were detected Change [OCR Scanned PDF:
as blank when [On] is specified Blank Page Sensitivity] in [Scanner
for [Delete Blank Page] in [OCR Features] to "Sensitivity Level 1".
Settings] in [Send File Type /
Name].

"Check original's orientation." Originals may sometimes not be Change the orientation of the
scanned depending on a original, and then scan the original
combination of items such as the again.
specified scaling factor and
document size.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned data exceeded Specify the scan size and
capacity." maximum data capacity. resolution again. Note that it may
"Check scanning resolution, not be possible to scan very large
then press Start key again." originals at a high resolution. For
details about the settings for the
scanner function, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Preparation.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned original exceeded Specify the scan size and
capacity." maximum data capacity. resolution again. Note that it may
"Check the scanning not be possible to scan very large
resolution, then reset n originals at a high resolution. For
original(s)." details about the settings for the
scanner function, see "Relationship
("n" in the message
between Resolution and Scan
represents a variable.)
Size", Preparation.

"Exceeded max. data The data being scanned is too Reduce the resolution or [Specify
capacity." large for the scale ratio Size] value, and then scan the
"Check the resolution and the specified in [Specify Size]. original again.
ratio and then press the Start
key again."

467
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of files Check the files stored by the other
files which can be used in that can be stored in the functions, and then delete
Document Server at the same Document Server has been unneeded files. For details about
time." exceeded. how to delete files, see "Deleting
Stored Documents", Basic
Operations.

"Not all of the image will be If the scaling factor specified in Reduce the scaling factor in
scanned." "Specify Reproduction Ratio" is "Specify Reproduction Ratio", and
"Check the ratio and then too large, part of the image then try to scan the original again.
press the Start key again." may be lost. If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to
start scanning with the current
scaling factor.

"Not all of the image will be Using "Specify Reproduction Specify a large size in [Specify
scanned." Ratio" to scale down a large Size], and then scan the original
"Check the ratio and then document may cause part of the again.
press the Start key again." image to be lost. If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to
start scanning with the current
scaling factor.

"The size of the scanned data The data being scanned is too Specify a higher resolution or a
is too small." small for the scale ratio large size in [Specify Size], and
"Check the resolution and the specified in [Specify Size]. then scan the original again.
ratio and then press the Start
key again."

468
 When Messages Appear

When documents cannot be scanned because the memory is full

Message Cause Solution

"Memory is full. Cannot scan. Because of insufficient hard disk Try one of the following measures:
The scanned data will be space, the first page could not • Wait for a while, and then
deleted." be scanned. retry the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or
scanning resolution. For
details about changing scan
area and scanning
resolution, see "Scan
Settings", Basic Operations.
• Delete unneeded stored files.
For details about how to
delete stored files, see
"Deleting a stored file", Basic
Operations.

"Memory is full. Do you want Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the
to store scanned file?" free hard disk space in the data.
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some of
the pages could be scanned.

"Memory is full. Scanning has Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the
been cancelled. Press [Send] free hard disk space in the data.
to send the scanned data, or machine for sending by e-mail
press [Cancel] to delete." while data is being stored in the
Document Server, only some of
the pages could be scanned.

When data transmission fails

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with the The entered user name or • Check that the user name and
destination has failed. Check password was invalid. password are correct.
settings. To check the current • Check that the ID and
status, press [Scanned Files password for the destination
Status]." folder are correct.
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be
recognized.

469
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. email size. The file size per page has Change the scanner features
Sending email has been reached the maximum e-mail settings as follows:
cancelled. Check [Max. size specified in [Scanner • Increase the e-mail size limit
Email Size] in Scanner Features]. in [Max. Email Size].
Features."
• Change the [Divide & Send
Email] setting to [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max.
Size)]. For details about these
settings, see "Send Settings",
Preparation.

"Sending the data has failed. A network error has occurred Wait until sending is retried
The data will be resent later." and a file was not sent correctly. automatically after the preset
interval. If sending fails again,
contact your administrator.

"Transmission has failed. Transmission has failed. There Allocate sufficient space.
Insufficient memory in the was not enough free space on
destination hard disk. To the hard disk of the SMTP
check the current status, press server, FTP server, or client
[Scanned Files Status]." computer at the destination.

"Transmission has failed. To While a file was being sent, a If the same message appears
check the current status, press network error occurred and the again after scanning again, the
[Scanned Files Status]." file could not be sent correctly. cause could be a mixed network,
or network settings were changed
during WSD scanner transmission.
For details about network error,
contact your administrator.

When data cannot be sent because a currently used file is selected

Message Cause Solution

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the name of Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
use. File name cannot be a file whose status is status cleared), and then change
changed." "Waiting...". the file name.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
use. Password cannot be password of a file whose status status cleared), and then change
changed." is "Waiting...". the password.

470
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the sender's Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
use. User name cannot be name whose status is status cleared), and then change
changed." "Waiting...". the user name.

"Some of selected files are You cannot delete a file which is Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
currently in use. They could waiting to be transmitted status cleared), and then delete
not be deleted." ("Waiting..." status displayed). the file.

When data cannot be sent because there are too many documents or pages
Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The file being stored has Specify whether to store the data
pages per file. Do you want exceeded the maximum number or not. Scan the pages that were
to store the scanned pages as of pages for one file. not scanned, and then store them
1 file?" as a new file. For details about
storing files, see page 402
"Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents".

"Exceeded max. number of Too many files are waiting to be Try again after they have been
stored files. Cannot send the sent. sent.
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."

"Exceeded maximum number Too many files are waiting to be Try again after they have been
of file to store. Delete all sent. sent.
unnecessary files."

When the WSD scanner function cannot be used

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot communicate with WSD (Device) protocol or WSD For details about how to enable or
PC. Contact the (Scanner) protocol is disabled. disable the WSD protocol, see
administrator." "Enabling and Disabling
Protocols", Security Guide.

"Cannot start scanning Scan Profile is not set on the Set Scan Profile. For details about
because communication was client computer. how to do this, see "Creating a
failed." new scan profile", Basic
Operations.

471
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot start scanning The [Take no action] setting has Open scanner properties, click the
because communication was been selected on the client [Events] tab, and then select [Start
failed." computer, forcing the client this program] as the computer's
computer to remain inactive response when it receives scan
when it receives scan data. data. For details, see your
operating system's Help.

"Cannot start scanning. The Scan Profile might be Check the Scan Profile
Check the setting(s) on the incorrectly configured. configuration.
PC."

"Could not send the data A time out occurred when WSD • Reduce the number of
because the PC timed out Scanner was used. Time outs originals, and then scan
before it was sent." occur when too much time again.
passes between scanning an • Remove any misfed original,
original and sending its data. and then scan again.
The followings are likely causes
• Use Scanner Journal to check
of time outs:
there are no jobs awaiting
• Too many originals per set. transmission, and then scan
• Misfed originals. again.
• Transmission of other jobs.

When documents cannot be stored on a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the memory The memory storage device is • Replace the memory storage
storage device because full and scan data cannot be device.
remaining free space is saved. Even if the memory • If the document is scanned as
insufficient." storage device appears to have single-page or divided into
sufficient free space, data might multiple pages, data already
not be saved if the maximum written to the memory storage
number of files that can be device is saved as is. Replace
saved is exceeded. the memory storage device,
and then press [Retry] to save
the remaining data, or press
[Cancel] to redo the scan.

"Cannot write on the memory The memory storage device is Unlock the write-protection on the
storage device because the write-protected. memory storage device.
device is write-protected."

472
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the memory The memory storage device is • Check to see if the memory
storage device. Check the faulty, or the file name contains storage device is defective.
memory storage device and a character that cannot be used. • Check the memory storage
machine settings." device. It might be
unformatted, or its format
might be incompatible with
this machine.
• Check the file name set at the
time of scanning. For details
about the characters that can
be used in file names, see
"Specifying the file name",
Basic Operations.

"Exceeded max. page The scan could not be Reduce the number of documents
capacity per file. Press completed because the to be written to the memory
[Write] to write the scanned maximum number of pages that storage device, and then try
data to the memory storage can be scanned by this machine again.
device, or press [Cancel] to was exceeded during the
delete." scanned data was written to the
memory storage device.

"Memory is full. Press [Write] The scan could not be Specify whether or not to save the
to write the current scanned completed because there was scanned document to the memory
data to the memory storage insufficient hard disk memory storage device.
device, or press [Cancel] to when the scanned data was
delete." saved to the memory storage
device.

Messages displayed on the client computer

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on
the client computer when you use the TWAIN driver. If a message not described here appears, follow
the instruction.

473
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Any of Login User Name, The entered login user Check your login user name, login
Login Password or Driver name, password, or driver password, or driver encryption key,
Encryption Key is incorrect." encryption key was invalid. and then enter them correctly. For
details about login user name, login
password, and driver encryption key,
see "Configuring User Authentication"
and "Enabling and Disabling
Protocols", Security Guide.

"Authentication succeeded. The logged in user name For details about how to set
However, the access does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
privileges for scanner for scanner function. Functions", Security Guide.
function has been denied."

"Cannot add any more The maximum number of The maximum number of modes that
scanning mode." registrable scan modes has can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
been exceeded. modes.

"Cannot detect the paper The set original was • Place the original correctly.
size of the original. Specify misaligned. • Specify the scan size.
the scanning size."
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Lift the
ADF 30 degrees or more.

"Cannot specify any more The maximum number of The maximum number of scanning
scanning area." registrable scan modes has areas that can be stored is 100. Delete
been exceeded. unneeded scanning areas.

"Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF." A paper misfeed has • Remove the jammed originals,
occurred inside the ADF. and then insert them again. For
details about jammed paper, see
page 517 "Removing Jammed
Paper".
• When a misfeed occurs, replace
the jammed originals.
• Check whether the originals are
suitable to be scanned by the
machine.

474
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Error has occurred in the An error has occurred in the • Check whether the network cable
scanner driver." driver. is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is
recognized correctly by
Windows.
• Check whether the client
computer can use the TCP/IP
protocol.

"Error has occurred in the The application-specified Check whether the scanning settings
scanner." scan conditions have made with the application exceed the
exceeded the setting range setting range of the machine.
of the machine.

"Fatal error has occurred in An unrecoverable machine An unrecoverable machine error has
the scanner." error has occurred. occurred. Contact your service
representative.

"Insufficient memory. Close Memory is insufficient. • Close all the unnecessary

all other applications, then applications running on the client
restart scanning." computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.

475
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is • Reset the scan size.

the scanning area." insufficient. • Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. For
details about the settings, see
TWAIN driver Help.
The problem may be due to the
following:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when halftone or high resolution is
used. For details about the
relationship between scan
settings, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Preparation.
• If a misfeed occurs, you might not
scan an original. Remove the
misfeed, and then scan the
original again.

"Invalid Winsock version. You are using an invalid Install the operating system of the
Please use version 1.1 or version of Winsock. computer or copy Winsock from the
higher." operating system CD-ROM.

"No response from the The machine or client • Check whether the machine or
scanner." computer is not connected to client computer is connected to
the network correctly. the network correctly.
• Disable the client computer's own
firewall. For details about firewall,
see Windows Help.

"No response from the The network is crowded. Wait for a while, and then connect to
scanner." the network again.

476
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is in use for other A function of the machine • Wait for a while, and then
function. Please wait." other than the Scanner connect to the network again.
function is being used such • Cancel the job that is being
as the Copier function. processed. Press the [Stop] key.
Follow the instructions in the
message that appears and exit
the function that is running.

"Scanner is not available on The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
the specified device." cannot be used on this
machine.

"Scanner is not ready. The ADF cover is open. Check whether the ADF cover is
Check the scanner and the closed.
options."

"The name is already in use. You tried to register a name Use another name.
Check the registered that is already in use.
names."

When there is a problem connecting to the scanner

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot connect to the An access mask is set. For details about an access mask,
scanner. Check the network contact your administrator.
Access Mask settings in User
Tools."

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The main power of the Check whether the main power of the
used for the previous scan. previously used scanner is scanner used for the previous scan is
"YYY" will be used instead." not set to "On". turned on.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)

477
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The machine is not • Check that the previously used
used for the previous scan. connected to the network scanner is connected to the
"YYY" will be used instead." correctly. network correctly.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate • Cancel the personal firewall of
scanner names.) the client computer. For details
about firewall, see Windows
Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Device Management.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.

"Cannot find the scanner. The machine's power is off. Turn on the power.
Check if the scanner main
power is on."

"Communication error has A communication error has Check whether the client computer can
occurred on the network." occurred on the network. use the TCP/IP protocol.

"Scanner is not available. The machine is not • Check whether the machine is
Check the scanner connected to the network connected to the network
connection status." correctly. correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
For details about firewall, see
Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Device Management.

478
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is not available. Network communication is • Check whether the machine's host
Check the scanner not available because the name is specified in the Network
connection status." machine's IP address could Connection Tool. For the WIA
not be obtained from the driver, check the [Network
host name. If only "IPv6" is Connection] tab in the properties.
set to [Active], the IPv6 • Use Web Image Monitor to set
address might not be "LLMNR" of "IPv6" to [Active].
obtained.

When Other Messages Appear

The messages related to scan function, destination list, user certificate and LDAP server are displayed on
Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.

Message Cause Solution

"A mainframe An error occurred when the • Check the status indicator on the
communication error has machine tried to interface box.
occurred with an extended communicate with the • Check the connection between
option. Check the status interface box. the machine and the interface
indicator on the interface box.
box."

"An extended option error An error has occurred in the Check the status of the interface box,
has occurred. Check the interface box. and then resolve the error.
status of the extended
option."

"Cannot connect with the • The wireless LAN Turn off the power, and then confirm
wireless card. Turn the main board was not inserted the wireless LAN board is inserted
power switch off, then check when the machine was correctly. After confirmation, turn on
the card." turned on. the power again. If the message
(A "wireless LAN board" is • The wireless LAN appears again, contact your service
referred to as a "wireless board was pulled out representative.
card".) after the machine was
turned on.
• The settings are not
updated although the
unit is detected.

479
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Clean the scanning glass. The scanning glass or guide Clean the scanning glass or guide
(Located next to the plate of the ADF is dirty. plate. See page 541 "Maintaining
exposure glass.)" Your Machine".

"Failed to read the PDF file." There is a possibility that the With this machine’s browser PDF files
PDF version is not supported other than those whose versions and
by the browser’s PDF viewer encryption levels are specified below
or an unsupported cannot be viewed.
encryption level is specified. • PDF version: 1.3-1.7
• PDF encryption level: 128Bit AES
or 256Bit AES

"Following output tray is full. The output tray is full. • Remove paper from the output
Remove paper." tray to resume printing. If paper is
delivered to the finisher shift tray
and you want to prevent paper
from falling off the tray, press the
[Stop] key to suspend printing,
and then remove the paper. Press
[Continue] on the control panel to
resume printing.
• When using the multi-folding unit,
the number of sheets per paper
stack depends on the paper type
and fold type.

"Internal cooling fan is Large print runs will cause The fan will emit noise, but this is
active." the machine's interior to heat normal and the machine will be
up, triggering the cooling operable while the fan is running.
fan. The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.

480
 When Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Self checking..." The machine is performing The machine may perform periodic
image adjustment maintenance during operations. The
operations. frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.

When there is a problem scanning or storing originals

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot detect original size. The machine failed to detect • Place the original correctly.
Select scan size." the size of the original. • Specify the scan size, and then
place the originals again.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Lift the
ADF 30 degrees or more.

"Captured file exceeded The maximum number of Reduce the number of pages in the
max. number of pages per pages per file has been transmitted file, and then resend the
file. Cannot send the exceeded. file. For details about the maximum
scanned data." number of pages per file, see "Storage
function", Preparation.

"Original(s) is being Another function of the Cancel the job in progress. Press [Exit],
scanned for a different machine is being used. and then press the [Stop] key. Follow
function." the instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that is
running.

481
 11. Troubleshooting

When the address book is updated

Message Cause Solution

"Updating the destination list A network error has • Check whether the server is
has failed. Try again?" occurred. connected.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Updating the destination The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
list... Please wait. Specified updated from the network not turn off the power while this
destination(s) or sender's using Web Image Monitor. message is displayed. Depending on
name has been cleared." the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some delay
before operation is resumed.
Operation is not possible while this
message is displayed.

"Updating the destination A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's

list... Please wait. Specified sender's name was cleared name again.
destination(s) or sender's when the destination list in
name has been cleared." the delivery server was
updated.

482
 When Messages Appear

When data cannot be sent due to a problem with the destination

Message Cause Solution

"Some invalid destination(s) The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
contained. Do you want to either an e-mail destination transmission, press [Select].
select only valid and/or folder destination
destination(s)?" that is not supported by the
specified transmission
method.

"SMTP authentication email The SMTP authentication e- For details about how to set SMTP
address and administrator mail address and the authentication, see "File Transfer",
email address mismatch." administrator's e-mail Device Management.
address do not match.

When the machine cannot be operated due to a problem with the user certificate

Message Cause Solution

"The destination cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
selected because its (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

"The group destination The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
cannot be selected because (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
it contains a destination with expired. (destination certificate), see
a encryption certificate that "Configuring S/MIME", Security
is not currently valid." Guide.

"Transmission cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
performed because the (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

483
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (S/ A new device certificate (S/MIME)
because the device MIME) has expired. must be installed. For details about
certificate used for the S/ how to install a device certificate (S/
MIME signature is not MIME), see "Configuring S/MIME",
currently valid." Security Guide.
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate For details about the device certificate
because there is a problem (S/MIME), or the certificate (S/MIME), see "Configuring S/
with the device certificate is invalid. MIME", Security Guide.
used for the S/MIME
signature. Check the device
certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (PDF A new device certificate (PDF with
because the Digital with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
Signature's device certificate PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
is not currently valid." signature) has expired. about how to install a device certificate
(XXX and YYY indicate the (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
user action.) with digital signature), see
"Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate A new device certificate (PDF with
because there is a problem (PDF with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
with the Digital Signature's PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
device certificate. Check the signature), or the certificate about how to install a device certificate
device certificate." is invalid. (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
(XXX and YYY indicate the with digital signature), see
user action.) "Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

• If an e-mail cannot be sent and a message appears which states that there is a problem with the
device certificate or user certificate, a new certificate must be installed. For details about how to
install a new certificate, see "Configuring S/MIME" or "Protecting Communication Paths via a
Device Certificate", Security Guide.

484
 When Messages Appear

When problems occur while logging in

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot log in." The entered login user name For details about the correct login user
or login password is not name and login password, see
correct. "Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.

"Cannot log in." The machine cannot perform For details about authentication, see
authentication. "Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.

When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation

Message Cause Solution

"You do not have the The logged in user name For details about how to set
privileges to use this does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
function." for the selected function. Functions", Security Guide.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files To check your access permission for
contained file(s) without without the permission to do stored documents, or to delete a
access privileges. Only so. document you do not have permission
file(s) with access privileges to delete, see "Unlocking Stored Files",
will be deleted." Security Guide.

When the LDAP server cannot be used

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with LDAP A network error has Try the operation again. If the message
server has failed. Check the occurred and connection is still displayed, the network may be
server status." has failed. busy.
Check the settings for LDAP server in
[System Settings]. For details about
settings for LDAP server, see
"Programming the LDAP server",
Device Management.

485
 11. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded time limit for A network error has • Try the operation again. If the
LDAP server search. Check occurred and connection message is still displayed, the
the server status." has failed. network may be busy.
• Check that the correct settings for
LDAP server are listed in
[Administrator Tools] of [System
Settings]. For details about LDAP
server, see "Programming the
LDAP server", Device
Management.

"LDAP server authentication A network error has Configure settings correctly for the user
has failed. Check the occurred and connection name and the password for LDAP
settings." has failed. server authentication.

486
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/

Document Server Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for Copier and Document Server function
problems.
The descriptions related to copy and Document Server functions are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3
machines.

When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem Cause Solution

Copies appear dirty. Image density is too high. Adjust the image density settings. For
details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.

Copies appear dirty. Auto Image Density is not On the control panel, select [Auto
selected. Density].

The reverse side of an Image density is too high. Adjust the image density settings. For
original image is copied. details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.

The reverse side of an Auto Image Density is not On the control panel, select [Auto
original image is copied. selected. Density].

The reverse side of an The original is thin. On the control panel, select [Auto
original image is copied. Density], or adjust the image density
settings.
For details about image density
settings, see "Adjusting Copy Image
Density", Basic Operations.

487
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Shadow appears on copies Image density is too high. • Adjust the image density settings.
if you use pasted originals. For details about image density
settings, see "Adjusting Copy
Image Density", Basic
Operations.
• Change the orientation of the
original.
• Use clear tape to fix down pasted
parts of the original.

Identical blemishes appear The exposure glass, Clean the exposure glass, scanning
in the same place on every scanning glass, or guide glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
copy. plate of the ADF is dirty. details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541 "Maintaining
Your Machine".

Identical blemishes appear • The original that has On the control panel, press
in the same place on every already been printed is [Generation ]to start a copy job.
copy. scanned.
• Original Type is set to
[Text / Photo], and an
original with text and
photographs that can
hardly be distinguished
from each other is
loaded.

The shadow density of an If Original Type is set to On the control panel, in the original
area is different from that of [Text / Photo] for copying, types, press [Photo] or [Text], and then
the original. the shadow density for each start copying.
area may vary.

Copies are too light. Image density is too light. Adjust the image density settings. For
details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.

488
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

Copies are too light. A light copy may result when • Use recommended paper. For
you use damp or rough details about recommended
grain paper. paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about how to store paper,
see page 265 "Paper Storage".

Parts of images are not The original is not set Set the original correctly. For details
copied. correctly. about how to set originals, see
page 176 "Placing Originals on the
Exposure Glass" and page 178
"Placing Originals in the Auto
Document Feeder".

Parts of images are not The correct paper size is not Select the correct paper size.
copied. selected.

Parts of images are not Even if you place originals Use "Create Margin" function to
copied. on the exposure glass or in reduce the image of its original size.
the ADF correctly, margins For details about image areas that
of a few millimeters on all cannot be copied, see "Create
four sides of the original margin", Basic Operations.
might not be copied.

Images appear only The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
partially. recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
how to store it, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Black lines appear. The exposure glass, Clean the exposure glass, scanning
scanning glass, or guide glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
plate of the ADF is dirty. details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541 "Maintaining
Your Machine".

489
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

White lines appear. The exposure glass or Clean the exposure glass or scanning
scanning glass is dirty. glass. For details about how to clean
the machine, see page 541
"Maintaining Your Machine".

White lines appear. When is flashing, toner is Add toner. For details about adding
beginning to run out. toner, see page 528 "Adding toner".

Copies are blank. The original is not set Set the original correctly. For details
correctly. about how to set originals, see "Placing
Originals", Preparation.

A moire pattern is produced The original has a dot Place the original on the exposure
on copies. pattern image or many lines. glass at a slight angle.

Black spots appear on the Because of high humidity, • Place a transparency on the
copy of a photographic the photographic print has exposure glass, and then place
print. stuck to the exposure glass. the print on the transparency.
• Place the print on the exposure
glass, and then place two or three
sheets of white paper on it. Leave
the ADF open when copying.

White stripes appear on the Fragments of paper are Use a dry cloth to wipe any paper
transparency. stuck to the transparency. fragments off the back of the
transparency.

The image on the back side Missing patches and • Do not install the machine in low-
of duplex copies has mottled smudges are caused by temperature areas.
blank patches or is moisture leaking from the • Use paper that has been stored
smudged. paper. where temperature and humidity
conditions meet the limitations we
recommend. For details about the
paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265
"Paper Storage".

490
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

Basic
Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the limit markings on the side fences of the
machine. paper tray, the markings on the paper
guides of the bypass tray, or the
markings on the Large Capacity Tray
(LCT).
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper tray's side fences Push the side fences lightly, and then
are set too tightly. reset it.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or thin. Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

Misfeeds occur frequently Small-size thick paper has When feeding paper with a grammage
been fed in long-edge feed of 200 gsm or more and a paper
(LEF) orientation. length of 21 cm (8.27 inches) or more,
pull the drawer unit out and operate
the lever of the paper transport unit to
raise its height.
For details, see page 200 "Using Small
Thick Paper".

491
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled • Use recommended paper. For
or has been folded or details about recommended
creased. paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about the proper way to
store paper, see page 265
"Paper Storage".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being used. Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed onto by
another machine.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.

Copy paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
creased. recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Copy paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. For details
creased. about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

You want to check print You can print a single copy Check the print quality by using the
quality before making a without specifying the setting sample copy function to print out only
large print run. again. the first set. See "Finishing", Basic
Operations.

You cannot combine several Selected functions cannot be Check the combination of functions,
functions. used together. and then make the settings again. For
details about combination of functions,
see "Function compatibility", Basic
Operations.

492
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

When sorting, pages are The memory became full Change the setting for [Memory Full
divided into two blocks. while pages were sorted so Auto Scan Restart] in [Copier /
that they were delivered in Document Server Features]. For details
two blocks. about setting "Memory Full Auto Scan
Restart", see "Input / Output",
Preparation.

A text pattern appears in the You have copied a Check the document. For details about
background of the copy. copyguarded document how to prevent unauthorized copying
protected from unauthorized of the document, see "Printing
copying. Documents that Are Not Authorized for
Duplication", Basic Operations.

Images are skewed. The side fences in the paper Make sure the side fences are set
feed tray are not set properly. For details about how to set
properly. the side fences, see page 204
"Changing the Paper Size".

Images are skewed. The paper is fed in at a slant. Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".

Images are skewed. The original guide of the Make sure the original guide is set
ADF is not set properly. properly. For details about how to set
the original guide, see page 178
"Placing Originals in the Auto
Document Feeder".

Edges of sheets are creased. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Edges of sheets are creased. You are using non- Use recommended paper. For details
recommended paper. about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

493
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Paper is bent at the corners. Paper is curled When using the decurl unit, adjust
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".For
details about the Adjustment Settings
for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".

Sheets are fed in together, Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets to flatten the paper
resulting in paper jams. before loading it. Alternatively, feed a
sheet of paper at a time.

"Add Staples" message The staple cartridge is not set Make sure the staple cartridge is set
appears and the Staple properly. properly.
function cannot be used.

When a sheet of paper is The paper is curling. Flatten the curled paper, and then set it
feed into a two-tray wide in the tray.
LCT, it cannot be sent, or
double feeding occurs.

Edit
Problem Cause Solution

In "Double Copies" mode, Combination of original and Specify the paper size again. For
parts of the original image copy paper is not correct. example, select A3 for A4
are not copied. originals. For details about the settings
for double copies, see "Double
Copies", Basic Operations.

In "Erase Border", "Erase You have entered a wide Make the margin width narrower.
Center", or "Erase Center / erased margin.
Border" mode, parts of the
original image are not
copied.

In "Erase Border", "Erase Originals are not scanned Place the originals correctly.
Center", or "Erase Center / correctly.
Border" mode, parts of the
original image are not
copied.

494
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

In "Margin Adjustment" • You set a wide erased Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
mode, parts of the original margin.
image are not copied. • There is a lack of
margin space on the
opposite side of the
binding position.

In "Image Repeat" mode, the You selected copy paper the Select copy paper larger than the
original image is not copied same size as the originals, or originals or specify the proper
repeatedly. you did not select the proper reproduction ratio.
reproduction ratio.

Stamp
Problem Cause Solution

The stamp position is wrong. The paper orientation is Check the paper orientation and stamp
wrong. position.

The stamp is not printed on The back side stamp position Reset the back side stamp position. For
the back side of sheets when is incorrect for the paper details about Adj. Back Side Stamp
duplex copying is size. Position, see "Copier / Document
performed. Server Features", Preparation.

Combine
Problem Cause Solution

Copies made with the You have selected a setting Change the setting for [Orientation:
"Booklet" or "Magazine" ("Open to Left" or "Open to Booklet, Magazine] in [Copier /
function cannot be folded Right") that does not match Document Server Features]. For details
into a book correctly. the orientation of originals. about the setting of [Orientation:
Booklet, Magazine], see "Edit",
Preparation.

495
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

When "Combine" is used, You specified a When you specify a reproduction ratio
parts of the image are not reproduction ratio that does using Manual Paper Select mode,
copied. not match the sizes of the make sure the ratio matches the
originals and copy paper. originals and the copy paper. Select
the correct reproduction ratio before
using Combine mode. For details about
Combine mode, see "One-Sided
Combine", "Two-Sided Combine", or
"Auto reduce / enlarge", Basic
Operations.

Copies are not in correct You placed the originals in When you place a stack of originals in
order. the incorrect order. the ADF, the last page should be on
the bottom.
If you place an original on the
exposure glass, start with the first page
to be copied.

Duplex
Problem Cause Solution

Cannot print in duplex You have loaded paper that Change the paper. For details about
mode. is too thick or thin. paper weight that can be used for
duplex printing, see "Specifications for
the Main Unit", Specifications.

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
mode. tray that is not set for duplex in [Tray Paper Settings] to enable
printing. duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper In [Tray Paper Settings], select a paper
mode. type that cannot be used for type that can be used for duplex
duplex printing. printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".

496
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

Copies are not in correct You placed the originals in When you place a stack of originals in
order. the incorrect order. the ADF, the last page should be on
the bottom.
If you place an original on the
exposure glass, start with the first page
to be copied.

When "Duplex" is used, You placed the originals in Place the original in the correct
copy is made top to bottom the wrong orientation. orientation. For details about original
even though [Top to Top] is orientations for duplex copy, see
selected. page 157 "Duplex Copying".

Document Server
Problem Cause Solution

Cannot access file. • The file is password- For details about password-protected
protected. files, see "Managing Stored Files",
• The entered password Security Guide.
is not correct.

You cannot find out what is You may not be able to You can switch the Select File screen
stored in a file. check the contents of a file between the [List] and [Thumbnails]
simply from the file name. display to check the file information.
• List display
The file name, the total number of
pages, and user name are shown.
• Thumbnails display
An image of the stored file
appears.
For details about the Select File screen,
see "Checking the Details of a Stored
Document", Basic Operations.

497
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Memory frequently becomes The Document Server Delete unnecessary files. On the file
full. memory is full. selection display, select unnecessary
files, and then press [Delete File]. If this
does not increase available memory
space, do the following:
• Switch to the scanner screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under the scanner function.
• Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under Sample Print, Locked
Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print.

Finishing
Problem Cause Solution

Copies are not stapled. There are jammed staples in Remove the jammed staples. For details
the stapler. about removing jammed staples, see
page 522 "Removing Jammed
Staples".

Copies are not stapled. Copy paper is curled. • Turn the copy paper over in the
tray.
• Straighten the curled sheets using
[Adjustment Settings for
Operators]. For details about the
settings for [Adjust Paper Curl],
see page 303 "Adjustment
Settings for Operators".

Copies are not stapled. The number of copies is too For details about the stapler capacity,
large for the stapler to staple see "Specifications for Finisher
the copies as a single batch. SR5090" or "Specifications for Finisher
SR5110" or "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR5100" or "Specifications for
Booklet Finisher SR5120",
Specifications.

498
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

Saddle-stitched documents Certain types of paper are For details about the recommended
come apart and do not stack resistant to folding and open paper, see page 228 "Recommended
properly. out after being folded and Paper Sizes and Types".
stitched.

Staples are wrongly Originals are not set For details about how to place the
positioned. correctly. originals with stapling, see "Staple",
Basic Operations.

Stapled sheets of paper are When you stop printing Press the [Stop] key, and then cancel
not output during printing. while using the staple copy settings, including stapling.
function, paper not stapled
during printing may be left in
the staple unit.

499
 11. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer

Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function problems.

Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors by checking the error log
on the control panel.

• The most recent 50 errors are recorded in the error log. If a new error is added when there are 50
errors already recorded, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the earliest error is a Sample Print,
Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print error, it is not deleted. The error is recorded separately until
30 errors are recorded.
• You cannot view [Error Log] on the simple screen.
• If the power is turned off, the log is deleted.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center, and press the [Printer
(Classic)] icon.
2. Press [Error Log].

3. Select the error log you want to check, and then press [Details].

500
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

If USB Connection Fails

Problem Cause Solution

The machine is not The USB cable is not Disconnect the USB cable, and then
automatically recognized. connected properly. turn off the power. Turn on the power
again. When the machine has fully
booted up, reconnect the USB cable.

The machine is not Windows has already • Check whether the computer has
automatically recognized. configured the USB settings. identified the machine as an
unsupported device.
• Open Windows' Device
Manager, and then, under
[Universal Serial Bus controllers],
remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a [!] or
[?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required
devices. For details, see Windows
Help.

The machine does not If the USB cable is Press the [Energy Saver] key, and then
recognize the USB connected while the disconnect the USB cable. Press the
connection even when a machine is off, the machine [Energy Saver] key again. When the
USB cable is inserted. might not recognize the USB machine has returned to the ready
connection. condition, reconnect the USB cable.

When You Cannot Print

Cause Solution

The power is off. For details about how to turn on the power, see
page 103 "Turning On/Off the Power".

The cause is displayed on the screen of Check the error message or warning status on the control
the control panel. panel, and then take the required action. For details
about solutions, see page 449 "Messages Displayed
When You Use the Printer Function".

501
 11. Troubleshooting

Cause Solution

The interface cable is not connected For details about how to connect interface cables
correctly. correctly, see "Connecting to the Interface", Device
Management.

The correct interface cable is not being The type of interface cable you use depends on the
used. computer. Be sure to use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. For details about the
interface cable, see "Connecting to the Interface", Device
Management.

The interface cable was connected after Connect the interface cable before turning on the power.
the power was turned on.

If the machine is using wireless LAN, • Check the radio signal status of the wireless LAN in
failure to print might result from a weak [System Settings]. If signal quality is not satisfactory,
wireless signal. move the machine to a location where radio waves
can pass, or remove objects that might cause
interference.
• You can check the radio signal status only when
wireless LAN is used in infrastructure mode. For
details about the radio signal status of the wireless
LAN, see "Interface Settings", Device Management.

When there is a microwave oven or a Turn off the microwave oven and the wireless LAN
wireless LAN access point near the access point, and then try printing again. If printing is
device, radio waves may be interfering successful, move the devices to a location where they do
with the Bluetooth's communication. not interfere.

If the machine is using a wireless LAN Turn off other machines or instruments which use the
(IEEE 802.11b/g/n), radio waves may same frequency range and then try printing again. If
be interfering with the wireless printing is successful, move the devices to a location
communication. This may occur if there is where they do not interfere.
a microwave oven, cordless telephone,
industrial machine, scientific instrument, or
medical instrument using the same
frequency range near the device.

If the machine is using wireless LAN, SSID Check using the machine's display panel that the SSID is
settings are incorrect. correctly set. For details about SSID setting, see
"Interface Settings", Device Management.

502
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

Cause Solution

If the machine is using wireless LAN, the • Check access point settings when in infrastructure
receiver's MAC address may be mode. Depending on the access point, client access
preventing communication with the access may be limited by MAC address.
point. • Check there are no problems in transmission
between the access point and wired clients, and
between the access point and wireless clients.

The login user name, login password, or Check the login user name, login password, or driver
driver encryption key is invalid. encryption key.

Advanced encryption has been set using Check the extended security function settings. For details
the extended security function. about extended security function settings, see "Specifying
the Extended Security Functions", Security Guide.

A mechanical error might have occurred. Contact your service representative.

The transmission mode is not configured • Turn off the power, and then back on again. For
correctly when using a wireless LAN in ad details about how to turn on and off the power, see
hoc mode. "Turning On/Off the Power", Preparation.
• Change [Communication Mode] in [System
Settings] to [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode], and then
select [Off] for [Security Method]. For details about
Communication Mode, see "Interface Settings",
Device Management.

When the Data In indicator does not light • When a cable is used to connect the computer
up or flash after a print job starts, data is directly to the machine, check whether the print
not being sent to the machine. ports are configured correctly.
• When the computer is connected to the network,
ask your administrator about the computer's
network connection.

If printing does not start, contact your service representative.

Other Printing Problems

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that can occur when printing
from a computer.

503
 11. Troubleshooting

When you cannot print clearly

Problem Cause Solution

The printed image is Settings for thick paper have On the printer driver's [Detailed
smudged. not been made for printing Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
on thick paper in the bypass and then select [Tray A] in the "Input
tray. Tray:" list. Then in the "Paper Type:" list,
select a proper paper type.

The printed image is faded The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
over the entire page. recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

The printed image is faded The paper is unsuitable. Use recommended paper. Printing on
over the entire page. coarse or treated paper might result in
faint print image. For details about
recommended paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".

The printed image is faded If the [Toner Saving] is On the printer driver's [Detailed
over the entire page. selected in the printer driver Settings] tab, click [Print
settings, the entire page will Quality:Standard] in "Menu:", and
be faded when printed. then select [Off] in the "Toner Saving:"
list.

Images smudge when The specified paper type On the printer driver's [Detailed
rubbed. (Toner is not fixed.) and the paper that is Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
actually loaded might be and then select a proper paper type in
different. For example, thick the "Paper Type:" list.
paper might be loaded but
not specified as the paper
type.

The printed image is different Printing will be performed by Only when using PCL 6
from the image on the the machine's graphic On the printer driver's [Detailed
computer's display. processing function. Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list.

504
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

When graphics are printed, If the printer driver is If you want to print accurately, set the
the output and the screen configured to use the printer driver to print without using the
are different. graphics command, the graphics command. For details about
graphics command from the settings for printer driver, see the
machine is used to print. printer driver Help.

Lines of garbled or An incorrect printer Select the correct printer driver, and
unwanted alphanumeric language might have been then print the file again.
characters appear. selected.

Images are cut off, or You may be using paper Use the same size paper as that
margins are printed. smaller than the size selected in the application. If you
selected in the application. cannot load paper of the correct size,
use the reduction function to reduce the
image, and then print. For details
about reduction function, see the
printer driver Help.

Photo images are coarse. Some applications print at Use the application's settings or printer
lower resolution. driver's settings to specify a higher
resolution. For details about printer
driver's settings, see the printer driver
Help.

A solid line is printed as a Dither patterns do not match. Only when using PostScript 3
dashed line or appears Change the dithering settings on
blurred. the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.

Fine or inconsistently thick Extremely fine lines have Only when using PostScript 3
lines appear, or fine lines do been specified, or a color Change the dithering settings on
not appear. that is too light has been the printer driver. For details
specified for the lines. about the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.
If the problem continues after you
change the dithering settings, use the
settings of the application in which the
image was created to change the
thickness of the lines.

505
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Images appear only The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
partially. recommended temperature and
humidity condition. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

The image on the back side Missing patches and • Do not install the machine in low-
of duplex copies has mottled smudges are caused by temperature areas.
blank patches or is moisture leaking from the • Use paper that has been stored
smudged. paper. where temperature and humidity
conditions meet the conditions we
recommend. For details about the
paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265
"Paper Storage".
• Install the optional anti-humidity
heater. For details about the
antihumidity heater, contact your
service representative.

When paper is not fed properly

Problem Cause Solution

Paper is not fed from the When you are using a On the Printer driver's [Detailed
selected tray. Windows operating system, Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
printer driver settings and then select the input tray you want
override those settings to use in the "Input Tray:" list.
applied to the display panel.

Images are printed at a The tray's side fences might Check that the side fences are locked.
slant. not be locked. For details about how to set the side
fences, see page 204 "Changing the
Paper Size".

Images are printed at a The paper is fed in at a slant. Load the paper correctly. For details
slant. about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".

506
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the limit markings on the side fences of the
machine. paper tray, the markings on the paper
guides of the bypass tray, or the
markings on the LCT.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper tray's side fences Push the side fences lightly, and then
are set too tightly. reset them.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or thin. Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is wrinkled or has • Use recommended paper. For
been folded or creased. details about recommended
paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about the proper way to
store paper, see page 265
"Paper Storage".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being used. Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.

Sheets are fed in together, Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly before
resulting in jams. loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.

507
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Paper becomes creased. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Paper becomes creased. The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

Edges of sheets are creased. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".

Edges of sheets are creased. You are using non- Use recommended paper. For details
recommended paper. about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

Duplex printing cannot be You have loaded paper that Change the paper. For details about
applied. is too thick or thin. paper weight that can be used for
duplex printing, see "Specifications for
the Main Unit", Specifications.

Duplex printing cannot be You have selected a paper Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
applied. tray that is not set for duplex in [Tray Paper Settings] to enable
printing. duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".

Duplex printing cannot be You have selected a paper In [Tray Paper Settings], select a paper
applied. type that cannot be used for type that can be used for duplex
duplex printing. printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".

508
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

White stripes appear on the Fragments of paper are Use a dry cloth to wipe any paper
transparency. stuck to the transparency. fragments off the back of the
transparency.

Other printing problems

Problem Cause Solution

It takes a long time to Sleep mode or Fusing Unit The machine requires time to warm up
complete a print job. Off mode might be set. if it has been in Sleep mode or Fusing
Unit Off mode. For details about Sleep
mode and Fusing Unit Off mode, see
page 104 "Saving Energy".

It takes a long time to Photographs and other If the Data In indicator is flashing, the
complete a print job. data- intensive pages take a printer has received data. Wait for a
long time for the machine to moment.
process. Wait until printing is Specifying a lower resolution with the
complete. printer driver may help speed up
printing. For details about how to
change the resolution setting, see the
printer driver Help.

Images are printed in the The feed orientation you Make sure the machine's feed
wrong orientation. selected and the feed orientation and the printer driver's feed
orientation selected in the orientation match. For details about
printer driver's option setup printer driver settings, see the printer
might be different. driver Help.

Optional components Bidirectional communication Set up optional devices on the

connected to the machine is not working. Properties of the printer. For details
are not recognized. about how to set up optional devices,
see the printer driver Help.

Combined printing, booklet The correct application or Make sure the application's paper size
printing, or Auto Reduce/ printer driver settings are not and orientation settings match those of
Enlarge printing does not configured. the printer driver. If a different paper
work as expected. size and orientation are set, select the
same size and orientation.

A print instruction was issued User Authentication may For details about user authentication,
from the computer, but have been set. see "User Code Authentication",
printing did not start. Security Guide.

509
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

PDF files cannot print or PDF PDF files are password- To print password-protected PDF files,
direct printing cannot be protected. enter the password in the [PDF Menu]
performed. or on Web Image Monitor. For details
about printing PDF files, see "PDF
Menu", Preparation, or Web Image
Monitor Help.

PDF files cannot print or PDF PDF files cannot print if they Change the PDF file security setting.
direct printing cannot be are print-disabled in PDF file
performed. security setting.

PDF direct print produces Fonts were not embedded. Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to
garbled characters. print, and then print.

Printing did not start even [Jobs Not Printed As Machn. Set [Jobs Not Printed As Machn. Was
though the specified print Was Off] was set to [Do not Off] to [Print When Machine On] in
time passed. Print] in [Printer Features], [Printer Features].
but when the specified print
time arrived, the power was
turned off.

Printing did not start even The time set on the machine Set the correct time on the machine or
though the specified print or computer is incorrect. computer.
time passed.

Printing via wireless LAN is The number of jobs exceeds Reduce the number of jobs.
slow. the capacity of the machine.

510
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

Printing via wireless LAN is • A communication error • Move the machine farther away
slow. might have occurred. from the wireless LAN device.
• Interference from other • If there are active wireless LAN
wireless LAN devices devices nearby, move the
can reduce machine or disable those devices.
communication speed. • Turn off other machines or
• If the machine is using instruments which use the same
a wireless LAN (IEEE frequency range and then try
802.11b/g/n), radio printing again. If printing is
waves may be successful, move the devices to a
interfering with the location where they do not
wireless interfere.
communication. This
may occur if there is a
microwave oven,
cordless telephone,
industrial machine,
scientific instrument, or
medical instrument
using the same
frequency range near
the device.

If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your service representative.

511
 11. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner

Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function problems.
The descriptions related to the scanner function are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

When stored files cannot be accessed

Problem Cause Solution

The stored file is locked and The password-protected file For details about locked files, see
is not accessible. is locked because the "Unlocking Stored Files", Security
password was incorrectly Guide.
entered ten times.

When stored files cannot be edited

Problem Cause Solution

Stored files cannot be Operational restrictions For details about the extended security
deleted. File names and have been imposed using function, see "Specifying the Extended
passwords cannot be the available extended Security Functions", Security Guide.
changed. Files cannot be security function.
delivered repeatedly.

When you cannot browse the network to send a scan file

Problem Cause Solution

Browsing through the The following machine Check the settings. For details about IP
network is not possible when settings may not be correct: address or Subnet Mask settings, see
specifying a destination • IP address "Interface Settings", Device
folder. Management.
• Subnet Mask

512
 Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner Function

When the TWAIN driver cannot be started

Problem Cause Solution

The Scanner Properties Advanced encryption has For details about the extended security
dialog box cannot be been specified in the setting, see "Specifying the Extended
displayed. extended security setting. Security Functions", Security Guide.

When e-mails are not sent as expected

Problem Cause Solution

The original file cannot be The file size exceeds the Specify [Yes (per Page)] for [Divide &
restored because a split e- maximum e-mail size Send Email] in [Scanner Features]. The
mail cannot be recovered at specified in [Max. Email file is divided per page and sent.
the destination. Size]. Because [Yes (per To send an e-mail without splitting it,
Max. Size)] is specified for perform the following:
[Divide & Send Email], the
• Specify a resolution so that the file
file is divided halfway down
size does not exceed the
the page and sent.
maximum size set in [Max. Email
Size].
• Specify a larger value for [Max.
Email Size] in [Scanner Features].
Make sure the larger maximum e-
mail size does not exceed the
allowable size range set on the
SMTP server.
• Specify [No] for [Divide & Send
Email] in [Scanner Features].
For details about these settings, see
"Send Settings", Preparation.

513
 11. Troubleshooting

When S/MIME cannot be used

Problem Cause Solution

If several destinations are Encrypted e-mails are sent to Make sure S/MIME-authentication
selected for a broadcasting the destinations for which S/ destinations are separated from plain
sequence, data is sent over MIME authentication is set, text destinations.
twice. and plain text e-mails are To encrypt e-mails, a user certificate
sent to the destinations for must be installed in Address Book.
which S/MIME
For details about destination settings,
authentication is not set.
see "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

To put a signature on an e- When S/MIME is applied, For details about applying S/MIME,
mail using S/MIME, an e- the administrator appears in see "Configuring S/MIME", Security
mail address for "Sender" is the "From" field, and the Guide.
not set for "From". sender appears in the
"Reply-to" field.

• The size of S/MIME e-mails is larger than that of e-mails without using S/MIME.

When you cannot send scan files using WSD

Problem Cause Solution

The WSD scanner function Scan Profile is not set on the Set Scan Profile. For details about how
cannot be used. client computer. to specify Scan Profile, see "Creating a
new scan profile", Basic Operations.

The WSD scanner function The [Take no action] setting Open scanner Properties, click the
cannot be used. has been selected on the [Events] tab, and then select [Start this
client computer, forcing the program] when the computer receives
client computer to remain scan data. For details, see your
inactive when it receives operating system's Help.
scan data.

514
 When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected

When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected

The descriptions related to the scanner function are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.

Problem Cause Solution

The scanned image is dirty. The exposure glass, Clean the exposure glass, scanning
scanning glass, or guide glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
plate of the ADF is dirty. details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541
"Maintaining Your Machine".

The image is distorted or not The original was moved Do not move the original during
correctly placed. during scanning. scanning.

The image is distorted or not The original was not pressed Make sure the original is pressed flat
correctly placed. flat against the exposure against the exposure glass.
glass.

The scanned image is upside The original was placed Place the original in the correct
down. upside down. orientation. For details about how to
place originals, see "Setting of Original
Feed Type", Basic Operations.

No scanned image is The original was placed When the original is placed directly on
available. with the front and back the exposure glass, the side to be
reversed. scanned must face down. When the
original is placed in the ADF, the side
to be scanned must face up.

Scanned images are If you set the original with its When placing an original directly on
rotated. top edge backward and the exposure glass, align its top edge
save full color/gray scale flush against the left side of the
images as a TIFF or JPEG exposure glass.
file, scanned images are When placing originals in the ADF,
rotated. place them from its top edge. For
details about placing originals, see
"Setting of Original Feed Type", Basic
Operations.

515
 11. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The scanned image contains If you scan originals using Scanning at a higher resolution may
white spaces. functions other than the reduce the margins.
network TWAIN scanner
function, certain paper size
and resolution settings may
produce scanned images
that are larger than the
specified size because of
margins being added to the
sides.

The shadow density of the If High Compression PDF is Press [Send File Type / Name] on the
scanned image is different selected as the save format initial scanner screen, and then specify
from that of the original. when the original is [PDF/A] for "PDF File Setting".
scanned, the shadow For details about PDF file settings, see
density may vary. "Specifying the File Type and File
Name", Basic Operations.

A text pattern appears in the You have scanned a Check the document. For details about
background. document protected from how to prevent unauthorized copying
unauthorized copying. of documents, see "Printing Documents
that Are Not Authorized for
Duplication", Basic Operations.

After an original is scanned, To prevent scanned data Contact your service representative for
the following settings are from being sent to wrong details about how to prevent the
canceled: destinations, this machine settings from being automatically reset
Destination, Sender, E-mail has a function to cancel the after scanned data is sent.
text, Subject, and File name settings after scanned data
is sent.

516
 Clearing Misfeeds

Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter describes what to do when paper or originals are misfed (become jammed inside the
machine).

Removing Jammed Paper

• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed paper, do not touch
areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching those areas can result in burns.

• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.

• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• When removing paper misfeeds, do not turn off the power. If you do, the configured functions and
values will be lost.
• To prevent paper misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
• If paper jams continue to occur, see page 434 "When You Have Problems Operating the
Machine", page 491 "When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted", and page 503 "Other
Printing Problems" for details about how to resolve the problem. If the actions recommended in this
manual cannot resolve the problem, contact your service representative.
• When removing jammed paper, you can touch only those areas explicitly indicated in the manual.
• Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.
• To remove paper that has not been fed into the fixing section correctly, remove the jammed paper
through the underside of the fusing unit. If the jammed paper cannot be removed through the
underside of the fusing unit, remove it from the top.
• To remove jammed paper in the bypass tray, remove the paper that is loaded on the bypass tray.

• Inside the finisher, or inside the front cover, there are stickers or sheets explaining how to remove
misfed paper.
• If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
• You can also use the procedure indicated in the [Check Status] screen to remove jammed paper.

517
 11. Troubleshooting

• If coated paper frequently becomes jammed and causes "U" to appear, contact your service
representative.

Locating jammed paper

If a misfeed happens, remove the jammed paper by following the procedures stated in the animation
that appears on the screen.
There is a section in the machine where the indicator is flashing. If you pull out the unit to remove the
jammed paper while the indicator is still flashing, the paper may be ripped or pieces of torn paper may
be left inside the machine.
When the indicator is flashing, open the guide board of the corresponding section to remove the
jammed paper or turn the knob to move the paper along the feed path. Confirm that the indicator has
stopped flashing, and then pull out the unit.
When flashing, indicators shows the following:
• A2–A3: Paper is left in the source tray and around the guide board.
• B1–B2: Paper is left somewhere between A and the drawer unit or between the LCT and the
drawer unit.
• D1: Paper is left between the drawer unit and the post-processing unit.
• E: Paper is left in the turnover section.
• C1, C2: The unit can be pulled out by moving the lever as indicated by the arrow.
• A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the screen.

EAQ311

518
 Clearing Misfeeds

• Multiple paper misfeed locations may be indicated at the same time. When this happens, check all
the areas indicated.
• If there is no misfed paper in the area you check first, see the other areas that are indicated.
• If coated paper frequently becomes jammed and causes "U" to appear, contact your service
representative.
• If a paper misfeed occurs in Rb1 - Rb5, check whether any paper has been output on top of the
paper press of the finisher shift tray. If there is paper on top of the paper press, remove the paper,
and then remove the misfed paper from inside the finisher.

Procedure for removing jammed paper

1. Remove the jammed paper by following the procedures that are displayed on the control
panel.
When [Next] or [Previous] is displayed on the screen.
After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step, press [Previous].

2. When the jammed paper is removed, restore the machine to the original state.

• More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the areas indicated.
• If there is no misfed paper in the first area you check, see the other areas that are indicated.
• When paper cannot be transferred to the post-processing side by turning the knob D1 as instructed
on the screen, see the position of the letter in the figure and turn the knob D1 in reverse direction
(clockwise) to send the paper back to the drawer unit, and then remove the paper.

519
 11. Troubleshooting

• After C is displayed and the drawer unit is pulled out to remove the jammed paper, check that there
is no toner searing on the location indicated in the figure. If toner smear is left, wipe off the toner
with a clean and dry cloth.

EAQ312

After Removing a Paper Jam in the Banner Sheet Tray of Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)

After jammed paper was removed from Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A).

1. Press the base board elevation button to lower the base board.

DSC022

520
 Clearing Misfeeds

2. Remove the end fence.

DSC023

3. Load paper into the tray again.

DSC024

4. Align the end fence with the bottom edge of the paper.

DSC025

521
 11. Troubleshooting

5. Press the base board elevation button to raise the base board.

DSC026

Removing Jammed Staples

If a staple jam occurs, remove the jammed staple by following the procedures indicated in the animation
that appears on the control panel. This section describes how to remove jammed staples when the
procedure is not displayed on the control panel.

• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.

• Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn paper over in the tray.
• When the finisher is installed, after jammed staples are removed, staples will not be ejected the first
few times when you use the stapler. If a staple jam occurs on the saddle stitch, the stapler will not
staple after the jammed staples are removed.

• Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. Check the type if you are unsure of the
finisher type. For details about type of finisher, see page 87 "Guide to Functions of the Machine's
Options".

Removing Jammed Ring Combs

If ring combs become jammed, a message appears on the control panel. Follow the message's
instructions to remove the jammed ring combs. This section describes how to remove jammed ring combs
when the procedure is not displayed on the control panel.

522
 Clearing Misfeeds

• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.

• The ring combs set in the ring comb cartridge might move or become slanted when you remove the
jammed ring combs from the ring comb cartridge. Before replacing the cartridge, check that all the
ring combs are straight and properly aligned.

Removing Punch Waste

If the punch receptacle is full, remove punch waste by following the procedures indicated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.

• While "Hole Punch Receptacle is full." is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function.
• "Hole Punch Receptacle is full." is displayed until the punch waste box is installed again.
• If the message is still displayed, install the punch waste box again.

Removing Staple Waste

If the staple waste box is full, remove staple waste by following the procedures stated in the animation
that appears on the control panel.

• While "Waste Staple Receptacle Full" is displayed, you cannot use the staple function.
• "Waste Staple Receptacle Full" is displayed until the staple waste box is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the staple waste box.

Removing Waste Paper

If the waste paper receptacle is full, remove waste paper by following the procedures stated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.

• While "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot use the
perfect binding.
• While "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot
use the trimmer.

523
 11. Troubleshooting

• "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." or "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle
is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed until the receptacle is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the receptacle.

524
12. Maintenance
This chapter explains how to perform daily maintenance tasks of the machine.

General Requirements
This section explains the items that should be followed during use of this machine.
You can use the Document Server function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.

Dos and Don'ts

• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because doing so can result in
fire or electric shock:
• Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.

• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive holidays, be sure to
disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for reasons of safety.

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the plug, not the
cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage the power cord, possibly
resulting in fire or electric shock.

• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 103 "Turning On/Off
the Power".
• After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become warm - this is not a
malfunction.
• The area around the vents might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
• If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place, condensation may form inside it. After
moving the machine, do not use it for at least an hour. The machine requires this time to adapt to its
new environment.

525
 12. Maintenance

• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.

• Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move or tilt the machine when the power is on.
• Do not knock the machine while it is operating (for instance, do not use the machine's surfaces to
knock stacks of paper into square).
• Depending on the ambient temperature and humidity, steam may come from the vents at the rear
right side of the machine during printing. This is water vapor from the paper, not a sign of
malfunction.
• If condensation forms inside the machine as a result of temperature change, the machine may not
print properly. To minimize this problem, use the anti-condensation heaters.
• The optional anti-humidity heater and the anti-condensation heater warm the machine's interior to
maintain the proper humidity. These heaters keep the machine warm even if the main power switch
is turned off.
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
• Ventilation should be more than 50 m3/hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
AC power switch
If the machine is not used for several days or longer at a time, set the AC power switch inside the
left front cover of the main unit to "Stand by". Make sure that the main power switch is turned off
and the main power indicator goes out before turning off the AC power switch. Not doing so may
damage the hard disk.

EAQ303

526
 General Requirements

• The anti-condensation heater work even after the AC power switch is turned off as long as the
power cord is connected.
• In normal operation, keep the AC power switch in the "On" position.
• When you set the AC power switch to "Stand by", do not immediately set it to "On". After
setting the switch to "Stand by", wait one minute or more before setting it to "On".
Drawer unit
When removing jammed paper, do not touch the rail in the upper part of the drawer unit.
Your hands may be dirtied with the lubricant applied on the rail.

DSC208

Saving Printouts

• Prints will fade if exposed to strong light or dampness and humidity for lengthy periods. Preserve
the quality of your copies by storing them in a binder in a dark, dry place.
• Toner may melt if a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other.
• Toner may also melt when using solvent type adhesive agents for pasting prints.
• When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
• Toner may melt if it is placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations of high temperature
for long periods of time.
• Toner may melt if prints are placed in places of extremely high temperatures, such as near heaters.

Backing Up Hard Disk Data

You can store data such as images and Address Book information on the machine's hard disk.
This section describes how to back up or download this data.

• Avoid strong impact to the machine. Doing so may damage the hard disk.

527
 12. Maintenance

• When turning off the power or disconnecting the power cord, follow the proper procedures. Not
doing so may damage the hard disk. For details about how to turn off the power, see page 103
"Turning On/Off the Power".
• If the machine's hard disk fails, data stored on it, including Address Book information might be lost.
For this reason, do not save important data on the machine's hard disk without backing it up or
downloading it. We also recommend backing up fonts, forms, and any other downloaded
resources that are stored on the hard disk. The manufacturer is not liable for damages resulting
from lost data.

• You can use Device Manager NX or Web Image Monitor to back up the machine's Address Book.
For details about Device Manager NX, see the manual for Device Manager NX. For details about
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• You can use Web Image Monitor to download data stored on the Document Server to your
computer. For details about how to do this, see "Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image
Monitor", Basic Operations, or Web Image Monitor Help.

Replenishing and Replacing Consumables

This section explains precautions for adding toner or staples.

You can send scanned documents on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

Adding toner

This section explains precautions when adding toner, how to send scanned documents when the toner
has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.

• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.

528
 General Requirements

• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.

• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.

• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.

• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.

529
 12. Maintenance

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Always replace the toner cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• Leave the machine on when replacing toner. If you turn off the main power when replacing toner,
the settings will be lost and you cannot restart printing, or the machine may not be able to detect
that a toner cartridge is inserted.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not shake the toner cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not remove the toner cartridge straight after installing it. If you do, the toner may spill out.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove toner cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
• When a toner cartridge is being used, it cannot be removed. Do not remove the cartridge forcibly.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a toner cartridge.
If one of the toner cartridge is empty, you can keep printing by using the other cartridge. You can
change the toner cartridge during printing.
Be sure to set the new toner cartridge in the left hole first when both toner cartridges are empty.
After replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to close the toner cartridge cover. The machine stops printing if
you leave the toner cartridge cover open.

• If "Toner Cartridge is almost empty." appears, the toner has almost run out. Have a replacement
toner cartridge at hand.
• You can check the name of the required toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add
Toner] screen.
• For details about how to check contact number where you can order supplies, see page 548
"Inquiry".
• Do not remove the outer cap of the toner cartridge before shaking it. Wait until you install the toner
cartridge before removing the cap.
• Do not remove the inner cap.

530
 General Requirements

• If you cannot get it to click in, pull out the toner cartridge a little, slightly rotate it to the left or right,
then try again.
• Do not remove toner cartridges that are being used or install toner cartridges that are partially
used. The remaining toner amount displayed on the screen will not always correspond with the
actual amount in the cartridge, causing the machine to unexpectedly run out of toner.
• Do not install an empty toner cartridge.
Sending scanned documents when toner has run out
When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator lamps on the control panel will be lit up. Note
that even if there is no toner left, you can still send scanned documents.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center, and press the [Scanner
(Classic)] icon.
2. Perform transmission operation.
Disposing of used toner
This section describes what to do with used toner.
Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of
the container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you
discard it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you
can recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

Replacing the waste toner bottle

• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.

531
 12. Maintenance

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.

• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.

• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.

• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.

532
 General Requirements

• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.

• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or some other material
around the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
• When removing the waste toner bottle, do not touch the inside of the machine.
• Be careful to not allow the toner to leak from the waste toner bottle when you remove it.
• Carefully pull the waste toner bottle out horizontally when you are replacing it.
• Do not use a waste toner bottle that has not been used for a long time.
• Take care not to drop the waste toner bottle.
• Make sure the waste toner bottle is fully inserted. If it is not, toner will leak inside the machine.
• We recommend purchasing and keeping a spare waste toner bottle on hand since waste toner
bottles are consumable items.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a waste toner bottle.

• Replace the waste toner bottle if "Waste Toner Bottle is full. Replace Waste Toner Bottle." appears
on the control panel.
• When the "Replacement of Waste Toner Bottle will soon be necessary." appears on the control
panel, the waste toner bottle should be replaced soon. Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
• Your service representative can replace the waste toner bottle if it is included in your contract. For
details, contact your local dealer or service representative.

Adding staples

• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.

• Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to add staples.

• If you cannot pull out the upper unit, there are staples remaining inside the cartridge. Use all the
staples, and do not add more.
• If staples have completely or almost run out, the message "Add Staples" appears on the control
panel.

533
 12. Maintenance

Replacing ring combs

• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.

• Use of non-recommended ring combs and/or ring comb cartridges can result in binding failures
and comb jams.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace ring combs.

• Add new ring combs to the cartridge only when the "Out of binding ring combs." message appears
on the control panel.
• The ring comb cartridge can hold both 100-sheet and 50-sheet type ring combs, but be sure not to
mix the two sizes inside the cartridge.
• We recommend that you prepare separate ring comb cartridges for each type and color of ring
comb.
• Store ring combs in their original packaging and stand them upright.
Changing the type of ring combs

1. Pull the ring comb cartridge out of the machine.

CET028

534
 General Requirements

2. Push the ring combs up from the bottom of the cartridge.

CET029

3. Place your fingers between the cartridge and the ring combs, and then remove the
ring combs.

CET030

4. Insert the ring combs you want to use into the cartridge.
Make sure that the ring combs are engaged and attached properly.
5. Put the cartridge back into the machine.

Filling the glue container

• Store binding glue in a dark room whose ambient temperature is -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F), away
from moisture, extremely high temperatures, direct sunlight, and open flames.
• Keep binding glue out of the reach of children.
• Use of non-recommended glue can result in failed bindings and faulty adhesion of the cover sheet
and book block.
• To use binding glue, you must first heat it. To begin the heating process, press the glue temperature
adjustment key.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to fill the glue container with binding glue.

535
 12. Maintenance

• The container can hold up to 380 g (0.84 lb.) of glue (about two of the provided cups).
• You can change the glue heating time under [Binding Glue Heater Auto Off Timer] in [System
Settings]. For details, see "Timer Settings", Device Management.
• The glue requires up to 6.5 minutes before the binding can begin. To begin binding quickly, be
sure to press the glue temperature adjustment key in advance.

Where to Put Your Machine

This section describes precautions for installation and movement.

Moving the machine

This section describes precautions when moving the machine.

Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.

• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another floor, contact your
service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine can result in injury or malfunction.

• Contact your sales representative before moving the machine out of the building or to another
location in the building. A moving service can be provided for a fee.

Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine

Optimum environmental conditions

• Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you can disconnect the
power cord plug easily in an emergency.

• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can result in fire or electric
shock.

536
 General Requirements

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can cause the machine to
fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.

• After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise, the machine might
move or topple over to cause injury.

• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously for a long period
of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to ventilate the room sufficiently.

• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the
machine to malfunction.
Avoid the following environments when locating the machine. If the machine is placed somewhere
where the conditions are different from those recommended, a failure may occur.
• Low temperature and humidity or high temperature and humidity
The following is the recommended temperature and humidity range:
• Temperature: 10–32°C (50–89.6°F) (humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)
• Humidity: 15–80% (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more than 1,500 lux)
• Places that are directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater
(Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine)
• Places that are where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration
• Places that are where the machine is exposed to dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow
• Places that are with poor ventilation
• Dusty areas
• Places that are close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine
• Unstable places
• Place the machine on a level spot. The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both
front to rear and left to right.

Optimum space for locating the machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
The clearance shown is necessary for using and servicing the machine.

537
 12. Maintenance

4 2

DER110

1. Rear: 47 cm (18.6 inches) or more

2. Right: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
3. Front: 57 cm (22.5 inches) or more
4. Left: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more

• For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.

Power connection

• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that match the
specifications shown
• Using multi-socket adaptors
• Using extension cords
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic

• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can result in fire or
electric shock:
• Damaging them
• Bundling them
• Modifying them
• Putting heavy objects on them
• Pulling them forcibly
• Bending them forcibly

538
 General Requirements

• The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They cannot be used for
appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use power cords other than the power cord or
cords supplied with this machine. Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in electric shock.

• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from the wall outlet at
least once a year and check them. If any of the following conditions exist, do not use the plug
and the power cord continuously, and consult your dealer or service representative.
• There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
• The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot

• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not push it into loose and
unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure. Doing so can result in heat generation.

• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive holidays, be sure to
disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for reasons of safety.

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the plug, not the
cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage the power cord, possibly
resulting in fire or electric shock.

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet
for safety.

• Power Source
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
220–240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
• (mainly North America)
208–240 V, 20 A, 50/60 Hz

539
 12. Maintenance

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.

• Voltage tolerance
Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.

540
 Maintaining Your Machine

Maintaining Your Machine

You can use the exposure glass and scanning glass, and the ADF on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.

How to Clean the Machine

• Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.

• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's interior. If the machine's
interior is not regularly cleaned while dust accumulates, fire and malfunction can result.

• Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene. If such substances
get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might occur.
• Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other parts should only be
cleaned by your service representative.

Cleaning the Machine

Wipe the machine with a soft, dry cloth. If this does not remove the dirt, wipe the machine with a damp
and tightly wrung cloth. If a damp cloth still does not remove the dirt, try using a mild detergent. Use the
cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the exposure glass or scanning glass.
If a cleaning procedure is specified for the part, use the specified procedure for cleaning.

Cleaning the Exposure Glass and Scanning Glass

If the exposure glass or scanning glass is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean these parts if they
are dirty.

• Do not close the ADF while hard objects are placed on the scanning glass. Doing so may damage
the machine.
Cleaning the Machine
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the parts.

541
 12. Maintenance

1. Wipe the exposure glass and the scanning glass.

1 2

DER111

1. Scanning glass
2. Exposure glass

Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder

If the ADF is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty.
Cleaning the Machine
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the scanning glass.

1. Wipe the sheet and guide plate of the ADF.

2
1

CWW502

1. Guide plate
2. Sheet

542
 Maintaining Your Machine

2. Slide the lever to the left.

CWW503

3. Wipe the scanning glass.

CWW504

1. Scanning glass
4. Return the sheet to its original position.

Cleaning the Power Cord Plug

• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from the wall outlet at
least once a year and check them. If any of the following conditions exist, do not use the plug
and the power cord continuously, and consult your dealer or service representative.
• There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
• The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot

543
 12. Maintenance

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 103 "Turning On/Off
the Power".

• After cleaning the power cord plug, make sure that the power cord is connected to the machine
firmly, and then connect the plug to the wall outlet.

544
 Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers

Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers

• When the machine's circuit breaker turns "Off", contact your service representative. Setting it to
"On" can result in electric shock, fire, smoke, or tripping of the room's breakers.

• If the earth leakage breaker is not functioning normally, contact your sales or service
representative.
An earth leakage breaker is installed on this machine, trimmer, ring binder, and perfect binder.
Once a year, check that the earth leakage breaker functions properly. Normally, the breaker is in the
On position.
The following procedure is explained using illustrations of the main unit and trimmer as an example.

1. Turn off the main power.

Make sure that the main power indicator goes out.
2. Open the front left cover, and then turn off the AC power switch.
3. Using a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object, press in the earth leakage breaker's test
button.
Main unit

EAQ319

545
 12. Maintenance

Trimmer

CWW508

4. Check that the earth leakage breaker moves to the Off position.
Main unit

EAQ302

Trimmer

CWW509

546
 Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers

5. Return the earth leakage breaker to the On position.

Main unit

EAQ301

Trimmer

CWW510

6. Turn on the AC power switch, and then close the front left cover.
7. Push the main power switch to turn on the main power.

• If the machine does not start up when you turn its main power switch back on, check whether the
earth leakage breaker is in the Off position. If the breaker is in the Off position, contact your sales
or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself.

Useful Information

This section describes how to check the counter value, telephone number for repairs, or ordering
consumables such as toner.

Counter

The counter displays the total number of pages used by each of the functions.
You can also print out the counter information.

547
 12. Maintenance

1. Press [Counter] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the right.

2. To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List], and then press the [Start] key.
3. Press [Exit].

Inquiry

The Inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs or ordering
consumables such as toner.
Checking Inquiry using the User Tools
Be sure to contact your service engineer to verify the following:
Supplies
• Toner
• Staple
• Staple (Booklet)
• Binding Glue
Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No.
• Serial No. of Machine
Sales Representative
• Telephone No.
Supply Order
• Telephone No.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Inquiry].
4. To print an inquiry list, press [Print Inquiry List], and then press the [Start] key.
5. Press [Exit].
Checking Inquiry using the [Check Status] key
You can check the following items under [Inquiry]:
• [Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number which are required for service.
• [Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
• [Supply Order]

548
 Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers

Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.

• [Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc., used on the machine.

1. Press the [Check Status] key.

DWP146

2. Press the [Maintnc./Inquiry/Mach. Info].

3. Press [Inquiry].
4. After checking the information, press [Close] twice.

549
 MEMO

550
MEMO

551
 MEMO

552 EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7217
© 2018
EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7217
Operating Instructions

DHCP Option 204

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. What Is DHCP Option 204?
What You Can Do with DHCP Option 204..................................................................................................... 3
Necessary Server Environment..................................................................................................................... 4
Flow of Settings...............................................................................................................................................4
2. Preparing Machines and Servers
Specifying a Machine........................................................................................................................................ 7
Specifying an IP Address............................................................................................................................... 7
Enabling DHCP Option 204 Settings........................................................................................................... 7
Enabling DIPRINT...........................................................................................................................................8
Enabling TFTP Communication on the TFTP Server.......................................................................................... 9
Adding DHCP Option 204 to the DHCP Server........................................................................................... 10
3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files
Configuring a Network Settings File...............................................................................................................11
File Format of the Network Settings File.....................................................................................................11
Parameters That Can Be Specified............................................................................................................. 12
Configuring a Printer Settings File................................................................................................................... 33
File Format of the Printer Settings File......................................................................................................... 33
Saving the Settings Files on the TFTP Server...................................................................................................34
4. Appendix
Checking System Log Information...................................................................................................................35
System Log Information............................................................................................................................... 35
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 37

1
2
1. What Is DHCP Option 204?
This chapter explains what you can do with DHCP Option 204 and also explains the flow of necessary
settings.

What You Can Do with DHCP Option 204

You can simultaneously specify a number of the machine's network settings and printer settings by using
DHCP Option 204. This is useful to synchronize the settings for multiple machines.
To change the settings, prepare two files: a network settings file and printer settings file.
In the network settings file, you can specify the machine's transmission speed and other network settings.
In the printer settings file, you can specify various settings, such as resolution. For details about the
settings files, see page 11 "Configuring a Network Settings File" or page 33 "Configuring a Printer
Settings File".

• DHCP Option 204 synchronizes settings for all machines. Machine-specific settings cannot be
specified.
• When the DHCP Option 204 setting is enabled, the server settings are applied to the machines
regardless of changes you specify using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.

3
1

4
DDN001

1. The network administrator changes the settings in the server.

3
 1. What Is DHCP Option 204?

2. The server sends the settings to the machines using the DHCP and TFTP functions, and then the
settings are applied to the machines.
3. Machines where the DHCP Option 204 setting is enabled
4. Machines where the DHCP Option 204 setting is disabled. DHCP Option 204 is not enabled on this
machine, so settings cannot be updated from the server.

Necessary Server Environment

To use DHCP Option 204, both the DHCP service and TFTP service must be running on the same server.
DHCP server
ISC DHCP server 3.0 or later
TFTP server
UNIX built-in TFTP server

• Do not use a Windows Server.

Flow of Settings

First, prepare necessary settings files. Next, a network administrator saves the settings files on the server,
then the settings are sent to each machine using a DHCP server and TFTP server. The settings are
enabled on the machines the DHCP Option 204 setting can be applied to.

• For details about the printer settings for machines, contact your service representative.

4
 What You Can Do with DHCP Option 204

Specifying a Machine
Specifying an IP Address
Enabling DHCP Option 204 Settings
Enabling DIPRINT

Enabling TFTP Communication on the TFTP Server

Adding DHCP Option 204 to the DHCP Server

Configuring a Network Settings File

Configuring a Printer Settings File

Saving the Settings Files on the TFTP Server

DDN002

5
 1. What Is DHCP Option 204?

6
2. Preparing Machines and Servers
This chapter explains the necessary settings to send the settings files from a server to machines.

Specifying a Machine
Multifunctional peripherals and printers are generally referred to as machines in this manual when
discussing the use of DHCP Option 204 to change settings.
Using DHCP Option 204 requires the following settings for the machine you want to use.
• IP addresses
• DHCP Option 204
• DIPRINT (to install a printer settings file)

Specifying an IP Address

On the control panel, specify settings for machines so that IP addresses are automatically allocated from
the DHCP server.

1. Display the initial settings screen.

2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Interface Settings].
4. Press [Network].
5. Press [Machine IPv4 Address].
6. Press [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)].
7. Press [OK].
8. Close the initial settings screen.

• Procedures may differ between machines. If this is the case, use the manuals that were provided
with your machine.

Enabling DHCP Option 204 Settings

Access the machine using telnet and enable the DHCP Option 204 settings.

1. Start telnet, and then log in to the machine as a network administrator.

2. Enable the DHCP Option 204 settings.
msh> dhcp 204 on

7
 2. Preparing Machines and Servers

3. Quit telnet.
msh> logout
4. A message asking you to confirm saving the changes appears, and then enter "yes".
5. Press the [Enter] key.

• To check the present settings, enter "msh> dhcp".

Enabling DIPRINT

DIPRINT is a protocol for direct printing from a computer. Enable DIPRINT using Web Image Monitor or
telnet.
This setting is needed to use a printer settings file. Otherwise, you do not need to specify this setting. For
details about the printer settings file, see page 33 "Configuring a Printer Settings File".
When using Web Image Monitor

1. Start Web Image Monitor.

2. Click [Login], and then log in as a network administrator.
3. In the menu area, click [Configuration] on the [Device Management] menu.
4. Under "Network", click [IPv4].
5. Select [Active] for "DIPRINT" in "Details".
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Logout], and then quit Web Image Monitor.
When using telnet

1. Start telnet, and then log in to the machine as a network administrator.

2. Enable DIPRINT.
msh> set diprint up
3. Quit telnet.
msh> logout
4. A message asking you to confirm saving the changes appears, and then enter "yes".
5. Press the [Enter] key.

• For details about how to start Web Image Monitor, see the manuals that were provided with your
machine.

8
 Enabling TFTP Communication on the TFTP Server

Enabling TFTP Communication on the TFTP

Server
Enable TFTP connections and configure the targeted machines so they can acquire the settings files on
the server.
For details about the setting procedures, see the manual and Help for the server you are using.

9
 2. Preparing Machines and Servers

Adding DHCP Option 204 to the DHCP Server

Add DHCP Option 204 and the name of the network settings file in the settings file of the DHCP server.

1. Log in to the server as a network administrator.

2. Display the "/etc/[Link]" file.
3. Add DHCP Option 204 to the "[Link]" file.
When the name of the network settings file is "[Link]", add the following text to the file:
• option opt204 code 204 = string;
• option opt204 "[Link]";
An example of the "[Link]" file

option opt204 code 204 = string;

subnet [Link] netmask [Link] {

# --- default gateway

option routers [Link];
option subnet-mask [Link];

# option broadcast-address [Link];

# option netbios-name-servers [Link];
# option netbios-scope "[Link]";
# option domain-name "[Link]";
option domain-name-servers [Link];

option opt204 "[Link]";

range dynamic-bootp [Link] [Link];

default-lease-time 12000;
max-lease-time 60000;
DDN003

4. Save the changed settings, and then log out of the server.

10
3. Configuring and Saving Settings
Files
This chapter explains how to configure and save settings files.

Configuring a Network Settings File

The network settings file is used to automatically apply the network settings specified in the file to
machines. To specify the printer settings at the same time, add the name of the printer settings file below
the last line of the network settings file.
An example of the network settings file
In this example, the name of the network settings file is "[Link]" and the name of the printer
settings file is "[Link]".

###[Link]
[Link] =0
[Link] =1
snmp.ipv4 =1
[Link] = 30
[Link] =4
PJL-file = [Link]

DDN004

File Format of the Network Settings File

File name
• Alphanumeric characters
• Symbols (/-_.)
• 64 bytes or fewer including a path
File size
51200 bytes or fewer
Rules
• Create as a cfg file.
• Describe in UTF-8 format only.
• Consider "=" as a delimiter.
• Consider CR (0x0d) + LF (0x0a) or LF as a line feed code.

11
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

• If you specify multiple settings for a parameter, the first one is enabled.
• The following items do not change the machine's settings even if they are included in the
network settings file.
• Tab character (0x09)
• Space (0x20)
• Lines that start from "#"
• Blank lines

Parameters That Can Be Specified

• Settings are reflected on all the machines whose DHCP Option 204 settings are enabled.
However, settings are not reflected if machines do not support the specified settings.

Common

This section describes the common network settings.

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = <text> Specify the name of the machine using up to 31

characters.

[Link] = <text> Specify a comment using up to 31 characters.

set.ipv6 = {1|0} Enable or disable IPv6.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable NetWare.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SMB.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

12
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable DIPRINT.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {AutoNego|10full| Specify an Ethernet speed from the following:

10half|100full|100half} • AutoNego: Automated negotiation
• 10full: 10 Mbps full duplex
• 10half: 10 Mbps half duplex
• 100full: 100 Mbps full duplex
• 100half: 100 Mbps half duplex

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to reset spooled jobs when you
turn off the machine while printing a spooled job and
turn it on again.
• 1: Reset
• 0: Do not reset

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using LPR.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using FTP.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using IPP.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using
SMB.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

13
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using
DIPRINT.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using
SFTP.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Job Spool settings when using
WSD (Printer).
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

authfree.<registry number>.[Link] = Specify the starting IPv4 address such as [Link],

{[Link]–[Link]} [Link], etc.
You can specify up to five IPv4 address ranges for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

authfree.<registry number>.[Link] = Specify an ending IPv4 address that is compatible with

{[Link]–[Link]} the starting IPv4 address.
You can specify up to five IPv4 address ranges for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

TCP/IP

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {30–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the print job
when using WSD (Printer) or IPP.

[Link] = {1–255} Specify the number of routers that SLP packets can pass
through.

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable FTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

14
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable LPR.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable RSH.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable Telnet.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the web protocol.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SNMP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable IPP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable HTTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Bonjour protocol.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SSL.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

15
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable NRS.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable RFU.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable NBT.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SSDP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SSH.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable SFTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable WSD (Device).

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable WSD (Printer).

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable WSD (Scanner).

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

16
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable IPDS.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable RHPP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable LLMNR.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable LLMNRC.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable LLTD.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

wins = {1|0} Enable or disable the WINS server settings.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

autonet = {1|0} Enable or disable the AutoNet settings.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {0–10080} Specify the time interval (minutes) to synchronize with the
specified NTP server when using SNTP.

• The time intervals that you can specify differ

depending on the targeted machine. If the specified
values are not reflected, specify values in the
following range.
[Link] = {0, 15–10080}

17
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable bidirectional communication settings

when using RAW in DIPRINT.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the dynamic DNS function.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Specify the behavior when DNS records are

overlapped.
• 1: Overwrite
• 0: Add a new record

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to register an A record of the

DHCP server when using the dynamic DNS function.
• 1: Register
• 0: Do not register

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to register CNAME of the

machine when using the dynamic DNS function.
• 1: Register
• 0: Do not register

[Link] = {1–255} Specify the time interval (hours) to update the registered
records when using the dynamic DNS function.

[Link] = {1|0} Specify the number of concurrent connections using

DIPRINT.
• 1: Multiple
• 0: Single

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to compress data when sending it

in the SSH/SFTP communication.
• 1: Compress
• 0: Do not compress

[Link] = {22, 1024–65535} Specify the port number in the SSH/SFTP

communication.

18
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {0–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the SSH/
SFTP communication.

[Link] = {0–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to stop logging in with
the SSH/SFTP communication.

access.<registry number>.[Link] = Specify the starting IPv4 address such as [Link],

{[Link]–[Link]} [Link], etc.
You can specify up to five IPv4 address ranges for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

access.<registry number>.[Link] = Specify an ending IPv4 address that is compatible with

{[Link]–[Link]} the starting IPv4 address.
You can specify up to five IPv4 address ranges for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

web.<registry number>.url = <text> Specify a URL to be displayed as a link on Web Image

Monitor using up to 127 bytes.
You can specify up to two links for the registry number by
using numerals 1 and 2.
You can only use ASCII (0x21-0x7e) characters.
Do not use spaces.

web.<registry number>.name = <text> Specify the name of a URL to be displayed as a link on

Web Image Monitor using up to 31 bytes.
You can specify up to two names for the registry number
by using numerals 1 and 2.

[Link] = <text> Specify a URL to be displayed as help on Web Image

Monitor using up to 127 bytes.
You can only use ASCII (0x21-0x7e) characters.
Do not use spaces.

[Link] = {1|0} To determine that the IP address that sent a print job and
the IP address that requests deletion of the job are the
same, specify either of the following by using LPR.
• 1: Judge
• 0: Do not judge

19
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

pathmtu = {1|0} Enable or disable the PathMTU Discovery service

function.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the function to detect an error that

occurs in the printer when LRP is used.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1024–65535} Specify the port number in the IPDS communication.

You cannot specify 2501, 2601, or 9100.

[Link] = {0, 30–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the IPDS
communication.

[Link] = {1024–65535} Specify the port number in the RHPP communication.

[Link] = {30–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the RHPP
communication.

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Keep-Alive configuration in HTTP

communication.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

http.keepalive_timeout = {1–255} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the Keep-
Alive configuration in the HTTP communication.

[Link] = {5–65535} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the DIPRINT
communication.

• The time intervals that you can specify differ

depending on the targeted machine. If the specified
values are not reflected, specify values in the
following range.
[Link] = {30–65535}

20
 Configuring a Network Settings File

SNMP

Settings Descriptions

snmp.ipv4 = {1|0} Enable or disable IPv4.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

snmp.ipv6 = {1|0} Enable or disable IPv6.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable IPX.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

snmp.<registry number>.name = <text> Specify a community name using up to 15 characters.

You can specify up to 10 community names for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.<registry number>.type = {no| Specify a community access permission from the

read|write|trap} following:
• no: Cannot access
• read: Read only
• write: Read and write
• trap: Notice errors
You can specify up to 10 permissions for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.<registry number>.active.ipv4 = {1| Enable or disable the community's IPv4.

0} • 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to 10 IPv4 protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

21
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

snmp.<registry number>.active.ipv6 = {1| Enable or disable the community's IPv6.

0} • 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to 10 IPv6 protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.<registry number>.[Link] = {1| Enable or disable the community's IPX.

0} • 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to 10 IPX protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.<registry number>.ipv4 = {[Link]– Specify IPv4 addresses for the community host.
[Link]} You can specify 10 IPv4 addresses for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.<registry number>.ipv6 = <IPv6 Specify IPv6 addresses for the community host.
address> You can specify up to 10 IPv6 addresses for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 10.
You can register the following IPv6 addresses:
• [::]
• Addresses that begin with "fe80"–"febf" or
"fec0"–"feff"
• Addresses other than the following:
• Addresses that begin with "ff"
• ::1
• : :<IPv4 address>
• : :ffff:<IPv4 address>

snmp.<registry number>.ipx = Specify IPX addresses for the community host.

{00000000000000000000– You can specify up to 10 IPX addresses for the registry
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF} number by using numerals from 1 to 10.

snmp.v1v2 = {1|0} Enable or disable the SNMP v1 or v2 function.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

22
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link].v1 = {1|0} Enable or disable the SNMP v1 TRAP configuration.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link].v2 = {1|0} Enable or disable the SNMP v2 TRAP configuration.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

snmp.v3 = {1|0} Enable or disable the SNMP v3 function.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link].v3 = {1|0} Enable or disable the SNMP v3 TRAP configuration.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

snmp.v3trap.<registry number>.ipv4 = Specify IPv4 delivery addresses for the SNMP v3 TRAP
{[Link]–[Link]} configuration.
You can specify up to five IPv4 delivery addresses for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

snmp.v3trap.<registry number>.ipv6 = Specify IPv6 delivery addresses for the SNMP v3 TRAP
<IPv6 address> configuration.
You can specify up to five IPv6 delivery addresses for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.
You can register the following IPv6 addresses:
• [::]
• Addresses that begin with "fe80"–"febf" or
"fec0"–"feff"
• Addresses other than the following:
• Addresses that begin with "ff"
• ::1
• : :<IPv4 address>
• : :ffff:<IPv4 address>

23
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

snmp.v3trap.<registry number>.ipx = Specify IPX delivery addresses for the SNMP v3 TRAP
{00000000000000000000– configuration.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF} You can specify up to five IPX delivery addresses for the
registry number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

snmp.v3trap.<registry Specify whether or not to use IPv4 for the SNMP v3

number>.active.ipv4 = {1|0} TRAP configuration.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to five IPv4 protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

snmp.v3trap.<registry Specify whether or not to use IPv6 for the SNMP v3

number>.active.ipv6 = {1|0} TRAP configuration.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to five IPv6 protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

snmp.v3trap.<registry number>.[Link] Specify whether or not to use IPX for the SNMP v3 TRAP
= {1|0} configuration.
• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable
You can specify up to five IPX protocols for the registry
number by using numerals from 1 to 5.

NetWare

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {Auto|802.2|802.3| Specify an Ethernet frame type from the following:

Ether2|Snap} • Auto: Select automatically
• 802.2: Ethernet 802.2
• 802.3: Ethernet 802.3
• Ether2: Ethernet II
• Snap: Ethernet SNAP

24
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Specify a mode for NetWare printing.

• 1: Print server
• 0: Remote printer

[Link] = {1|0} Specify where to log in.

• 1: NDS tree
• 0: File server

[Link] = <text> Specify the NetWare file server name using up to 47

characters.

[Link] = <text> Specify the NDS context name using up to 127

characters.

[Link] = <text> Specify the NetWare print server name using up to 47

characters.

[Link] = {0–254} Specify the number of the remote printer.

[Link] = {3–255} Specify the time interval (seconds) to cancel the printing
job.

netware.sap_interval = {0–3600} Specify the time interval (seconds) to send SAP packets.

[Link] = <text> Specify the NDS tree name using up to 32 characters.

You can only use alphanumeric characters, -, and _.

[Link] = {IPv4pri|IPXpri|IPv4| Specify a protocol to transfer a file from the following:

IPX} • IPv4pri: IPv4+IPX (IPv4 has priority.)
• IPXpri: IPv4+IPX (IPX has priority.)
• IPv4: IPv4
• IPX: IPX

25
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Windows network

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = <text> Specify the computer name using up to 15 characters.

You cannot use the following symbols:
"*+/;:>=<?[\]|, and spaces

[Link] = <text> Specify the name of the computer workgroup using up to

15 characters.
You cannot use the following symbols:
"*+/;:>=<?[\]|, and spaces

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to send a message to the client

when the print job is complete.
• 1: Send
• 0: Do not send

[Link] = {1|0} Specify either of the following as the priority port for
SMB client communication.
• 1: 445
• 0: 139

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not clients use WSD (Device) as a

browser.
• 1: Use
• 0: Do not use

[Link] = {1|0} Specify the mode for clients to write a file.

• 1: Synchronize
• 0: Do not synchronize

Bonjour

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {0–99} Specify the DIPRINT priority. The priority increases as the
number decreases.

26
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {0–99} Specify the LPR priority. The priority increases as the
number decreases.

[Link] = {0–99} Specify the IPP priority. The priority increases as the
number decreases.

[Link] = {1–255} Specify the number of routers that IPv4 packets can pass
through.

[Link] = <text> Specify the installation location of the machine using up

to 31 characters.

UPnP

This section explains universal plug and play settings.

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = <text> Specify a URL to be displayed using up to 127 bytes.

You can only use ASCII (0x21-0x7e) characters.
Do not use spaces.

SSDP

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1–255} Specify the number of routers that SSDP packets can
pass through.

[Link] = {1801–86400} Specify the time interval (seconds) when profile

information is valid.

IPv6

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable IPv6 stateless addresses.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

27
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

set.ftp6 = {1|0} Enable or disable FTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.lpr6 = {1|0} Enable or disable LPR.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.rsh6 = {1|0} Enable or disable RSH.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.telnet6 = {1|0} Enable or disable Telnet.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.diprint6 = {1|0} Enable or disable DIPRINT.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.ipp6 = {1|0} Enable or disable IPP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.http6 = {1|0} Enable or disable HTTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.bonjour6 = {1|0} Enable or disable the Bonjour protocol.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.ssl6 = {1|0} Enable or disable SSL.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

28
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

set.rfu6 = {1|0} Enable or disable RFU.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.sftp6 = {1|0} Enable or disable SFTP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.wsdev6 = {1|0} Enable or disable WSD (Device).

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

set.rhpp6 = {1|0} Enable or disable RHPP.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

dns.<registry number>.server6 = <IPv6 Specify IPv6 addresses for the DNS server.
address> You can specify up to three IPv6 addresses for the
registry number by using numerals 1, 2, and 3.
You can register the following IPv6 addresses:
• [::]
• Addresses that begin with "fe80"–"febf" or
"fec0"–"feff"
• Addresses other than the following:
• Addresses that begin with "ff"
• ::1
• : :<IPv4 address>
• : :ffff:<IPv4 address>

[Link] = <IPv6 Specify an IPv6 address for the default gateway.

address> You can register the following IPv6 addresses:
• [::]
• Addresses that begin with "fe80"–"febf"

29
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {static|dhcp} To allocate an address for the DNS server when using
the DHCPv6 server, specify either of the following:
• static: Users specify.
• dhcp: Get from the DHCPv6 server.

[Link] = {0–4294967295} Specify the ID for the IPv6 address.

[Link] = {Router|DHCPv6| When the DHCPv6 server obtains a parameter, specify

DHCPv6lite} either of the following:
• Router: Obey the router.
• DHCPv6: Get an IP address.
• DHCPv6lite: Do not get an IP address.

[Link] = {1|0} Specify the encoding method for the DHCPv6 server's
domain name.
• 1: Conform to RFC
• 0: Do not conform to RFC

[Link] = <IPv6 address> Specify IPv6 addresses when using an Ethernet or

wireless LAN.
You can register the following IPv6 addresses:
• [::]
• Addresses that begin with "fec0"–"feff"
• Addresses other than the following:
• Addresses that begin with "fe80"–"febf "
• Addresses that begin with "ff"
• ::1
• : :<IPv4 address>
• : :ffff:<IPv4 address>

[Link] = {1–128} Specify the prefix length of the IPv6 address when using
an Ethernet or wireless LAN.

dhcpv6 = {1|0} Enable or disable the DHCPv6 configuration.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

30
 Configuring a Network Settings File

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to register an AAAA record when

the dynamic DNS function and DHCPv6 are enabled.
• 1: Register
• 0: Do not register

Device

This section explains machine settings.

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the PictBridge function.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the USB connection.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the Bluetooth function.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

IPsec

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Enable or disable the IPsec.

• 1: Enable
• 0: Disable

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to ignore HTTPS.

• 1: Ignore the protocol
• 0: Do not ignore the protocol

31
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Settings Descriptions

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to ignore DNS.

• 1: Ignore the protocol
• 0: Do not ignore the protocol

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to ignore DHCP.

• 1: Ignore the protocol
• 0: Do not ignore the protocol

[Link] = {1|0} Specify whether or not to ignore WINS.

• 1: Ignore the protocol
• 0: Do not ignore the protocol

32
 Configuring a Printer Settings File

Configuring a Printer Settings File

The printer settings file is used to apply the printer settings specified in the file to machines automatically.
For details about the printer settings for machines, contact your service representative.
An example of the printer settings file

%-12345X@PJL

@PJL DMINFO ASCIIHEX = "040006010401030105040103"

@PJL COMMENT Tray 1 mode set to first

@PJL DMINFO ASCIIHEX = "04000701040108030104080101"

@PJL COMMENT Configure fuser mode Plain to Normal

%-12345X

DDN005

File Format of the Printer Settings File

File name
• Alphanumeric characters
• Symbol (/-_.)
• 64 bytes or fewer including a path
File size
4096 bytes or fewer
Rules
• Create as a PJL file.
• Described in PJL format.

33
 3. Configuring and Saving Settings Files

Saving the Settings Files on the TFTP Server

Save the network settings file and the printer settings file on the TFTP server.

1. Log in to the server as a network administrator.

2. Save the network settings file and the printer settings file below "/tftproot".
When the file name is "[Link]"
/tftproot/[Link]
3. Reboot the DHCP server.
4. Log out of the server.

• For details about settings files, see page 11 "Configuring a Network Settings File" or page 33
"Configuring a Printer Settings File".

34
4. Appendix
This chapter explains system log information and trademarks.

Checking System Log Information

System log information can be used to check the condition of the machines connected via a network. To
check system log information, use the relevant UNIX or telnet commands.

System Log Information

Use the following commands to display the system log information:

• UNIX: Use the "syslog" parameter and the "rsh", "rcp", "ftp", and "sftp" commands. "rsh" and "rcp"
cannot be used in a Windows environment.
• telnet: Enter the following command:
msh> syslog

Messages Causes and solutions

Auto-configuration process internal ERROR. An internal error occurred while setting updates
were performed by the DHCP or TFTP function.

Auto-configuration process is started. Setting updates are being performed by the

DHCP or TFTP function.

Config-file is downloaded from <an IP address or The network settings file was downloaded.
file name>

Failed to change network settings: <parameter> The setting displayed in <parameter> was not
specified.
Check the network settings file configuration. For
details about the items and values you can
specify, see page 11 "File Format of the Network
Settings File".

Failed to download config-file: <an IP address or The network settings file was not downloaded.
file name> Check if TFTP is enabled on the DHCP server.
Check if the name and size of the file is correct.
For details about the file format, see page 11
"File Format of the Network Settings File".

35
 4. Appendix

Messages Causes and solutions

Failed to download PJL-file from TFTP server. The printer settings file was not downloaded.
Check if TFTP is enabled on the DHCP server.
Check if the name and size of the file is correct.
For details about the file format, see page 33
"File Format of the Printer Settings File".

Failed to transfer PJL-file to printer. The printer settings file was not sent.
Check if DIPRINT is enabled.

Fileformat is unmatched.<cause> The file format is not correct.

The following items are displayed in <cause>.
Check the displayed message and the file format.
• CharCode: Character codes other than
ASCII or UTF-8 were used. Use ASCII or
UTF-8 only.
• CR: Only CR was used as a line feed code.
Use CR + LF or LF.

Network settings are changed. The network settings were changed.

Network settings are not changed. No changes to the network settings were
required.

PJL-file is downloaded from TFTP server. The printer settings file was downloaded.

PJL-file is transferred to printer. The printer settings file was sent.

PJL-filename is not specified. The name of the printer settings file is not
specified in the network settings file.
Check if the name of the printer settings file is
specified in the network settings file.

rconfig process is canceled. rconfig is a remote setting process.

The download of settings files or network setting
in rconfig were canceled.
Check if the settings were changed by something
other than DHCP Option 204 while rconfig was
running.

36
 Trademarks

Trademarks
IPDS is a trademark of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

37
 MEMO

38
MEMO

39
 MEMO

40 EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7230
EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7230 © 2018
Operating Instructions

Paper Fundamentals

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper
Characteristics of Paper..................................................................................................................................... 5
Composition of Paper.................................................................................................................................... 5
Friction Characteristics................................................................................................................................... 5
Surface Smoothness....................................................................................................................................... 5
Resistance to Heat.......................................................................................................................................... 6
Moisture Content............................................................................................................................................ 6
Clark Stiffness................................................................................................................................................. 7
Bending Stiffness.............................................................................................................................................7
Surface Resistivity........................................................................................................................................... 8
Paper Specifications.......................................................................................................................................8
Condition of Paper........................................................................................................................................... 10
Rips, Wrinkles, and Folds............................................................................................................................10
Curls.............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Cut Edge....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Grain Direction.............................................................................................................................................13
2. Handling Paper
Loading Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 15
How to Hold Paper......................................................................................................................................17
How to Place Paper..................................................................................................................................... 17
Storing Paper....................................................................................................................................................19
Precautions during Transport...........................................................................................................................20
Using Special Types of Paper......................................................................................................................... 21
Coated Paper...............................................................................................................................................21
Recycled Paper............................................................................................................................................ 21
Preprinted Paper.......................................................................................................................................... 21
Colored Paper..............................................................................................................................................22
Prepunched Paper....................................................................................................................................... 23
Transparencies............................................................................................................................................. 23
Label Paper, Pressure-sensitive Paper........................................................................................................ 23
Carbonless Paper........................................................................................................................................ 24

1
 3. Appendix
Paper Weight Conversion Table.....................................................................................................................25
Prepunched Paper That Can Be Used............................................................................................................ 27
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 29

2
Introduction
This manual explains paper characteristics and methods for handling paper to get favorable print
quality and consistent performance from the machine. For more information about paper types, weights,
and sizes that are supported by the machine, see the manuals supplied with the machine.
The machine supports regular and coated paper, as well as a variety of other types of paper. However,
the characteristics and conditions of certain types of paper may result in low print quality. In addition,
the characteristics and conditions of the paper may vary even with the same product. Therefore, we
recommend evaluating paper before using the paper with the machine. For details, consult your sales
representative or service representative.

3
4
1. Characteristics and Conditions of
Paper
This chapter describes the characteristics and conditions of paper.

Characteristics of Paper
This section describes how the characteristics of paper affect the quality of printing and the movement of
paper in the machine.

Composition of Paper

• Do not use acidic paper because it accelerates the deterioration of the photoconductor unit and
surrounding parts.
Many types of paper used for printing contain calcium carbonate (CaCO3) and other natural impurities.
Paper whose calcium carbonate ratio is high may reduce the life of machine components such as the
OPC drum and fusing unit. For the values for the calcium carbonate ratio, see page 8 "Paper
Specifications".
Do not use coated paper that contains components that dissolve or vaporize when exposed to high
temperatures.

Friction Characteristics

The friction characteristics of paper are important to transfer the paper correctly from the paper tray
through the inside of the machine.
If the force of the friction (coefficient of friction) acting on stacked paper is too large or too small, the
paper may not be fed correctly through the machine. If coefficients of friction are not uniform, it is
possible to feed multiple sheets at one time.
Use printing paper with uniform friction characteristics to print from the machine. For the values for the
friction coefficients, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

Surface Smoothness

The smoothness of the surface of the paper is important to get high print quality and also stable paper
feeds.

5
 1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper

If an area has solid printing, it may not be uniform when using paper with a rough surface. On the other
hand, the toner may not fuse to the paper properly if the surface of the paper is too smooth. In addition,
if paper has a smooth surface, each of the sheets is likely to stick together, and therefore the paper may
not feed correctly inside the machine.
Printing on embossed paper may produce irregularities in print quality or deterioration in the ability to
fuse toner. Moreover, the paper may not feed correctly in the machine.
For the values for the surface smoothness of paper, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

Resistance to Heat

Paper is exposed to high temperatures inside the machine when toner is fused to the paper. Because of
this, it is necessary for the paper to maintain the same qualities even when exposed to high
temperatures.
Use a paper that does not dissolve, vaporize, change color, or cause set-off printing when exposed to
high temperatures during the fusing process. Also, do not use paper that peels off in layers.

Moisture Content

The moisture content of paper affects the condition of the paper and print quality.
If the moisture content ratio is too high, the edge of the paper may warp and become wavy. In addition,
the paper may wrinkle during printing and reduce print quality, such as decreasing print density.
Wavy paper
If the humidity is high in the place where the paper is stored, paper that is exposed to air may
absorb moisture and the edges may become wavy. The paper may not feed through the machine,
or feed at an angle because the heights of the edge and the center part of wavy paper are
different. Also, wrinkling, and curling may occur during printing.
Use paper that has a difference of 2 mm (0.08 inches) or less between the top sheet's highest and
lowest point when the maximum number of sheets of paper is loaded in the paper.

CEL001

6
 Characteristics of Paper

1. 2 mm (0.08 inches) or less

Warped paper
If the humidity is low in the place where paper is stored, paper that is exposed to air may lose
moisture and the edges may shrink. Paper with wavy edges feeds at an angle and may cause
paper jams.
Use paper that has a difference of 6 mm (0.24 inches) or less between the stack's central area and
the edge when the maximum number of sheets of paper is loaded in the paper.

CEL002

1. 6 mm (0.24 inches) or less

For the values for moisture content of paper, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

Clark Stiffness

Represents the flexibility of paper.

If the Clark stiffness is low, paper is easy to bend. It is also susceptible to moisture content and heat, so
paper with a low Clark stiffness may shrink at its edges or curl during printing. In addition, soft paper is
likely to twine around the paper rollers or belts, which may cause paper jams.
For the values for the Clark stiffness of paper, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

Bending Stiffness

Represents the flexibility of paper.

Hard paper has a high bending stiffness. If paper has a high bending stiffness, it is difficult to bend
through the paper rollers and the pathways inside the machine and may cause paper jams.
For the values for the bending stiffness of paper, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

7
 1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper

Surface Resistivity

Represents the electrical resistance on the paper's surface.

It may affect the quality of printing and the movement of paper in the machine.
For the values for the surface resistivity of paper, see page 8 "Paper Specifications".

Paper Specifications

Use the following tables as a guide when you select paper.

Uncoated paper

Item Specifications

Ash content (%) *1 15% or less

Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) ratio (%) 15% or less

Cut edge Height of burrs: 0.05 mm (0.002 inches) or less

Length: ±0.5 mm (0.02 inches)

Cutting tolerance
Angle: 90° ± 0.1°*2

Clark stiffness 40 or more

Bending stiffness Less than 1800

Smoothness (s) 80 or more

Static friction coefficient 0.35 to 0.67

Moisture content (%) 3.7 to 5.5%

Surface resistivity ( ) 5×109 to 1×1012

*1 Measured by combustion at 900°C (1652°F)

*2 If you want to improve the image position accuracy, applying "90°±0.02°" is recommended.
Coated paper

Item Specifications

Ash content (%) *1 22% or less

Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) ratio (%) 20% or less

8
 Characteristics of Paper

Item Specifications

Cut edge Height of burrs: 0.05 mm (0.002 inches) or less

Length: ±0.5 mm (0.02 inches)

Cutting tolerance
Angle: 90° ± 0.1°*2

Clark stiffness 40 or more

Bending stiffness Less than 1800

Air permeability (s) 5000 or less

Static friction coefficient 0.35 to 0.67

Moisture content (%) 3.7 to 5.5%

Surface resistivity ( ) 5×109 to 1×1012

*1 Measured by combustion at 900°C (1652°F)

*2 If you want to improve the image position accuracy, applying "90°±0.02°" is recommended.

9
 1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper

Condition of Paper
In addition to the characteristics of paper, the condition of the paper greatly affects the print results.

Rips, Wrinkles, and Folds

Use clean paper in good condition that has no folds, rips, or wrinkles.
Check the condition of the paper before placing it in the paper tray, and remove any sheets that are not
in good condition.
Rips, Wrinkles, and Folded Corners
Use paper that has no rips, wrinkles, or folded corners. If sheets of paper have rips, wrinkles or the
like, a paper jam in the paper rollers or surrounding mechanisms may occur or paper may be fed
at an angle.

3
CEL003

1. Rip
2. Folded corner
3. Wrinkles
Rounded Edges
When paper is placed in storage, the edge of the paper on the top or the bottom may become
rounded from being stacked. This is called rounded edges. Using paper like this may cause a
paper jam inside the machine or to be fed at an angle.

10
 Condition of Paper

CEL004

1. Rounded edges

Curls

Curled paper has a major effect on the print quality and end result.
Curled paper can cause such things as paper jams and wrinkles. Also, paper that is output may not
stack evenly in the output tray.
If heat is applied to the paper during the printing process, the entire sheet of paper may curl. Be sure to
pay special attention to preprinted paper because it is likely to curl. Paper may also partially curl after
printing if the moisture content is not evenly distributed.
Also, the extent of the curl may vary depending on the printing surface of the paper. If the paper curls
after printing, turn over the paper in the paper tray and try again.

How to Measure Curled Paper

You need to measure the extent of the curl of your paper before printing on it.
Use paper that has a maximum curl of not greater than 10 mm (0.39 inches).

CEL006

1. 10 mm (0.39 inches) or less

11
 1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper

1. Print on paper under the following printing conditions:

• One-sided printing
• Print 10 sheets
• Output the paper with the printed side face down
2. Place the curled paper on a table or flat surface with the curl facing up.
3. Measure the height of the tip of the curl at each corner of the stack of paper.
Do this measurement within one minute after printing.

• If the weight of the paper is 221 g/m2 or more, measure one sheet of paper.

Cut Edge

The condition of the cut edge of the paper affects print performance.
Cut paper is made by stacking many sheets together and cutting them. The cut edge of paper cut with a
sharp cutter is straight, but if the cutter is dull, then the cut edge is uneven and has thin protrusions on the
edge of the paper. These are called burrs.

1 2
CEL007

1. Cut edge from a dull cutter (burrs)

2. Cut edge from a sharp cutter
Burrs may cause the paper to feed at an angle, feed multiple sheets at one time, or result in misfeeds
through the machine. They may also cause paper jams in the machine and shorten the life of the fusing
unit.
If a paper jam occurs, turn over the paper in the paper tray. Changing paper orientations will make
burrs less likely to occur.
Remove as much of the paper dust particles caused by the burrs as possible. These particles may reduce
the print quality.

12
 Condition of Paper

Grain Direction

Paper used for printing is produced with the grain of the paper in one direction. The paper's grain
direction affects how paper curls or changes shape, as well as the movement of the paper in the
machine.
Paper can be loaded in paper trays regardless of grain direction. If the paper curls or changes shape,
or a paper jam occurs, change the direction of grain in relation to the paper feed direction by reloading
the paper. This should help resolve the problem.
Tear a sheet of paper to check the direction of the grain. The tear in the paper is straight if it is in the
same direction as the paper's grain direction. The tear in the paper is not straight if it is not in the same
direction as the paper's grain direction.

Grain direction Tear in paper

13
 1. Characteristics and Conditions of Paper

14
2. Handling Paper
This chapter describes precautions regarding loading and storing paper, and important points about
how to use special types of paper.

Loading Paper
Note the following points for preventing problems related to paper, such as paper feeding at an angle
or paper jams.
• Open the package and take out the paper immediately before using it. Do not store the paper in
an open package for a long time. The package is moisture proof to prevent the paper from
absorbing moisture.
• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack it with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the entire
stack before loading it into the tray.
• When loading curled paper, if the top and bottom edges of the paper are curled, load it so they
curl down. If the left and right edges of the paper are curled, load it so they curl up.
• The top and bottom edges of the paper are curled.

EAQ601

• The left and right edges of the paper are curled.

EAQ602

15
 2. Handling Paper

• If printed sheets are curled, turn over the paper that is in the paper tray being used. By doing this,
the amount of curl may be reduced.
• The paper in the paper tray may change shape if the air conditioner is turned off for a long period,
such as at nighttime or on weekends. Check the condition of the paper in the paper tray before
using the machine. If the paper has curled or become wavy, reload it correctly or remove the
paper that has changed shape.
• Keep the temperature and humidity of the room in which the machine is located as constant as
possible.
• If the machine you are using has a function to compensate for curled paper, you can specify curl
compensation in the machine's settings. See the manuals supplied with the machine for details
about how to configure this setting.
How to Fan a Stack of Paper
Sheets of paper that stick together may cause multiple sheet feeding or paper jams. Fan the stack of
paper before loading it in the paper tray.
Hold the stack of paper in both hands, shuffle the sheets of paper. Otherwise, place the stack of
paper on a flat surface, place one hand on the side of the paper and shuffle the other side with
your other hand.

CEL011

CEL012

Refer to the above methods, and select the easiest method for the type and size of paper that you
are loading.
When fanning thin paper, handle it with care so you do not crease it.

16
 Loading Paper

• See the manuals supplied with the machine for the procedure to load paper in the paper tray.

How to Hold Paper

When holding a large amount of paper, split it up into stacks of 200 to 500 sheets each.
The stack of paper may become uneven or parts may stick out if you pick up a large amount of paper at
one time. Paper that sticks out will be folded when it is placed in the paper tray and may cause paper
jams.

CEL013

How to Place Paper

To load paper into the tray, face the paper directly downward and slowly put it into the paper tray.
Do not put paper into the tray by placing a large amount at one time and sliding it along the side of the
tray. Some sheets may fold and cause a paper jam.

EAQ603

After placing the paper in the paper tray, make sure it is loaded correctly. Remove any paper that is torn
or folded. Make sure that no paper is sticking out of the stack. If any paper is sticking out, remove it.

17
 2. Handling Paper

CEL015

1. Rip
2. Folded corner
3. Inside fold
4. Sticking out

18
 Storing Paper

Storing Paper
Temperature, humidity, other environmental factors, and the method of paper storage all greatly affect
the paper's condition.
The moisture content of paper changes as the temperature changes, causing the paper to curl and
become wavy. The changes in the paper's conditions may cause paper jams and wrinkles generated
during printing. Pay attention to the following points when storing paper:
• The temperature of the storage area must be between 20 and 25°C (68 and 77°F) and the
humidity must be between 30 and 65%.
• If there is a large temperature difference between the storage area and the area near the machine,
keep some paper near the machine for a few days before you use it, so it can adjust to the
temperature near the machine.
• Once a package of paper is open, seal it completely in a plastic bag or moisture-proof paper to
prevent it from absorbing moisture from the air.
• Do not expose the paper to direct sunlight.
• If stacking directions are indicated on paper boxes, stack the boxes according to the directions. Do
not stack paper on end, even if it is still in the box.
• Do not place paper on the floor. Keep paper on a surface such as a palette, table, or cabinet in a
temperature and humidity controlled room.

19
 2. Handling Paper

Precautions during Transport

Note the following points when transporting paper:
• Use a palette if you are transporting many boxes. Do not throw or hit boxes while transporting
them. Stacking many boxes may reduce the condition of the paper in the boxes, either because the
shape of the lower boxes may change or the upper boxes may fall and become damaged.
Therefore, do not stack boxes higher than necessary.
• If you wrap the paper in paper, use wrapping paper that is strong enough to not rip during
transport. We recommend using wrapping paper that is moisture proof.

20
 Using Special Types of Paper

Using Special Types of Paper

• Refer to the tables on page 8 "Paper Specifications" as a guide when you select special types of
paper to use with the machine.
While this machine supports coated and special types of paper, the characteristics and conditions of
certain types of paper may result in low print quality.
We recommend evaluating special types of paper before using them in the machine. It is impossible to
confirm the consistency of feeding, and the effect on consumable parts and components without long-
term testing, but you can determine the basic characteristics, such as print quality and toner adhesion,
by printing around 500 sheets.

• The special types of paper that you can use with the machine depend on the machine. For details,
see the manuals supplied with the machine.

Coated Paper

In terms of density and surface conditions, coated paper is very different from regular paper. Coated
paper may not feed correctly and the print quality may not be very good because of the low toner
adhesion and image quality. For the characteristics of coated paper that can be used with the machine,
see page 8 "Paper Specifications".
Thinly coated paper may cause paper jams in the machine and thickly coated paper has poor toner
adhesion that may damage the machine. Also, many coated papers cannot endure the heat and
pressure that occur during printing, and may wrinkle during printing.
Fan coated paper before loading it in the paper tray. For details about fanning coated paper, see the
manuals supplied with the machine.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper is made from a mixture of new pulp and pulp made from old paper, such as
newspapers and magazines. Because of this, the characteristics of recycled paper vary greatly
depending on the brand and manufacturer. We recommend evaluating recycled paper before using it.

Preprinted Paper

When printing onto preprinted media from Offset or any Press that uses Anti-Offset Powder, Ricoh
recommends the use Two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray (Two-tray wide LCT) for feeding of this media.

21
 2. Handling Paper

Other media feeding systems may result in poor system performance due to contamination caused by
use of Anti-Offset Powder. Consult your sales or service representative.
When printing on preprinted paper, note the following:
• Toner may not adhere to preprinted images as well as it does to plain white paper. Check the print
quality in advance.
• Before using preprinted paper, check that the ink is completely dry.
• Preprinted media should use ink that is heat resistant* and designed for paper used in high speed
copy machines and laser printers.
• The machine does not support prints using toner. However, prints created on the same model can
be used.
• Fan media thoroughly before loading into Paper drawers. page 6 "Resistance to Heat".
• Printing on colored paper or preprinted media may result in problems that may cause a paper jam.
If this is the case, consult your service representative.
• We recommend using a print environment where the temperature is between 20 and 25 °C and
the relative humidity (RH) is between 40 and 50 %.
• We recommend storing paper in an environment where the temperature is between 20 and 25 °C
and the relative humidity (RH) is between 40 and 50 %.
* Use a non-volatile oil based and heat resistant ink for preprinted paper. Do not use ink that melts,
vaporizes, dissolves, or delaminates when exposed to heat. For details, see page 6 "Resistance to
Heat".
Major precautions about ink used for preprinted paper are as follows:
• Minimize the use of ink for preprints (we recommend Coverage of 30% or lower). Use screen
printing to print on large areas.
• Minimize the use of powder to prevent offset of ink or blocking.
• Do not use the following types of ink on preprinted paper:
• Evaporative drying ink
• Cold set ink
• Precipitation drying ink
• Soy ink
• Metallic ink

Colored Paper

Colored paper is paper that is treated lightly with colorant throughout. Some colors of paper cannot be
used. For details, contact your sales representative or service representative.

22
 Using Special Types of Paper

Prepunched Paper

Prepunched paper must be smooth and flat to be used in the machine. Prepunched paper that is warped
or torn cannot be used. Before printing on prepunched paper, remove any dust or trimmings that were
produced during the punching process.
To print on prepunched paper, print in an area 3 mm (0.12 inches) or more from the edge of the hole.
The holes in the paper must be within the following conditions:

4
2

3
CEL005

1. 5 mm (0.20 inches) or more

2. 8 mm (0.31 inches) or less
3. 3 mm (0.12 inches) or more
4. Acceptable print area
The conditions for using prepunched paper depend on the machine and its configurations. For some
typical conditions for prepunched paper, see page 27 "Prepunched Paper That Can Be Used".

Transparencies

Transparencies is made from polyester and specially coated so toner adheres to it. A transparencies has
one printable side. Printing cannot be done on both sides.
Fan transparencies before loading it in the paper tray so the sheets do not stick together. For details
about how to fan paper, see page 15 "Loading Paper".

Label Paper, Pressure-sensitive Paper

Some labels and pressure-sensitive paper have use-by dates. Purchase only as much as you can use
within the time limit. Contact your paper retailer regarding use-by dates and storage methods.

23
 2. Handling Paper

Carbonless Paper

When using carbonless paper, note the following:

• Carbonless paper can be used only when Two-tray Wide LCT is used along with Finisher SR5110
or Booklet Finisher SR5120 for post-processing.
• When using carbonless paper, only the stacker can be connected between the machine and
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
• Some types of carbonless paper have expiration dates. Purchase the amount you can use within
the time limit. Contact your paper retailer regarding the expiration dates and storage methods.

24
3. Appendix
The chapter describes the specifications for prepunched paper and provides a paper weight conversion
table.

Paper Weight Conversion Table

The weight of paper is measured as basis weight or ream weight.
Basis weight is the weight of one square meter of a sheet of paper, measured in units of g/m2. Ream
weight is the weight in pounds of 500 sheets of the paper. The basic size varies depending on the type
(grade) of paper.
The basic sizes for each grade are as follow:
• Bond, Ledger: 17" × 22"
• Offset, Text: 25" × 38"
• Cover: 20" × 26"
• Index: 251/2" × 301/2"
Ream weight can be calculated using the following equation:
Ream weight (lb) = basis weight (g/m2) × dimension of paper (m2/sheet) × 500 (sheets)
The following table shows the relationship between basis and ream weight.

Ream weight

Basis weight Bond / Ledger Offset / Text Cover Index

(g/m2) (lb.) (lb. text) (lb. cover) (lb. index)

52 14 36 20 29

60 16 * 40 * 22 33

75 20 * 50 * 28 42

90 24 * 60 * 33 50

105 28 * 70 * 39 58

108 29 73 40 * 60

118 31 80 * 44 65

120 32 * 81 45 67

135 36 90 50 * 75

25
 3. Appendix

Ream weight

Basis weight Bond / Ledger Offset / Text Cover Index

(g/m2) (lb.) (lb. text) (lb. cover) (lb. index)

148 39 100 * 55 82

162 43 110 60 * 90 *

176 47 120 65 * 97

199 53 135 74 110 *

216 58 146 80 * 120

244 65 165 90 * 135

253 67 171 94 140 *

256 68 173 95 142

270 72 183 100 * 150

297 79 * 201 110 * 165

307 82 208 114 170 *

325 87 220 120 180 *

351 94 237 130 * 194

398 106 269 147 220 *

405 108 274 150 224

Asterisks (*) indicate the most common weights for that category.

26
 Prepunched Paper That Can Be Used

Prepunched Paper That Can Be Used

The following are typical conditions for using prepunched paper in the machine.
Contact your service representative if you want to use prepunched paper not described below.
Europe (2/4 holes) and Northern Europe (4 holes)

5
3 4
6
CEL016

1. Europe: 240 mm (9.45 inches) / Northern Europe: 112 mm (4.41 inches)

2. Europe: 80 mm (3.15 inches) / Northern Europe: 70 mm (2.76 inches)
3. Europe: 6 mm (0.24 inches) / Northern Europe: 6.5 mm (0.26 inches)
4. 12 mm (0.47 inches)
5. Punch hole
6. Paper edge
North America (2/3/7 holes)

1
2
3
4

7
5 6
8
CEL019

1. 216 mm (8.50 inches)

2. 178 mm (7.01 inches)
3. 108 mm (4.25 inches)
4. 70 mm (2.76 inches)
5. 8 mm (0.31 inches)

27
 3. Appendix

6. 2 holes: 12 mm (0.47 inches) / 3 and 7 holes: 9.5 mm (0.37 inches)

7. Punch hole
8. Paper edge

28
INDEX
B Prepunched paper.......................................... 23, 27
Pressure-sensitive paper........................................23
Basis weight........................................................... 25
Burrs........................................................................ 12 R

C Ream weight.......................................................... 25
Recycled paper..................................................... 21
Calcium carbonate.................................................. 5
Resistance to heat.................................................... 6
Carbonless Paper.................................................. 24
Rips......................................................................... 10
Characteristics of paper.......................................... 5
Rounded edges..................................................... 10
Coated paper.................................................... 8, 21
Colored paper....................................................... 22 S
Composition of paper............................................. 5 Special paper........................................................ 21
Condition of paper................................................ 10 Specifications........................................................... 8
Curled paper......................................................... 11 Storing paper......................................................... 19
Curls........................................................................11 Surface resistivity..................................................... 8
Cut edge.................................................................12 Surface smoothness................................................. 5
F T
Fanning paper....................................................... 15 Transparencies.......................................................23
Folds....................................................................... 10 Transporting paper................................................20
Friction characteristics............................................. 5
U
G
Uncoated paper...................................................... 8
Grain...................................................................... 13
W
Grain direction...................................................... 13
Warped paper.........................................................6
H
Wavy paper............................................................. 6
Heat resistance........................................................ 6 Wrinkles................................................................. 10
Holding paper....................................................... 17
I
Introduction.............................................................. 3
L
Label paper............................................................23
Loading paper....................................................... 15
M
Moisture content...................................................... 6
P
Paper specifications................................................. 8
Paper weight conversion table............................. 25
Placing paper........................................................ 17
Precautions during transport................................. 20
Preprinted paper................................................... 21

29
 MEMO

30
MEMO

31
 MEMO

32 EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7225
EN GB EN US EN AU D0BX-7225 © 2018